Servo Delta ASDA

Communication Applications ASDA-A2 Series User Manual
Delta High Resolution AC Servo Drive for Network

Industrial Automation Headquarters
Delta Electronics, Inc.
Taoyuan Technology Center
No.18, Xinglong Rd., Taoyuan District,
Taoyuan City 33068, Taiwan
TEL: 886-3-362-6301 / FAX: 886-3-371-6301
EMEA
Headquarters: Delta Electronics (Netherlands) B.V.
Asia Sales: [email protected]
Delta Electronics (Shanghai) Co., Ltd. Marketing: [email protected]
No.182 Minyu Rd., Pudong Shanghai, P.R.C. Technical Support: [email protected]
Post code : 201209 Customer Support: [email protected]
TEL: 86-21-6872-3988 / FAX: 86-21-6872-3996 Service: [email protected]
Customer Service: 400-820-9595 TEL: +31(0)40 800 3800
Delta Electronics (Japan), Inc. BENELUX: Delta Electronics (Netherlands) B.V.

Tokyo Offic De Witbogt 20, 5652 AG Eindhoven, The Netherlands
Industrial Automation Sales Department Mail: [email protected]
2-1-14 Shibadaimon, Minato-ku TEL: +31(0)40 800 3800
Tokyo, Japan 105-0012
TEL: 81-3-5733-1155 / FAX: 81-3-5733-1255 DACH: Delta Electronics (Netherlands) B.V.
Coesterweg 45, D-59494 Soest, Germany
Delta Electronics (Korea), Inc. Mail: [email protected]
Seoul Offi TEL: +49(0)2921 987 0
1511, 219, Gasan Digital 1-Ro., Geumcheon-gu, France: Delta Electronics (France) S.A.
Seoul, 08501 South Korea ZI du bois Challand 2, 15 rue des Pyrénées,
TEL: 82-2-515-5305 / FAX: 82-2-515-5302 Lisses, 91090 Evry Cedex, France
Mail: [email protected]
Delta Energy Systems (Singapore) Pte Ltd.
TEL: +33(0)1 69 77 82 60
4 Kaki Bukit Avenue 1, #05-04, Singapore 417939
Delta High Resolution

TEL: 65-6747-5155 / FAX: 65-6744-9228 Iberia: Delta Electronics Solutions (Spain) S.L.U
Ctra. De Villaverde a Vallecas, 265 1º Dcha Ed.
Delta Electronics (India) Pvt. Ltd. Hormigueras – P.I. de Vallecas 28031 Madrid
Plot No.43, Sector 35, HSIIDC Gurgaon, TEL: +34(0)91 223 74 20
AC Servo Drive for Network

PIN 122001, Haryana, India
C/Llull, 321-329 (Edifici CINC) | 22@Barcrelona, 08019 Barcelon
TEL: 91-124-4874900 / FAX : 91-124-4874945
Mail: [email protected]
TEL: +34 93 303 00 60
Communication Applications
Delta Electronics (Thailand) PCL.
909 Soi 9, Moo 4, Bangpoo Industrial Estate (E.P.Z), Italy: Delta Electronics (Italy) S.r.l.
Pattana 1 Rd., T.Phraksa, A.Muang, Ufficio di Milano ia Senigallia 18/2 20161 Milano (MI)
Samutprakarn 10280, Thailand Piazza Grazioli 18 00186 Roma Italy
ASDA-A2 Series
TEL: 66-2709-2800 / FAX : 662-709-2827 Mail: [email protected]
TEL: +39 02 64672538
Delta Energy Systems (Australia) Pty Ltd.
User Manual
Unit 20-21/45 Normanby Rd., Notting Hill Vic 3168, Australia Russia: Delta Energy System LLC
TEL: 61-3-9543-3720 Vereyskaya Plaza II, office 12 Vereyskaya str.
17 121357 Moscow Russia
Americas Mail: [email protected]
TEL: +7 495 644 3240
Delta Electronics (Americas) Ltd.
Raleigh Offi Turkey: Delta Greentech Elektronik San. Ltd. Sti. (Turkey)
P.O. Box 12173, 5101 Davis Drive, Şerifali Mah. Hendem Cad. Kule Sok. No:16-A
Research Triangle Park, NC 27709, U.S.A. 34775 Ümraniye – İstanbul
TEL: 1-919-767-3813 / FAX: 1-919-767-3969 Mail: [email protected]
TEL: + 90 216 499 9910
Delta Greentech (Brasil) S/A
São Paulo Offi GCC: Delta Energy Systems AG (Dubai BR)
Rua Itapeva, 26 – 3˚ Andar - Bela Vista P.O. Box 185668, Gate 7, 3rd Floor, Hamarain Centre
CEP: 01332-000 – São Paulo – SP - Brasil Dubai, United Arab Emirates
TEL: 55-11-3530-8642 / 55-11-3530-8640 Mail: [email protected]
TEL: +971(0)4 2690148
Delta Electronics International Mexico S.A. de C.V.
Mexico Offi Egypt + North Africa: Delta Electronics
Vía Dr. Gustavo Baz No. 2160, Colonia La Loma, 511 Cairo Business Plaza, North 90 street,
54060 Tlalnepantla Estado de Mexico New Cairo, Cairo, Egypt
TEL: 52-55-2628-3015 #3050/3052 Mail: [email protected]
*We reserve the right to change the information in this catalogue without prior notice. DELTA_IA-ASDA_A2_UM_EN_20190621 www.delta.com.tw/ia
Preface
Thank you for purchasing ASDA-A2. This user manual provides the related information of ASDA-
A2 series servo drive and ECMA series servo motors. This manual includes:
 Installation and inspection of servo drive and servo motor

 The configuration of servo drive
 Procedures of trial run
 Control function and adjustment methods of servo drive
 Parameters
 Communication protocol
 Maintenance and inspections
 Troubleshooting
This manual addresses personnel with the following qualifications:
 Servo system designers

 Installation or wiring personnel
 Trial and tuning personnel
 Maintenance and inspection personnel
Before using the product, please read through this manual carefully in order to ensure the correct
use of the product. In addition, please place this manual safely for quick reference whenever is
needed. Please follow the rules below if you have not finished reading this manual yet.
 No vapor, corrosive gas, and inflammable gas are allowed in installation environment.
 Three-phase power is prohibited to connect to U, V and W connector when wiring.
It is possible to damage the servo drive.
 Ground is a must.
 Do not disassemble the servo drive, motor or change the wiring when connecting to the
power.
 Be ensured that the emergency stop can be activated anytime before connecting to the
power and operation.
 Do not touch the heat sink to avoid scald before connecting to the power and operation.
If you have any enquiry, please contact the distributors or Delta customer service center.
i
Preface ASDA-A2
Safety Precautions
ASDA-A2 series is the high resolution and open type servo drive. It should be installed in a
shielded control box during operation. This servo drive uses precise feedback control and the
digital signal processor with high-speed calculation function to control the current output generated
by IGBT so as to operate three-phase permanent magnet synchronous motors (PMSM) and to
achieve precise positioning.
ASDA-A2 is applicable on industrial application and is suggested to be installed in the distribution

board. (Servo drives, wire rod, and motors all should be installed in the environment which
complies with the minimum requirement of UL Level 1.)
Pay special attention to the following safety precautions anytime during inspection, installation,
wiring, operation, and examination.
The symbol of danger, warning and stop represent:
It indicates the potential hazards. It is possible to cause severe injury or fatal harm if not
following the instructions.
It indicates the potential hazards. It is possible to cause minor injury or lead to serious
damage of the product or even malfunction if not following the instructions.
It indicates the absolute prohibited activity. It is possible to damage the product or

cannot be used due to malfunction if not following the instructions.
Inspection
 Please follow the instruction when using servo drive and servo motor, or it is possible
to cause fire or malfunction.
Installation
 It is prohibited to expose the product with the environment containing vapor,

corrosive gas, inflammable gas, etc. Or it is possible to cause electric shock or fire.
Wiring
 Please connect the ground terminal to class-3 ground system (under 100Ω); poor
grounding may result in electric shock or fire.
 Do not connect the three-phase source to the motor output terminal U, V and W. Or it
is possible to cause personnel injury or fire.
 Please tighten the screws of the power and motor output terminal. Or it is possible to
cause fire.
 Please connect wiring according to the wire rod in order to prevent any danger.
ii
ASDA-A2 Preface
Operation
 Before the operation, please change the parameter setting value according to the
needs. If it is not adjusted to the correct setting value, it is possible to lead to
malfunction of the machine or the operation might be out of control.
 Before the machine starts to operate, please be ensured the emergency stop can be
activated anytime.
 When power on, please make sure the motor shaft stands still and will not operate
because of mechanical inertia or other causes.
 During the operation, it is prohibited to touch any rotating motor parts. Or it is

possible to cause personnel injury.
 In order to prevent any accident, please separate the couplings and belts of the
machine and isolate them. Then, conduct the initial trial run.
 If users fail to operate the machine properly after the servo motor connects to the
equipment, it would cause the damage of the equipment and lead to the personnel
injury.
 In order to prevent the danger, it is strongly recommended to check if the motor can
operate normally without load first. Then, operate the motor with load.
 Do not touch the heat sink of the servo drive. Or it is possible to cause scald due to
the high temperature.
Maintenance and Inspection

 It is prohibited to touch the internal parts of the servo drive and servo motor.
Or it is possible to cause electric shock.
 It is prohibited to disassemble the panel of the servo drive when turning on the
power. Or it is possible to cause electric shock.
 Do not touch the ground terminal within 10 minutes after turning off the power.
Or the residual voltage may cause electric shock.
 Do not disassemble the motor. Or it is possible to cause electric shock or personnel
injury.
 Do not change the wiring when the power is on. Or it is possible to cause electric
shock or personnel injury.
 Only the qualified electrical and electronics professionals can install, wire, and
maintain the servo drive and servo motor.
iii
Preface ASDA-A2
Main Circuit Wiring

 Do not put the power cable and the encoder cable in the same channel and bond
them together. Please separate the power cable and the encoder cable for at least
30 centimeters (= 11.8 inches) when wiring.
 Please use stranded wires and multi-core shielded-pair wires for the encoder cables
and encoder feedback cables. The maximum length of command input cable is
3 meters (= 9.84 feet) and the maximum length of feedback cable is 20 meters
(= 65.62 feet).
 The high voltage might remain in the servo motor even when the power is off.
Do not touch the power terminal temporally (at least 10 minutes). Please conduct the
inspection not until the indicator light, CHARGE is off.
 Do not turn the power on and off too often. If continuous power on and off is needed,
please be ensured the interval is one minute at most.
Terminal Wiring of the Main Circuit

 When wiring, please disassemble the terminal socket from the servo drive.
 One terminal of the terminal socket for one electric wire only.
 When inserting the electric wires, do not connect the conductor to the adjacent wire.
 Before connecting to the power, please inspect and be ensured the wiring is correct.
Note: if there is any difference of each version, please refer to Delta’s website
(http://www.delta.com.tw/industrialautomation/) for the latest information.
iv
Table of Contents
Chapter 1 Inspection and Model Explanation ························································ 1-1
1.1 Inspection ····························································································· 1-1
1.2 Product Model ························································································ 1-3
1.2.1 Nameplate Information····································································· 1-3
1.2.2 Model Explanation ·········································································· 1-5
1.3 Servo Drive and Corresponding Servo Motor ················································ 1-8
1.3.1 ASDA-A2 220V Series ····································································· 1-8
1.3.2 ASDA-A2 400V Series ····································································1-10
1.4 Each Part of the Servo Drive ····································································1-11
1.4.1 ASDA-A2 220V Series ····································································1-11
1.4.2 ASDA0A2 400V Series ···································································1-14
1.5 ASDA-A2-XN Series ···············································································1-16
1.5.1 Model Explanation ·········································································1-16
1.5.2 ASDA-A2-XN Series Servo Drive and Corresponding Motor ····················1-19
1.5.3 Each Part of the ASDA-A2-XN Series Servo Drive ································1-20
Chapter 2 Installation ························································································ 2-1
2.1 Notes ··································································································· 2-1
2.2 Ambient Conditions of Storage ··································································· 2-1
2.3 Ambient Conditions of Installation ······························································· 2-1
2.4 Installation Direction and Space ································································· 2-2
2.5 Specification of Circuit Breaker and Fuse ····················································· 2-4
2.6 Ferrite Ring ··························································································· 2-5
i
ASDA-A2 Table of Contents
2.7 EMI Filter Selection ················································································· 2-8
2.8 Selection of Regenerative Resistor ····························································2-11
2.9 The Use of Servo Motor ··········································································2-21
2.9.1 Troubleshooting for the Motor Operation and Status ······························2-21
2.9.2 Mounting Directions and Precautions for the Servo Motor ·······················2-22
2.9.3 Precautions for Using Servo Motors with Oil Seal ·································2-23
2.9.4 Precautions for Using Couplings ·······················································2-23
2.9.5 Oil and Water Prevention Measures for the Servo Motor ························2-24
2.9.6 Measures to Suppress Temperature Increase of the Servo Motor ·············2-25
Chapter 3 Wiring ························································································· 3-1
3.1 Connections – 220V series ······································································· 3-1
3.1.1 Connecting to Peripheral Devices······················································· 3-1
3.1.2 Connectors and Terminals of Servo Drive ············································ 3-3
3.1.3 Wiring Method ··············································································· 3-5
3.1.4 Specification of Motor Power Cable ···················································· 3-7
3.1.5 Specification of Encoder Cable Connector············································ 3-9
3.1.6 Selection of Wiring Rod···································································3-15
3.2 Connections – 400V series ······································································3-17
3.2.1 Connecting to Peripheral Devices······················································3-17
3.2.2 Connectors and Terminals of the Servo Drive ······································3-18
3.2.3 Wiring Method ··············································································3-20
3.2.4 Specification of Motor Power Cable ···················································3-21
3.2.5 Specification of Encoder Connector ···················································3-23
3.2.6 Selection of Wiring Rod···································································3-25
3.3 Basic Wiring ·························································································3-27
ii
Table of Contents ASDA-A2
3.3.1 220V series ··················································································3-27
3.3.2 400V series ··················································································3-30
3.4 I/O Signal (CN1) Connection ····································································3-32
3.4.1 I/O Signal (CN1) Connector Terminal Layout ·······································3-32
3.4.2 Signals Explanation of Connector CN1 ···············································3-34
3.4.3 Wiring Diagrams (CN1) ···································································3-44
3.4.4 DI and DO Signal Specified by Users ·················································3-53
3.4.5 Application: Using CN1 Quick Connector for Wiring ·······························3-53
3.5 CN2 Connector ·····················································································3-58
3.6 Wiring of CN3 Connector ·········································································3-61
3.6.1 Layout of CN3 Connector ································································3-61
3.6.2 Connection between PC and Connector CN3·······································3-62
3.7 CN4 Serial Connector (USB) ····································································3-63
3.8 CN5 Connector (Full-closed loop) ······························································3-64
3.9 CN6 Connector (CANopen) ······································································3-65
3.9.1 CANopen communication ································································3-65
3.9.2 DMCNET communication ································································3-67
3.10 Expansion Digital Input Connector of CN7 ···················································3-69
3.11 CN8 Connector of Battery Box ··································································3-70
3.12 Standard Connection Example – 220V series ···············································3-71
3.12.1 Position (PT) Control Mode ······························································3-71
3.12.2 Position (PR) Control Mode ·····························································3-72
3.12.3 Speed Control Mode ······································································3-73
3.12.4 Torque Control Mode ·····································································3-74
3.12.5 Communication Mode ·····································································3-75
iii
3.13 Standard Connection Example – 400V series ···············································3-76
3.14 Differences between A2-XN and A2 Series Servo Drives ································3-81
3.14.1 Connecting to Peripheral Devices (A2-EN model as an example) ············3-81
3.14.2 Connectors of A2-XN Servo Drives ····················································3-82
3.14.3 CN1 I/O 50-pin Connector (applicable to –LN series and 4.5kW ~ 7.5kW models
of –FN and –MN series) ··································································3-82
3.14.4 CN1 I/O 26-pin Connector (applicable to -EN series and 3kW models or below of
–FN and –MN Series) ·····································································3-84
3.14.5 CN3 Communication Connector (applicable to –LN series and 4.5kW ~ 7.5kW
models of –FN and –MN series) ························································3-85
3.14.6 EtherCAT Communication Connector (applicable to –EN models) ············3-86
3.14.7 CN-STO (Safe Torque Off) ······························································3-89
3.14.8 How does the STO Function Work? ···················································3-90
3.14.9 Related Parameter of the STO Function ·············································3-91
iv
Chapter 4 Panel Display and Operation ······························································· 4-1
4.1 Panel Description···················································································· 4-1
4.2 Parameter Setting Procedure ···································································· 4-2
4.3 Status Display ························································································ 4-5
4.3.1 Save Setting Display ··········································································· 4-5
4.3.2 Decimal Point ···················································································· 4-5
4.3.3 Alarm Message ················································································· 4-5
4.3.4 Positive and Negative Sign Setting ························································ 4-6
4.3.5 Monitor Display·················································································· 4-6
4.4 General Function ···················································································· 4-9
4.4.1 Operation of Fault Record Display ························································· 4-9
4.4.2 JOG Mode ·······················································································4-10
4.4.3 Force DO Output ··············································································4-11
4.4.4 Digital Input Diagnosis Operation ··························································4-12
4.4.5 Digital Output Diagnosis Operation ·······················································4-12
Chapter 5 Trial Operation and Tuning ·································································· 5-1
5.1 Inspection without Load ············································································ 5-1
5.2 Applying Power to the Servo Drive ······························································ 5-2
5.3 JOG Trial Run without Load ······································································ 5-6
5.4 Trial Run without Load (Speed Mode) ·························································· 5-7
5.5 Trial Run without Load (Position Mode) ························································ 5-9
5.6 Tuning Procedure ··················································································5-11
5.6.1 Flowchart of Tuning Procedure·····························································5-12
5.6.2 Inertia Estimation Flowchart (with Mechanism) ········································5-13
5.6.3 Flowchart of Auto Tuning ····································································5-14
v
5.6.4 Flowchart of Semi-Auto Tuning ····························································5-15
5.6.5 Limit of Inertia Ratio···········································································5-16
5.6.6 Mechanical Resonance Suppression Method ··········································5-17
5.6.7 Tuning Mode and Parameters ······························································5-19
5.6.8 Tuning in Manual Mode ······································································5-20
Chapter 6 Control Mode of Operation ·································································· 6-1
6.1 Selection of Operation Mode ····································································· 6-1
6.2 Position Mode ························································································ 6-3
6.2.1 Position Command in PT Mode ····························································· 6-3
6.2.2 Position Command in PR Mode ····························································· 6-7
6.2.3 Control Structure of Position Mode ························································· 6-8
6.2.4 S-curve Filter (Position) ······································································· 6-9
6.2.5 Electronic Gear Ratio ·········································································6-12
6.2.6 Low-pass Filter ·················································································6-15
6.2.7 Timing Diagram in Position Mode (PR) ··················································6-16
6.2.8 Gain Adjustment of Position Loop ·························································6-17
6.2.9 Low-frequency Vibration Suppression in Position Mode ·····························6-20
6.3 Speed Mode ·························································································6-25
6.3.1 Selection of Speed Mode ····································································6-25
6.3.2 Control Structure of Speed Mode ··························································6-26
6.3.3 Smooth Speed Command ···································································6-27
6.3.4 The Scaling of Analog Command··························································6-31
6.3.5 Timing Diagram in Speed Mode ···························································6-32
6.3.6 Gain Adjustment of Speed Loop ···························································6-33
6.3.7 Resonance Suppression ·····································································6-40
vi
6.4 Torque Mode ························································································6-48
6.4.1 Selection of Torque Command ·····························································6-48
6.4.2 Control Structure of Torque Mode ·························································6-49
6.4.3 Smooth Torque Command ··································································6-50
6.4.4 The Scaling of Analog Command··························································6-51
6.4.5 Timing Diagram in Torque Mode···························································6-52
6.5 Dual Mode ···························································································6-53
6.5.1 Speed / Position Dual Mode ································································6-54
6.5.2 Speed / Torque Dual Mode ·································································6-54
6.5.3 Torque / Position Dual Mode ·······························································6-55
6.6 Others ·································································································6-56
6.6.1 The Use of Speed Limit ······································································6-56
6.6.2 The Use of Torque Limit ·····································································6-57
6.6.3 Analog Monitor ·················································································6-58
6.6.4 The Use of Brake ··············································································6-62
Chapter 7 Motion Control··················································································· 7-1
7.1 Motion Control Functions of ASDA-A2 ························································· 7-1
7.2 System Information ················································································· 7-1
7.2.1 Description of Monitoring Variables ························································ 7-2
7.2.2 Description of Data Array ····································································· 7-9
7.3 Description of Motion Axes·······································································7-12
7.4 Description of PR Mode···········································································7-13
7.5 The Difference between General PR Mode and the One in ASDA-A2 ················7-13
7.6 The Position Unit of PR Mode ···································································7-14
7.7 Description of Register in PR Mode ····························································7-14
vii
7.8 Homing Description of PR Mode································································7-16
7.9 DI/DO Provided by PR Mode and Diagrams ·················································7-16
7.10 Parameter Settings ················································································7-18
7.10.1 The Relation between the Previous Path and the Next Path ·······················7-25
7.10.2 Programming the Path in PR Mode ·······················································7-26
7.11 The Description of E-Cam Function····························································7-27
7.11.1 Function Description of CAPTURE (Data Capture) ···································7-34
7.11.2 Function Description of COMPARE (Data Compare) ·································7-36
Chapter 8 Parameters ······················································································· 8-1
8.1 Parameter Definition ················································································ 8-1
8.2 List of Parameters ··················································································· 8-2
8.3 Parameter Description ············································································8-14
P0-xx Monitor Parameters ············································································8-14
P1-xx Basic Parameters···············································································8-37
P2-xx Extension Parameters ·········································································8-91
P3-xx Communication Parameters ······························································· 8-136
P4-xx Diagnosis Parameters ······································································· 8-146
P5-xx Motion Setting Parameters ································································· 8-160
P6-xx PR Parameters ················································································ 8-225
P7-xx PR Parameters ················································································ 8-267
Table 8.1 Function Description of Digital Input (DI)············································ 8-279
Table 8.2 Function Description of Digital Output (DO) ········································ 8-289
Chapter 9 Communications················································································ 9-1
9.1 RS-485 & RS-232 Communication Hardware Interface ···································· 9-1
9.2 RS-485 & RS-232 Communication Parameters Setting ···································· 9-3
viii
9.3 MODBUS Communication Protocol ····························································· 9-6
9.4 Write-in and Read-out Communication Parameters ·······································9-18
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting··············································································10-1
10.1 Alarm of Servo Drive ··············································································10-1
10.2 Alarm of CANopen Communication ····························································10-6
10.3 Alarm of Motion Control ···········································································10-8
10.4 Causes and Corrective Actions ······························································· 10-12
10.5 Corrective Actions after the Alarm Occurs ················································· 10-38
Chapter 11 Specifications ·················································································11-1
11.1 Specifications of Servo Drives (ASDA-A2 Series) ··········································11-1
11.1.1 ASDA-A2 220V Series ······································································11-1
11.1.2 ASDA-A2 400V Series ······································································11-4
11.2 Specifications of Servo Motors (ECMA Series) ·············································11-7
11.2.1 ECMA 220V Series ··········································································11-7
11.2.2 ECMA 400V Series ········································································ 11-17
11.3 Torque Features (T-N Curves) ································································ 11-25
11.3.1 220V Series ················································································· 11-25
11.3.2 400V Series ················································································· 11-27
11.4 Overload Features ··············································································· 11-29
11.5 Dimensions of Servo Drive ····································································· 11-31
11.5.1 220V Series ················································································· 11-31
11.5.2 400V Series ················································································· 11-38
11.6 Dimensions of Servo Motor (ECMA Series)················································ 11-41
11.6.1 220V Series ················································································· 11-41
11.6.2 400V Series ················································································· 11-48
ix
Chapter 12 Absolute System ·············································································12-1
12.1 Battery Box (absolute type) and wiring ························································12-2
12.1.1 Specifications ·················································································12-2
12.1.2 Battery Box Dimensions ····································································12-4
12.1.3 Connection Cables for Absolute Encoder ··············································12-5
12.1.4 Battery Box Cords ···········································································12-7
12.2 Installation ····························································································12-8
12.2.1 Connection Examples·······································································12-8
12.2.2 How to Install a Battery ··································································· 12-12
12.2.3 How to Replace a Battery ································································ 12-14
12.3 System Initialization Procedure and Operation ············································ 12-16
12.3.1 System Initialization Procedure ························································· 12-16
12.3.2 Pulse Counting ············································································· 12-17
12.3.3 PUU Counting ·············································································· 12-18
12.3.4 Use Digital Inputs/Outputs to Create the Absolute Origin Coordinate ········· 12-19
12.3.5 Use Parameters to Create the Absolute Origin Coordinate .......................... 12-19
12.3.6 Use Digital Inputs/Outputs to Read the Absolute Coordinate Data ············ 12-20
12.3.7 Use Parameter to Read the Absolute Coordinate Data ··························· 12-23
12.4 Related Parameters for Absolute System ·················································· 12-24
12.5 Digital Input (DI) Function Definition (for Absolute System) ···························· 12-29
12.6 Digital Output (DO) Function Definition (for Absolute System) ························ 12-30
12.7 Alarms for Absolute System ··································································· 12-31
12.7.1 Causes and Corrective Actions ························································· 12-32
12.8 Related Monitoring Variables ·································································· 12-34
x
Appendix A Accessories····················································································A-1
Appendix B Maintenance and Inspection ·····························································B-1
xi
(This page is intentionally left blank.)
xii
Chapter 1 Inspection and Model
Explanation
1.1 Inspection
In order to prevent the negligence during purchasing and delivery, please inspect the following
items carefully.
 Please check if the product is what you have purchased: check the part number of the
motor and the servo drive on the nameplate. Refer to the next section for the model
explanation.
 Check if the motor shaft can rotate smoothly: rotate the motor shaft by hand. If it can be
rotated smoothly, it means the motor shaft is normal. However, it cannot be rotated by hand
if the motor has an electromagnetic brake.
 Check if there is any damage shown on its appearance: visually check if there is any
damage or scrape of the appearance.
 Check if there is any loose screw: if the screws are un-tightened or fall off.
If any of the above situations happens, please contact the distributors to solve the problems.
A complete and workable servo set should include:
(1) A servo drive and a servo motor
(2) A UVW motor power cable, the U, V, and W wires can connect to the socket attached by
the servo drive and the other side is the plug which could connect to the socket of the
motor. And a green ground wire which should be locked to the ground terminal of the
servo drive. (selective purchase)
(3) An encoder cable which connects to the socket of the encoder. One side of it connects to
the CN2 on the servo drive and the other side is the plug. (selective purchase)
(4) A 50-PIN connector which is used in CN1 (selective purchase)
(5) A 20-PIN connector which is used in CN2 (selective purchase)
(6) A 6-PIN connector which is used in CN3 and is for general communication (RS-485)
(selective purchase)
(7) A 4-PIN connector which is used in CN4 (USB Type B product) (selective purchase)
(8) An RJ45 connector which is used in CN6 and is for high-speed (CANopen)
communication (selective purchase)
(9) A 7-PIN connector which is used in CN7, for extension DI. (-U model) (selective purchase)
1-1
ASDA-A2 Chapter 1 Inspection and Model Explanation
(10) Servo drive power input:

220V:
Control circuit power Main circuit power
100 W ~ 3 kW L1C, L2C, quick connector R, S, T quick connector
4.5 kW ~ 15 kW L1C, L2C, terminal block R, S, T terminal block
400V:
Control circuit power Main circuit power
750 W ~ 1.5 kW DC24V, DC0V, quick connector R, S, T quick connector
2 kW ~ 7.5 kW DC24V, DC0V, terminal block R, S, T terminal block
(11) A 3-PIN quick connector (U, V, W)

(12) A 3-PIN quick connector (P , D, C)
(13) A plastic lever (for 220V 100 W ~ 3 kW and 400V 750 W ~ 1.5 kW)
(14) A metal short-circuit chip (for 220V 100 W ~ 4.5 kW and 400V 750 W ~ 1.5 kW)
(15) An installation manual
1-2
Chapter 1 Inspection and Model Explanation ASDA-A2
1.2 Product Model

1.2.1 Nameplate Information
ASDA-A2 Series Servo Drive

 Nameplate Information
Model Name MODEL : ASD-A2-0421-L

Capacity Specification POWER : 400W LISTED
Applicable power Supply INPUT : 200~230V 3PH 50/60Hz 1.86A 19XK
IND. CONT. EQ.
200~230V 1PH 50/60Hz 3.22A
Rated Current Output OUTPUT : 110V 0-250Hz 2.6A
Barcode A20421LT14130102
Firmware Version 01.34
DELTA ELECTRONICS, INC. MADE IN TAIWAN
 Serial Number
A20421L T 14 13 0102
Serial Number
(Production sequence of a week, starting from 0001)
Week of Production (from 1 to 52)
Year of Production (14: year 2014)
Production Factory (T: Taoyuan; W: Wujiang)
Model Name
ECMA Series Servo Motor

 Nameplate Information
AC SERVO MOTOR
Model Name MODEL: ECMA-C10602ES
Input Power INPUT: VAC 110 A 1.55 Ins. A
Rated Speed and Rated Output OUTPUT: r/min 3000 N.m 0.64 kW 0.2
Barcode C10602EST14330001
Delta Electronics, Inc. MADE IN XXXXXX
 Serial Number
C10602ES T 14 33 0001 Serial Number

Production Factory (T: Taoyuan; W: Wujiang)
Model Name
1-3
ECMC Series Servo Motor

 Nameplate information
AC SERVO MOTOR
Model MODEL : ECMC-EW1310RS
Power Input INPUT : VAC 110 A 5.6 Ins.A
Power Output OUTPUT : r/min 2000 N.m.4.77kW 1.0
Barcode and
Product Serial Number EW1310RST14090001
Delta Electronics, Inc. MADE IN TAIWAN
 Serial Number
EW1310RS T 14 09 0001
Serial Number
Production Plant (T: Taoyuan; W: Wujiang)
Model Name
1-4
1.2.2 Model Explanation
ASDA-A2 Series Servo Drive
A S D - A 2 - 0 7 4 3 - U
Model Type
Input Voltage and Phase

21: 220V 1 phase
23: 220V 3 phase
43: 400V 3 phase
Rated Power Input

01: 100 W 30: 3 kW
02: 200 W 45: 4.5 kW
04: 400 W 55: 5.5 kW
07: 750 W 75: 7.5 kW
10: 1 kW 1B: 11 kW
15: 1.5 kW 1F: 15 kW
20: 2 kW
Series
A2
Product Name
AC Servo Drive
1-5
Model Type
Type Standard Network

A2 Series L U E F M
RS-485 (CN3) O O X O O
Full-closed loop control (CN5)*1 O O O O O
DI expansion port (CN7) X O O X X
EtherCAT X X O X X
CANopen X X X X O
DMCNET X X X O X
Analog Voltage Control O O X X O
Pulse Input O O X X O
PR mode*2 O O O O O
E-Cam*3 X O O X O
Note:
1. In PR mode, only A2-F supports full-closed loop control function.
2. PR parameters can be read and written through communication by DMCNET only.
3. E-cam function can only be used in PR mode.
1-6
ECMA Series Servo Motor
E C M A - C 1 0 6 0 2 E S
Standard Shaft Diameter: S
Specific Shaft Diameter: 3 = 42 mm, 7 = 14 mm
w/o with
Type of Shaft
w/o with
Brake, 特
Brake,
Brake, Brake,
Diameter and with with
w/o Oil w/o Oil
Oil Seal Oil Oil
Seal Seal
Seal Seal
Round Shaft
(with fixed - - C D
screw holes)
Keyway E F - -
Keyway (with
fixed screw P Q R S
holes)
Rated Power Output

0F: 50 W 09: 900 W 50: 5.0 kW
01: 100 W 10: 1.0 kW 55: 5.5 kW
02: 200 W 13: 1.3 kW 75: 7.5 kW
03: 300 W 15: 1.5 kW 1B: 11 kW
04: 400 W 18: 1.8 kW 1F: 15 kW
05: 500 W 20: 2.0 kW
06: 600 W 30: 3.0 kW
07: 750 W 35: 3.5 kW
08: 850 W 45: 4.5 kW
Motor Frame Size

04: 40 mm 09: 86 mm 18: 180 mm
06: 60 mm 10: 100 mm 22: 220 mm
08: 80 mm 13: 130 mm
Name of the Series

Rated Voltage and Rated Speed
C = 220V / 3,000 rpm; E = 220V / 2,000 rpm;
F = 220V / 1,500 rpm; G = 220V/ 1,000 rpm;
J = 400V / 3,000 rpm; K = 400V / 2,000 rpm;
L = 400V / 1,500 rpm; M = 400V / 1,000 rpm
Encoder Type
1: Incremental, 20-bit
2: Incremental, 17-bit
3: 2500 ppr
A: Absolute (Resolution of single cycle: 17-
Servo Type
bit; Resolution of multi-cycle: 16-bit)
A: AC Servo
Product Name
ECM: Electronic Commutation Motor
1-7
1.3 Servo Drive and Corresponding Servo Motor

1.3.1 ASDA-A2 220V Series
Motor Servo Drive
Max. Continuous Max.

Rated
Motor Output Instantaneous Output Instantaneous
Power Model Number Current Model Number
series (W) current Current output current
(Arms)
(Arms) (Arms) (Arms)
50 ECMA-C1040F□S 0.69 2.05

ASD-A2-0121-□ 0.90 2.70
100 ECMA-C△0401□S 0.90 2.70
200 ECMA-C△0602□S 1.55 4.65 ASD-A2-0221-□ 1.55 4.65
400 ECMA-C△0604□S 2.60 7.80

ECMA-C 3000 r/min
ASD-A2-0421-□ 2.60 7.80

400 ECMA-C△0804□7 2.60 7.80
Low Inertia
Single-
/Three- 750 ECMA-C△0807□S 5.10 15.30
phase ASD-A2-0721-□ 5.10 15.30
750 ECMA-C△0907□S 3.66 11.00
1000 ECMA-C△0910□S 4.25 12.37

ASD-A2-1021-□ 7.30 21.90
1000 ECMA-C△1010□S 7.30 21.90
2000 ECMA-C△1020□S 12.05 36.15 ASD-A2-2023-□ 13.40 40.20
3000 ECMA-C△1330□4 17.2 47.5 ASD-A2-3023-□ 19.40 58.20
500 ECMA-E△1305□S 2.90 8.70 ASD-A2-0421-□ 2.60 7.80

ECMA-E 2000 r/min
1000 ECMA-E△1310□S 5.60 16.80 ASD-A2-1021-□ 7.30 21.90

Medium Inertia
1500 ECMA-E△1315□S 8.30 24.90 ASD-A2-1521-□ 8.30 24.90

Single-
/Three- 2000 ECMA-E△1320□S 11.01 33.03
phase ASD-A2-2023-□ 13.40 40.20
2000 ECMA-E△1820□S 11.22 33.66
3000 ECMA-E△1830□S 16.10 48.30

ASD-A2-3023-□ 19.40 58.20
3500 ECMA-E△1835□S 19.20 57.60
500 ECMA-F△1305□S 3.90 12.10 ASD-A2-0721-□ 5.10 15.30
850 ECMA-F△1308□S 7.10 19.40 ASD-A2-1021-□ 7.30 21.90
1300 ECMA-F△1313□S 12.60 38.60

ASD-A2-2023-□ 13.40 40.20
ECMA-F 1500 r/min
Medium-high inertia
1800 ECMA-F△1318□S 13.00 36.00
Single- 3000 ECMA-F△1830□S 19.40 58.20 ASD-A2-3023-□ 19.40 58.20

/Three-
phase 4500 ECMA-F△1845□S 32.50 81.30 ASD-A2-4523-□ 32.50 70.71
5500 ECMA-F△1855□3 40.00 100.00 ASD-A2-5523-□ 40.00 106.07
7500 ECMA-F△1875□3 47.50 118.80 ASD-A2-7523-□ 47.50 141.42
11000 ECMA-F1221B□3 51.80 129.50 ASD-A2-1B23-□ 54.40 141.42
15000 ECMA-F1221F□S 61.50 145.70 ASD-A2-1F23-□ 70.00 212.13
1-8
Motor Servo Drive

Rated
Motor Output Instantaneous Output Instantaneous
Power Model Number Current Model Number
series (W) current Current output current
(Arms)
400 ECMA-C△0604□H 2.60 7.80 ASD-A2-0421-□ 2.60 7.80

ECMA-C/G 3000
High Inertia
750 ECMA-C△0807□H 5.10 15.30 ASD-A2-0721-□ 5.10 15.30

Single-
r/min
/Three- 300 ECMA-G△1303□S 2.50 7.50 ASD-A2-0421-□ 2.60 7.80

phase
600 ECMA-G△1306□S 4.80 14.40 ASD-A2-0721-□ 5.10 15.30
900 ECMA-G△1309□S 7.50 22.50 ASD-A2-1021-□ 7.30 21.90
Note:
1. The boxes () at the ends of the servo drive model names are for optional configurations. For the actual
model name, please refer to the ordering information of the actual purchased product.
2. The boxes (△) in the model names are for encoder resolution types. △= 1: Incremental type, 20-bit;
△= 2: Incremental type, 17-bit; △= 3: 2500 ppr; △= A: Absolute type). The listed motor model name is for
information searching, please contact the local distributors for the actual purchased product.
3. The boxes () in the model names represent brake or keyway / oil seal.
4 *11 kW and 15 kW will be available soon.
The above table shows the specification of the servo drive which has triple rated current.
For detailed specification of the servo motor and servo drive, please refer to Chapter 11.
1-9
Motor Servo Drive

Rated
Output Instantaneous Output Instantaneous
Motor series Power Model Number Current Model Number
(W) current Current output current
(Arms)
400 ECMA-J△0604S 1.62 4.85 ASD-A2-0743-□ 3.07 9.21
750 ECMA-J△0807S 3.07 9.5 ASD-A2-0743-□ 3.07 9.21

ECMA-J 3000 r/min
750 ECMA-J△0907S 2.16 6.37 ASD-A2-0743-□ 3.07 9.21

Low Inertia
Three-
1000 ECMA-J△0910S 2.4 7.17 ASD-A2-1043-□ 3.52 9.86
phase
1000 ECMA-J△1010S 4.15 12.46 ASD-A2-1543-□ 5.02 10.04
2000 ECMA-J△1020S 7.09 21.28 ASD-A2-2043-□ 6.66 18.65
3000 ECMA-J△13304 9.8 29.99 ASD-A2-3043-□ 11.9 33.32
750 ECMA-K△1305S 1.7 5.2 ASD-A2-0743-□ 3.07 9.21

ECMA-K 2000 r/min
Medium Inertia
1000 ECMA-K△1310S 3.52 10.56 ASD-A2-1043-□ 3.52 9.86

Three-
1500 ECMA-K△1315S 5.02 15.06 ASD-A2-1543-□ 5.02 10.04
phase
2000 ECMA-K△1320S 6.66 19.98 ASD-A2-2043-□ 6.66 18.65
2000 ECMA-K△1820S 6.6 19.88 ASD-A2-2043-□ 6.66 18.65
750 ECMA-L△1305S 2.1 6.1 ASD-A2-0743-□ 3.07 9.21
850 ECMA-L△1308S 3.4 8.85 ASD-A2-1043-□ 3.52 9.86
1300 ECMA-L△1313S 5.02 15 ASD-A2-1543-□ 5.02 10.04

ECMA-L 1500 r/min
Medium-high Inertia
3000 ECMA-L△1830S 11.53 34.6 ASD-A2-3043-□ 11.9 33.32

Three-
4500 ECMA-L△1845S 20.8 52 ASD-A2-4543-□ 20 44
phase
5500 ECMA-L△18553 22.37 56 ASD-A2-5543-□ 22.04 48.49
7500 ECMA-L△18753 27.3 68.3 ASD-A2-7543-□ 28.39 62.46
11000 ECMA-L1221B3 27.2 68 ASD-A2R-1B43-□ 28.1 61.82
15000 ECMA-L1221F3 41.6 100 ASD-A2R-1F43-□ 38.65 85.03

High Inertia
ECMA-C/G
3000 r/min
1000 r/min
ECMA-G
Three- ECMA-
900 4.4 13.1 ASD-A2-1543-□ 5.02 10.04
phase M△1309S
Note:
1. The boxes () at the end of the servo drive model names are for optional configurations. For the actual
model name, please refer to the ordering information of the actual purchased product.
2. The boxes (△) in the model names are for encoder resolution types. △= 1: Incremental type, 20-bit;
△= 2: Incremental type, 17-bit; △= 3: 2500 ppr; △= A: Absolute type). The listed motor model name is for
information searching, please contact your local distributors for the actual purchased product.
The above table shows the specification of the servo drive which has triple rated current. If you need the
servo drive which specification is six times of the rated current of servo motor, contact the distributors. For
detailed specification of the servo motor and servo drive, please refer to Chapter 11.
1-10
1.4 Each Part of the Servo Drive

1.4.1 ASDA-A2_220V Series
220V Series - Front View
Please see the figure of top view.
Front sliding lid
Model name Input voltage
CN5: full-closed loop

interface
Connects to the linear scale. CN1: I/O signal interface
Connects to PLC and controls I/O.
CN6: CANopen connector
Communication ports
CN2: encoder connector

Connects to the encoder.
CN7: external digital input
connector
CN3: RS-485 / RS-232 connector
Up to 6 digital inputs could be added.
Connects to the controller.
CN4: USB connector
Connects to PC.
Ground terminal
Ensure the servo drive is correctly
grounded so as to avoid electric shock.
Please see the figure of bottom view.
1-11
220V Series - Top View
1-12
220V Series - Bottom View
1-13
1.4.2 ASDA-A2_400V Series
400V Series - Front View
Please refer to the figure of top view
Front sliding lid

Model name Input voltage
CN5: full-closed loop

interface
Connects to the linear scale. CN1: I/O signal interface
Connects to PLC and controls I/O.
CN6: CANopen connector
Communication ports. CN2: encoder connector
Connects to the encoder.
CN3: RS-485 / RS-232 connector

CN7: external digital input
connector Connects to the controller.
Up to 6 digital inputs could be added.

CN4: USB connector
Connects to PC.
Ground terminal
Ensure the servo drive is
correctly grounded so as
to avoid electric shock.
Please refer to the figure of bottom view
1-14
400V Series - Top View
ASDA-A2_400V Series - Bottom View
1-15
1.5 ASDA-A2-XN Series

1.5.1 Model Explanation
ASDA-A2-*N Series Servo Drive
A S D - A 2 - 0 4 2 1 -L N
N = Supports Nikon absolute
encoder
Model Type
Input Voltage and Phase

21: 220V 1-phase
23: 220V 3-phase
Rated Power Input

01: 100 W 20: 2 kW
02: 200 W 30: 3 kW
04: 400 W 45: 4.5 kW
07: 750 W 55: 5.5 kW
10: 1 kW 75: 7.5 kW
15: 1.5 kW
Series
A2
Product Name
AC Servo Drive
1-16
Model type
Type Standard Network 100 W ~ 3 kW Network 4.5 kW ~ 7.5 kW
A2 series LN EN FN MN EN FN MN
RS-485 (CN3) O X X X X O O
Full-closed loop control

X X X X X X X
(CN5)
DI expansion port (CN7) X O X X O X X
EtherCAT X O X X O X X
CANopen X X X O X X O
DMCNET X X O X X O X
Analog voltage control O X X X X O O
Pulse input O X X X X O O
CN1 number of DI/DO 8/5 7/4 7/4 7/4 7/4 8/5 8/5
PR mode*1 O O O O O O O
E-Cam*2 X O X O O X O
STO*3 O O O O O X X
L: Full-closed loop E: EtherCAT F: DMCNET M: CANopen
Note:
1. You can only read PR parameters through communication in DMCNET mode.

2. E-Cam function is only applicable in PR mode.
3. STO certification application is in progress.
1-17
ECMC Series Servo Motor

E C M C - C W 0 6 0 2 R S
Standard Shaft Diameter: S
Specific Shaft Diameter: H = High Inertia
with
Type of Shaft
w/o Brake, Brake,
Diameter and
with Oil Seal with Oil
Oil Seal
Seal
Round Shaft
(with fixed C D
screw holes)
Keyway
(with fixed R S
screw holes)
Rated Power Output

01: 100 W 13: 1.3 kW
02: 200 W 15: 1.5 kW
04: 400 W 18: 1.8 kW
07: 750 W 20: 2.0 kW
08: 850 W 30: 3.0 kW
10: 1.0 kW
Motor Frame Size

04: 40 mm 09: 86 mm 18: 180 mm
06: 60 mm 10: 100 mm
08: 80 mm 13: 130 mm
Series Name
Rated voltage and speed
C = 220V / 3,000 rpm; E = 220V / 2,000 rpm;
F = 220V / 1,500 rpm;
Encoder Type
W: absolute, 20-bit (resolution of single
cycle: 20-bit; resolution of multi-cycle:
16-bit)
Resolution of servo drive:
1280000 p/rev
Driven Type
C: High Precision AC Servo Motor
(applicable to CNC solutions)
Product Name
ECM: Electronic Commutation Motor
1-18
1.5.2 ASDA-A2-XN Series Servo Drive and Corresponding Motor
Servo Drive Corresponding Servo Motor
100 W ASD-A2-0121-N ECMC-C△0401S (S = 8 mm)

ECMC-C△0604S (S = 14 mm)
ECMC-C△08047 (7 = 14 mm)
400 W ASD-A2-0421-N
ECMC-E△1305S (S = 22 mm)
ECMC-G△1303S (S = 22 mm)
ECMC-C△0807S (S = 19 mm)
ECMC-G△1306S (S = 22 mm)
ECMC-C△0910S (S = 16 mm)
ECMC-C△1010S (S = 22 mm)
1000 W ASD-A2-1021-N
ECMC-E△1310S (S = 22 mm)
ECMC-G△1309S (S = 22 mm)
1500 W ASD-A2-1521-N ECMC-E△1315S (S = 22 mm)
ECMC-C△1020S (S = 22 mm)
ECMC-E△1320S (S = 22 mm)
2000 W ASD-A2-2023-N ECMC-E△1820S (S = 35 mm)
*ECMC-F△1313S (S = 22 mm)
*ECMC-F△1318S (S = 22 mm)
ECMC-E△1830S (S = 35 mm)
3000 W ASD-A2-3023-N ECMC-F△1830S (S = 35 mm)
ECMC-C△13308LA (8 = 28 mm)
ECMC-F△1845S (S = 35 mm)
4500 W ASD-A2-4523-N
ECMC-C△1340PLA (P = 24 mm)
ECMC-F△18553 (3 = 42 mm)
5500 W ASD-A2-5523-N
ECMC-C△13508LA (8 = 28 mm)
7500 W ASD-A2-7523-N ECMC-F△18753 (3 = 42 mm)
Note: 1.  at the end of the servo drive model name represents model type. For the actual
model name, please refer to the ordering information of the actual purchased
product.
2.  in the servo motor model name represents brake or keyway / oil seal.
3. △ in the the servo model name represents encoder type.
* represents high inertia motor.

The above table shows the specification of servo drive which has triple rated current. For detailed
specification of the servo motor and servo drive, please refer to Chapter 11.
1-19
1.5.3 Each Part of the ASDA-A2-XN Series Servo Drive
Servo drive models (front view)

The last two codes in the end of the servo drive model name represent the model type. The
product front views are as follows; the servo drive appearances are subject to change with models
of different input power. Please refer to the actual product.
-LN -EN -FN / -MN
Connector Function Description

Connects to PLC or control I/O
50-pin: applicable to -LN series and 4.5 kW ~ 7.5 kW models of
Input / Output Signal
CN1 -FN and -MN series
Connector
26-pin: applicable to -EN series and models below 3 kW of -FN
and -MN series
CN2 Encoder Connector Connects to the encoder connector on the motor
CN3 RS-485 Connector Connects to controller (only applicable to -LN models)
CN4 USB Connector Connects to the PC
CN5 Full-closed Connector Connects to the linear scale
Connector for communication control (only applicable to
-EN, -FN, and -MN models)
*Communication connector function:
CN6 Communication Connector
CANopen: applicable to -MN models
DMCNET: applicable to -FN models
EtherCAT: applicable to -EN models
CN7 External DI Connector 7 expandable DI points (only applicable to -EN models)
Absolute Encoder Battery Connects to the battery connector on the absolute encoder
CN8
Connector cable
CN-STO CN-STO Safe Torque Off
1-20
Servo Drive (top view)
Regenerative Resistor
1. For connecting to external
regenerative resistor:
P⊕ and C contacts connect to the
resistor;
P⊕ and D contacts are left open.
2. For connecting to internal
regenerative resistor:
P⊕ and C contacts are left open;
P⊕ and D are short-circuited.
3. For external regenerative brake:
P⊕ and Θ contacts connect to the brake;
P⊕, C and P⊕, D contacts are left open.
Control Circuit Power

L1c and L2c are for single-/three-phase
power 200~230Vac, 50/60Hz
Main Circuit Power

R,S, and T are for main electricity
AC200 ~ 230V, 50/60 Hz.
Heat Sink
For fixing the servo drive and
heat dissipation
1-21
Servo Drive (bottom view)
Absolute Encoder
Servo Motor Output Battery Connector
Connects to motor
power connector
(U,V,W). Do not connect
with the main power Ground
circuit; incorrect Connects to
connection may cause power ground and
servo drive malfunction. motor ground
1-22
Chapter 2 Installation
2.1 Notes
Please pay special attention to the followings:
 If the connection between the servo drive and the servo motor is over 20 meters (65.62 feet),
please thicken the connecting wire, UVW, as well as the encoder cable. Please refer to
Section 3.1.6 for further information.
2.2 Ambient Conditions of Storage

Before the installation, this product has to be kept in the shipping carton. In order to retain the
warranty coverage and for the maintenance, please follow the instructions below for storage, if the
product is not in use temporarily:
 Store the product within an ambient temperature range of -20°C to +65°C (-4°F to 149°F).
 Store the product within a relative humidity range of 0% to 90% and a non-condensing
environment.
 Avoid storing the product in the environment containing corrosive gas and liquid.
2.3 Ambient Conditions of Installation

The ambient conditions of installing and operating the servo drive:
A location that has no over-heat device, no water drop, vapor, dust and oily dust, no corrosive and
inflammable gas and liquid, no airborne dust and metal particles, no interference of
electromagnetic noise and has solid foundation and no vibration.
The ambient conditions of operating the servo motor:
The ambient temperature is between 0°C and 40°C (32°F to 104°F). And the ambient location shall
have no over-heat device, no water drop, vapor, dust and oily dust, no corrosive and inflammable
gas and liquid, no airborne dust and metal particles.
The best temperature of this servo drive is between 0°C and 55°C (32°F to 131°F). If the
temperature is over 45°C (113°F), please place the product in a well-ventilated environment so as
to ensure its performance. If the product is installed in a distribution board, make sure the size of
the distribution board and its ventilation condition will not overheat and endanger the internal
electronic device. Also, pay attention to the vibration of the machine. Check if the vibration will
influence the electronic device of the electric box.
2-1
ASDA-A2 Chapter 2 Installation
2.4 Installation Direction and Space

Notes:
 Mount the servo drive according to the following illustration. Incorrect installation may result in
a drive malfunction or premature failure of the drive and motor.
 The ASDA-A2 servo drive should be mounted perpendicularly to the wall or in the control
panel. In order to ensure the drive is well ventilated, ensure that all ventilation holes are not
obstructed and sufficient free space is given to the servo drive. Do not install the drive in a
horizontal position or malfunction and damage will occur.
 Do not connect the servo drives in parallel, or it might burn out the soft-start resistance or the
commutator and cause danger.
Correct
Incorrect
2-2
Chapter 2 Installation ASDA-A2
Scheme of Installation:
In order to have smaller wind resistance of the fan and increase the ventilation, please follow the
suggested clearance value when installing one or more than one servo drives. (Refer to the
following diagram.)
Note: The above diagrams are not in equal proportion. Please refer to the annotation.
2-3
2.5 Specification of Circuit Breaker and Fuse

220V Series
Caution: Please use the fuse and circuit breaker that are recognized by UL / CSA.
Servo Drive Model Circuit Breaker Fuse (Class T)
Operation Mode General General
ASD-A2-0121- 5A 5A
ASD-A2-0221- 5A 5A
ASD-A2-0421- 10A 10A
ASD-A2-0721- 10A 20A
ASD-A2-1021- 15A 25A
ASD-A2-1521- 20A 40A
ASD-A2-2023- 30A 50A
ASD-A2-3023- 30A 70A
ASD-A2-4523- 70A 140A
ASD-A2-5523- 75A 150A
ASD-A2-7523- 95A 175A
ASD-A2-1B23- - -
ASD-A2-1F23- - -
Note: If the servo drive equips with earth leakage circuit breaker for avoiding electric leakage, please choose
the current sensitivity which is over 200 mA and can continue up to 0.1 seconds.
400V Series
Caution: Please use the fuse and circuit breaker that are recognized by UL / CSA.
Servo Drive Model Circuit Breaker Fuse (Class T)
Operation Mode General General
ASD-A2-0443- 10A 10A
ASD-A2-0743- 10A 15A
ASD-A2-1043- 15A 20A
ASD-A2-1543- 20A 25A
ASD-A2-2043- 25A 30A
ASD-A2-3043- 30A 50A
ASD-A2-4543- 50A 80A
ASD-A2-5543- 60A 90A
ASD-A2-7543- 70A 120A
Note: If the servo drive equips with earth leakage circuit breaker for avoiding electric leakage, please
choose the current sensitivity which is over 200 mA and can continue up to 0.1 seconds.
2-4
2.6 Ferrite Ring

The movable or round-shaped ferrite ring is usually made of Mn-Zn ferrite. The impedance of the
ferrite ring varies with frequency. Normally, its impedance is relatively small to a low-frequency
signal; however, when the frequency of the signal increases, the impedance may increase
dramatically. Use the ferrite ring to optimize signal transmission and suppress high-frequency
noise, and reduce high-frequency interference in the power cable, signal cable, and connectors.
UNIT: mm (inch)
Winding Inductance Initial

Model OD ID HT
Condition L (OA) Permeability
2.6 mH ±
ASD-ACFC7K00 68.0 ± 0.6 44.0 ± 0.6 13.5 ± 0.5 Ø0.5 2UEW 20TS 5500
25%
Ferrite ring model Applicable servo drive model

ASD-A2-4523-, ASD-A2-5523-, ASD-A2-7523-,
ASD-A2-1B23-, ASD-A2-1F23-
ASD-ACFC7K00
ASD-A2-2043-, ASD-A2-3043-, ASD-A2-4543-,
ASD-A2-5543-, ASD-A2-7543-, ASD-A2-1B43-, ASD-A2-1F43-
2-5
Installation precautions
The ferrite ring is commonly used when peripheral devices (such as a controller) are affected by
noise from conduction and radiation when the servo motor is in the Servo On state. The parasitic
capacitance between the cables in the wiring panel and the ground is typically small. As the
frequency of the signal increases (Servo On state), the resistance of the parasitic capacitance
becomes small enough to let common-mode current flow through. Normally, common-mode
current only leads to common-mode interference due to an unstable circuit caused by a poor
connection between the power circuit and ground. If the common-mode current flows through the
external cables, common-mode interference may also happen due to electrical interference caused
by unstable electric potential.
The ferrite ring causes eddy current losses to a high-frequency signal and transforms it into heat
when suppressing common-mode interference. The ferrite ring acts as a low-pass filter to
effectively suppress high-frequency noise and ensure the stability of the circuit while the
impedance to low-frequency signals is relatively small.
Winding several turns of wire onto the ferrite ring can increase inductance and the ability to filter
out high-frequency noise.
The suggested winding methods are shown below:

1. For A2-220V model (4.5 kW ~ 7.5 kW) and A2-400V model (2 kW ~ 7.5 W)
2-6
2. For A2-220V model (11 kW ~ 15 kW) and A2-400V model (11 kW ~ 15 kW)
Note:
1. Please refer to Section 3.1.4 for the selection of the motor power cable.
2. Only the motor power cable or power cable can run through the ferrite ring. If needed, please prepare
extra ferrite rings for grounding.
3. An EMI filter may be required for absorbing radiation when using a longer motor power cable.
2-7
2.7 EMI Filter Selection

220V Series
Recommended EMI Filter
Item Power Servo Drive Model FootPrint
1PH 3PH
1 100 W ASD-A2-0121- RF007S21AA RF022B43AA N
4 750 W ASD-A2-0721- RF007S21AA RF037B43BA N
5 1.0 kW ASD-A2-1021- RF007S21AA RF037B43BA N
6 1.5 kW ASD-A2-1521- RF007S21AA RF037B43BA N
7 2.0 kW ASD-A2-2023- - RF037B43BA N
8 3.0 kW ASD-A2-3023- - RF037B43BA N
9 4.5 kW ASD-A2-4523- - RF075M43BA N
10 5.5 kW ASD-A2-5523- - RF075M43BA Y
11 7.5 kW ASD-A2-7523- - 30TDRT1W4 Y
12 11.0 kW ASD-A2-1B23- - 50TDS4W4C -
13 15.0 kW ASD-A2-1F23- - 50TDS4W4C -
400V Series
Item Power Servo Drive Model Recommended EMI Filter FootPrint
1 750 W ASD-A2-0743- RF007S43AA N
2 1000 W ASD-A2-1043- RF007S43AA N
3 1500 W ASD-A2-1543- RF022B43AA N
4 2000 W ASD-A2-2043- RF037B43BA N
5 3000 W ASD-A2-3043- RF037B43BA N
6 4500 W ASD-A2-4543- RF075M43BA N
7 5500 W ASD-A2-5543- RF075M43BA Y
8 7500 W ASD-A2-7543- RF075M43BA Y
2-8
EMI Filter Installation

All electronic equipment (including servo drive) generates high or low frequency noise during
operation and interferes with the peripheral equipment via conduction or radiation. With an EMI
Filter and the correct installation, much interference can be eliminated. It is suggested to use
Delta’s EMI Filter to suppress the interference better.
When installing the servo drive and EMI Filter, please follow the instructions of the user manual
and make sure it meets the following specifications:
1. EN61000-6-4 (2001)
2. EN61800-3 (2004) PDS of category C2
3. EN55011+A2 (2007) Class A Group 1
General Precaution
In order to ensure the best performance of EMI Filter, apart from the instructions of servo drive
installation and wiring, please follow the precautions below:
1. The servo drive and EMI Filter should be installed on the same metal plate.
2. When installing the servo drive and EMI Filter, the servo drive should be installed above the
EMI Filter.
3. The wiring should be as short as possible.
4. The metal plate should be well grounded.
5. The metal cover of the servo drive and EMI Filter or grounding should be firmly fixed on the
metal plate. Also, the contact area should be as large as possible.
6. It is suggested to install one servo drive with one EMI filter.
2-9
Motor Cable Selection and Installation Precautions

The selection of motor cables and installation affects the performance of EMI Filter. Please follow
the precautions below.
1. Use the cable that has braid shielding. (The effect of double shielding is better.)
2. The shield on both sides of the motor cable should be grounded in the shortest distance and
the largest contact area.
3. The protective paint of the U-shape saddle and metal plate should be removed in order to
ensure good contact. Please see the figure below.
4. It should have a correct connection between the braid shielding of the motor cable and the
metal plate. The braid shielding on both sides of the motor cable should be fixed by the U-
shape saddle and metal plate. Please see the figure below for the correct connection.
(1) The protective paint of the U-shape saddle and metal plate should be removed in
order to ensure good contact.
(2) U-shape saddle
(3) Well-grounded metal plate
2-10
2.8 Selection of Regenerative Resistor

When the direction of pull-out torque is different from the rotation, it means the electricity is sent
back to the servo drive from the load-end. It becomes the capacitance of DC Bus and increases
the voltage. When the voltage increases to a specific value, the come-back electricity can only be
consumed by regenerative resistor. There is a built-in regenerative resistor in the servo drive.
Users can also use the external regenerative resistor if needed.
Specification of built-in regenerative resistor provided by ASDA-A2 220V Series
Specification of built-in
regenerative resistor The capacity of
Servo Drive Minimum allowable
built-in regenerative
(kW) Resistance Capacity resistance (Ohm)
resistor (Watt)
(P1-52) (Ohm) (P1-53) (Watt)
0.1 - - - 30
0.2 - - - 30
0.4 40 40 20 30
0.75 40 60 30 20
1.0 40 60 30 20
1.5 40 60 30 20
2.0 20 100 50 10
3.0 20 100 50 10
4.5 20 100 50 10
5.5 - - - 8
7.5 - - - 5
11 - - - 8
15 - - - 5
Specification of built-in regenerative resistor provided by ASDA-A2 400V Series

Specification of built-in regenerative resistor
Minimum allowable
Servo Drive (kW) Resistance Capacity resistance (Ohm)
(P1-52) (Ohm) (P1-53) (Watt)
0.75 80 100 60
1.0 80 100 60
1.5 80 100 40
2.0 - - 40
3.0 - - 30
4.5 - - 20
5.5 - - 20
7.5 - - 15
11 - - 10
15 - - 10
2-11
When the regenerative energy exceeds the capacity of the built-in regenerative resistor, the
external regenerative resistor should be applied. Please pay special attention to the followings
when using the regenerative resistor.
1. Please correctly set up the resistance (P1-52) and capacity (P1-53) of regenerative resistor.
Or it might influence the performance of this function.
2. When using an external regenerative resistor, please note that its resistance must be greater
than the resistance of the built-in regenerative resistor. For general application, you can
connect more than one resistor in series. If the value (from resistors connected in series)
exceeds the rated range, you can reduce the value by connecting the resistor in parallel.
If you want to connect the resistors in parallel to increase the power of the regenerative
resistor, please make sure the capacitance meets the requirements.
See the following diagram and settings for connecting the regenerative resistor in serial and
parallel.
External Regenerative Resistor
P Setting:
P1-52=10 (Ω)
1kW, 10Ω
P1-53=1000 (W)
C
(serial connection)
P
Setting:
1kW, 10Ω
P1-52=20 (Ω)
1kW, 10Ω
P1-53=2000 (W)
C
(parallel connection)
P Setting:
P1-52=5 (Ω)
1kW, 10Ω 1kW, 10Ω
P1-53=2000 (W)
C
3. In natural environment, if the capacity of the regenerative resistor (the average value) is within
the rated capacity, the temperature of the capacitance will increase to 120°C (248°F) or even
higher (under the condition of regenerative energy continues to function). For safety concerns,
please apply the method of forced cooling in order to reduce the temperature of regenerative
resistor. Or, it is suggested to use the regenerative resistor which is equipped with thermal
switches. Please contact the distributors for load characteristics of the regenerative resistor.
When using the external regenerative resistor, the resistor should connect to P, C terminal and the
contact of P, D terminal should be opened. It is recommended to choose the above mentioned
capacitance. For easy calculation of regenerative resistor capacity, except the energy consumed
by IGBT, two ways are provided to select the capacity of the external regenerative resistor
according to the selected linear motor or rotary motor.
2-12
(1) Regenerative Power Selection

(a) When the external load on torque does not exist
If the motor operates back and forth, the energy generated by the brake will go into the
capacitance of DC bus. When the voltage of the capacitance exceeds a specific value, the
redundant energy will be consumed by the regenerative resistor. Two ways of selecting the
regenerative resistor are provided here. The table below provides the energy calculation
method. Users can refer to it and calculate the selected regenerative resistor.
220V
Regenerative power The maximum
Servo Drive Rotor Inertia from empty load regenerative power of
Motor capacitance
(kW) J (× 10 kg.m2) 3000 r/min to stop
-4
Eo (joule) Ec (joule)
0.1 ECMA-C△040F 0.021 0.10 4.21
0.1 ECMA-C△0401 0.037 0.18 4.21
0.2 ECMA-C△0602 0.177 0.87 5.62
0.4 ECMA-C△0604 0.277 1.37 8.42
0.4 ECMA-C△0804 0.68 3.36 8.42
Low
0.75 ECMA-C△0807 1.13 5.59 17.47
Inertia
0.75 ECMA-C△0907 1.93 9.54 17.47
1.0 ECMA-C△1010 2.65 13.10 21.22
1.0 ECMC-C△0910 2.62 12.96 21.22
2.0 ECMA-C△1020 4.45 22.0 25.58
3.0 ECMA-C△1330 12.7 62.80 25.58
0.4 ECMA-E△1305 8.17 40.40 8.42
1.0 ECMA-E△1310 8.41 41.59 21.22
1.5 ECMA-E△1315 11.18 55.29 25.58
Medium
2.0 ECMA-E△1320 14.59 72.15 25.58
Inertia
2.0 ECMA-E△1820 34.68 171.49 25.58
3.0 ECMA-E△1830 54.95 271.73 31.20
3.0 ECMA-E△1835 54.95 271.73 31.20
1.0 ECMA-F△1308 13.6 67.25 21.22
2.0 ECMA-F△1313 20.0 98.90 25.58
2.0 ECMA-F△1318 24.9 123.13 31.20
Medium-
High 3.0 ECMA-F△1830 54.95 271.73 28
Inertia
4.5 ECMA-F△1845 77.75 384.48 25
5.5 ECMA-F△1855 99.78 493.42 27
7.5 ECMA-F△1875 142.7 705.66 93
2-13

Motor capacitance
(kW) J (× 10-4kg.m2) 3000 r/min to stop
Medium- 11.0 ECMA- F△221B 329.0 723.08 117
High
Inertia 15.0 ECMA- F△221F 553.0 1215.38 156
0.4 ECMA-G△1303 8.17 17.96 8.42
High 0.75 ECMA-F△1305 10.3 22.64 17.47

Inertia 0.75 ECMA-G△1306 8.41 18.48 17.47
1.0 ECMA-G△1309 11.18 24.57 21.22
Eo= J * wr2/182 (joule), Wr: r/min
400V
Regenerative The maximum

Servo Drive Rotor Inertia power from empty regenerative power
Motor of capacitance
(kW) J (× 10-4kg.m2) load 3000 r/min to
stop Eo (joule) Ec (joule)
0.75 ECMA-J△0604 0.277 1.37 42.43
0.75 ECMA-J△0807 1.13 5.59 42.43
Low 0.75 ECMA-J△0907 1.93 9.54 42.46

Inertia 1.0 ECMA-J△0910 2.62 12.96 42.43
1.5 ECMA-J△1010 2.65 13.10 42.43
2.0 ECMA-J△1020 4.45 22.01 42.43
0.75 ECMA-K△1305 8.17 40.40 51.17
1.0 ECMA-K△1310 8.41 41.59 51.17
Medium
1.5 ECMA-K△1315 11.18 55.29 57.41
Inertia
2.0 ECMA-K△1320 14.59 72.15 34.94
2.0 ECMA-K△1820 34.68 171.49 34.94
2-14

Motor capacitance
(kW) J (× 10-4kg.m2) 3000 r/min to stop
0.75 ECMA-L△1305 13.1 16.20 42.43
1.5 ECMA-L△1313 23.6 29.18 42.43
3.0 ECMA-L△1830 54.95 67.93 42.43
Medium-
High 3.0 ECMA-J△1330 12.7 15.70 42.43
Inertia
4.5 ECMA-L△1845 77.75 96.12 51.17
5.5 ECMA-L△1855 99.78 123.35 57.41
7.5 ECMA-L△1875 142.7 176.41 62.40
High 1.0 ECMA-L△1308 17.1 84.56 42.43

Inertia 1.5 ECMA-M△1309 11.18 55.29 57.41
Eo= J * wr2/182 (joule), Wr: r/min
Assume that the load inertia is N times to the motor inertia and the motor decelerates from
3000 r/min to 0, its regenerative energy is (N+1) x Eo. The consumed regenerative resistor is
(N+1) × Eo - Ec joule. If the cycle of back and forth operation is T sec, then the power of
regenerative resistor it needs is 2× ((N+1) x Eo - Ec) / T.
Followings are the calculation procedure:
Step Item Calculation and Setting Method

Set the capacity of regenerative
1 Set P1-53 to the maximum value
resistor to the maximum
2 Set T cycle of back and forth operation Enter by the user
3 Set the rotational speed wr Enter by the user or read via P0-02
4 Set the load/motor inertia ratio N Enter by the user or read via P0-02
Calculate the maximum regenerative
5 Eo= J * wr2/182
energy Eo
Set the absorbable regenerative
6 Refer to the above table
energy Ec
Calculate the needful capacitance of
7 2 x ((N+1) xEo – Ec) / T
regenerative resistor
Take 400 W as the example. The cycle of back and forth operation is T = 0.4 sec, the maximum
speed is 3000 r/min, and the load inertia is 7 times to the motor inertia. Then, the needful power of
regenerative resistor is 2 × ((7+1) ×1.37 – 8) / 0.4 = 14.8 W. If it is smaller than the built-in capacity
of regenerative resistor, the built-in 60 W regenerative resistor will do. Generally speaking, when
the need of the external load inertia is not much, the built-in regenerative is enough. The smaller
power of the regenerative resistor it is, the more energy it accumulates and the higher temperature
it will be. When the temperature is higher than a specific value, AL005 occurs.
2-15
(b) If the external load torque exists, the motor is in reverse rotation.
Usually, the motor is in forward rotation, which means the torque output direction of the motor
is the same as the rotation direction. However, in some applications, the direction of torque
output is different from the rotation. In this situation, the motor is in reverse rotation. The
external energy goes into the servo drive through the motor. The diagram below is one
example. When the external force direction is the same as the moving direction, the servo
system has to use the force of the opposite direction to keep the speed and stability. Huge
amount of energy will return to the servo drive at the moment. When DC-BUS is full and
unable to store the regenerative energy, the energy will be led to the regenerative resistor
and consumed.
馬達轉速
Motor Speed
External Load Torque

外部負載扭矩
Motor Output Torque

馬達輸出扭矩
馬達輸出負功
Negative Torque
正功
Positive 負功Torque
Negative 正功
Positive
Torque
Torque
Negative torque: TL × Wr TL: external load torque

For safety reasons, please calculate it by considering the safest situation.
For example, when the external load torque is the +70% rated torque and the rotation
reaches 3000 r/min, then take 400 W (the rated torque is 1.27 Nt-m) as the example. The
user has to connect the regenerative resistor of 40, which is
2 ×(0.7 ×1.27) ×(3000 ×2 ×π／60) = 560 W.
2-16
(2) Simple Selection
Choose the appropriate regenerative resistor according to the allowable frequency and empty
load frequency in actual operation. The so-called empty allowable frequency is the frequency of
continuous operation when the servo motor runs from 0 r/min to the rated speed and then
decelerates from the rated speed to 0 r/min within the shortest time. The following table lists
the allowable frequency when the servo drive runs without load (times/min).
Allowable frequency when the servo motor runs without load (times/min)
and uses a built-in regenerative resistor
Motor Capacity 600 750 900 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.0 3.0 4.5 5.5 7.5 11.0 15.0
W W W kW kW kW kW kW kW kW kW kW kW
Servo Motor 06 07 09 10 15 20 20 30 45 55 75 1B 1F
83
ECMAC - 312 - 137 - - - - - - - -
(F100)
24 10
ECMAE - - - 42 32 11 - - - - -
(F130) (F180)
ECMAF - - - - - - - 11 8 - - - -
ECMAG 42 - 31 - - - - - - - - - -
ECMAJ - 537 - - - - - - - - - - -
ECMAK - - - 162 122 - - - - - - - -
ECMAL - - - - - - - - - - - - -
When the servo motor runs with load, the allowable frequency will be different according to
different load inertia or speed. The following is the calculation method.
m represents load / motor inertia ratio.
2
Allowable frequency when serv o motor run without load Rated s peed times
Allowable fr equency = x
m+ 1 Operating speed mi n.
The comparison table of external regenerative resistor is provided below. Please choose the
appropriate regenerative resistor according to the allowable frequency.
The table below describes the suggested allowable frequency (times/min) of regenerative
resistor when the servo drive runs without load.
Allowable frequency of regenerative resistor when the servo drive runs without load (times/min)
ECMAC
Motor Capacity
400 W 400 W
100 W 200 W 750 W 1.0 kW 2.0 kW
(F60) (F80)
Corresponding Motor
01 02 04 04 07 10 20
BR400W040 (400 W 40Ω) - - 8608 3506 2110 925 562
BR1K0W020 (1 kW 20Ω) - - - 8765 5274 2312 1406
2-17
ECMAE
Motor Capacity
2.0 kW 2.0 kW
0.5 kW 1 kW 1.5 kw 3.0 kW
(F130) (F180)
Corresponding Motor
05 1.0 15 20 20 30
BR400W040 (400 W 40Ω) 291 283 213 163 68 -
BR1K0W020 (1 kW 20Ω) 729 708 533 408 171 -
BR1K5W005 (3 kW 10Ω) - - - - - 331
Motor Capacity ECMAF

3.0 KW 4.5 KW 5.5 KW 7.5 kW 11.0 kW 15.0 kW
Corresponding Motor 30 45 55 75 1B 1F
BR1K5W005 (3 kW 10Ω) 331 234 182 127 124 74
Allowable frequency of regenerative resistor when the servo drive runs without load (times/min)
Motor Capacity ECMAG

0.3 kW 0.6 kW 0.9 kW
Corresponding Motor 03 06 09
BR400W040 (400 W 40Ω) 292 283 213
BR1K0W020 (1 kW 20Ω) 729 708 533
ECMAK
Motor Capacity
1.0 kW 1.5 kW 2.0 kW
Corresponding Motor
10 15 20
BR400W040 (400 W 40Ω) - 488 665
Motor Capacity ECMAL

3.0 KW 4.5 KW 5.5 KW 7.5 kW
Corresponding Motor 30 45 55 75
BR400W040 (400 W 40Ω) 177 - - -
BR1K0W020 (1 kW 20Ω) - 312 243 170
If the regenerative resistor wattage is not enough, you can connect the same regenerative
resistors in parallel to increase the power, but the resistance cannot be lower than the
minimum allowable resistance specified in the manual after parallel connection.
2-18
Dimensions of Regenerative Resistor
Delta Part Number: BR400W040 (400 W 40Ω)
L1 L2 H D W MAX. WEIGHT (g)

265 250 30 5.3 60 930
Delta Part Number: BR1K0W020 (1 kW 20Ω)
L1 L2 H D W MAX. WEIGHT (g)

400 385 50 5.3 100 2800
2-19
Delta Part Number: BR1K5W005 (3 kW 10Ω)
2-20
2.9 The Use of Servo Motor
Please pay attention to the following when using servo motors with brake:
 Never apply the brake to dynamic braking.
2.9.1 Troubleshooting for the Motor Operation and Status
Servo motor makes abnormal noises:

Possible causes Confirmation Solutions
Check if there is any foreign object,
Replace the connecting
There is a source of vibration damage, or deformation in the
component (such as coupling) or
in the connecting component. movable parts of the connecting
contact the manufacturer.
component.
1. Whether the servo motor has
been subjected to excessive force
or vibration, resulting in damage to
the encoder.
The encoder is subject to
2. Remove and shake the motor to Replace the servo motor.
excessive vibration / shocks.
see if there is any abnormal
noises (disk damage).
3. Visually inspect the encoder’s rear
cover for dust (encoder damage).
Servo motor overheating:

Possible causes Confirmation Solutions
Make sure the installation surface
is flat. If there are other objects
Measure the temperatures of the (such as paint, gasket) between
Poor thermal conductivity of servo motor frame and the mounting the mounting surface and motor
the servo motor mounting surface (metal). The temperature surface resulting in poor heat
surface. difference should not exceed 20°C dissipation, remove the objects or
(68°F). apply other methods to help
dissipate heat (such as forced air
cooling for the servo motor).
2-21
2.9.2 Mounting Directions and Precautions for the Servo Motor
You can install the servo motor horizontally or vertically.

Orientation Precautions
Horizontal
If you are using a servo motor with oil seal, please refer to
the precaution measures in section 2.9.5 for preventing
oil / water from entering the servo motor.
Vertical (with shaft end up)
 Do not use servo motors with oil seal in the vertical

orientation.
 When wiring, you need to install an oil trap (marked as
(1) in the left) to prevent vapor from entering the motor.
 When installing the servo motor in a machine (such as
a gearbox), you must comply with the precaution
measures in section 2.9.5 to prevent oil and gas from
entering the servo motor.
Vertical (with shaft end down)
If you are using a servo motor with oil seal, please refer to
the precaution measures in section 2.9.5 for preventing
oil / water from entering the servo motor.
Note: if you need to install gears on the servo motor, please follow the manufacturer’s instructions for installation.
2-22
2.9.3 Precautions for Using Servo Motors with Oil Seal
This section defines the operating conditions for using motors with oil seal:
1. In the operating environment, the oil level must be lower than the oil seal lip.
(1) Servo motor; (2) Motor shaft; (3) Gear; (4) Oil; (5) Oil seal lip; (6) Oil seal
2. The oil seal cannot be submerged in the liquid; it can only withstand splashes of oil.
3. The oil seal lip cannot be soaked in oil.
4. The oil seal cannot be lower than the oil level; otherwise the oil will enter the servo motor and
cause damage.
2.9.4 Precautions for Using Couplings
Caution:
It is suggested to use a flexible coupling specifically designed for servo motors, especially double
spring couplings, which provide some buffer tolerance during eccentric motion and deflection.
Please select appropriate coupling size for the operating conditions. Improper usage or connection
may result in damage.
1. Wipe off the anti-rust coating or oil on the motor shaft end.
2. If using a servo motor with a keyway, attach the supplied key or a key that matches the
dimensions of the drawing to the motor shaft.
Note: when installing the keyway on the motor, do not apply excessive force to the
keyway or motor shaft.
3. Use dial gauge or other methods to ensure that the centering accuracy is within the
specification.
If you cannot use the dial gauge or other methods, you can slide the coupling along both axes and
adjust it until it does not get stuck.
(1) The distance is measured at four
different positions on the
circumference for the centering
accuracy. The difference between
the maximum and minimum
measurement values must be
0.03 mm or less; and even within
this range, you can make
adjustments to increase the
centering accuracy as much as
possible.
Note: when measuring, rotate the coupling

and the motor shaft together.
2-23
4. Installation safety precautions for the servo motor shaft

(1) When connecting the shaft, ensure that the required centering accuracy is reached. If the
shaft is not correctly centered, vibration may damage the bearings and encoder.
(2) When installing the coupling, do not apply excessive force to the shaft. Also, do not apply
excessive force to the area around the encoder, as the impact may damage the encoder.
(3) If the coupling makes any abnormal noises, re-align the shaft until the noises disappear.
(4) Ensure that the axial load and radial load are within the specifications. Please refer to the
specifications for the maximum axial load (N) and maximum radial load (N) for each
servo motor.
2.9.5 Oil and Water Prevention Measures for the Servo Motor
Please follow the following precautions and do not allow water, oil, or other foreign objects to enter
the servo motor:
1. Do not submerge the cable in oil or water.
2. If oil or water is unavoidable, please use oil-resistant cables. Delta does not provide oil-
resistant cable.
3. If the servo motor must be mounted with the shaft end up, do not use it in a machine,
gearbox, or other environments where the servo motor may have contact with oil or water.
(1) Gear; (2) Oil

4. Do not use the servo motor in an environment with cutting fluid. Depending on the type of
cutting fluid, the sealing material, the coated colloids, cables, or other components may be
affected or even deteriorate.
5. Do not let the servo motor be in continuous exposure to oil mist, water vapor, oil, water, or
grease.
2-24
If you cannot avoid using the servo motor under the above conditions, please take prevention
measures to avoid dirt and water for the machine.
2.9.6 Measures to Suppress Temperature Increase of the Servo Motor
1. When installing the servo motor, please pay attention to the cooling conditions (such as size of
the heat sink) provided in the specifications of each servo motor type.
2. The servo motor generates heat during operation, and the heat generated by the servo motor
is dissipated to the heat sink through the motor mounting surface. Therefore, if the surface area
of the heat sink is too small, the temperature of the servo motor may increase abnormally.
3. If it is difficult to apply large heat sinks in the operating environment or if the ambient air
temperature exceeds the given specifications, please take the following measures:
(1) Reduce servo motor full load rating: for more details, please refer to the specifications of
each servo motor type. When selecting servo motors, consider motors with the power
capacity 1 to 2 levels higher.
(2) Reduce the acceleration and deceleration of the work cycle to lower the motor load.
(3) Apply external forced air cooling to the servo motor using cooling fans or other means.
Important: avoid placing a gasket or other insulating materials between the servo motor and heat sink, as this
may result in motor temperature increase, inferior noise resistance, and motor malfunction.
2-25
2-26
Chapter 3 Wiring
This chapter provides information on wiring ASDA-A2 series products, the descriptions of I/O
signals and gives typical examples of wiring diagrams.
3.1 Connections - 220V series

3.1.1 Connecting to Peripheral Devices
Power
100W-1.5kW Single-/Three-phase 200-230V

2kW-15kW Three-phase 200-230V
No Fuse Breaker (NFB)

Installing a NFB can prevent excessive current from arising due to
short-circuit or flow when power on and off, so as to avoid the
damage on the servo drive.
Electromagnetic contractor (MC)
When an alarm occurs, it outputs ALARM

signal and disconnect the power of the servo Host controller
drive. It can connect to Delta PLC controller or other
brands of NC controllers.
Regenerative resistor (Optional)
The returned regenerative power Terminal block module

generated when braking may result in (ASD-BM-50A) (Optional)
damage. Thus, external resistor is
recommended. Connect the external
resistor to P and C, and ensure an Transmit the signal from CN1 50pin
open circuit between P and D. When to the controller via this block
applying internal resistor, ensure the module.
circuit is close between P and D, and
the circuit is open between P and C.
CN1 I/O
connector
CN5 connector (Optional)
For full-closed loop or linear scale connection.
CN5: for ASDA-A2-L, -M, -U. (Please refer to the
description of section 1.2.2) CN3 connector (Optional)
CN6 CANopen connector (Optional) Use MODBUS communication to

CN2 connector
support RS-485/RS232.
(Optional)
CN6: for ASDA-A2-M only. (Please refer to the
description or section 1.2.2)
CN7: for ASDA-A2-U only. (Please refer to the

description of section 1.2.2)
CN4 USB connector (Optional)
1. Connect to personal computer

Motor power output (U, V, W) via USB cable.
2. Use ASDA-SOFT for tuning,
parameter setting and control.
Servo motor
3-1
Chapter 3 Wiring ASDA-A2
Installation notes:
1. Check if the power and wiring among R, S, T and L1C, L2C are correct.
Please refer to Chapter 11 for Specifications. Make sure the input voltage is correct, or it might
damage the servo drive or danger may occur.
2. Please check if the output terminal U, V, W of the servo motor is correctly wired. The incorrect
wiring may disable the operation of the motor or cause malfunction.
3. When applying to the external regenerative resistor, the contact between P and D should be
opened and the external regenerative resistor should connect to terminal P and C. When
applying to the internal regenerative resistor, the contact between P and D should be closed
and the contact between P and C should be opened.
4. When an alarm occurs or the system is in emergency stop status, use ALARM or WARN to
output and disconnect the power of magnetic contactor in order to disconnect the power of
servo drive.
3-2
ASDA-A2 Chapter 3 Wiring
3.1.2 Connectors and Terminals of Servo Drive
Terminal
Name Description
Signal
Connect to single-phase AC power (select the
Power input of the control
L1C, L2C circuit appropriate voltage specification according to the
product).
Connect to three-phase AC power (select the

Power input of the main
R, S, T appropriate voltage specification according to the
circuit
product).
Connect to the servo motor.

Terminal
Wire Color Description
Symbol
U Red
U, V, W Three-phase main
Motor cable V White power cable of the
FG motor.
W Black
Connect to ground
FG Green terminal ( ) of the
servo drive.
The contact between P and D
end should be closed; contact
Internal resistor
between P and C end should
be opened.
Connect P , C ends to the
P , D, Regenerative resistor External resistor resistor and the contact between
C, terminal or braking unit P and D end should be opened.
P and P of the brake unit
should connect to P and
External braking
respectively. The contact between
unit
P and D and P and C should
be opened.
Connect to the ground wire of power and servo
Ground terminal
motor.
Connect to the host controller. Please refer to
CN1 I/O connector (Optional)
section 3.4.
Connect encoder of the motor. Please refer to
CN2 Connector (Optional)
section 3.5.
Connect to RS-485 or RS-232. Please refer to
CN3 Connector (Optional)
section 3.6.
USB connector (Type B) Connect to personal computer (PC or notebook).
CN4 (Optional) Please refer to section 3.7.
Connect to linear scale or encoder for full-closed
CN5 Connector (Optional) loop and motor feedback. Please refer to section
3.8.
CANopen connector
CN6 RJ45 connector. Please refer to section 3.9.
(Optional)
3-3
Terminal
Name Description
Signal
Extension digital input Extension DI connector. Please refer to section
CN7 connector (Optional) 3.10.
CN8 Reserved connector Reserved.
Pay special attention to the followings when wiring:

1. When the power is cutoff, do not touch R, S, T and U, V, W since the capacitance inside the
servo drive still contains huge amount of electric charge. Wait until the charging light is off.
2. Separate R, S, T and U, V, W from the other wires. The interval should be at least 30 cm
(11.8 inches).
3. If the wire of encoder CN2 or CN5 connector is not long enough, please use shielded twisted-
pair cable which cannot exceed 20 meters (65.62 feet). If it exceeds 20 meters, please
choose the bigger wire diameter of signal cable to ensure it will not cause signal fading. As
for the encoder wiring specification of 20-meter-long cable, please use AWG26 of wire size
and metal braided shield twisted-pair cable which complies with the standard of UL 2464.
4. When using CANopen, please use the standard shielded twisted-pair cables to ensure the
communication quality.
5. When selecting the wire rod, please refer to Section 3.1.6.
6. Do not install the plug-in capacitance in servo drive. It might burn out the soft-start resistance
and cause danger.
3-4
3.1.3 Wiring Method
The wiring method of 220V servo drive is divided into single-phase and three-phase. In the
diagram below, Power On is contact a, and Power Off and ALRM_RY are contact b. MC is the coil
of magnetic contactor, self-remaining power, and the contact of main power circuit.
 Wiring Method of Single-phase Power Supply (suitable for 1.5 kW and models below 1.5 kW)
RT
MCCB
Power Power
Noise Filter On Off MC
ALRM_RY
MC
SUP
U
Motor
V
W
MC
R Servo Drive
S
T
CN1
DO5+(28)
DC24V
L1C ALRM_RY
L2C DO5-(27)
3-5
 Wiring Method of Three-phase Power Supply (suitable for all series)

TSR
MCCB
Power Power
ALRM_RY
MC
SUP
U
Motor
V
W
MC
R Servo Drive
S
T
CN1
DO5+(28)
DC24V
L1C ALRM_RY
L2C DO5-(27)
3-6
3.1.4 Specification of Motor Power Cable
Terminal
Motor Model U, V, W / Connector of Brake
Definition
ECMA-C1040FS (50 W)
ECMA-C△0401S (100 W)
ECMA-C△0602S (200 W)
ECMA-C△0604S (400 W)
ECMA-C△0604H (400 W)
A
ECMA-C△08047 (400 W)
ECMA-C△0807S (750 W)
ECMA-C△0807H (750 W)
ECMA-C△0907S (750 W)
ECMA-C△0910S (1000 W)
ECMA-C1040FS (50 W)
ECMA-C△0401S (100 W)
ECMA-C△0602S (200 W)
ECMA-C△0604S (400 W)
ECMA-C△08047 (400 W) B
ECMA-C△0807S (750 W)
ECMA-C△0807H (750 W)
ECMA-C△0907S (750 W)
ECMA-C△0910S (1000 W)
ECMA-G△1303S (300 W)
ECMA-E△1305S (500 W)
ECMA-F△1305S (500 W)
ECMA-G△1306S (600 W)
ECMA-F△1308S (850 W)
ECMA-G△1309S (900 W)
ECMA-C△1010S (1000 W) C
ECMA-E△1310S (1000 W) MIL 20-18S
ECMA-F△1313S (1300 W)
ECMA-E△1315S (1500 W)
ECMA-F△1318S (1800 W)
ECMA-C△1020S (2000 W)
ECMA-E△1320S (2000 W)
ECMA-C△13304 (3000 W)
3-7
Terminal
Motor Model U, V, W / Connector of Brake
Definition
ECMA-E△1820S (2000 W)
ECMA-C△1330R8LA (3000 W)
ECMA-E△1830S (3000 W)
ECMA-F△1830S (3000 W) D
ECMA-E△1835S (3500 W) MIL 24-11S
ECMA-C△1340RPLA (4000 W)
ECMA-F△1845S (4500 W)
ECMA-C△1350R8LA (5000 W)
ECMA-F△18553 (5500 W)
D A
ECMA-F△18753 (7500 W) E
ECMA-F1221B3 (11 kW) C B
MIL 32-17S
ECMA-F1221FS (15 kW)
Terminal
Motor Model Connector of Brake
Definition
ECMA-F218553 (5500 W)
F
ECMA-F218753 (7500 W)
Wiring U V W CASE GROUND BRAKE1 BRAKE2

Name (Red) (White) (Black) (Yellow/Green) (Note*5) (Note*5)
A 1 2 3 4 - -
B 1 2 4 5 3 6
C F I B E G H
D D E F G A B
E A B C D - -
Wiring Name BRAKE1 (Red) BRAKE2 (Black)

F A B
When selecting the wire rod, please choose a 600V PVC cable and the length should not be longer
than 30 m (98.43 feet). If the length exceeds 30 m, refer to the voltage drop when selecting the
wire size. Please refer to Section 3.1.6 for wire rod selection.
Note:
1. No polarity for brake coil. The wiring name is BRAKE1 & BRAKE2.
2. Power for brake is DC24V. Never share it with the power of control signal VDD.
3. Box, (△) in servo motor model represents encoder type. △= 1: incremental, 20-bit;
△= 2: incremental, 17-bit; △ = 3: 2500 ppr; △= A: absolute.
4. Box, () in servo motor model represents brake or keyway / oil seal.
5. Color of brake cable F40 to F86: brown and blue; color of brake cable for F100 or above: yellow and
blue.
3-8
3.1.5 Specification of Encoder Cable Connector
Encoder Connection (Diagram 1)
(1) CN2 connector; (2) Quick connector (connector of encoder cable)
Note: this diagram shows the connection between the servo drive and the motor encoder. It is not drawn by
the practical scale and specification will be different according to the selected servo drive and motor model.
1. Please refer to the Section of Specification and Definition of Encoder Connector.
2. Please refer to Section 3.5 CN2 Connector.
Motor Model Connector of Encoder Cable

ECMA-C1040F (50 W)
ECMA-C△0401S (100 W)
ECMA-C△0602S (200 W)
ECMA-C△0604S (400 W)
ECMA-C△0604H (400 W)
ECMA-C△08047 (400 W)
ECMA-C△0807S (750 W)
ECMA-C△0807H (750 W)
ECMA-C△0907S (750 W)
ECMA-C△0910S (1000 W)
3-9
Specification and Definition of Incremental Encoder Connector:

Connector of Connector of
Encoder Cable Motor Encoder
Servo Drive Motor

CN2 Encoder
View from this side View from this side
(Encoder type is 17bit, 20bit):

1 2 3
White 3 2 1
T+ Reserved Reserved White
-
4 5 6 Reserved T+
White/Red 6 5 4
T- Reserved Reserved White/Red
-
7 8 9 Reserved T-
Brown Blue
Shield 9 8 7
DC+5V GND Blue Brown
Shield
GND DC+5V
The wire color of the servo drive

is for reference only. Please refer
to the real object.
1 1
2 2
Servo Drive 3 3 Motor

CN2 4 4 Encoder
‧ ‧
‧ ‧
‧ ‧
If not using housing and directly wiring the cores, please follow the corresponding core number for wiring. For
example, core number 1 from the servo drive CN2 should connect to core number 1 from the motor encoder;
core number 2 from the servo drive CN2 should connect to core number 2 from the motor encoder and so on.
Please number the cores from the servo drive in order and then connect it to the encoder.
3-10
Specification and Definition of Absolute Encoder Connector:
Battery Encoder Quick Connector *1

Box
CN2
Connector Female Male
Servo Drive
Motor
Note 1:
Female Male
Housing : AMP(1-172161-9)
1 2 3 3 2 1
White Red Black White
T+ BAT+ Reserved Reserved BAT+ T+
4 5 6 6 5 4
White/Red Black Red/Black White/Red
T- BAT- Reserved Reserved BAT- T-
7 8 9 9 8 7
Brown Blue Blue Brown
Shield Shield
DC+5V GND GND DC+5V
The wire color of the servo drive is for

reference only. Pleas refer to the
actual product.
3-11
Encoder Connection (Diagram 2):
(1) CN2 connector; (2) Military connector (connector of encoder cable)
Note: This diagram shows the connection between the servo drive and the motor encoder. It is not drawn by
the actual scale and specification will be different according to the selected servo drive and motor model.
Please refer to Section 3.5, CN2 Connector.
3-12

ECMA-G△1303S (300 W)
ECMA-E△1305S (500 W)
ECMA-F△1305S (500 W)
ECMA-G△1306S (600 W)
ECMA-F△1308S (850 W)
ECMA-G△1309S (900 W)
ECMA-C△1010S (1000 W)
ECMA-E△1310S (1000 W)
ECMA-F△1313S (1300 W)
ECMA-E△1315S (1500 W) Pin Terminal
Color
No. Identification
ECMA-F△1318S (1800 W)
ECMA-C△1020S (2000 W) A T+ White
ECMA-E△1320S (2000 W) White/
B T-
Red
ECMA-E△1820S (2000 W)
S DC+5V Brown
ECMA-C△13304 (3000 W)
R GND Blue
ECMA-C△1330R8LA (3000 W) BRAID
ECMA-E△1830S (3000 W) L –
SHIELD
ECMA-C△1340RPLA (4000 W)
ECMA-C△1350R8LA (5000 W)
ECMA-F△1830S (3000 W)
ECMA-E△1835S (3500 W)
ECMA-F△1845S (4500 W)
ECMA-F△18553 (5500 W)
ECMA-F△18753 (7500 W)
ECMA-F1221B3 (11 kW)
ECMA-F1221FS (15 kW)
Please select shielded multi-core and the shielded cable should connect to the SHIELD end.
Please refer to the description of Section 3.1.6.
Note:
1. Box, (△) in servo motor model represents encoder type. △= 1: incremental, 20-bit; △= 2: incremental,
17-bit; △ = A: absolute.
3-13
Battery Box
Military *1
CN2
Connector
Connector
Servo Drive
Motor
Note*1
m
w fro
e
Vie is sid
th
Pin
Assignment Color
No.
A M A T+ White
B
C N L B T- White/Red
P T
D K
R S C BAT+ Red
E J
F G H D BAT- Black
S DC+5V Brown
R GND Blue
3106A-20-29S BRAID
L -
Military Connector SHIELD
3-14
3.1.6 Selection of Wiring Rod
The recommended wire rods are shown as the following table.

Power Wiring - Wire Diameter mm2 (AWG)
Servo Drive and corresponding Servo Motor
L1C, L2C R, S, T U, V, W P ,C
ECMA-C1040FS
ASD-A2-0121-
ECMA-C△0401S
ASD-A2-0221- ECMA-C△0602S
ECMA-C△0604S
ECMA-C△0604H
ASD-A2-0421- ECMA-C△08047
1.3 2.1 0.82 2.1
ECMA-E△1305S
(AWG16) (AWG14) (AWG18) (AWG14)
ECMA-G△1303S
ECMA-F△1305S
ECMA-C△0807S
ASD-A2-0721- ECMA-C△0807H
ECMA-C△0907S
ECMA-G△1306S
ECMA-C△0910S
ECMA-C△1010S
ASD-A2-1021- ECMA-E△1310S 1.3 2.1 1.3 2.1
ECMA-F△1308S (AWG16) (AWG14) (AWG16) (AWG14)
ECMA-G△1309S
ASD-A2-1521- ECMA-E△1315S
ECMA-C△1020S 1.3 2.1 2.1 2.1
ECMA-E△1320S (AWG16) (AWG14) (AWG14) (AWG14)
ASD-A2-2023- ECMA-E△1820S
ECMA-F△1313S
ECMA-F△1318S
1.3 2.1 3.3 2.1
ECMA-C△1330S
(AWG16) (AWG14) (AWG12) (AWG14)
ECMA-E△1830S
ASD-A2-3023-
ECMA-E△1835S
ECMA-F△1830S
1.3 3.3 8.4 3.3
ASD-A2-4523- ECMA-F△1845S
(AWG16) (AWG12) (AWG8) (AWG12)
1.3 3.3 13.3 3.3
ASD-A2-5523- ECMA-F△18553
1.3 5.3 13.3 3.3
ASD-A2-7523- ECMA-F△18753
3-15
Power Wiring - Wire Diameter mm2 (AWG)

Servo Drive and corresponding Servo Motor
L1C, L2C R, S, T U, V, W P ,C
1.3 8.4 13.3 8.4
ASD-A2-1B23- ECMA-F1221B3
1.3 13.3 21.2 13.3
ASD-A2-1F23- ECMA-F1221FS
Encoder Wiring - Wire Diameter mm2 (AWG)

Servo Drive Model
Size Number Specification Standard Length
ASD-A2-0121-
ASD-A2-0221-
ASD-A2-0421-
ASD-A2-0721-
ASD-A2-1021-
ASD-A2-1521- L = 3 to 20 m L = 3 to 20 m
(UL2464) (9.84 ft to 65.6 ft)
ASD-A2-2023- Note*8 2C+2P
L = 21 to 50 m L = 21 to 50 m
ASD-A2-3023- (UL20276) (68.9 ft to 164 ft)
ASD-A2-4523-
ASD-A2-5523-
ASD-A2-7523-
ASD-A2-1B23-
ASD-A2-1F23-
Note:
1. Please use shielded twisted-pair cable for encoder wiring so as to reduce the interference of the noise.
2. The shield should connect to the phase of SHIELD.
3. Please follow the Selection of Wire Rod when wiring in order to avoid the danger it may occur.
4. Box, () at the end of the servo drive model represents the model code of ASDA-A2. Please refer to
the model information of the product you purchased.
5. (△), in servo motor model represents encoder type. △= 1: incremental type, 20-bit;
△= 2: incremental type, 17-bit; △ = 3: 2500 ppr; △= A: absolute type.
7. Specification of brake cable F40 to F86: AWG#22; specification of brake cable for F100 or above:
AWG#20.
8. L = 3 - 20 m: 0.324 mm²-2C(AWG22-2C) – for connecting to +5V power and grounding
0.205 mm²-2P(AWG24-2P) – for signal cable
L = 21 - 50 m: 1.31 mm²-2C(AWG16-2C) – for connecting to +5V power and grounding
3-16
3.2 Connections - 400V series
3.2.1 Connecting to Peripheral Devices
Power
750W-15kW Three-phase 380-480V±10%

Electromagnetic contractor (MC) Power
When an alarm occurs, it outputs ALARM

Host controller
signal and disconnect the power of the servo
drive. It can connect to Delta PLC controller or other
brands of NC controllers.
Regenerative resistor (Optional)

Terminal block module
The returned regenerative power
generated when braking may result in
(ASD-BM-50A) (Optional)
recommended. Connect the external Transmit the signal from CN1 50pin
resistor to P and C, and ensure an to the controller via this block
open circuit between P and D. When module.
applying internal resistor, ensure the
the circuit is open between P and C. CN1 I/O
connector
description of section 1.2.2) Use MODBUS communication to
CN2 connector support RS-485/RS232.
CN6 CANopen connector (Optional) (Optional)
CN6: for ASDA-A2-M only. (Please refer to the

description or section 1.2.2)
CN7 extension DI connector (Optional)
CN7: for ASDA-A2-U only. (Please refer to the

description of section 1.2.2) CN4 USB connector (Optional)

Motor power output (U, V, W) via USB cable.
parameter setting and control.
Servo motor
Installation Notes:
1. Check if the power and wiring among R, S, T and DC24V, DC0V are correct.
Please refer to Chapter 11 for Specifications. Make sure the input voltage is correct, or it might damage
the servo drive or danger may occur.
2. Check if the output terminal U, V, W of the servo motor is correctly wired. The incorrect wiring may
disable the operation of the motor or cause the malfunction.
3. When applying to the external regenerative resistor, the contact between P and D should be opened
and the external regenerative resistor should connect to terminal P and C. When applying to the
internal regenerative resistor, the contact between P and D should be closed and the contact between
P and C should be opened.
4. When an alarm occurs or the system is in emergency stop status, use ALARM or WARN to output and
disconnect the power of magnetic contactor in order to disconnect the power of servo drive.
3-17
3.2.2 Connectors and Terminals of the Servo Drive
Terminal Signal Name Description

Connect to single-phase AC power (select the
Power input of the
DC24V, DC0V appropriate voltage specification according to the
control circuit
product )
Connect to three-phase AC power (select the
Power input of the
R, S, T appropriate voltage specification according to the
main circuit
product)
Connect to servo motor
Terminal
Wire Color Description
Symbol
U Red
U, V, W Three-phase main
Motor cable V White power cable of the
FG ( ) motor
W Black
Connect to the
FG( ) Green grounding of the
servo drive.
The contact between P and D end
Internal resistor should be closed; contact between P
and C end should be opened.
Connect P , C ends to the resistor
External
and the contact between P and D
resistor
end should be opened.
Regenerative
resistor terminal or P and P of the brake unit should
P , D, C,
braking unit connect to P and P respectively.
The contact between P and D and
External P and C should be opened.
braking unit P : Connect (+) terminal of V_BUS
voltage.
: Connect to (-) terminal of
V_BUS voltage.
Connect to the ground wire of the power and the servo
Ground terminal
motor.
I/O connector Connect to the host controller. Please refer to Section
CN1 (Optional) 3.4.
Connector Connect to the encoder of the motor. Please refer to
CN2 (Optional) Section 3.5.
Connector Connect to RS-485 or RS-232. Please refer to Section
CN3 (Optional) 3.6.
USB connector Connect to personal computer (PC or NOTEBOOK).
CN4
(Type B) (Optional) Please refer to Section 3.7.
Connector Connect to linear scale or encoder for full-closed loop
CN5 (Optional) and motor feedback. Please refer to Section 3.8.
3-18
Terminal Signal Name Description

CANopen
CN6 connector RJ45 connector. Please refer to Section 3.9
(Optional)
Extension DI
CN7 connector Extension DI connector. Please refer to 3.10.
(Optional)
Reserved
CN8 Reserved.
connector
Communication
CN9 extension port For other expansion cards (coming soon).
(Optional)
Pay special attention to the followings when wiring:
1. When the power is cutoff, do not touch R, S, T and U, V, W since the capacitance inside the
servo drive still contains huge amount of electric charge. Wait until the charging light is off.
2. Separate R, S, T and U, V, W from the other wires. The interval should be at least 30 cm
(11.8 inches).
3. If the wire of encoder CN2 or CN5 connecter is not long enough, please use shielded twisted-
pair cable which cannot exceed 20 meters (65.62 feet). If it exceeds 20 meters, please choose
the bigger wire diameter of signal cable to ensure it will not cause signal fading. As for the
encoder wiring specification of 20-meter-long cable, please use AWG26 of wire size and metal
braided shield twisted-pair cable which complies with the standard of UL2464.
4. When using CANopen, please use the standard shielded twisted-pair cables to ensure the
communication quality.
5. When selecting the wire rod, please refer to Section 3.2.6.
6. Do not install the plug-in capacitance in servo drive. It might burn out the soft-start resistance
and cause danger.
3-19
3.2.3 Wiring Method
The wiring method of 400V servo drive is divided into single-phase and three-phase. In the
diagram below, Power On is contact a, and Power Off and ALRM_RY are contact b. MC is the coil
of magnetic contactor, self-remaining power, and the contact of main power circuit.
 Wiring Method of Three-phase Power Supply (suitable for all series of 400V servo drive)
TSR
MCCB
Power Power
ALRM_RY
MC
SUP
U
V Motor
R Servo Drive
S
T
CN1
DO5+(28)
DC24V ALRM_RY
DC0V DO5-(27)
DC24V
Power
Supply
3-20
3.2.4 Specification of Motor Power Cable
Motor Model U, V, W / Connector of Brake Terminal Definition

ECMA-J△0604S (400 W)
ECMA-J△0807S (750 W)
A
ECMA-J△0907S (750 W)
ECMA-J△0910S (1000 W)
ECMA-J△0604S (400 W)
ECMA-J△0807S (750 W)
B
ECMA-J△0907S (750 W)
ECMA-J△0910S (1000 W)
ECMA-K△1305S (500 W)
ECMA-L△1305S (500 W)
ECMA-L△1308S (850 W)
ECMA-M△1309S (900 W)
ECMA-J△1010S (1000 W)
ECMA-K△1310S (1000 W) C
ECMA-L△1313S (1300 W)
ECMA-K△1315S (1500 W)
ECMA-J△1020S (2000 W)
ECMA-K△1320S (2000 W)
ECMA-J△13304 (3000 W)
ECMA-L△1830S (3000 W)
ECMA-L△1845S (4500 W)
ECMA-L△18553 (5500 W) D
ECMA-L△18753 (7500 W)
ECMA-K△1820S (2000 W)
Wiring U V W CASE GROUND BRAKE1 BRAKE2

Name (Red) (White) (Black) (Yellow/Green) (Note*5) (Note*5)
A 1 2 3 4 - -
B 1 2 4 5 3 6
C F I B E G H
D D E F G A B
When selecting the wire rod, please choose 600VAC PVC cable and the length should not be longer
than 30 m (98.43 feet). If the length exceeds 30 m, please refer to the voltage drop when selecting
the wire size. Please refer to Section 3.1.6 for wire rod selection.
3-21
Note:
1. No polarity for brake coil. The wiring name is BRAKE1 & BRAKE2.
2. Power for brake is DC24 V. Never share it with the power of control signal VDD.
3. Box, (△) in servo motor model represents encoder type. △= 1: incremental, 20-bit;
△= 2: incremental, 17-bit; △= 3: 2500 ppr; △= A: absolute.
5. Color of brake cable F40 to F86: brown and blue; color of brake cable for F100 or above: yellow and
blue.
3-22
3.2.5 Specification of Encoder Connector
(1) CN2 connector; (2) Quick connector (connector of encoder cable)

Note: This diagram shows the connection between the servo drive and the motor encoder. It is not drawn by
the practical scale and specification will be different according to the selected servo drive and motor model.
1. Please refer to the Section of Specification and Definition of Encoder Connector.
2. Please refer to Section 3.5 CN2 Connector.
ECMA-J△0604S (400 W)
ECMA-J△0807S (750 W)
ECMA-J△0907S (750 W)
ECMA-J△0910S (1000 W)
3-23
(1) CN2 connector; (2) Military connector (connector of encoder cable)
Note: This diagram shows the connection between the servo drive and the motor encoder. It is not
drawn by the practical scale and specification will be different according to the selected servo drive
and motor model.
Please refer to Section 3.5, CN2 Connector.

ECMA-K△1305S (500 W)
ECMA-L△1305S (500 W)
Pin Terminal
ECMA-L△1308S (850 W) Color
No. Identification
ECMA-M△1309S (900 W) A T+ White
ECMA-J△1010S (1000 W) White/
B T-
ECMA-K△1310S (1000 W) Red
ECMA-L△1313S (1300 W) S DC+5V Brown
ECMA-K△1315S (1500 W) R GND Blue
ECMA-J△1020S (2000 W) BRAID
L –
SHIELD
ECMA-K△1320S (2000 W)
ECMA-J△13304 (3000 W)
Please select shielded multi-core and the shielded cable should connect to the SHIELD end.
Please refer to the description of Section 3.1.6.
Note:
1. The symbol △ in the servo motor model represents encoder type.
△= 1: incremental, 20-bit; △= 2: incremental, 17-bit; △= 3: 2500 ppr;
△= A: absolute
2. The box  in the servo motor model represents brake or keyway / oil seal.
3-24
3.2.6 Selection of Wiring Rod
The following table lists the recommended wire for connectors and signal wiring for the ASDA-A2
servo drive.
Servo Drive and corresponding Power Wiring - Wire Diameter mm2 (AWG)
Servo Motor DC24V, DC0V R, S, T U, V, W P ,C
ECMA-J△0604S
ECMA-J△0807S
1.3 0.82 0.82 2.1
ASD-A2-0743- ECMA-J△0907S
(AWG16) (AWG18) (AWG18) (AWG14)
ECMA-K△1305S
ECMA-L△1305S
ECMA-J△0910S
ASD-A2-1043- ECMA-K△1310S
ECMA-L△1308S
ECMA-J△1010S
ECMA-K△1315S 1.3 0.82 1.3 2.1
ASD-A2-1543-
ECMA-M△1309S (AWG16) (AWG18) (AWG16) (AWG14)
ECMA-L△1313S
ECMA-J△1020S
ASD-A2-2043- ECMA-K△1320S
ECMA-K△1820S
ECMA-L△1830S 1.3 1.3 1.3 2.1
ASD-A2-3043-
ECMA-J△13304 (AWG16) (AWG16) (AWG16) (AWG14)
ASD-A2-4543- ECMA-L△1845S 1.3 2.1 3.3 3.3

ASD-A2-5543- ECMA-L△18553 (AWG16) (AWG14) (AWG12) (AWG12)
1.3 3.3 5.3 3.3

ASD-A2-7543- ECMA-L△18753
(AWG16) (AWG12) (AWG10) (AWG12)
ECMA-L△18753
1.3 13.3 13.3 10.5
ASD-A2-1B43- ECMA-L△221B3
ECMA-L△221F3
ECMA-L△221B3 1.3 13.3 13.3 10.5
ASD-A2-1F43-
ECMA-L△221F3 (AWG16) (AWG6) (AWG6) (AWG7)
3-25
Encoder Wiring - Wire Diameter mm2 (AWG)

Servo Drive Model
Size Number Specification Standard Length
ASD-A2-0743-
ASD-A2-1043-
ASD-A2-1543-
ASD-A2-2043-
L = 3 to 20 m L = 3 to 20 m
ASD-A2-3043- (UL2464) (9.84 ft to 65.6 ft)
Note*7 2C+2P
ASD-A2-4543- L = 21 to 50 m L = 21 to 50 m
(UL20276) (68.9 ft to 164 ft)
ASD-A2-5543-
ASD-A2-7543-
ASD-A2-1B43-
ASD-A2-1F43-
Note:
1. Box, () at the end of the servo drive model represents the model code of ASDA-A2.
Please refer to the model information of the product you purchased.
2. (△), in servo motor model represents encoder type. △= 1: incremental type, 20-bit;
△= 2: incremental type, 17-bit; △= 3: 2500 ppr; △= A: absolute type.
4. Please use shielded twisted-pair cable for encoder wiring so as to reduce the interference of the noise.
5. The shield should connect to the phase of SHIELD.
6. Please follow the Selection of Wire Rod when wiring in order to avoid the danger it may occur.
7. L = 3 - 20 m: 0.324 mm²-2C(AWG22-2C) – for connecting to +5V power and grounding
L = 21 - 50 m: 1.31 mm²-2C(AWG16-2C) – for connecting to +5V power and grounding

3-26
3.3 Basic Wiring
3.3.1 220V series
 200 W (included) or models below (without built-in regenerative resistor)
Connect to external
Power
1-phase/3-phase
200~230V
P D C Servo Drive
R
Rectifier Circuit
Phase Loss
Detection
Servo
S Regeneration U Motor
T Circuit
V M
Encoder
L1C ±15V
Control Power
+5V
L2C +3.3V
+24V GATE
Protection DRIVE
Circuit
Position Speed Current

External Speed A/D PWM
Control Control Control
External Torque
Position Pulse Current

Digital Input
Signal A/D
Processing
CN1
Encoder Signal
A, B, Z Output Encoder
Signal CN2
Digital Output Processing
Linear Scale
Analog Monitor
Output
Display
A/D DSP CPLD
Data
Serial
Bus MODE SHIFT
Communication CN3 CN5
RS-232/RS-485 Full-Closed
CHARGE SET Loop
USB CN4 USB/UART Extension

CN7
Digital Input
Reserved CN8 CN6 CANopen
CN9 Reserved
3-27
 400 W ~ 4.5 kW models (with built-in regenerative resistor)
Power Connect to external regenerative resistor

400W~1kW single-/3-phase 200~230V
2kW~4.5kW 3-phase 200~230V
P D C Servo drive 750W~4.5kW models
PRB 60W or 120W
+12V
R
Rectifier Circuit
Phase Loss
S
Detection
Servo
U Motor
T
Regeneration
V
Circuit
M
Encoder
L1C ±15V
Control power
+5V
L2C +3.3V
+24V GATE
DRIVE
Protection
Circuit

External speed A/D PWM
control control control
External Torque
Position pulse Current

Digital input
signal A/D
processing
CN1
A,B,Z output Encoder

Digital output
signal CN2
processing
Analog monitor
output
Linear scale
Display
A/D DSP CPLD
Data
Serial
Bus MODE SHIFT
communication CN3 CN5
RS-232/RS-485 Full-closed
CHARGE SET loop

CN7
DI
CN9 Reserved
3-28
 5.5 kW ~ 15 kW models (with built-in fan but no regenerative resistor)
Connect to external
Power 11kW and 15kW models
5.5kW~15kW 3-phase 200~230V do not have D contact
P D C Servo Drive 5.5kW~15kW models
+12V
R
Rectifier Circuit
Phase Loss
Detection
Servo
S U
Regeneration
Motor
T
Circuit
V M
Encoder
L1C ±15V
Control Power
+5V
L2C +3.3V
+24V GATE
Protection DRIVE
Circuit

External Torque

Digital Input
Signal A/D
Processing
CN1
Encoder Signal
Signal CN2
Analog Monitor
Linear Scale
Output
Display
A/D DSP CPLD
Serial Data
Communication Bus MODE SHIFT
CN3 CN5
CHARGE SET Loop

CN7
Digital Input
CN9 Reserved
3-29
3.3.2 400V series
 750 W ~ 1.5 kW models (with built-in regenerative resistor and fan)
Connect to external
Power
_10%
_ 10%, DC24V +
3-phase 380~480V +
P D C Servo Drive 750W and above models
PRB 60W
+12V
R
Rectifier Circuit
Phase Loss
Detection
Servo
S
Regeneration
U Motor
Circuit
T V M
Encoder
DC24V ±15V
Control Power
DC24V
+5V
Power
Supply DC0V +3.3V
+24V GATE
Protection DRIVE
Circuit

External Torque

Signal A/D
Digital Input Processing
CN1
Encoder Signal
Signal CN2
Analog Monitor
Linear Scale
Output
Display
A/D DSP CPLD
Data
Serial
Bus MODE SHIFT
CHARGE SET Loop

CN7
Digital Input
CN9 Reserved
3-30
 2 kW ~ 7.5 kW models (with built-in fan but no regenerative resistor)
Connect to external
Power regenerative resistor
_10%
_ 10%, DC24V +
3-phase 380~480V +
P D C Servo Drive 750W and above models
+12V
R
Rectifier Circuit
Phase Loss
Detection
Servo
S U Motor
Regeneration
T
Circuit
V M
Encoder
DC24V ±15V
Control Power
DC24V
+5V
Power
Supply DC0V +3.3V
+24V GATE
Protection DRIVE
Circuit

External Torque

Signal A/D
Digital Input Processing
CN1
Encoder Signal
Signal CN2
Analog Monitor
Linear Scale
Output
Display
A/D DSP CPLD
Data
Serial
Bus MODE SHIFT
CHARGE SET Loop

CN7
Digital Input
CN9 Reserved
3-31
3.4 I/O Signal (CN1) Connection
3.4.1 I/O Signal (CN1) Connector Terminal Layout
In order to have a more flexible communication with the controller, 5 programmable Digital Outputs
(DO) and 8 programmable Digital Inputs (DI) are provided. The setting of 8 digital inputs and 5
digital outputs of each axis are parameters P2-10 ~ P2-17 and parameters P2-18 ~ P2-22
respectively. In addition, the differential output encoder signal, A+, A-, B+, B-, Z+, and Z-, inputs of
analog torque command, analog speed/position command, and pulse position command are also
provided. The pin diagram is as follows.
25 50
24 49
23 48
22 47
21 46
20 45
19 44
18 43
17 42
16 41
15 40
14 39
13 38
12 37
11 36
35
9 34
8 33
7 32
6 31
5 30
(1) (2) 4
3
29
28
2 27
1 26
(1) CN1 connector (Female); (2) CN1 connector (Male)
3-32
Pin assignment:
1 DO4+ Digital output 26 DO4- Digital output
2 DO3- Digital output 27 DO5- Digital output
3 DO3+ Digital output 28 DO5+ Digital output
4 DO2- Digital output 29 /HPULSE High-speed
5 DO2+ Digital output position pulse 30 DI8- Digital input
(-)
6 DO1- Digital output 31 DI7- Digital input
7 DO1+ Digital output 32 DI6- Digital input
8 DI4- Digital input 33 DI5- Digital input
10 DI2- Digital input 35 PULL Pulse applied
11 COM+ Power input HI_S power (SIGN) 36 SIGN Position sign
(12~24V) (SIGN) (+)
12 GND Analog input 37 /SIGN Position sign
signal ground (-)
13 GND Analog input 38 HPULSE High-speed
14 NC No Connection signal ground 39 PULL Pulse applied position pulse
HI_P Power (+)
15 MON2 Analog (PULSE) (PULSE) 40 /HSIGN High-speed
monitor position sign
16 MON1 Analog 41 /PULSE Pulse input (-)
monitor output 2 (-)
output 1 17 VDD +24V power 42 V_REF Analog speed
18 T_REF Analog torque output (for 43 PULSE Pulse input (+) input (+)
external I/O)
Input
19 GND Analog input 44 GND Analog input
20 VCC +12V power signal ground 45 COM- VDD(24V) signal ground
output power
21 OA Encoder 46 HSIGN High-speed
(for analog ground
command) A pulse position sign
output (+)
22 /OA Encoder 47 COM- VDD(24V)
/A pulse output 23 /OB Encoder /B power 48 OCZ Encoder Z
pulse ground pulse open-
output collector
24 /OZ Encoder /Z 49 COM- VDD(24V) output
pulse power
output 25 OB Encoder B 50 OZ Encoder Z
ground
pulse pulse line-
output driver output
Note: NC means NO CONNECTION. This terminal is for internal use only. Do not connect it, or it may
damage the servo drive.
3-33
3.4.2 Signals Explanation of Connector CN1
The following details the signals listed in the previous section:

General Signals
Wiring
Method
Pin
Signal Function (Refer to
No.
section
3.4.3)
(1) The speed command of the motor is -10V ~
+10V which means the speed command is
-3000 ~ +3000 r/min (default). It can change
V_REF 42 the corresponding range via parameters. C1
Analog (2) The position command of the motor is -10V ~
Command +10V which means the position command is
(input) -3 cycles ~ +3 cycles (default).
The torque command of the motor is -10V ~
T_REF 18 +10V which means the rated torque command of C1
-100 % ~ +100 %.
The operating state of the motor can be shown by
Analog analog voltage, such as speed and current. This
MON1 16
Monitor drive provides two channel outputs. Users can C2
MON2 15 select the desired monitoring data via parameter
(output)
P0-03. This signal is based on the power ground.
Position pulses can be sent by Line Driver
PULSE 43 (single-phase max. frequency 500 kHz) or open-
/PULSE 41 collector (single phase max. frequency 200 kHz).
Position SIGN 36 The command types can be selected with P1-00,
Pulse CW/CCW pulse, pulse and direction, and A/B C3/C4
(input) /SIGN 37 pulse.
PULL HI_P 39 If open collector type is used with sending
PULL HI_S 35 position pulses, CN1 should be connected to an
external applied power for pull high.
HPULSE 38 Position pulses can only be sent by Line Driver

High-speed
29 (single-phase max. frequency 4 MHz). Three
Position /HPULSE
command types are available, CW/CCW pulse, C4-2
Pulse HSIGN 46 pulse with direction, and A/B pulse; please refer
(input) /HSIGN 40 to P1-00.
OA 21
/OA 22
OB 25
Position Encoder signal output A, B, Z (Line Drive output) C13/C14
Pulse /OB 23
(output) OZ 50
/OZ 24
OCZ 48 Encoder signal output Z (Open-collector output) -
VDD is the +24V power provided by the drive and
Power VDD 17 is for Digital Input (DI) and Digital Output (DO) -
signals. The maximum current is 500 mA.
3-34
Wiring
Method
Pin
Signal Function (Refer to
No.
section
3.4.3)
COM+ is the common input of Digital Input (DI)
11 and Digital Output (DO) voltage. When using
COM+ 45 VDD, VDD should be connected to COM+. If not
using, it needs to apply the external power
COM- 47 (+12V ~ + 24V). Its positive end should connect to
49 COM+ and the negative end should connect to
COM-.
VCC is the +12V power provided by the drive. It is
used for providing the simple analog command
VCC 20
(speed or torque command). The maximum
current is 100 mA.
12,13,
GND VCC voltage is based on GND.
19,44
NO CONNECTION. This terminal is for internal
Other NC 14 use only. Do not connect it, or it may damage the
servo drive.
There are numerous operation modes of this servo drive (please refer to section 6.1). Each
operation mode needs different I/O signals. In order to use the terminal in a more efficient way, the
selection of I/O signal has to be programmable. That is to say, users can choose the desired
DI/DO signal to meet the demand. Basically, the default setting of DI/DO signal has already had
the appropriate function which can satisfy the demand of general applications.
Users have to select the operation mode based on the needs first (please refer to section 6.1 for
the introduction of each mode) and refer to the following DI/DO table to know the corresponding
default setting of DI/DO signal and Pin No. of the selected mode in order to conduct the wiring.
The table below lists the default setting of DI/DO signal function and Pin No.:
3-35
The explanation of DO signal default setting is as the followings.
Pin Wiring
Method
DO Signal Operation No.
Details (Refer to
Name Mode
section
+ - 3.4.3)
When the servo drive applies to the power and no
SRDY ALL 7 6 alarm (ALRM) occurs in control circuit and motor
power circuit, this DO is ON.
When the DI.SON is ON and the motor servo
SON N/A - -
circuit can operate smoothly, this DO is ON. C5/C6/
When the motor speed is slower than the setting C7/C8
ZSPD ALL 5 4
value of parameter P1-38, this DO is ON.
When the motor actual speed (r/min) is faster than
TSPD ALL - - the setting value of parameter P1-39, this DO is
ON.
PT, PR,
PT-S, When the deviation between the motor command
TPOS PT-T, 1 26 and actual position (PULSE) is smaller than the
PR-S, setting value of parameter P1-54, this DO is ON.
PR-T
ALL
TQL (except T, - - When torque is limiting, this DO is ON.
Tz)
When the alarm occurs (except forward/reverse
ALRM ALL 28 27 limit, emergency stop, communication error, under
voltage), this DO is ON.
BRKR ALL - - Control contact of brake.
HOME ALL 3 2 When homing is completed, this DO is ON.
OLW ALL - - When the overload level is reached, this DO is ON.
C5/C6/
A warning occurs. C7/C8
WARN ALL - - When it is in the status of forward/reverse limit,
emergency stop, communication error, under
voltage, this DO is ON.
OVF PT, PR - - Position command / feedback overflows
SNL (SCWL) PR - - Reverse software limit
SPL
PR - - Forward software limit
(SCCWL)
The output of internal position command is
Cmd_OK PR - -
completed.
CAP_OK PR - - CAPTURE procedure is completed.
When DO.Cmd_OK and TPOS are ON, this DO is
MC_OK PR - -
ON.
The master position of E-CAM is inside the setting
CAM_AREA PR - -
area.
3-36
Pin Wiring
No. Method
DO Signal Operating
Details (Refer to
Name Mode
+ - section
3.4.3)
When the deviation between the speed command
and the feedback speed of the motor is smaller
S_CMP S, Sz - -
than the setting value of parameter P1-47, this DO
is ON.
SDO_0 ALL - - Output the status of bit00 of P4-06
SDO_A ALL - - Output the status of bit10 of P4-06
SDO_B ALL - - Output the status of bit11 of P4-06
SDO_C ALL - - Output the status of bit12 of P4-06
SDO_D ALL - - Output the status of bit13 of P4-06
SDO_E ALL - - Output the status of bit14 of P4-06
SDO_F ALL - - Output the status of bit15 of P4-06
Note:
1. For example, if the user selects PR mode, Pin 3 and 2 are HOME. If the user selects S mode, Pin 3
and 2 are TSPD.
2. The unlisted Pin No. means the signal is not the preset one. If users want to use it, parameters need to
be changed and set as the desired ones. Please refer to Section 3.4.4 for further details.
The explanation of DI signal default setting is as the followings

Wiring
Method
DI Signal Operation Pin
Function (Refer to
Name Mode No.
section
3.4.3)
When DI is ON, the servo circuit will be activated and the
SON ALL 9
motor coil will generate current.
When the alarm (ALRM) occurs, this signal is used to reset C9/C10/
ARST ALL 33 the servo drive and output the signal, Ready (SRDY), C11/C12
again.
GAINUP ALL - It is for switching the controller gain.
3-37
Wiring
Method
Function (Refer to
Name Mode No.
section
3.4.3)
CCLR PT, PR 10 It is for clearing the deviation counter.
When this DI is ON and the motor speed is slower than the
ZCLAMP ALL - setting of P1-38, the motor position will be locked when the
signal is triggered.
When this DI is ON, the motor will operate in the opposite
CMDINV S, Sz, T -
direction.
PR, In PR mode, the moment CTRG is ON (rising edge), save
CTRG PR-S, 10 the position command selected by POS0 ~ 2 into the
PR-T controller and then trigger the command.
TRQLM S, Sz 10 ON means the torque limit command is effective.
SPDLM T, Tz 10 ON means the speed limit command is effective.
POS0 34 In PR mode, the source of position command:

Position POS POS POS POS POS Corresponding
POS1 8 command 5 4 3 2 1
POS0 CTRG
parameter
P6-00
POS2 - P0 0 0 0 0 0 0
P6-01
POS3 - P6-02
P2 0 0 0 0 0 1
POS4 - P6-03
P,
~ ~
PR-S,
P6-98
PR-T P50 1 1 0 0 1 0
P6-99
P7-00
P51 1 1 0 0 1 1
POS5 - P7-01 C9/C10/
~ ~ C11/C12
P7-26
P63 1 1 1 1 1 1
P7-27
STOP - - Stop
SPD0 34 The source of selecting speed command:

SPD1 SPD0 Command source
S, Sz,
0 0 S mode is analog input; Sz mode is 0
PT-S,
SPD1 PR-S, S-T 8 0 1 P1-09
1 0 P1-10
1 1 P1-11
TCM0 PT, T, Tz, 34 The source of selecting torque command:
3-38
Wiring
Method
Function (Refer to
Name Mode No.
section
3.4.3)
PT-T, TCM1 TCM0 Command source
PR-T, S-T 0 0 T mode is analog input; Tz mode is 0
TCM1 8 0 1 P1-12
1 0 P1-13
1 1 P1-14
PT-S,
S-P 31 Mode switching. OFF: Speed; ON: Position
PR-S
S-T S-T 31 Mode switching. OFF: Speed; ON: Torque
PT-T,
T-P 31 Mode switching. OFF: Torque; ON: Position
PR-T
When selecting PT-PR mode or the multi-mode, PT-PR-S,
users can select the source via this DI. When this DI is
PT-PR PT, PR -
OFF, it is in PT mode. When this DI is ON, it is in PR
mode.
It is contact B and has to be ON frequently; otherwise the
EMGS ALL 30
alarm (ALRM) will occur.
PT, PR, S, Reverse inhibit limit (contact B) and has to be ON
NL(CWL) 32
T, Sz, Tz frequently, or the alarm (ALRM) will occur.
PL PT, PR, S, Forward inhibit limit (contact B) and has to be ON
31
(CCWL) T, Sz, Tz frequently, or the alarm (ALRM) will occur.
ORGP PR - When this DI is ON, the drive will start homing.

In PR mode, it needs to search the origin. When this DI is
SHOM PR - ON, the origin searching function is activated. (Please refer
to the setting of parameter P1-47.)
E-cam engaging control (please refer to the setting of
CAM PR -
values U and Z of P5-88.)
When this DI is ON, the motor JOG operates in forward
JOGU ALL -
direction.
When this DI is ON, the motor JOG operates in reverse
JOGD ALL -
direction.
EV1 PR - Event trigger PR command
PT, PR,
PT-S, Electronic gear ratio (numerator) selection 0 (Please refer
GNUM0 -
to P2-60 ~ P2-62 for gear ratio selection (numerator).)
PR-S
3-39
Wiring
Method
Function (Refer to
Name Mode No.
section
3.4.3)
PT, PR,
PT-S, Electronic gear ratio (numerator) selection 1 (Please refer
GNUM1 -
to P2-60 ~ P2-62 for gear ratio selection (numerator).)
PR-S
Pulse input is prohibited. In position mode, when this DI is
INHP PT, PT-S -
ON, the external pulse input command is not working.
The default setting of DI and DO in each operation mode is shown as the followings. Please note
that the following tables neither detail the information as the previous one nor show the Pin number
of each signal. However, each operation mode is separated in different columns in order to avoid
the confusion.
Table 3.1 Default Value of DI Input Function
DI PT- PT- PR- PR-
Symbol Input Function PT PR S T Sz Tz S-T
Code S T S T
SON 0x01 Servo On DI1 DI1 DI1 DI1 DI1 DI1 DI1 DI1 DI1 DI1 DI1
ARST 0x02 Alarm Reset DI5 DI5 DI5 DI5 DI5 DI5
GAINUP 0x03 Gain switch

CCLR 0x04 Pulse clear DI2 DI2 DI2
ZCLAMP 0x05 Zero speed CLAMP

The input command will
CMDINV 0x06
be in reverse direction.
Reserved 0x07 Reserved
Internal position
CTRG 0x08 DI2 DI2 DI2
command triggered
TRQLM 0x09 Torque limit DI2 DI2
SPDLM 0x10 Speed limit DI2 DI2

Internal position
POS0 0x11 DI3 DI3 DI3
command selection 0
Internal position
POS1 0x12 DI4 DI4 DI4
command selection 1
Internal position
POS2 0x13
command selection 2
Internal position
POS3 0x1A
command selection 3
Internal position
POS4 0x1B
command selection 4
Internal position
POS5 0x1C
command selection 5
3-40
DI PT- PT- PR- PR-

Code S T S T
STOP 0x46 Motor stops
Speed command
SPD0 0x14 DI3 DI3 DI3 DI5 DI3
selection 0
Speed command
SPD1 0x15 DI4 DI4 DI4 DI6 DI4
selection 1
Torque command
TCM0 0x16 DI3 DI3 DI3 DI3 DI5 DI5
selection 0
Torque command
TCM1 0x17 DI4 DI4 DI4 DI4 DI6 DI6
selection 1
Mode switch between
S-P 0x18 speed and position DI7 DI7
command
Mode switch between
S-T 0x19 speed and torque DI7
command
Mode switch between
T-P 0x20 torque and position DI7 DI7
command
Switch between PT
PT-PR 0x2B
and PR command
EMGS 0x21 Emergency stop DI8 DI8 DI8 DI8 DI8 DI8 DI8 DI8 DI8 DI8 DI8
NL(CWL) 0x22 Reverse inhibit limit DI6 DI6 DI6 DI6 DI6 DI6
PL(CCWL) 0x23 Forward inhibit limit DI7 DI7 DI7 DI7 DI7 DI7
Original point of
ORGP 0x24
homing
SHOM 0x27 Homing is activated
CAM 0x36 E-Cam engaged
JOGU 0x37 Forward JOG input
JOGD 0x38 Reverse JOG input
Event trigger PR
command #1(refer to
EV1 0x39
the setting of P5-98,
P5-99)
Event trigger PR
command #2 (refer to
EV2 0x3A
the setting of P5-98,
P5-99)
Event trigger PR
command #3 firmware
EV3 0x3B
V1.008 sub04 will be
provided afterwards)
EV4 0x3C Event trigger PR

command #4 (firmware
3-41
DI PT- PT- PR- PR-

Code S T S T
V1.008 sub04 will be
provided afterwards)
Electronic gear ratio
GNUM0 0x43
(numerator) selection 0
Electronic gear ratio
GNUM1 0x44
(numerator) selection 1
INHP 0x45 Pulse input inhibit
Note: refer to section 3.4.1 for corresponding pins of DI1 ~ 8.
Table 3.2 Default Value of DO Output Function

DO PT- PT- PR- PR-
Symbol Output Function PT PR S T Sz Tz S-T
Code S T S T
SRDY 0x01 Servo is ready DO1 DO1 DO1 DO1 DO1 DO1 DO1 DO1 DO1 DO1 DO1
SON 0x02 Servo is On

ZSPD 0x03 Zero-speed reached DO2 DO2 DO2 DO2 DO2 DO2 DO2 DO2 DO2 DO2 DO2
Reach the target
TSPD 0x04 DO3 DO3 DO3 DO3 DO3 DO3 DO3 DO3 DO3
speed
Reach the target
TPOS 0x05 DO4 DO4 DO4 DO4 DO4 DO4
position
TQL 0x06 Torque limit
ALRM 0x07 Servo alarm DO5 DO5 DO5 DO5 DO5 DO5 DO5 DO5 DO5 DO5 DO5
BRKR 0x08 Brake DO4 DO4 DO4 DO4
HOME 0x09 Homing complete DO3 DO3

Early warning for
OLW 0x10
overload
WARN 0x11 Servo warning
Position command /
OVF 0x12
feedback overflows
SNL
0x13 Reverse software limit
(SCWL)
SPL
0x14 Forward software limit
(SCCWL)
Internal position
Cmd_OK 0x15 command is
completed
Capture procedure is
CAP_OK 0x16
completed
Servo procedure is
MC_OK 0x17
completed
3-42
DO PT- PT- PR- PR-

Symbol Output Function PT PR S T Sz Tz S-T
Code S T S T
Master position area
CAM_AREA 0x18
of E-CAM
SP_OK 0x19 Target speed reached
Output the status of
SDO_0 0x30
bit00 of P4-06
SDO_1 0x31
bit01 of P4-06
SDO_2 0x32
bit02 of P4-06
SDO_3 0x33
bit03 of P4-06
SDO_4 0x34
bit04 of P4-06
SDO_5 0x35
bit05 of P4-06
SDO_6 0x36
bit06 of P4-06
SDO_7 0x37
bit07 of P4-06
SDO_8 0x38
bit08 of P4-06
SDO_9 0x39
bit09 of P4-06
SDO_A 0x3A
bit10 of P4-06
SDO_B 0x3B
bit11 of P4-06
SDO_C 0x3C
bit12 of P4-06
SDO_D 0x3D
bit13 of P4-06
SDO_E 0x3E
bit14 of P4-06
SDO_F 0x3F
bit15 of P4-06
Note: refer to section 3.4.1 for corresponding pins of DO1 ~ 5.
3-43
3.4.3 Wiring Diagrams (CN1)
The valid voltage of speed analog command and torque analog command is between -10V and
+10V. The command value can be set via relevant parameters. The input impedance is 10 k.
C1: Speed, Input of Torque Analog Command
Controller Servo drive
10kΩ
42 V-REF
10kΩ (18 T-REF )
10V
about 10kΩ
10V
13 GND
SG
C2: Analog Monitor Output MON1, MON2
Servo drive Controller

Max. +
_ 8V
Output 1mA
24kΩ
MON1 16 8kΩ
(MON2 15)
8V
Full scale
GND 13
SG
3-44
Pulse command can be input by the way of open-collector or Line driver. The maximum input pulse
of Line driver is 500 kpps and 200 kpps for open-collector.
C3-1: The source of pulse input is open-collector NPN equipment which applies the internal
power of the servo drive.
Controller Servo Drive
DC24V
VDD 17
Pull-hi_S 35
Approx.
1KΩ
The max. input pulse
frequency is 200 kpps
51Ω
/SIGN 37 51Ω
Approx.
1KΩ
51Ω
/PULSE 41 51Ω
45
COM-
SG
C3-2: The source of pulse input is open-collector PNP equipment which applies the internal
power of the servo drive.
DC24V
VDD 17
51Ω
PULSE 43
1KΩ*
/PULSE 41 51Ω

SIGN 36 51Ω
1KΩ*
/SIGN 37 51Ω
SG
COM- 45
Note: Resistor of 1 kΩ (1 w) has to be connected.
3-45
 Caution: Do not apply to dual power or it may damage the servo drive.
C3-3: The source of pulse input is open-collector NPN equipment and applies the external
power.
Pull-hi_S 35
+ Approx.
DC24V 1KΩ The max. input pulse
- frequency is 200 kpps
51Ω
/SIGN 37 51Ω
Approx. The max. input pulse

1KΩ frequency is 200 kpps
51Ω
/PULSE 41 51Ω
SG
C3-4: The source of pulse input is open-collector PNP equipment and applies the external
power.
+
24V The max. input pulse
- frequency is 200 kpps
51Ω
PULSE 43
1KΩ*
/PULSE 41 51Ω

SIGN 36 51Ω
1KΩ*
/SIGN 37 51Ω
SG
Note: Resistor of 1 kΩ (1 w) has to be connected.
3-46
C4-1: Pulse input (Line driver) can only apply to 5V power. Do not apply to 24V power.
Max. input pulse

SIGN 36 51Ω
/SIGN 37 51Ω
Max. input pulse

PULSE 43 51Ω
/PULSE 41 51Ω
SG
 This opto-isolator is one-way input. Please be ensured the direction of

current of pulse input is correct.
C4-2: High-speed pulse input (Line driver) can only apply to 5V power.
Do not apply to 24V power.
HSIGN 46 2KΩ
100Ω
/HSIGN 40 2KΩ
HPULSE 38 2KΩ
100Ω
/HPULSE 29 2KΩ
SG
13
GND GND
 The high-speed pulse input interface of the servo drive is not the isolated
interface. In order to reduce the interference of the noise, it is suggested
that the terminal ground of the controller and the servo drive should be
connected to each other.
3-47
When the drive connects to inductive load, the diode has to be installed. (The permissible current
is under 40 mA. The surge current is under 100 mA; the maximum voltage is 30V.)
C5: Wiring of DO signal. The servo drive applies to the internal power and the resistor is
general load.
Servo Drive
DC24V
VDD
DOX: (DOX+,DOX-)
17
X=1,2,3,4,5
R
DO1: (7,6)
DO2: (5,4)
DOX+
DO3: (3,2)
DO4: (1,26)
DO5: (28,27)
DOX-
COM-
45
C6: Wiring of DO signal. The servo drive applies to the internal power and the resistor is
inductive load.
Servo Drive
Ensure the polarity
(+, -) of Diode is
DC24V correct or it may
damage the drive.
VDD
DOX: (DOX+,DOX-)
17
X=1,2,3,4,5
DO1: (7,6)
DO2: (5,4)
DO3: (3,2) DOX+
DO4: (1,26)
DO5: (28,27)
DOX-
COM-
45
3-48
C7: Wiring of DO signal. The servo drive applies to the external power and the resistor is
general load.
Servo Drive
DOX: (DOX+,DOX-) Do not connect

X=1,2,3,4,5 VDD and COM+
R
DO1: (7,6) DC24V
DO2: (5,4)
DOX+
DO3: (3,2)
DO4: (1,26)
DO5: (28,27) DOX-
C8: Wiring of DO signal. The servo drive applies to the external power and the resistor is
inductive load.
Servo Drive Do not connect

VDD and COM+
DOX: (DOX+,DOX-) Ensure the polarity (+, -)
X=1,2,3,4,5 of Diode is correct or it
may damage the drive.
DO1: (7,6) DC24V

DO2: (5,4)
DOX+
DO3: (3,2)
DO4: (1,26)
DO5: (28,27)
DOX-
3-49
DI wiring — Input signals by relay or open-collector transistor.

Conditions of DI On/Off:
ON: 15V – 24V; condition: input current = 3 mA.
OFF: 5V or below; input current must not be higher than 0.5 mA.
NPN transistor, common emitter (E) mode (SINK mode)
C9: The wiring of DI. The servo drive applies to C10: The wiring of DI. The servo drive
the internal power. applies to the external power.
Servo Drive
DC24V Servo Drive
VDD
Approx.
COM+ 4.7KΩ
Approx.
4.7KΩ COM+
Approx.
C 4.7KΩ
B
E DC24V
SON SON
COM-
PNP transistor, common emitter (E) mode (SOURCE mode)
C11: The wiring of DI. The servo drive applies C12: The wiring of DI. The servo drive applies
to the internal power. to the external power.
Servo Drive
DC24V Servo Drive

VDD
SON SON
DC24V
Approx.
4.7KΩ
Approx. COM+
4.7KΩ
R
E Approx.
B COM+ 4.7KΩ
C
COM-
3-50
C13: Encoder signal output (Line driver)
Servo Drive Max. output

Controller
current is 20mA
AM26CS31 Type
OA 21
/OA 22
125Ω
OB 25
/OB 23
125Ω
OZ 50
/OZ 24
125Ω
SG
C14: Encoder signal output (Opto-isolator)
Servo Drive Max. output

Controller
current is 20mA
AM26CS31 Type
OA 21
200Ω
/OA 22
High speed
photocoupler
OB 25
200Ω
/OB 23
High speed
photocoupler
OZ 50
200Ω
/OZ 24
High speed
photocoupler
SG
3-51
C15: Encoder OCZ output (open-collector Z pulse output)
24V
Servo Drive
Max. Spec.
30V
100mA
OCZ48
GND 13
3-52
3.4.4 DI and DO Signal Specified by Users
If the default setting of DI/DO signal cannot satisfy the need, self-set the DI/DO signal will do and
be easy. The signal function of DI1 ~ 8, DI9 ~ DI13, and DO1 ~ 5 is determined by parameters
P2-10 ~ P2-17 and parameters P2-18 ~ P2-22 respectively. Please refer to section 8.2, which is
shown as the following tables. Enter the DI or DO code in the corresponding parameter to set the
DI/DO function.
Corresponding Corresponding
Signal Name Pin No. Signal Name Pin No.
Parameter Parameter
DI1- CN1-9 P2-10 DO1+ CN1-7
P2-18
DI2- CN1-10 P2-11 DO1- CN1-6
DI3- CN1-34 P2-12 DO2+ CN1-5
P2-19
Standard DI4- CN1-8 P2-13 DO2- CN1-4
DI DI5- CN1-33 P2-14 Standard DO3+ CN1-3
P2-20
DI6- CN1-32 P2-15 DO DO3- CN1-2
DI7- CN1-31 P2-16 DO4+ CN1-1
P2-21
DI8- CN1-30 P2-17 DO4- CN1-26
EDI9 CN7-2 P2-36 DO5+ CN1-28
P2-22
EDI10 CN7-3 P2-37 DO5- CN1-27
Extension
EDI11 CN7-4 P2-38
DI
EDI12 CN7-5 P2-39
(optional)
EDI13 CN7-6 P2-40
EDI14 CN7-7 P2-41
3.4.5 Application: Using CN1 Quick Connector for Wiring
The CN1 quick connector (ASD-IF-SC5020) is designed for easy wiring. It is applicable to ASDA-
A2 and ASDA-A2R series servo drive and can satisfy the demand of different DI/O application. It
will be a good choice for those who do not want to solder the wires by themselves. The spring
terminal blocks prevent vibration from loosening the wires. It is rather convenient and fast when
wiring. 5 digital inputs, 4 digital outputs, pulse command inputs, and Z phase open-collector
outputs are included.
Pin definition is as the following:
J2 J1
3-53
J1 CN_GND
52
51
J2
25 50
PULL_HI_PS 11 10 DO2+ 24 49
23 48 OCZ
/ PULSE 12 9 DO1+
22 47 COM-
PULSE 13 8 DI7- 21 46
20 45 COM-
/ SIGN 14 7 DI4-
GND 19 44 GND
SIGN 15 6 DI3- 18 43 PULSE
VDD 17 42
OCZ 16 5 DI2-
16 41 /PULSE
GND 17 4 DI1- 15 40
14 39
DO4+ 18 3 COM-
GND 13 38
DO3+ 19 2 COM+ GND 12 37 /SIGN
COM+ 11 36 SIGN
CN_GND 20 1 VDD
DI2- 10 PULL_HI_PS
35
DI1- 9 DI3-
34
DI4- 8
33
DO1+ 7
32
COM- 6
31 DI7-
DO2+ 5
30
COM- 4
29
3
DO3+ 28
COM- 2
27
1
DO4+ 26 COM-
J2 J1
PIN Description PIN Description
1 VDD 17 VDD
2 COM+ 11 COM+
3 COM- 2, 4, 6, 26, 45, 47 COM-
4 DI1- 9 DI1-
5 DI2- 10 DI2-
6 DI3- 34 DI3-
7 DI4- 8 DI4-
8 DI7- 31 DI7-
9 DO1+ 7 DO1+
10 DO2+ 5 DO2+
11 PULL_HI_PS 35 PULL_HI_PS
12 /PULSE 41 /PULSE
13 PULSE 43 PULSE
14 /SIGN 37 /SIGN
15 SIGN 36 SIGN
16 OCZ 48 OCZ
17 GND 12, 13, 19, 44 GND
18 DO4+ 1 DO4+
19 DO3+ 3 DO3+
20 CN_GND 51, 52 CN_GND
3-54
Wiring example:
PULL_HI_PS Internal Wiring DO2+
DC24V
/PULSE DO1+
External
PULSE DI7- power
Pulse Input supply
(Line Driver) /SIGN DI4-
SIGN Max. output DI3-

current 3A
voltage 50V
OCZ DI2-
Z phase Open
Collector Signal GND DI1-
DO4+ COM-
Internal
power DO3+ COM+
supply Shield CN_GND 24V VDD
cable
Internal Wiring PLC Example

Sink mode
PULL_HI_PS DO2+ X1
/PULSE DO1+ X0
PULSE DI7-
S/S
Open Collector
Pulse Input /SIGN DI4-
24G
SIGN
Max. 200 kHz DI3-
+24V
OCZ DI2-
GND DI1-
DO4+ COM-
DO3+ COM+
Shield CN_GND 24V VDD

cable
3-55
Wiring and installation of CN1 quick connector:

Installation
3-56
Wiring
(1) The CN1 quick connector has multiple spring

terminals. Please determine which terminal is
to be wired in advance.
(2) Use a flathead screwdriver to press the spring

down to open the pin.
(3) Insert the stripped wire into the pin.
(4) Withdraw the screwdriver to complete the

wiring.
3-57
3.5 CN2 Connector
The terminal block of the connector and pin number are as follows:
CN2 connector ends:
3-58
The definition of each signal is as follows:

Drive Connector Encoder Connector
Terminal Military Quick

Pin No. Function and Description Color
Symbol Connector Connector
Serial communication signal

5 T+ A 1 Blue
input / output (+)

4 T- B 4 Blue & Black
input / output (-)
Red / Red &

14, 16 +5V +5V power supply S 7
White
Black / Black
13, 15 GND Power ground R 8
& White
Shell Shielding Shielding L 9 -
Voltage of the battery is 3.6V
7 BAT+ (Applicable to encoder cable C 2 Green
with battery box)
Ground cable of the battery
9 BAT- (Applicable to encoder cable D 5 Black
with battery box)
About shielding and ground

The two sides of CN2 encoder cable are CN2 connector and encoder connector. Shielding and
ground conductor should be correctly connected to the corresponding pins so as to effectively
shield and ground.
The shielding procedures of CN2 encoder connector are as followings:
(1) Cut through the cable and expose the

core wire which covers the metal core
wires with shielding. The reserved core
wire length should be 20 - 30 mm
(0.79 - 1.18 inches). Then, cover a
45 mm (1.77 inches) heat shrink tube
on the cable.
(2) Spread the metal core wires with

shielding and turn it upside down in
downward direction. Ensure to follow
the above table of CN2 Terminal Signal
Identification to connect the pins one by
one.
3-59
(3) Leave a length of 5 - 10 mm

(0.2 - 0.39 inches) metal core wires with
shielding outside of the cable. The
length is about the width of the metal
saddle. The other unexposed wires of
the cable should be protected by heat
shrink tube for good ground contact.
(4) Install a metal saddle to fix the exposed

metal core wires. The metal saddle
must completely cover all the exposed
metal core wires. The extended sheet
metal should be connected to the metal
part of the connector.
(5) Install the connector with shielding into

the plastic case as shown in the figure.
(6) Tighten the screws to complete a

shielded CN2 connector.
3-60
3.6 Wiring of CN3 Connector
3.6.1 Layout of CN3 Connector
The servo drive connects to the personal computer via communication connector. The user can
operate the servo drive, PLC, or HMI through MODBUS using the assembly language. There are
two commonly used communication interfaces, RS-232 and RS-485. Both can be set via
parameter P3-05. RS-232 is more commonly used which communication distance is about 15
meter (49.21 feet). If the user selects RS-485, its transmission distance is longer and supports
connecting more than one servo drives simultaneously.
Pin No. Signal Name Terminal Symbol Function and Description
1 Grounding GND +5V connects to the signal terminal

RS-232 data The drive transmits the data
2 RS-232_TX
transmission The connector connects to RS-232 of PC
3 - - Reserved
RS-232 data The drive receives the data
4 RS-232_RX
receiving The connector connects to RS-232 of PC
RS-485 data The drive transmits the data to
5 RS-485(+)
transmission differential terminal (+)
RS-485 data The drive transmits the data to
6 RS-485(-)
transmission differential terminal (-)
Note:
1. Please refer to page 9-2 for the wiring of RS-485.
2. Two kinds of communication wire of IEEE1394 are commercially available. One of the internal ground
terminals (Pin 1) will short-circuit the shielding and damage the drive. Do not connect GND to the
shielding.
3-61
3.6.2 Connection between PC and Connector CN3
1
6
2 5 1 6 5
7
3 2 2 4 3
8
4 3 4 2 1
9
5
Drive
PC or Notebook CN3
3-62
3.7 CN4 Serial Connector (USB)
CN4 is a serial connector which is used to connect PC software and increase the efficiency.
The transmission speed of USB can be up to 1 MB, that is to say, PC Data Scope can obtain the
correct data in real time.
Pin No. Signal Name Function and Description
1 V bus DC +5V (external power supply)

2 D- Data-
3 D+ Data+
4 GND Ground
3-63
3.8 CN5 Connector (Full-closed loop)
Connect to the external linear scale or encoder (A, B, Z) and form a full-closed loop with the servo.
In position mode, the pulse position command issued by the controller is based on the control loop
of the external linear scale. Please refer to Chapter 6.
Terminal
Symbol
1 /Z phase input Opt_/Z Linear scale /Z phase output
2 /B phase input Opt_/B Linear scale /B phase output
3 B phase input Opt_B Linear scale B phase output
4 A phase input Opt_A Linear scale A phase output
5 /A phase input Opt_/A Linear scale /A phase output
6 Encoder grounding GND Ground
7 Encoder grounding GND Ground
8 Encoder power +5V Linear scale +5V power
9 Z phase input Opt_Z Linear scale Z phase output
Note:
1. It only supports AB phase signal and the encoder of 5V, 300 mA.
2. Application of full-closed loop: It supports the encoder with the highest resolution,
1280000 pulse/rev (Full-closed loop corresponds to the resolution of quadruple frequency when motor
runs a cycle.).
3-64
3.9 CN6 Connector (CANopen)
3.9.1 CANopen communication
Based on the standard of CANopen DS301 and DS402, CN6 uses the standard CAN interface to
implement position, torque, and speed mode. It also can read or monitor the drive status.
The station number of CANopen is the same as RS-232 / RS-485. All are set via parameter P3-00
and the transmission rate can be up to 1 Mbps. It provides two sets of communication ports for
connecting multiple drives. Put the terminal resistor in the last servo drive.
Note: CANopen is supported by A2-M and A2-MN only.

1, 9 CAN_H CAN_H bus line (dominant high)
2, 10 CAN_L CAN_H bus line (dominant low)
3, 11 CAN_GND Ground / 0V / V -
4, 12 - Reserved
5, 13 - Reserved
6, 14 - Reserved
7, 15 CAN_GND Ground / 0V / V -
8, 16 - Reserved
3-65
Note:
1. It is suggested to use a terminal resistor of 120Ω (Ohm) and 0.25 W or above.
2. The wiring method of concatenating more than one drives is based on two ports of CANopen. One is for
receiving and another one is for transmission. Put the terminal resistor in the last servo drive.
3-66
3.9.2 DMCNET communication
The CN6 connector is a standard RJ45 connector with shielded cable. You can use it to connect to
the host controller or motion control card. With Delta’s DMCNET system, you can control position,
torque, and speed, and access or monitor the servo status.
You can set the station number of DMCNET, as well as RS-232 / RS-485, with P3-00. Its
maximum transmission rate is 20 Mbps. Two ports are provided for connecting multiple servo
drives, with one way in and the other way out. Please put the terminal resister (120Ω) in both ends
of the equipment.
Note: DMCNET is supported by A2-F and A2-FN only.

1, 9 DMCNET_1A DMCNET Channel 1 bus line (+)
2, 10 DMCNET_1B DMCNET Channel 1 bus line (-)
3, 11 DMCNET_2A DMCNET Channel 2 bus line (+)
4, 12
- Reserved
5, 13
6, 14 DMCNET_2B DMCNET Channel 2 bus line (-)
7, 15
- Reserved
8, 16
3-67
3-68
3.10 Expansion Digital Input Connector of CN7
The A2 series servo drive provides single-axis point-to-point controls with up to 64 points. When
using the external DI to perform point-to-point motion controls and the internal DI (8 sets) are all
occupied, you can use this optional expansion DI (6 sets) to meet the requirements. You must use
the internal DI (8 sets) and the expansion DI (6 sets) to select the positioning point.
Terminal
Pin No. Signal Name Function Description
Symbol
VDD (24V) power supply, same as Pin 11 of
*1 VDD 24V power COM+
CN1
2 Extension DI9 EDI 9- Digital input DI9-
 *1 Caution: Do not use dual power supply or it might damage the servo drive.
3-69
3.11 CN8 Connector of Battery Box
CN8 connector on servo drive is the power supply for absolute battery box. Please refer to Chapter
12 for further information.
Pin definition:
Pin No. Connector1 Connector2
1 BAT+ BAT+
2 BAT- BAT-
Note: Due to the different design of servo drive model, CN8 might have one or two connectors, which
however has the same pin definition.
3-70
3.12 Standard Connection Example – 220V series

3.12.1 Position (PT) Control Mode
Servo Drive
MCCB ASDA-A2 series
MC
AC 200/230 V R ＊4
P⊕
Three-phase＊8 S Regenerative
50/60Hz D Resistor
T
C
Red
U
L1c White Power Supply
V
L2c Black
W
CN1 Green 24V EMGS BRKR Brake
＊5
/SIGN 37
CN2 Encoder
SIGN 36
Pulse Input 5 T+ Blue
(Line Driver)＊1 /PULSE 41
10KΩ 4 T- Blue/Black
PULSE 43
7 - -
±10V 10KΩ T-REF 18
10KΩ 9 - -
GND 13 SG Twisted-pair or
14,16 +5V Red/Red & White
twisted-shield
/HSIGN 40
13,15 GND Black/Black&White cable
High-speed HSIGN 46
Pulse Input ＊2 CN3
/HPULSE 29
(Line Receiver) 6 RS485-
HPULSE 38
5 RS485+
MON1 16
Twisted-pair or 10KΩ 4 RS232_RX
twisted-shield 10KΩ GND 12,13,19
DC 24V 3 -
cable MON2 15
SG 2 RS232_TX
VDD 17
1 GND
COM+ 11
CN7
COM- 45,47,49 ＊3
1 COM+ ＊6
SON DI1 9 4.7KΩ
4.7KΩ
CCLR 2 EDI9-
DI2 10
4.7KΩ
4.7KΩ
3 EDI10-
TCM0 DI3 34
4.7KΩ
4.7KΩ
4 EDI11-
TCM1
4.7KΩ
DI4 8 4.7KΩ
4.7KΩ 5 EDI12-
ARST DI5 33
6 EDI13-
4.7KΩ
4.7KΩ
NL DI6 32
7 EDI14-
4.7KΩ
4.7KΩ
PL DI7 31
4.7KΩ
CN4
EMGS DI8 30
1 +5V DC ＊7
Please note:
DO1+ 7
SRDY
1.5KΩ 2 Data- *1 Please refer to C3 ~ C4 wiring
DO1- 6
3 Data+ diagrams in section 3.4.3.
DO2+ 5
ZSPD
1.5KΩ 4 GND
DO2- 4 *2 Please refer to C3 ~ C4 wiring
24V CN5
DO3+ 3 diagrams in section 3.4.3.
HOME
1.5KΩ 8 +5V
DO3- 2 *3 Please refer to C9 ~ C12 wiring
4 Opt A
DO4+ 1 diagrams (SINK / SOURCE mode)
TPOS
1.5KΩ 5 Opt /A
DO4- 26 in section 3.4.3.
3 Opt B
DO5+ 28 *4 400 W and below drives do not
ALRM 1.5KΩ 2 Opt /B
DO5- 27 provide built-in regenerative
9 Opt Z
OA 21 resistor.
A phase pulse 1 Opt /Z
/OA 22 *5 The coil of brake has no polarity.
6 GND
OB 25 *6 For expansion digital inputs (DI)
B phase pulse 7 GND
/OB 23
Encoder CN6 CANopen connections (CN7 is an optional
Pulse OZ 50
Z phase pulse 1,9 CAN H part, not Delta standard supplied
Output /OZ 24
2,10 CAN L part.).
3,11 CAN GND *7 For USB connection. It is used to
Z phase open OCZ 48
collector
4,12 - connect to personal computer or
GND 13
5,13 - notebook.
Max. output
current: 50mA 6,14 - *8 Single -phase connections are for
voltage: 30V 7,15 CAN GND servo drives 1.5 kW and below
8,16 - only.
3-71
3.12.2 Position (PR) Control Mode
Servo Drive
MCCB ASDA-A2 series
MC
AC 200/230 V R ＊2
P
Three-phase ＊6 S Regenerative
50/60Hz D
T Resistor
C
Red
U
V
L2c Black
W
Green 24V EMGS BRKR
＊3 Brake
CN2 Encoder
5 T+ Blue
4 T- Blue/Black
7 - -
9 - -
Red/ SG Twisted-pair or
14,16 +5V Red & White twisted-shield
Black/
10KΩ 13,15 GND cable
CN1 Black & White
CN3
±10V 10KΩ T-REF 18
10KΩ 6 RS485-
GND 13
5 RS485+
MON1 16
twisted-shield 10KΩ GND 12,13,19
DC 24V 3 -
cable MON2 15
SG 2 RS232_TX
VDD 17
1 GND
COM+ 11
CN7
COM- 45,47,49 ＊1 ＊4
1 COM+
SON DI1 9 4.7KΩ
4.7KΩ
2 EDI9-
CTRG DI2 10
4.7KΩ
4.7KΩ
3 EDI10-
POS0 DI3 34
4.7KΩ
4.7KΩ
4 EDI11-
POS1 DI4 8
4.7KΩ
4.7KΩ
4.7KΩ 5 EDI12-
ARST DI5 33
6 EDI13-
4.7KΩ
4.7KΩ
NL DI6 32
7 EDI14-
4.7KΩ
4.7KΩ
PL DI7 31
4.7KΩ
CN4
EMGS DI8 30
1 +5V DC ＊5
DO1+ 7
SRDY
1.5KΩ 2 Data-
DO1- 6
3 Data+
DO2+ 5
ZSPD
1.5KΩ 4 GND
24V DO2- 4 Please note:
CN5
DO3+ 3 *1 Please refer to C9 ~ C12 wiring
HOME
1.5KΩ 8 +5V
DO3- 2 diagrams (SINK / SOURCE mode)
4 Opt A
DO4+ 1 in section 3.4.3.
TPOS
1.5KΩ 5 Opt /A
DO4- 26 *2 400 W and below drives do not
3 Opt B
DO5+ 28
ALRM 1.5KΩ 2 Opt /B provide built-in regenerative
DO5- 27
9 Opt Z resistor.
OA 21
A phase pulse 1 Opt /Z *3 The coil of brake has no polarity.
/OA 22
6 GND *4 For expansion digital inputs (DI)
OB 25
B phase pulse 7 GND connections (CN7 is an optional
/OB 23
Encoder CN6 CANopen part, not Delta standard supplied
Pulse OZ 50
Z phase pulse 1,9 CAN H part.).
Output /OZ 24
2,10 CAN L *5 For USB connection. It is used to
3,11 CAN GND connect to personal computer or
Z phase open OCZ 48
4,12 - notebook.
collector GND 13
5,13 -
*6 Single -phase connections are for
Max. output 6,14 -
current 50mA servo drives 1.5 kW and below
voltage 30V 7,15 CAN GND
only.
8,16 -
3-72
3.12.3 Speed Control Mode
Servo Drive
MCCB ASDA-A2 series
MC
AC 200/230 V R ＊2
P
Three-phase＊6 S Regenerative
50/60Hz D Resistor
T
C
Red
U
V
L2c Black
W
Green 24V EMGS BRKR Brake
＊3
CN2 Encoder
5 T+ Blue
4 T- Blue/Black
7 - -
10KΩ 9 - -
CN1 Red/ SG Twisted-pair or
±10V 10KΩ V-REF 42 Black/
10KΩ 13,15 GND Black & White
cable
GND 44 10KΩ
CN3
±10V 10KΩ T-REF 18
10KΩ 6 RS485-
GND 13
5 RS485+
MON1 16
twisted-shield GND 12,13,19
cable
10KΩ DC 24V 3 -
MON2 15
SG 2 RS232_TX
VDD 17
1 GND
COM+ 11
CN7
COM- 45,47,49 ＊1 ＊4
1 COM+
SON DI1 9 4.7KΩ
4.7KΩ
2 EDI9-
TRQLM DI2 10
4.7KΩ
4.7KΩ
3 EDI10-
SPD0 DI3 34
4.7KΩ
4.7KΩ
4 EDI11-
SPD1 DI4 8
4.7KΩ
4.7KΩ
4.7KΩ 5 EDI12-
ARST DI5 33
6 EDI13-
4.7KΩ
4.7KΩ
CWL DI6 32
7 EDI14-
4.7KΩ
4.7KΩ
CCWL DI7 31
4.7KΩ
CN4
EMGS DI8 30
1 +5V DC ＊5
DO1+ 7
SRDY
1.5KΩ 2 Data-
DO1- 6
3 Data+
DO2+ 5
ZSPD
1.5KΩ 4 GND
24V DO2- 4
CN5
DO3+ 3
TSPD
1.5KΩ 8 +5V Please note:
DO3- 2
4 Opt A *1 Please refer to C9 ~ C12 wiring
DO4+ 1
BRKR
1.5KΩ 5 Opt /A diagrams (SINK / SOURCE mode)
DO4- 26
3 Opt B in section 3.4.3.
DO5+ 28
ALRM 1.5KΩ 2 Opt /B *2 400 W and below drives do not
DO5- 27
9 Opt Z provide built-in regenerative
OA 21
/OA 22 resistor.
6 GND *3 The coil of brake has no polarity.
B phase pulse
OB 25
7 GND *4 For expansion digital inputs (DI)
Encoder /OB 23
CN6 CANopen connections (CN7 is an optional
Pulse
Z phase pulse
OZ 50
Output 1,9 CAN H
/OZ 24 part, not Delta standard supplied
2,10 CAN L
part.).
3,11 CAN GND
Z phase open OCZ 48 *5 For USB connection. It is used to
collector 4,12 -
GND 13 connect to personal computer or
5,13 -
Max. output notebook.
6,14 -
current 50mA *6 Single -phase connections are for
8,16 - servo drives 1.5 kW and below
only.
3-73
3.12.4 Torque Control Mode
Servo Drive
MCCB ASDA-A2 series
MC
AC 200/230 V R ＊2
P
Three-phase ＊6 S Regenerative
50/60Hz D Resistor
T
C
Red
U
V
L2c Black
W
Green 24V EMGS BRKR
＊3
Brake
CN2 Encoder
5 T+ Blue
4 T- Blue/Black
7 - -
10KΩ 9 - -
CN1 Red/ SG Twisted-pair or
10KΩ 13,15 GND Black & White
cable
GND 44 10KΩ
CN3
±10V 10KΩ T-REF 18
10KΩ 6 RS485-
GND 13
5 RS485+
MON1 16
cable
10KΩ DC 24V 3 -
MON2 15
SG 2 RS232_TX
VDD 17
1 GND
COM+ 11
CN7
COM- 45,47,49 ＊1
1 COM+ ＊4
SON DI1 9 4.7KΩ
4.7KΩ
2 EDI9-
SPDLM DI2 10
4.7KΩ
4.7KΩ
3 EDI10-
TCM0 DI3 34
4.7KΩ
4.7KΩ
4 EDI11-
TCM1 DI4 8
4.7KΩ
4.7KΩ
4.7KΩ 5 EDI12-
ARST DI5 33
6 EDI13-
4.7KΩ
4.7KΩ
CWL DI6 32
7 EDI14-
4.7KΩ
4.7KΩ
CCWL DI7 31
4.7KΩ
CN4
EMGS DI8 30
1 +5V DC ＊5
DO1+ 7
SRDY
1.5KΩ 2 Data-
DO1- 6
3 Data+
DO2+ 5
ZSPD
1.5KΩ 4 GND
24V DO2- 4
CN5
DO3+ 3
TSPD
1.5KΩ 8 +5V
DO3- 2 Please note:
4 Opt A
DO4+ 1 *1 Please refer to C9 ~ C12 wiring
BRKR
1.5KΩ 5 Opt /A
DO4- 26 diagrams (SINK / SOURCE mode) in
3 Opt B
DO5+ 28 section 3.4.3.
DO5- 27 *2 400 W and below drives do not
9 Opt Z
OA 21 provide built-in regenerative resistor.
/OA 22 *3 The coil of brake has no polarity.
6 GND
OB 25 *4 For expansion digital inputs (DI)
B phase pulse 7 GND
Encoder /OB 23 connections (CN7 is an optional part,
CN6 CANopen
Pulse OZ 50
Output Z phase pulse 1,9 CAN H not Delta standard supplied part.).
/OZ 24
2,10 CAN L *5 For USB connection. It is used to
3,11 CAN GND connect to personal computer or
Z phase open OCZ 48
collector
4,12 - notebook.
GND 13
5,13 - *6 Single -phase connections are for
Max. output 6,14 -
current 50mA
servo drives 1.5 kW and below only.
8,16 -
3-74
3.12.5 Communication Mode
Servo Drive
MCCB ASDA-A2 series
MC
AC 200/230 V R ＊2
P⊕
3-phase＊5 S Regenerative
50/60Hz D Resistor
T
C
Red
U
L1c White Power supply
V
L2c Black
W
Green
24V EMGS BRKR Brake
＊3
CN2 Encoder
5 T+ Blue
DC 24V
CN1 4 T- Blue/Black
Twisted-pair or
VDD 17 7 - - twisted-shield
COM+ 11 9 - - cable
COM- 45,47,49 ＊1 14,16 +5V
Red/Red& SG
White
Reserved DI1 9 4.7KΩ
13,15 GND
Black/
Black&white
Reserved DI2 10
4.7KΩ
Reserved DI3 34
4.7KΩ CN4
1 +5V DC ＊4
Reserved DI4 8
4.7KΩ
ORGP DI5 33
4.7KΩ
2 Data-
NL DI6 32
4.7KΩ
3 Data+
PL DI7 31
4.7KΩ
4 GND
4.7KΩ
EMGS DI8 30 CN5

DO1+ 7 8 +5V
SRDY
1.5KΩ
DO1- 6 4 Opt A
DO2+ 5 5 Opt /A
ZSPD
1.5KΩ
DO2- 4 3 Opt B
24V
DO3+ 3 2 Opt /B
HOME
1.5KΩ
DO3- 2 9 Opt Z
DO4+ 1 1 Opt /Z
TPOS
1.5KΩ
DO4- 26 6 GND
DO5+ 28 7 GND
ALRM 1.5KΩ
DO5- 27
A phase
OA 21
differential signal /OA 22 CN6 CANopen (for ASDA-A2-M) CN6 DMCNET (for ASDA-A2-F)
B phase OB 25 1 CAN H 1 DMCNET_1A
differential signal /OB 23
Encoder
2 CAN L 2 DMCNET_1B
pulse Z phase OZ 50 3 CAN GND 3 DMCNET_2A
output differential signal /OZ 24 4 - 4 -
Data input Data input
5 - 5 -
Z phase signal OCZ 48 6 - 6 DMCNET_2B
(open-collector) GND 13 7 CAN GND 7 -
Max. output
8 - 8 -
current: 50mA
voltage: 30V
9 CAN H 9 DMCNET_1A
CN3 10 CAN L 10 DMCNET_1B
RS485- 6 11 CAN GND 11 DMCNET_2A
RS485+ 5 12 - 12 -
Data output
RS232_RX 4 13 - 13 - Data output
- 3 14 - 14 DMCNET_2B
RS232_TX 2 15 CAN GND 15 -
GND 1 16 - 16 -
Please note:
*1 Please refer to C9 ~ C12 wiring
diagrams (SINK / SOURCE mode) in
section 3.4.4.
*2 400 W and below drives do not provide
built-in regenerative resistor.
*3 The coil of brake has no polarity.
*4 For USB connection. It is used to
connect to personal computer or
notebook.
*5 Single -phase connections are for
servo drives 1.5 kW and below only.
*6 A2-F only supports DMCNET mode.
3-75
3.13 Standard Connection Example – 400V series

Servo Drive
MCCB ASDA-A2 series
MC
R ＊4
AC 380/480 V P⊕
Three-phase S Regenerative
D Resistor
T
C
Red
DC 24V U
24V White Power Supply
Power V
Supply 0V Black
W
＊5
/SIGN 37
CN2 Encoder
Pulse Input SIGN 36
(Line Driver)＊1 5 T+ Blue
/PULSE 41
10KΩ 4 T- Blue/Black
PULSE 43
7 - -
±10V 10KΩ T-REF 18
10KΩ 9 - -
GND 13 SG Twisted-pair or
14,16 +5V Red/Red&White
twisted-shield
/HSIGN 40 cable
13,15 GND Black/Black&White
High-speed HSIGN 46
Pulse Input ＊2 CN3
(Line Receiver) /HPULSE 29
6 RS485-
HPULSE 38
5 RS485+
MON1 16
cable 10KΩ DC 24V 3 -
MON2 15
SG 2 RS232_TX
VDD 17
1 GND
COM+ 11
CN7
COM- 45,47,49 ＊3
1 COM+
＊6
SON DI1 9 4.7KΩ
4.7KΩ
CCLR 2 EDI9-
DI2 10
4.7KΩ
4.7KΩ
3 EDI10-
TCM0 DI3 34
4.7KΩ
4.7KΩ
4 EDI11-
TCM1
4.7KΩ
DI4 8 4.7KΩ
4.7KΩ 5 EDI12-
ARST DI5 33
6 EDI13-
4.7KΩ
4.7KΩ
NL DI6 32
7 EDI14-
4.7KΩ
4.7KΩ
PL DI7 31
4.7KΩ
CN4
EMGS DI8 30
1 +5V DC ＊7
DO1+ 7
SRDY
1.5KΩ 2 Data-
DO1- 6
3 Data+
DO2+ 5
ZSPD
1.5KΩ 4 GND
24V DO2- 4
CN5
DO3+ 3
HOME
1.5KΩ 8 +5V
DO3- 2
4 Opt A
DO4+ 1
TPOS
1.5KΩ 5 Opt /A
DO4- 26
3 Opt B Please note:
DO5+ 28
ALRM 1.5KΩ 2 Opt /B *1 Please refer to C3 ~ C4 wiring
DO5- 27
9 Opt Z diagrams in section 3.4.3.
OA 21
A phase pulse 1 Opt /Z *2 Please refer to C3 ~ C4 wiring
/OA 22
6 GND diagrams in section 3.4.3.
OB 25
B phase pulse 7 GND *3 Please refer to C9 ~ C12 wiring
Encoder /OB 23
Pulse CN6 CANopen diagrams (SINK / SOURCE mode) in
Output
OZ 50
Z phase pulse 1,9 CAN H section 3.4.3.
/OZ 24
2,10 CAN L *4 4.5 kW and below drives provide
3,11 CAN GND
Z phase open OCZ 48 built-in regenerative resistor.
4,12 -
collector GND 13 *5 The coil of brake has no polarity.
5,13 -
Max. output *6 For expansion digital inputs (DI)
6,14 -
current 50mA connections (CN7 is an optional part,
not Delta standard supplied part.).
8,16 -
notebook.
3-76
Servo Drive
MCCB ASDA-A2 series
MC
R ＊2
AC 380/480 V P⊕
D Resistor
T
C
Red
DC 24V U
Power V
Supply 0V Black
W
＊3
CN2 Encoder
5 T+ Blue
4 T- Blue/Black
7 - -
9 - -
SG Twisted-pair or
14,16 +5V Red/Red&White
twisted-shield
10KΩ 13,15 GND Black/Black&White cable
CN1
CN3
±10V 10KΩ T-REF 18
10KΩ 6 RS485-
GND 13
5 RS485+
MON1 16
MON2 15
SG 2 RS232_TX
VDD 17
1 GND
COM+ 11
CN7
COM- 45,47,49 ＊1
＊4
1 COM+
SON DI1 9 4.7KΩ
4.7KΩ
2 EDI9-
CTRG DI2 10
4.7KΩ
4.7KΩ
3 EDI10-
POS0 DI3 34
4.7KΩ
4.7KΩ
4.7KΩ 4 EDI11-
POS1 DI4 8 4.7KΩ
4.7KΩ 5 EDI12-
ARST DI5 33
6 EDI13-
4.7KΩ
4.7KΩ
NL DI6 32
7 EDI14-
4.7KΩ
4.7KΩ
PL DI7 31
4.7KΩ
CN4
EMGS DI8 30 ＊5
1 +5V DC
DO1+ 7
SRDY
1.5KΩ 2 Data-
DO1- 6
3 Data+
DO2+ 5
ZSPD
1.5KΩ 4 GND
24V DO2- 4
CN5
DO3+ 3
HOME
1.5KΩ 8 +5V
DO3- 2
4 Opt A
DO4+ 1
TPOS
1.5KΩ 5 Opt /A
DO4- 26
3 Opt B
DO5+ 28
DO5- 27
9 Opt Z
OA 21
/OA 22
6 GND
OB 25
B phase pulse 7 GND Please note:
Encoder /OB 23
CN6 CANopen *1 Please refers to C9 ~ C12 wiring
Pulse OZ 50
Output Z phase pulse 1,9 CAN H diagrams (SINK / SOURCE mode) in
/OZ 24
2,10 CAN L section 3.4.3.
3,11 CAN GND *2 4.5 kW and below drives provide
Z phase open OCZ 48
collector
4,12 - built-in regenerative resistor.
GND 13
5,13 - *3 The coil of brake has no polarity.
Max. output
6,14 - *4 For expansion digital inputs (DI)
current 50mA
voltage 30V 7,15 CAN GND connections (CN7 is an optional part,
8,16 - not Delta standard supplied part.).
notebook.
3-77
Servo Drive
MCCB ASDA-A2 series
MC
R ＊2
AC 380/480 V P⊕
D Resistor
T
C
Red
DC 24V U
Power V
Supply 0V Black
W
＊3
CN2 Encoder
5 T+ Blue
4 T- Blue/Black
7 - -
9 - -
CN1 10KΩ
SG Twisted-pair or
14,16 +5V Red/Red & White
twisted-shield
±10V 10KΩ V-REF 42 cable
10KΩ 13,15 GND Black/Black&White
GND 44 10KΩ
CN3
±10V 10KΩ T-REF 18
10KΩ 6 RS485-
GND 13
5 RS485+
Twisted-pair or 10KΩ MON1 16
4 RS232_RX
MON2 15
SG 2 RS232_TX
VDD 17
1 GND
COM+ 11
CN7
COM- 45,47,49 ＊1 ＊4
1 COM+
SON DI1 9 4.7KΩ
4.7KΩ
TRQLM 2 EDI9-
DI2 10
4.7KΩ
4.7KΩ
3 EDI10-
SPD0 DI3 34
4.7KΩ
4.7KΩ
4 EDI11-
SPD1
4.7KΩ
DI4 8 4.7KΩ
4.7KΩ 5 EDI12-
ARST DI5 33
6 EDI13-
4.7KΩ
4.7KΩ
CWL DI6 32
7 EDI14-
4.7KΩ
4.7KΩ
CCWL DI7 31
4.7KΩ
CN4
EMGS DI8 30
1 +5V DC ＊5
DO1+ 7
SRDY
1.5KΩ 2 Data-
DO1- 6
3 Data+
DO2+ 5
ZSPD
1.5KΩ 4 GND
24V DO2- 4
CN5
DO3+ 3
TSPD
1.5KΩ 8 +5V
DO3- 2
4 Opt A
DO4+ 1
BRKR
1.5KΩ 5 Opt /A
DO4- 26
3 Opt B
DO5+ 28
DO5- 27
9 Opt Z
A phase pulse
OA 21
1 Opt /Z
/OA 22 Please note:
6 GND
B phase pulse OB 25 *1 Please refers to C9 ~ C12 wiring
7 GND
Encoder /OB 23
CN6 CANopen diagrams (SINK / SOURCE mode) in
Pulse
Z phase pulse OZ 50
Output 1,9 CAN H section 3.4.3.
/OZ 24
3,11 CAN GND built-in regenerative resistor.
Z phase open OCZ 48
collector 4,12 - *3 The coil of brake has no polarity.
GND 13
Max. output
6,14 - connections (CN7 is an optional part,
current 50mA
voltage 30V 7,15 CAN GND not Delta standard supplied part.).
8,16 - *5 For USB connection. It is used to
notebook.
3-78
Servo Drive
MCCB ASDA-A2 series
MC
R ＊2
AC 380/480 V P⊕
D Resistor
T
C
Red
DC 24V U
Power V
Supply 0V Black
W
＊3
CN2 Encoder
5 T+ Blue
4 T- Blue/Black
7 - -
9 - -
CN1 10KΩ
SG Twisted-pair or
14,16 +5V Red/Red&White twisted-shield
±10V 10KΩ V-REF 42 cable
10KΩ 13,15 GND Black/Black&White
GND 44 10KΩ
CN3
±10V 10KΩ T-REF 18
10KΩ 6 RS485-
GND 13
5 RS485+
Twisted-pair or 10KΩ
MON1 16
4 RS232_RX
MON2 15
SG 2 RS232_TX
VDD 17
1 GND
COM+ 11
CN7
COM- 45,47,49 ＊1
1 COM+ ＊4
SON DI1 9 4.7KΩ
4.7KΩ
SPDLM 2 EDI9-
DI2 10
4.7KΩ
4.7KΩ
3 EDI10-
TCM0 DI3 34
4.7KΩ
4.7KΩ
4 EDI11-
TCM1
4.7KΩ
DI4 8 4.7KΩ
4.7KΩ 5 EDI12-
ARST DI5 33
6 EDI13-
4.7KΩ
4.7KΩ
CWL DI6 32
7 EDI14-
4.7KΩ
4.7KΩ
CCWL DI7 31
4.7KΩ
CN4
EMGS DI8 30
1 +5V DC ＊5
DO1+ 7
SRDY
1.5KΩ 2 Data-
DO1- 6
3 Data+
DO2+ 5
ZSPD
1.5KΩ 4 GND
24V DO2- 4
CN5
DO3+ 3
TSPD
1.5KΩ 8 +5V
DO3- 2
4 Opt A
DO4+ 1
BRKR
1.5KΩ 5 Opt /A
DO4- 26
3 Opt B
DO5+ 28
DO5- 27
9 Opt Z
OA 21
/OA 22
6 GND Please note:
OB 25
B phase pulse 7 GND *1 Please refer to C9 ~ C12 wiring
Encoder /OB 23
CN6 CANopen diagrams (SINK / SOURCE mode) in
Pulse OZ 50
Output Z phase pulse 1,9 CAN H section 3.4.3.
/OZ 24
3,11 CAN GND built-in regenerative resistor.
Z phase open OCZ 48
collector
4,12 - *3 The coil of brake has no polarity.
GND 13
Max. output
6,14 - connections (CN7 is an optional part,
current 50mA
Voltage 30V 7,15 CAN GND
not Delta standard supplied part.).
8,16 -
notebook.
3-79
Servo Drive
MCCB ASDA-A2 series
MC
R ＊2
AC 380/480 V P⊕
3-phase S Regenerative
D resistor
T
C
Red
DC 24V U
24V White Power supply
Power V
Supply 0V Black
W
＊3
CN2 Encoder
5 T+ Blue
DC 24V
CN1 4 T- Blue/
Black Twisted-pair or
VDD 17 7 - - twisted-shield
COM+ 11 cable
9 - -
COM- 45,47,49 ＊1 14,16 +5V
Red/Red& SG
White
Reserved DI1 9 4.7KΩ
13,15 GND
Black/
Black&White
Reserved DI2 10
4.7KΩ
Reserved DI3 34
4.7KΩ CN4
1 +5V DC ＊4
Reserved DI4 8
4.7KΩ
ORGP DI5 33
4.7KΩ
2 Data-
NL DI6 32
4.7KΩ
3 Data+
PL DI7 31
4.7KΩ
4 GND
4.7KΩ
EMGS DI8 30 CN5

DO1+ 7 8 +5V
SRDY
1.5KΩ
DO1- 6 4 Opt A
DO2+ 5 5 Opt /A
ZSPD
1.5KΩ
DO2- 4 3 Opt B
24V DO3+ 3 2 Opt /B
HOME
1.5KΩ
DO3- 2 9 Opt Z
DO4+ 1 1 Opt /Z
TPOS
1.5KΩ
DO4- 26 6 GND
DO5+ 28 7 GND
ALRM 1.5KΩ
DO5- 27
A phase OA 21
differential signal CN6 CANopen (for ASDA-A2-M) CN6 DMCNET (for ASDA-A2-F)
/OA 22
OB 25 1 CAN H 1 DMCNET_1A
B phase
differential signal /OB 23 2 CAN L 2 DMCNET_1B
Encoder 3 CAN GND 3
OZ 50 DMCNET_2A
pulse Z phase
output differential signal /OZ 24 4 - 4 -
Data input Data input
5 - 5 -
OCZ 48 6 - 6 DMCNET_2B
Z phase signal
(open-collector) GND 13 7 CAN GND 7 -
8 - 8 -
Max. output
current: 3A
voltage: 50V
9 CAN H 9 DMCNET_1A
10 CAN L 10 DMCNET_1B
CN3
11 CAN GND 11 DMCNET_2A
RS485- 6
12 - 12 -
RS485+ 5 Data output
13 - 13 - Data output
RS232_RX 4
14 - 14 DMCNET_2B
- 3
15 CAN GND 15 -
RS232_TX 2
16 - 16 -
GND 1
Please note:
*1 Please refer to C9 ~ C12 wiring diagrams
(SINK / SOURCE mode) in section 3.4.4.
*2 4.5 kW and below drives provide built-in
regenerative resistor.
*3 The coil of brake has no polarity.
*4 For USB connection. It is used to connect to
personal computer or notebook.
*5 A2-F only supports DMCNET mode.
3-80
3.14 Differences between A2-XN and A2 Series Servo Drives

The hardware connection structure of A2-XN series (X represents L, M, F, and N) is very similar to
that of the A2 series. The following section illustrates their differences in detail.
3.14.1 Connecting to Peripheral Devices (A2-EN model as an example)
Power
100W-1.5kW Single/Three-phase 200-230V

2kW-15kW Three-phase 200-230V

Electromagnetic contractor (MC) Host controller
When an alarm occurs, it outputs ALARM It can connect to Delta PLC controller or other
signal and disconnect the power of the servo brands of NC controllers.
drive.
*The power connector

varies from models of
Regenerative resistor (Optional) different watt. Please
refer to the actual
The returned regenerative power purchased product.
generated when braking may result in
recommended. Connect the external
Terminal block module
resistor to P and C, and ensure an
open circuit between P and D. When
(ASD-MDSC2626)
applying internal resistor, ensure the (Optional)
the circuit is open between P and C.
Transmit the signal from
CN1 I/O CN1 26pin to the controller
connector via this block module.
description of section 1.2.2)
CN7 extension DI connector (Optional) CN2 connector
(Please refer to the description of section 1.2.2

CN6 communication
for supporting series.)
connector
Connect to the controller or more than
one drive.
Absolute
battery
Motor power output (U, V, W) box CN4 USB connector (Optional)

via USB cable.
parameter setting, and control.
Servo motor
3-81
3.14.2 Connectors of A2-XN Servo Drives
Signal Name Description

CN-STO CN-STO STO connector; please refer to Section 3.14.9.
3.14.3 CN1 I/O 50-pin Connector (applicable to -LN series and 4.5 kW ~ 7.5 kW
models of -FN and -MN series)
Delta provides 8 user-defined digital input (DI) points and 5 digital output (DO) points to provide
highly flexible communication between the servo drive and the controller. The corresponding
parameters for the 8 DI points and 5 DO points are P2-10 ~ P2-17 and P2-18 ~ P2-22. In addition,
differential type output signals for encoder A+, A-, B+, B-, Z+, and Z-, as well as the analog torque
command input and analog speed / position command input, and pulse position command input
are provided. The pin assignments are shown as follows.
3-82
Pin assignment:
Digital Digital
1 DO4+ 26 DO4-
output output
Digital Digital
2 DO3- 27 DO5-
output output
Digital Digital
3 DO3+ 28 DO5+
output High speed output
Digital position
4 DO2- 29 /HPULSE command
output
Digital
5 DO2+ pulse (－) 30 DI8- Digital input
output
Digital Digital
6 DO1- 31 DI7- input
output
Digital
7 DO1+ 32 DI6- Digital input
output Digital
Digital
8 DI4- 33 DI5- input
input
PULL External
Digital power input
10 DI2- 35 HI_S
input Power input of Sign Position
11 COM+ (Sign) pulse 36 SIGN
(12~24V) sign (＋)
Analog input
Position
12 GND signal 37 /SIGN
GND for sign ( - ) High speed
ground
13 GND analog input 38 HPULSE position
signal PULL External pulse (＋)
14 NC Not in use 39 HI_P power input
Analog (Pulse) of pulse High speed
15 MON2 monitor 40 /HSIGN position
Analog output 2 Position sign (－)
16 MON1 monitor 41 /PULSE
pulse (－)
output 1 +24V Analog
Power command
17 VDD output (for 42 V_REF input speed
Analog Position
external
18 T_REF command 43 PULSE (＋)
I/O) pulse (＋)
input torque
Analog
Analog input
+12V Power 19 GND input signal 44 GND
VDD (24V) signal
output (for ground
20 VCC 45 COM- power ground
analog
ground
command) High speed
Encoder position
Encoder 21 OA A pulse 46 HSIGN command
VDD (24V)
22 /OA output 47 COM- power sign (＋)
/A pulse
output ground
Encoder Encoder Z
pulse open-
Encoder /Z 23 /OB /B pulse 48 OCZ
VDD (24V) collector
24 /OZ pulse output 49 COM- power output
output ground
Encoder Encoder Z
pulse line-
25 OB B pulse 50 OZ
driver
output output
Note: NC represents “No connection”, which is for internal use only. Do not connect to NC or it may damage
the servo drive.
3-83
3.14.4 CN1 I/O 26-pin Connector (applicable to -EN series and 3 kW models or
below of -FN and -MN Series)
Delta provides 7 user-defined digital input (DI) points and 4 digital output (DO) points to provide
highly flexible communication between the servo drive and the controller. The corresponding
parameters for the 7 DI points and 4 DO points are P2-10 ~ P2-16 and P2-18 ~ P2-21. In addition,
differential type output signals for encoder A+, A-, B+, B-, Z+, and Z- are provided. The pin
assignments are shown as follows.
Digital VDD
1 DO1+ 14 COM-
output ground
Digital
2 DO1- 15 NC Not in use
output Analog
Digital
3 DO2+ 16 GND input signal
output Encoder
Digital ground
4 DO2- 17 OA A pulse
output Encoder
+24 Power output
5 VDD 18 /OA /A pulse
output Encoder
Power input output
6 COM+ 19 OB B pulse
(12 ~ 24V) Encoder
Digital output
7 DI1- 20 /OB /B pulse
input Encoder
output
8 DI2- Digital input 21 OZ Z pulse
output Encoder
Digital
9 DI3- 22 /OZ /Z pulse
input
Digital output
10 DI4- Digital input 23 DO4+
output
Digital Digital
11 DI5- 24 DO4- output
input
Digital
12 DI6- Digital input Digital 25 DO3+ Digital
13 DI7- output 26 DO3-
input output
Note: NC represents “No connection”, which is for internal use only. Do not connect to NC or it may
damage the servo drive.
3-84
3.14.5 CN3 Communication Connector (applicable to -LN series and 4.5 kW ~ 7.5
kW models of -FN and -MN series)
When the servo drive is connected to the PC via CN3, you can operate the servo drive, PLC, or
HMI through MODBUS using the assembly language. The CN3 connector supports the
communication interfaces RS-485 and enables you to connect to multiple servo drives
simultaneously. You can also set P3-05 to transmit data at a longer distance.
Pin No. Name Signal Function

1 Signal ground GND +5V and signal terminal GND
2 - - Reserved
3 - - Reserved
4 - - Reserved
RS-485 data The servo drive transmits the data to
5 RS-485(+)
transmission differential terminal (+)
RS-485 data The servo drive transmits the data to
6 RS-485(-)
transmission differential terminal (-)
Note:
1. Please refer to page 9-2 for RS-485 wiring.
2. There are two types of IEEE1394 communication cables commercially available, one is that the internal
ground (Pin 1) is short-circuited with the shielding; if this type of connector would damage the
communication cable, do not short-circuit the ground on the communication cable with the terminal case.
3-85
3.14.6 EtherCAT Communication Connector (applicable to -EN models)
A2-XN provides two ports (input and output) for servo drives connected in series.
(1) CN6 connector (Female); (2) CN6 connector (Male) (a) Network status indicator
CN6 pin assignment:
Pin No. Name Signal Function

1 TX + TX + Transmit +
2 TX - TX - Transmit -
3 RX + RX + Receive +
4 - - -
5 - - -
6 RX - RX - Receive -
7 - - -
8 - - -
CN6 indicator:
 Network status indicator

Indicator
Definition Description
Status
Connection is established without data
On Connecting
transmission
Connected and data
Blink Data transmission in progress
transmission in progress
Off No connection Connection is not established
3-86
 EtherCAT connection status indicator (RUN)

Indicator
Status
After powering on, the EtherCAT device is
initialized and the communication is not
Off Initial
established, but the controller can still access
the register of the device.
Transmitting SDO, TxPDO, and RxPDO data
On Operational
packets is allowed.
The controller can exchange data through
Blinking Pre-Operational
Mailbox.
Single The device can use SDO and TxPDO data
Safe-Operational
Flash packets to exchange data with the controller.
 EtherCAT error indicator (ERR)

Indicator
Status
Off No error No error.
Device malfunction; please contact your
On PDI Watchdog timeout
distributor.
State switching error caused by wrong
Blinking State change error parameter setting.
Please refer to the diagram below.
Single Synchronization error / Synchronization failure of the controller and
Flash SyncManager error device or data is lost during data receiving.
Init
(IP) (PI)
Pre-Operational (SI)
(OI) (PS) (SP)
(OP) Safe-Operational
(SO) (OS)
Operational
Status switch diagram
3-87
Connect to multiple servo drives:
Note:
1. When connecting multiple servo drives in serial, the maximum distance between each servo drive is
50 m (164.04 feet).
2. Please use CAT5e STP shielded cable.
3. Beckhoff cable is recommended (model type: ZB9020).
3-88
3.14.7 CN-STO (Safe Torque Off)
(1) CN-STO connector (Female); (2) CN-STO connector (Male)
Note: STO certification application is in progress.
Pin No Signal Function

VDD(24V) power, which is identical to Pin 5 on
*1 COM+
CN1
2 STO_A STO input A+
3 /STO_A STO input A-
4 STO_B STO input B+
5 /STO_B STO input B-
STO alarm output A, Relay output, N.C.
6 FDBK_A Max. current: 30 VDC, 1 A
125 VAC, 0.3 A
STO alarm output B, Relay output, N.C.
7 FDBK_B Max. current: 30 VDC, 1 A
125 VAC, 0.3 A
8 COM- VDD(24V) power ground
* Caution: Do not use dual power supply or it might damage the servo drive.
3-89
3.14.8 How does the STO Function Work?
The STO function is controlled by the motor current from two individual circuits. It cuts off the
power supply to the motor when needed, after which the motor is free from torque force. The table
below details how this function works.
Actions description (ON = 24V; OFF = 0V)
Note: STO certification application is in progress.
Signal Channel Status of opto-isolator

STO_A
ON ON OFF OFF
~ / STO_A
STO
STO_B
ON OFF ON OFF
~ / STO_B
Servo Drive Output Torque off Torque off Torque off

Ready
Status (STO_B lost) (STO_A lost) (STO Mode)
(1) Description of the STO alarm:

See the diagram below. When the motor runs normally (Servo On), but both STO_A and STO_B
signals are lost for 10 ms at the same time, AL500 occurs and the drive is in the Servo Off state.
10 ms
STO_A
H L
STO_B
H L
S_ON
ON OFF
Servo
status Servo on Servo off & AL500
3-90
When the motor runs normally (Servo On), but one of the safety signal source is lost for 1 s, AL501
or AL502 occurs. Then the servo drive is in the Servo Off state.
1s
STO_A
H L
H
STO_B
L
S_ON
ON OFF
Servo
status Servo on Servo off & AL501
3.14.9 Related Parameter of the STO Function
By setting parameter P2-93, you can determine the FDBK status (Pin FDBK+ and FDBK-) and
whether FDBK latches if an STO alarm occurs. The settings for P2-93 are shown as below:
P2-93= XX 1 0
(1) (2) (3)
(1) Not in use

(2) 1: FDBK no latch
2: FDBK latch
(3) 0: Logic A
1: Logic B
2: Logic C
3: Logic D
3-91
STO function description:

See the table below. Four logic conditions (Logic A, B, C, and D) are available to standardize the
FDBK status when different STO alarms occur. You can select the corresponding logic according
to the needs of the application. In this table, “Open” means FDBK+ and FDBK- of CN8 are an open
circuit. Take Logic C as an example. When AL500 occurs, FDBK+ and FDBK- of CN8 are short-
circuited.
FDBK status
Servo drive status
Logic A Logic B Logic C Logic D
Parameter P2-93 XX10 XX20 XX11 XX21 XX12 XX22 XX13 XX23
No No No No
FDBK behavior Latch Latch Latch Latch
Latch Latch Latch Latch
No STO alarm Open Close Open Close
occurs
AL500 Close Open Close Open
Alarm AL501 Close Open Open Close

occurs AL502 Close Open Open Close
AL503 Close Open Open Close
Note:
1. Open = open circuit; Close = short circuit
2. Please refer to Chapter 10 Troubleshooting for more details.
FDBK behavior (Latch / No Latch):

If FDBK is latched when the STO alarm occurs, the status of FDBK does not change even when
the alarm is cleared. Please note that when more than one alarm occurs, the drive panel only
shows AL500.
 Example of Latching:
If Logic C P2-93 = XX22 is set, the FDBK status is closed when safety signal is lost and AL005
occurs.
1. Since FDBK is selected as Latch, even when the safety signal is back to normal, the FDBK
status remains closed. To reset FDBK:
(1) Reconnect the power supply: FDBK status returns to “open”.
(2) Do not reconnect the power supply. Instead, set P2-93 to XX12 to make the FDBK status
return to “open”. Then set P2-93 to XX22 again. This step sets the FDBK behavior to Latch.
2. After the FDBK status is restored, you can clear the alarms by the normal corrective actions.
In this case, you can clear AL500 by DI.Alm Reset.
3-92
 Example of not latching:

If Logic C P2-93 is set to XX12, the FDBK status is closed when the safety signal is lost and
AL500 occurs.
1. Since FDBK is selected as No Latch, when the safety signals return to normal, the FDBK
status automatically changes from short-circuited to normal when AL500 occurs. Setting
P2-93 to XX12 again is not required.
2. After the FDBK status is restored, you can clear the alarms by the normal corrective actions.
In this case, you can clear AL500 by DI.Alm Reset.
Relevant parameter (Please refer to Chapter 8 for detailed information):
Parameter Function
P2-93 STO FDBK Control
3-93
Servo Drive
MCCB Applicable model: ASDA-A2-LN
＊4
MC
Regenerative
AC 200/230 V R ＊1
P⊕
resistor
Three-phase S
50/60Hz D
T
C
Red
U
L1c White Power
V
L2c Black
W
＊2
/SIGN 37
＊5 CN2 Encoder
Pulse command input SIGN 36
(Line Driver) 5 T+ Blue
/PULSE 41
shielded cable
Twisted pair
Blue/
10KΩ 4 T- Black
PULSE 43
7 BAT+ -
±10V 10KΩ T-REF 18
10KΩ 9 GND -
GND 13 Red/ SG
14,16 +5V Red&White
/HSIGN 40 Black/
13,15 GND
High-speed pulse＊6 HSIGN 46 Black&White
command input CN3

(Line Receiver) /HPULSE 29
6 RS485-
HPULSE 38
5 RS485+
shielded cable
MON1 16
Twisted pair
10KΩ 4 -
GND 12,13,19
10KΩ DC 24V 3 -
MON2 15
SG 2 -
VDD 17
1 GND
COM+ 11
COM- 45,47,49 ＊7
SON DI1 9 4.03KΩ
CCLR DI2 10 4.03KΩ
TCM0 DI3 34
4.03KΩ
TCM1 DI4 8
4.03KΩ
4.03KΩ
ARST DI5 33
4.03KΩ
NL DI6 32
4.03KΩ
PL DI7 31
4.03KΩ
CN4
EMGS DI8 30
1 +5V DC ＊3
DO1+ 7
SRDY
1.5KΩ 2 Data-
DO1- 6
3 Data+
DO2+ 5
ZSPD
1.5KΩ 4 GND
24V DO2- 4
CN5
DO3+ 3
HOME
1.5KΩ 8 +5V
DO3- 2
4 Opt A
DO4+ 1
TPOS
1.5KΩ 5 Opt /A
DO4- 26
3 Opt B
DO5+ 28
DO5- 27
9 Opt Z
A-phase
OA 21
1 Opt /Z
differential signal /OA 22
Encoder 6 GND Note:
B-phase OB 25
pulse 7 GND
output
differential signal /OB 23 DC 24V CN-STO *1. Models of 200 W and below have
Z-phase OZ 50 no built-in regenerative resistor.
differential signal
1 VDD
/OZ 24
3KΩ
2 STO_A *2. The brake coil has no polarity.
3 /STO_A
*3. Connect to USB (for PC
4 STO_B
3KΩ
communication).
5 -
/STO_B
6 FDBK_A *4. Models of 1.5 kW and below can
7 FDBK_B use single-phase power supply.
8 COM-
*5, *6. Please refer to Section 3.3.3 for
wiring diagrams C3 and C4.
*7. Please refer to Section 3.3.3 for
wiring diagrams C9 ~ C12 SINK /
SOURCE mode
3-94
Servo Drive
MC
Regenerative
AC 200/230 V R ＊1
P⊕
resistor
Three-phase＊4 S
50/60Hz D
T
C
Red
U
L1c White Power
V
L2c Black
W
＊2
CN2 Encoder
5 T+ Blue
Blue/
4 T-
shielded cable
Twisted pair
Black
7 BAT+ -
9 GND -
Red/ SG
14,16 +5V Red&White
Black/
10KΩ 13,15 GND Black&White
CN1
CN3
±10V T-REF 18
10KΩ
10KΩ
6 RS485-
GND 13
5 RS485+
shielded cable
MON1 16
Twisted pair
10KΩ 4 -
GND 12,13,19
10KΩ DC 24V 3 -
MON2 15
2 -
SG VDD 17
1 GND
COM+ 11
COM- 45,47,49 ＊5
SON DI1 9 4.03KΩ
CTRG DI2 10 4.03KΩ
POS0 DI3 34
4.03KΩ
POS1 DI4 8
4.03KΩ
4.03KΩ
ARST DI5 33
4.03KΩ
NL DI6 32
4.03KΩ
PL DI7 31
4.03KΩ
CN4 ＊3
EMGS DI8 30
1 +5V DC
DO1+ 7
SRDY
1.5KΩ 2 Data-
DO1- 6
3 Data+
DO2+ 5
ZSPD
1.5KΩ 4 GND
24V DO2- 4
CN5
DO3+ 3
HOME
1.5KΩ 8 +5V
DO3- 2
4 Opt A
DO4+ 1
TPOS
1.5KΩ 5 Opt /A
DO4- 26
3 Opt B
DO5+ 28
DO5- 27
9 Opt Z
A-phase
OA 21
1 Opt /Z Note:
Encoder 6 GND
B-phase OB 25 *1. Models of 200 W and below have
pulse
differential signal
7 GND
output /OB 23 DC 24V CN-STO no built-in regenerative resistor.
Z-phase OZ 50
1 VDD *2. The brake coil has no polarity.
differential signal /OZ 24
3KΩ
2 STO_A *3. Connect to USB (for PC
3 /STO_A
communication).
4 STO_B
*4. Models of 1.5 kW and below can
3KΩ
5 -
/STO_B
6 FDBK_A use single-phase power supply.
7 FDBK_B *5. Please refer to Section 3.3.3 for
8 COM- wiring diagrams C9 ~ C12 SINK /
SOURCE mode.
3-95
Servo Drive
MC
＊4
Regenerative
AC 200/230 V R ＊1
P⊕
resistor
Three-phase S
D
50/60Hz T
C
Red
U
L1c White Power
V
L2c Black
W
＊2
CN2 Encoder
5 T+ Blue
shielded cable
Blue/
Twisted pair
4 T- Black
7 BAT+ -
9 GND -
CN1 10KΩ
Red/ SG
14,16 +5V Red&White
±10V V-REF 42 Black/
10KΩ
GND 44 10KΩ
CN3
±10V T-REF 18
10KΩ
10KΩ
6 RS485-
GND 13
5 RS485+
shielded cable
MON1 16
Twisted pair
10KΩ 4 -
GND 12,13,19
10KΩ DC 24V 3 -
MON2 15
2 -
SG VDD 17
1 GND
COM+ 11
COM- 45,47,49 ＊5
SON DI1 9 4.03KΩ
TRQLM DI2 10 4.03KΩ
SPD0 DI3 34
4.03KΩ
SPD1 DI4 8
4.03KΩ
4.03KΩ
ARST DI5 33
4.03KΩ
CWL DI6 32
4.03KΩ
CCWL DI7 31
4.03KΩ
CN4
EMGS DI8 30 ＊3
1 +5V DC
DO1+ 7
SRDY
1.5KΩ 2 Data-
DO1- 6
3 Data+
DO2+ 5
ZSPD
1.5KΩ 4 GND
24V DO2- 4
CN5
DO3+ 3
TSPD
1.5KΩ 8 +5V
DO3- 2
4 Opt A
DO4+ 1
BRKR
1.5KΩ 5 Opt /A
DO4- 26
3 Opt B
DO5+ 28
DO5- 27
9 Opt Z
A-phase
OA 21
1 Opt /Z
Encoder 6 GND
B-phase OB 25
pulse
differential signal
7 GND
output /OB 23 DC 24V CN-STO
OZ 50 Note:
Z-phase
differential signal 1 VDD *1. Models of 200 W and below
/OZ 24
2 STO_A
3KΩ have no built-in regenerative
3 /STO_A
resistor.
4 STO_B
3KΩ
*2. The brake coil has no polarity.
5 -
/STO_B
6 FDBK_A
7 FDBK_B communication).
8 COM- *4. Models of 1.5 kW and below
can use single-phase power
supply.
*5. Please refer to Section 3.3.3
for C9 ~ C12 wiring diagrams
SINK / SOURCE mode.
3-96
Servo Drive
＊4 MC
Regenerative
AC 200/230 V R ＊1
P⊕
resistor
Three-phase S
50/60Hz D
T
C
Red
U
L1c White Power
V
L2c Black
W
Green
24V EMGS BRKR Brake
＊2
CN2 Encoder
5 T+ Blue
CN2
shielded cable
Twisted pair
Blue/
4 T- Black
7 BAT+ -
9 GND -
CN1 10KΩ
Red/ SG
14,16 +5V Red&White
GND 44 10KΩ
CN3
±10V 10KΩ T-REF 18
10KΩ 6 RS485-
GND 13
5 RS485+
shielded cable
MON1 16
Twisted pair
10KΩ 4 -
GND 12,13,19
10KΩ DC 24V 3 -
MON2 15
SG 2 -
VDD 17
1 GND
COM+ 11
COM- 45,47,49 ＊5
SON DI1 9 4.03KΩ
SPDLM DI2 10 4.03KΩ
TCM0 DI3 34
4.03KΩ
TCM1 DI4 8
4.03KΩ
4.03KΩ
ARST DI5 33
4.03KΩ
CWL DI6 32
4.03KΩ
CCWL DI7 31
4.03KΩ
CN4
EMGS DI8 30
1 +5V DC ＊3
DO1+ 7
SRDY
1.5KΩ 2 Data-
DO1- 6
3 Data+
DO2+ 5
ZSPD
1.5KΩ 4 GND
24V DO2- 4
CN5
DO3+ 3
TSPD
1.5KΩ 8 +5V
DO3- 2
4 Opt A
DO4+ 1
BRKR
1.5KΩ 5 Opt /A
DO4- 26
3 Opt B
DO5+ 28
DO5- 27
9 Opt Z
A-phase
OA 21
1 Opt /Z
6 GND
Encoder B-phase OB 25
7 GND Note:
pulse differential signal /OB 23
output DC 24V CN-STO *1. Models of 200 W and below
Z-phase OZ 50
differential signal
1 VDD have no built-in regenerative
/OZ 24
2 STO_A resistor.
3KΩ
3 /STO_A *2. The brake coil has no polarity.

3KΩ
4 STO_B *3. Connect to USB (for PC
5 -
/STO_B
communication).
6 FDBK_A
7 FDBK_B
use single-phase power supply.
8 COM-
wiring diagram C9 ~ C12 SINK /
SOURCE mode.
3-97
Servo Drive
ASDA-A2-FN, ASDA-A2-NN,
MCCB ASDA-A2-MN, ASDA-A2-EN CN6
＊4
MC
＊1
Regenerative
AC 200/230 V R P⊕
resistor
Three-phase S CN6 EtherCAT
D
50/60Hz T (for ASDA-A2-EN)
C
Red
U Connects to a
L1c White Power controller or a
V CN6A
L2c Black servo drive
W
Green
24V EMGS BRKR 剎車
Brake No connection or
＊2
connects to the CN6B
DC 24V CN2 next servo drive
CN1 Encoder
VDD 5 5 T+ Blue
CN6 CANopen (for ASDA-A2-MN)
shielded cable
COM+ 6 4 T- Blue/Black
Twisted pair
COM- 14 ＊5 7 BAT+ - 1 CAN H
DI1 7 4.03KΩ
9 GND - 2 CAN L
14,16 Red/ SG
DI2 8 4.03KΩ
+5V Red&White 3 CAN GND
DI3 9
4.03KΩ
13,15 GND
Black/
Black&White 4 -
Data input
ORGP DI4 10
4.03KΩ
CN4 5 -
1 +5V DC ＊3
NL DI5
4.03KΩ
11 6 -
2 Data-
4.03KΩ
PL DI6 12 7 CAN GND
3 Data+
4.03KΩ
EMGS DI7 13 8 -
4 GND
9 CAN H
DO1+ 1 CN5 10 CAN L
SRDY
1.5KΩ
DO1- 2 8 +5V 11 CAN GND
DO2+ 3 4 Opt A 12 -
DO2- 4 5 Opt /A Data output
24V 13 -
DO3+ 25 3 Opt B 14 -
DO3- 26 2 Opt /B 15 CAN GND
DO4+ 23 9 Opt Z 16 -
ALRM
1.5KΩ
DO4- 24 1 Opt /Z
6 GND
GND 16 7 GND CN6 DMCNET
A-phase
OA 17 CN7 (only available on -EN models) (for ASDA-A2-FN & ASDA-A2-NN)
differential signal /OA 18 1
Encoder
COM+ 1 DMCNET_1A
B-phase OB 19 2 EDI9-
pulse 2 DMCNET_1B
output differential signal /OB 20 3 EDI10- 3 DMCNET_2A
Z-phase OZ 21
differential signal 4 EDI11- 4 -
/OZ 22 5 EDI12- Data input
5 -
6 EDI13- 6 DMCNET_2B
7 EDI14- 7 -
DC 24V
CN-STO 8 -
1 VDD 9 DMCNET_1A
2 STO_A 10
3KΩ DMCNET_1B
3 /STO_A 11 DMCNET_2A
4 STO_B 12 -
3KΩ
Data
5 /STO_B 13 - output
6 FDBK_A 14 DMCNET_2B
7 FDBK_B 15 -
8 COM- 16 -
Note:
*1. Models of 200 W and below have
no built-in regenerative resistor.
*2. The brake coil has no polarity.
communication).
use single-phase power supply.
wiring diagram C5 ~ C8 SINK /
SOURCE mode.
3-98
Chapter 4 Panel Display
and Operation
This chapter details the panel status and operation of ADSA-A2 series servo drive.
4.1 Panel Description
Display
MODE Key SHIFT Key

MODE ▲ SHIFT
UP Key
Charge LED SET Key
CHARGE ▼ SET
DOWN Key
Name Function
Five-/Seven-segment display is for displaying the monitoring values,
Display
parameter values, and setting values.
In Parameter mode, use this key to change the group number. In Editing
mode, moving the flashing (selected) digit to the left lets you adjust the
SHIFT Key
higher setting bit. You can switch the display of high / low digis in
Monitoring mode.
Pressing the SET key can display and save the parameter groups and
various parameter settings. In Monitoring mode, pressing SET key can
SET Key
switch decimal or hexadecimal display. In Parameter mode, pressing
SET key can enter into parameter setting mode.
Pressing the DOWN key can scroll through and change monitor codes,
DOWN Key
parameter groups, and various parameter settings.
Pressing the MODE key can enter or exit different parameter groups, and
MODE Key
switch between Monitoring mode and Parameter mode.
Pressing the UP key can scroll through and change monitor codes,
UP Key
parameter groups, and various parameter settings.
Charge LED The Charge LED lights to indicate the power is applied to the circuit.
4-1
ASDA-A2 Chapter 4 Panel Display and Operation
4.2 Parameter Setting Procedure
Switch the mode:
Power On
Monitoring
Mode Please refer to section 7.2.1
MODE
Parameter
Mode Please refer to Chapter 8 for parameters
MODE
1. If no alarm occurs, then the Alarm Mode will be skipped.
2. When a new alarm occurs, it will switch to Alarm Mode
in any conditions.
Alarm Mode
3. When switching to the other modes, if there is no key to
be selected for 20 seconds, it will return to the Alarm Mode
MODE automatically.
Please refer to Chapter 10 for detailed alarm description.
Operate in each mode:

Monitoring mode
Monitoring
Mode
1. Press keys can select monitoring

variables. (Please refer to section 4.3.5
for further information about monitoring
variables.)
2. Users can directly enter the code of
monitoring variables via P0-02. (Please
refer to section 7.2.1 or P0-02 for detailed
description.)
SHIFT Switch High / Low Word

‧‧‧‧
SET Switch Hex. / Dec.
4-2
Chapter 4 Panel Display and Operation ASDA-A2
Parameter Mode
Parameter
Mode
Monitor
‧‧‧
Parameter P0
SHIFT
Basic Parameter
‧‧‧
P1
SHIFT
Extension
‧‧‧
Parameter P2
SHIFT
Communication
‧‧‧
Parameter P3
SHIFT
Diagnosis
‧‧‧
Parameter P4
SHIFT
Motion Control
‧‧‧
Parameter P5
SHIFT
PR Parameter
‧‧‧
P6
SHIFT
PR Parameter
‧‧‧
P7
SHIFT
MODE
Monitoring Mode
4-3
Edit Setting Mode

Parameter
Mode
MODE SET
Editing Setting Mode
SET
‧‧‧
Display parameter setting value Save the parameter
setting value. Then,
return to Parameter
Mode.
SHIFT
SET
‧‧‧
Save the parameter
SHIFT return to Parameter
Mode.
SET
‧‧‧
Save the parameter
‧‧‧
return to Parameter
Mode.
MODE
Monitoring / Alarm
If no alarm occurs, then the Alarm Mode will be skipped.
Mode
4-4
4.3 Status Display
4.3.1 Save Setting Display
When finishing editing parameter, press the SET key to save the setting. The panel will display the
setting status according to the setting for a second.
Displayed Symbol Description
The setting value is saved correctly. (Saved)
Read-only parameter. Write-protected. (Read-Only)
Enter the wrong password or no password has been entered. (Locked)
Incorrect setting value or enter the reserved setting value. (Out of Range)
No entering is allowed when it is Servo ON. (Servo On)
Parameter will be effective after the servo drive is re-powered on. (Power On)
4.3.2 Decimal Point
Display Symbol Description
High byte / low byte indication: When the data is displayed in decimal 32 bits,
it is for indicating the current high or low byte.
Negative sign: When the data is displayed in decimal format, the two
L
o
w
B
y
te
No Function
High Byte
Negative Sign
decimal points in the left represent the negative sign, no

matter it is showed in 16 or 32 bits. When it is showed in
hexadecimal format, it only shows positive sign.
4.3.3 Alarm Message

When there is an error of the drive, it will show ‘AL’ as the alarm sign and ‘nnn’
as the alarm code. For further explanation, please refer to Chapter 8, P0-01,
parameter description, or Chapter 10, Troubleshooting.
4-5
4.3.4 Positive and Negative Sign Setting

When entering the Editing Setting Mode, pressing the UP / DOWN keys can
increase or decrease the displayed content. The SHIFT key can change the
desired adjusted carry value. (The carry value is blinking at the moment.)
Pressing the SHIFT key for two seconds can switch the positive (+) and
negative (-) signs. If the parameter is over the range after switching the
positive or negative sign, then it cannot be switched.
4.3.5 Monitor Display
When the power is applied to the drive, the display will show the monitor displayed symbol for a
second, and then enter the Monitoring Mode. In Monitoring Mode, the UP / DOWN keys can
change the desired monitor variable. Or, the user can directly change parameter P0-02 to set the
monitor code. When applying to the power, the system will pre-set the monitor code according to
the setting value of P0-02. For example, the setting value of P0-02 is 4. Every time when applying
to the power, it will display C-PLS monitor sign first, and then shows the input pulse number of
pulse command.
P0-02 Monitor Displayed

Description Unit
Setting Value Symbol
Motor feedback pulse number (after the scaling of
0 [user unit]
electronic gear ratio) (User unit)
Input pulse number of pulse command (after the
1 [user unit]
scaling of electronic gear ratio) (User unit)
The difference of error pulse number between
2 control command pulse and feedback pulse number [user unit]
(User unit)
Motor feedback pulse number (encoder unit) (1.28
3 [pulse]
million pulse/rev)
Input pulse number of pulse command (before the
4 [pulse]
scaling of electronic gear ratio) (encoder unit)
Error pulse number (after the scaling of electronic
5 [pulse]
gear ratio) (encoder unit)
6 Input frequency of pulse command [Kpps]
7 Motor speed [r/min]
8 Speed input command [Volt]
9 Speed input command [r/min]
10 Torque input command [Volt]
4-6
P0-02 Monitor Displayed

Description Unit
Setting Value Symbol
11 Torque input command [%]
12 Average torque [%]
13 Peak torque [%]
14 Main circuit voltage [Volt]
Load / Motor inertia ratio

15 [1 times]
(Note: If it shows 13.0, it means the actual inertia is 13)
16 IGBT temperature [°C]
Resonance frequency (Low byte is the first

17 [Hz]
resonance and high byte is the second one).
The absolute pulse number of encoder Z phase

0 +5000 0 +5000 0 equals to the homing value, 0. It will be +5000 or
18 -
-5000 pulse when rotating in forward or reverse
direction.
Z Z Z
Mapping parameter #1: shows the content of

19 parameter P0-25 -
(specify the mapping target by P0-35)
Monitor variable #1: shows the content of parameter
23 P0-09 -
(specify the monitor variable code by P0-17)
24 P0-10 -
25 P0-11 -
26 P0-12 -
4-7
Example of the Status Description

displayed value
If the value is 1234, it displays 01234 (shows in decimal
(Dec) format).
16 bits
If the value is 0x1234, it displays 1234 (shows in
(Hex) hexadecimal format; the first digit does not show any).
(Dec high) If the value is 1234567890, the display of the high byte is
1234.5 and displays 67890 as the low byte (shows in
decimal format).
(Dec low)
32 bits
(Hex high) If the value is 0x12345678, the display of the high byte is
h1234 and displays L5678 as the low byte (shows in
hexadecimal format).
(Hex low)
Negative display. If the value is -12345, it displays 1.2.345 (only
shows in decimal format; there is no positive or negative sign for
hexadecimal format display).
Note:
1. Dec means it is displayed in decimal format. Hex means it is displayed in hexadecimal format.
2. The above display methods can be applied in Monitoring Mode and Editing Setting Mode.
3. When all monitor variables are 32 bits, high / low bit and the display (Dec / Hex) can be switched.
According to the definition in Chapter 8, each parameter only supports one displaying method and
cannot be switched.
4-8
4.4 General Function
4.4.1 Operation of Fault Record Display
When it is in Parameter Mode, select P4-00 ~ P4-04 and press the SET key, the corresponding
fault record will be shown.
SET
The 1st recent error
SET
The 2nd recent error
SET
The 3rd recent error
SET
The 4th recent error
SET
The 5th recent error
4-9
4.4.2 JOG Mode
When it is in Parameter Mode, select P4-05 and follow the setting method below for JOG operation
(The communication mode does not support using the panel to set the JOG mode).
(1) Press the SET key to display the speed value of JOG. The default value is 20 r/min.
(2) Press the UP or DOWN key to adjust the desired speed value of JOG. It is adjusted to
100 r/min in the example.
(3) Press the SET key to display JOG and enter JOG mode.
(4) When it is in JOG Mode, press the UP or DOWN key to enable the servo motor in forward or
reverse direction. The servo motor stops running as soon as the user stops pressing the key.
JOG operation is working only when it is Servo ON.
SET
Display JOG speed value.

Its default value is 20 r/min.
Press the UP/DOWN keys to adjust

JOG speed.
…
Adjust to 100 r/min.
SET
Display JOG and enter JOG Mode.
JOG Mode
P(CCW) N(CW)
MODE
Exit
4-10
4.4.3 Force DO Output
Enter the Digital Output Mode by the following settings. Set P2-08 to 406 and enable the function
of force DO mode. Then, set the force DO output by binary method via P4-06. When the setting
value is 2, DO2 will be forced to enable. When the setting value is 5, DO1 and DO3 will be forced
to enable. No data is retained in this mode. It returns to the normal DO mode when re-powering on
the drive or setting P2-08 to 400.
SET
SET
Force to enable
DO mode
SET
Force to enable DO1
Force to enable DO2
Force to enable DO3
Force to enable DO4
Force to enable DO5
Force to enable DO1, DO3
Force to enable DO1,

DO2, DO3
Note: P4-06 is displayed in hexadecimal format. Therefore, it will not show the fifth 0.
4-11
4.4.4 Digital Input Diagnosis Operation
Enter the Digital Input Diagnosis Mode by the following setting methods. When the external output
signals DI1 ~ DI8 are ON, the corresponding signals will be shown on the panel. It is displayed by
bit. When it shows bit, it means it is ON.
For example, if it shows 3FE1, E is in hexadecimal format, it will be 1100 when it transfers to binary
format. Then, DI6 ~ DI8 are ON.
SET
The panel displays in

hexadecimal format.
11 1111 1110 0001 Binary code
DI DI DI DI DI DI DI DI DI DI DI DI DI DI Corresponding
14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 DI status
(Display in hexadecimal format)
4.4.5 Digital Output Diagnosis Operation
Enter the Digital Output Diagnosis Mode by the following setting methods. The output signals
DO1 ~ DO5 are ON and the corresponding signals will be shown on the panel. It is displayed by bit.
When it shows bit, it means it is ON.
For example, if it shows 1F, F is in hexadecimal format, it will be 1111 when it transfers to binary
format. Then, DO1 ~ DO4 are ON.
SET
The panel displays in

hexadecimal format
0001 1111 Binary code
DO DODODODO Corresponding
5 4 3 2 1 DO status
(Display in hexadecimal format)
4-12
Chapter 5 Trial Operation and
Tuning
This chapter is divided into two parts to describe the trial operation. The first one is the inspection
without load and the other one is the inspection with load. For safety reasons, please conduct the
first inspection.
5.1 Inspection without Load
Please remove the load of the servo motor, including coupling on the shaft and accessories, so as
to avoid any damage to the servo drive or mechanism. This is aiming to avoid the falling off of the
disassembled parts of the motor shaft which indirectly causes the personnel injury or equipment
damage during operation. Running the motor without load, if the servo motor can run during normal
operation, then it can connect to load for operation.
Caution: Please operate the servo motor without load first. If the servo motor runs normally,
connect the load afterwards in order to avoid any danger.
Please check the following items before operation.
Inspection before operation (has not applied to the power yet)
 Check if there is any obvious damage on its appearance.

 The splicing parts of the wiring terminal should be isolated.
 Make sure the wiring is correct so as to avoid the damage or any abnormity.
 Check if the electrically conductive objects, including metal (such as screws) or inflammable
objects, are not inside the servo drive.
 Check if the control switch is in OFF status.
 Do not place the servo drive or external regenerative resistor on inflammable objects.
 To avoid the electromagnetic brake losing efficacy, please check if stop function and circuit
break function can work normally.
 If the peripheral devices are interfered by the electronic instruments, please reduce
electromagnetic interference with devices.
 Please make sure the external voltage level of the servo drive is correct.
5-1
Chapter 5 Trial operation and Tuning ASDA-A2
Inspection during operation (has already applied to the power)

 The encoder cable should avoid excessive stress. When the motor is running, make sure the
cable is not worn or stretched.
 Please contact Delta if there is any vibration of the servo motor or unusual noise during the
operation.
 Make sure the setting of the parameters is correct. Different machinery has different
characteristic, so please adjust the parameter according to the characteristic of each
machinery.
 Please reset the parameter when the servo drive is in SERVO OFF status, or it may cause
malfunction.
 When the relay is operating, if there is no contact noise or there is other abnormal noise,
contact Delta.
 Check if the power indicator and LED display work normally.
5.2 Applying Power to the Servo Drive
Please follow the instructions below.
A. Make sure the wiring between the motor and servo drive is correct.
1) U, V, W, and FG have to connect to the red, white, black, and green wires respectively. If
the wiring is incorrect, the motor cannot work normally. The ground wire FG of the motor
must be connected to the ground terminal of the servo drive. Please refer to sections 3.1
and 3.2 for wiring.
2) The encoder cable of the motor has correctly connected to CN2: If users only desire to
execute JOG function, it is unnecessary to connect CN1 and CN3 (Please refer to Chapter
5.3). Refer to sections 3.1 and 3.5 for the wiring of CN2.
Caution: Do not connect the power terminal (R, S, T) to the output terminal (U, V, W) of the
servo drive. Or it might damage the servo drive.
B. Power circuit of the servo drive:
Caution: Wiring of 220V servo drive is different from that of 400V. Make sure the wiring is
correct, or it might damage the servo drive.
220V Servo Drive: Apply power to the servo drive. Please refer to section 3.1.3 for power wiring.
400V Servo Drive: Apply power to the servo drive. Please refer to section 3.2.3 for power wiring.
C. Power on:
220V Servo Drive: Power of the servo drive: including control circuit (L1C, L2C) and main circuit
(R, S, T) power.
400V Servo Drive: Power of the servo drive: including control circuit (DC24V, DC0V) and
main circuit (R, S, T) power.
When the power is on, the display of the servo drive will be:
5-2
ASDA-A2 Chapter 5 Trial operation and Tuning
The digital inputs (DI6 ~ DI8) of the default value are the signals of negative limit error (NL),
positive limit error (PL), and emergency stop (EMGS), if not using the default setting of DI6 ~
DI8, adjusting the setting of P2-15 ~ P2-17 is a must. Parameters could be set to 0 (disable this
DI function) or modified to another function.
From the last setting, the servo drive status displays parameter P0-02 setting as the motor
speed (07), then the screen display will be:
When the screen displays no text, please check if the power of control circuit is under voltage.
1) When the screen displays:
Warning of overvoltage:
It means the voltage input by the main circuit is higher than the rated voltage or power
input error (incorrect power system).
Corrective action:
 Use the voltmeter to measure if the input voltage from the main circuit is within the
range of rated voltage value.
 Use the voltmeter to measure if the power system complies with the specification.
Warning of encoder error:

Check if the motor encoder is securely connected or the wiring is correct.
Corrective action:
 Check if the wiring is the same as the instruction of the user manual.
 Check the encoder connector.
 Check if the wiring is loose.
 Check if the encoder is damaged.
5-3
Warning of emergency stop:

Please check if any of the digital inputs DI1 ~ DI8 is set to emergency stop (EMGS).
Corrective action:
 If not desiring to set emergency stop (EMGS) as one of the digital input, make sure no
digital input is set to emergency stop (EMGS) among DI1 ~ DI8. (That is to say none of
the parameters, P2-10 ~ P2-17, is set to 21.)
 If the function of emergency stop (EMGS) is needed and this DI is set as normally
close (function code: 0x0021), please make sure this DI is always normally close. If
not, please set this DI as normally open (function code: 0x0121).
Warning of negative limit error:

Please check if any of the digital inputs DI1 ~ DI8 is set to negative limit (NL) and that DI is
ON.
Corrective action:
 If not desiring to set negative limit (NL) as one of the digital input, make sure no digital
input is set to negative limit (NL) among DI1 ~ DI8. (That is to say none of the
parameters, P2-10 ~ P2-17, is set to 22.)
 If the function of negative limit (NL) is needed and this DI is set as normally close
(function code: 0x0022), please make sure this DI is always normally close. If not,
please set this DI as normally open (function code: 0x0122).
Warning of positive limit error:

Please check if any of the digital inputs DI1 ~ DI8 is set positive limit (PL) and that DI is
ON.
Corrective action:
 If not desiring to set positive limit (PL) as one of the digital input, make sure no digital
input is set to positive limit (PL) among DI1 ~ DI8. (That is to say none of the
parameters, P2-10 ~ P2-17, is set to 23.)
 If the function of positive limit (PL) is needed and this DI is set as normally close
(function code: 0x0023), please make sure this DI is always normally close. If not,
5-4
please set this DI as normally open (function code: 0x0123).
Warning of overcurrent:
Corrective Action:
 Check the connection between the motor and servo drive.
 Check if the conducting wire is short-circuited. Exclude short circuit and avoid metal
conductors being exposed.
Warning of undervoltage:
Corrective action:
 Check if the wiring of main circuit input voltage is correct.
 Use the voltmeter to measure if the main circuit voltage is normal.
 Use the voltmeter to measure if the power system complies with the specification.
Note: During the process of power on or servo on, if an alarm occurs or shows any abnormal
display, please contact the distributors.
5-5
5.3 JOG Trial Run without Load
It is very convenient to test the motor and servo drive with the method of JOG trial run without load
since the extra wiring is unnecessary. For safety reasons, it is recommended to set JOG at low
speed. Please see the following descriptions.
Step 1: Use the software to set the drive to Servo ON by setting parameter P2-30 to 1. This setting
is to force the servo ON through software.
Step 2: Set P4-05 as JOG speed (Unit: r/min). After setting the desired JOG speed, press the SET
key, and the servo drive will enter JOG mode.
Step 3: Press the MODE key to exist JOG mode.
SET
Display the JOG speed. The default value is 20.
Press the UP/DOWN keys to adjust JOG speed.
Adjust to 100
SET
Display JOG and enter JOG mode.
JOG Mode
The definition of forward and reverse direction

has nothing to do with the actual operation
Motor runs in Motor runs in direction of the motor.
forward direction reverse direction Operation direction of the motor can be
changed via P1-01.
MODE
Exit
Motor runs in
forward direction
Speed 0 Motor stops

Motor runs in
reverse direction
Press Release Press
If the motor does not run, please check if the wiring between UVW and encoder cable is correct.
If the motor runs abnormally, please check if the UVW phase sequence is correct.
5-6
5.4 Trial Run without Load (Speed Mode)
Before the trial run without load, firmly secure the motor base so as to avoid the danger caused by
the reaction of motor operation.
Step 1:
Set the control mode of the servo drive to speed mode. Set P1-01 to 2 as speed mode.
Then, cycle power on the servo drive.
Step 2:
In speed control mode, the digital input settings of trial run are as follows:
Parameter
Digital Input Symbol Function Description CN1 Pin No.
Setting Value
DI1 P2-10 = 101 SON Servo ON DI1- = 9
DI2 P2-11 = 109 TRQLM Torque limit DI2- = 10
DI3 P2-12 = 114 SPD0 Speed command selection DI3- = 34
DI4 P2-13 = 115 SPD1 Speed command selection DI4- = 8
DI5 P2-14 = 102 ARST Alarm reset DI5- = 33
DI6 P2-15 = 0 Disabled Invalid DI function -
EDI9 P2-36 = 0 Disabled Invalid DI function CN7 = 2
The above table disables the functions of negative limit (DI6), positive limit (DI7), and emergency
stop (DI8). Thus, the values of parameters P2-15 ~ P2-17 and P2-36 ~ P2-41 are set to 0
(Disabled). The digital input of Delta’s servo drive can be programmed by users. When
programming digital input, please refer to the description of DI code.
The default setting includes the functions of negative limit, positive limit, and emergency stop.
Therefore, after the setting is complete, if any alarm occurs, please cycle power on the servo drive
or switch ON DI5 to clear the alarm. Please refer to section 5.2.
5-7
The speed command selection is determined by SPD0 and SPD1. See the table below.
Speed DI signal of CN1
Command Command Source Content Range
No. SPD1 SPD0
Voltage difference
External analog
S1 0 0 between V-REF and -10V ~ +10V
command
GND
S2 0 1 P1-09 -60000 ~ 60000
Register
S3 1 0 P1-10 -60000 ~ 60000
parameter
S4 1 1 P1-11 -60000 ~ 60000
0: means DI is OFF; 1: means DI is ON
Register parameter
The parameter setting range is from -60000 to 60000.
Setting speed = Setting range x unit (0.1 r/min).
For example: P1-09 = +30000; Setting speed = +30000 x 0.1 r/min = +3000 r/min
Command setting of speed register
Set parameter P1-09 to 30000. Input command Rotation direction

Set parameter P1-10 to 1000. + CW
Set parameter P1-11 to -30000. - CCW
Step 3:
(1) Users switch ON DI1 and Servo ON.
(2) Both DI3 (SPD0) and DI4 (SPD1), the speed command, are OFF, which means it currently
executes S1 command. The motor rotates according to analog voltage command.
(3) When DI3 (SPD0) is ON, it means it currently executes S2 command (3000 r/min). The
rotation speed is 3000 r/min.
(4) When DI4 (SPD1) is ON, it means it currently executes S3 command (100 r/min). The
rotation speed is 100 r/min.
(5) When both DI3 (SPD0) and DI4 (SPD1) are ON, it means it currently executes S4 command
(-3000 r/min). The rotation speed is -3000 r/min.
(6) Steps (3), (4), and (5) can be repeatedly executed.
(7) If users desire to stop the motor, switch OFF DI1 (Servo OFF).
5-8
5.5 Trial Run without Load (Position Mode)
Before the trial run without load, firmly secure the motor base so as to avoid the danger caused by
the reaction of motor operation.
Step 1:
Set the control mode of the servo drive to position (PR) mode.
Set parameter P1-01 to 1 as position (PR) mode. Then, cycle power on the servo drive.
Step 2: In position mode, the digital input settings of trial run are as follows:
Parameter
Digital Input Symbol Function Description CN1 Pin No.
Setting Value
DI1 P2-10 = 101 SON Servo ON DI1- = 9
DI2 P2-11 = 108 CTRG Command triggered DI2- = 10
Position command
DI3 P2-12 = 111 POS0 DI3- = 34
selection
Position command
DI4 P2-13 = 112 POS1 DI4- = 8
selection
DI5 P2-14 = 102 ARST Alarm reset DI5- = 33
The above table disables the functions of negative limit (DI6), positive limit (DI7), and emergency
stop (DI8), thus, set P2-15 ~ P2-17 and P2-36 ~ P2-41 to 0 (Disabled). The digital input of Delta’s
servo drive can be programmed by users. When programming digital input, please refer to the
description of DI code.
The default setting includes the functions of negative limit, positive limit, and emergency stop.
Therefore, after the setting is complete, if any alarm occurs, please cycle power on the servo drive
or switch ON DI5 to clear the alarm. Please refer to section 5.2.
5-9
Please refer to section 3.12.2, Position (PR) Mode Standard Wiring for wiring diagram. However,
since POS2 is not the default digital input, set P2-14 to 113. Please refer to the table below for 64
sets of register command, POS0 ~ POS5, and the relative parameters.
Position Corresponding
POS5 POS4 POS3 POS2 POS1 POS0 CTRG
Command Parameter
P6-00
PR0 0 0 0 0 0 0
P6-01
P6-02
PR1 0 0 0 0 0 1
P6-03
~ ~
P6-98
PR50 1 1 0 0 1 0
P6-99
P7-00
PR51 1 1 0 0 1 1
P7-01
~ ~
P7-26
PR64 1 1 1 1 1 1
P7-27
0: means DI is OFF; 1: means DI is ON
Users can set the 64-set of command value (P6-00 ~ P7-27). The value can be set as the absolute
position command.
5-10
5.6 Tuning Procedure
Estimate the inertia ratio: JOG Mode

Tuning Procedure Display
1. After completing wiring, when applying to the power, the servo drive will
display:
2. Press the MODE Key to select the mode of parameter function.
3. Press the SHIFT Key twice to select the mode of parameter group.
4. Press the UP Key to select parameter P2-17.

5. Press the SET Key to display parameter value, which is shown as the
content on the right.
6. Press the SHIFT Key twice, then press the UP Key and then press the
SET Key.
8. Press the SET Key to display the parameter value.
9. Press the UP Key and select the parameter value 1.
10. Then, the servo drive is ON and will show:
11. Press the DOWN Key thrice to select the value of inertia ratio.
12. The panel displays the current value of inertia ratio (default value).
13. Press the MODE Key to select the mode of parameter function.
14. Press the SHIFT Key twice to select the mode of parameter group.
16. Press the SET Key to show the content, which is 20 r/min at JOG speed.
Press the UP or DOWN Key to increase or decrease the JOG speed.
Press the SHIFT Key to move to the next digit of the left.
17. Set the desired JOG speed and press the SET Key which is shown as the
figure on the right.
18. Press the UP Key to rotate the motor in forward direction while press the DOWN Key the
motor will rotate in reverse direction.
19. Execute JOG operation at low speed first. With the constant speed, if the motor operates
smoothly in forward and reverse directions, users can execute JOG operation at higher
speed.
20. In P4-05, the servo drive cannot display inertia ratio. Please press the MODE Key twice to
view the value of inertia ratio. If users desire to execute JOG operation again, press the
MODE Key, and then press the SET Key twice. Observe the panel display to see if the load
inertia ratio / total weight of movable section and load remain at the same value after
acceleration and deceleration.
5-11
5.6.1 Flowchart of Tuning Procedure
Trial run without load

is OK.
No
New model?
Yes
Exit the control of master.
Use the servo drive to perform trial If the estimation of inertia ratio is
run and estimate the inertia ratio* incorrect, it cannot obtain the best
performance of tuning.
Semi-auto
Manual mode Auto mode
mode
Connect to the master. Pay attention

to the wiring of CN1. Perform trial run
by P4-07 and P4-09.
Resonance can be suppressed
by P2-23 and P2-24.
Use the selected gain tuning mode

to enhance the performance.
OK
* refers to“the inertia ratio”for rotary motors or“the total weight (kg) of the coil assembly,
magnetic way, and load ”for linear motors.
5-12
5.6.2 Inertia Estimation Flowchart (with Mechanism)
Turn Off the power of servo drive.
Connect the motor to the

mechanism.
Turn On the power of servo drive.
Set P0-02 to 15. The panel will

display inertia ratio*.
Set P2-32 to 0 in manual mode.
Set P2-30 to 1.
Decrease the value of P2-00. Set Yes Mechanical

the value of P2-06 and P2-00 to system
the same. vibrates?
No
Enter P4-05, JOG mode.
Set JOG speed at 20r/min.
Press the Up (forward) or Down

(reverse) key to perform JOG.
If it operates No Check the

smoothly at
constant speed?
mechanism.
Yes
Increase JOG speed which is

>200r/min.
Alternately accelerate and

decelerate the mechanical
system.
View the panel display to see if the inertia ratio* remains the same after alternately accelerate and
decelerate. Then, select the tuning method according to the inertia ratio*.
Note: Users cannot view inertia ratio* in JOG mode. Please press the MODE Key twice. If users
desire to perform JOG operation, press the MODE Key, and then press the SET Key twice.
* refers to“the inertia ratio”for rotary motors or“the total weight (kg) of the coil assembly, magnetic way,
and load ”for linear motors.
5-13
5.6.3 Flowchart of Auto Tuning
Set P2-32 to 1 (auto mode, continuous tuning)

Continue to estimate the system inertia. Automatically save the value in P1-37 every 30 minutes
and refer the stiffness and bandwidth setting of P2-31.
P2-31 Stiffness setting in auto tuning mode (The default value is 80)
In auto and semi-auto modes, the bandwidth setting of speed circuit is:
1 ~ 50 Hz: low-stiffness, low-response
51 ~ 250 Hz: medium-stiffness, medium-response
251 ~ 850 Hz: high-stiffness, high-response
851 ~ 1000 Hz: extremely high-stiffness, extremely high-response
Stiffness setting in auto tuning mode: the bigger the value is, the stronger the stiffness will be.
Adjust the value of P2-31: Increase the value of P2-31 to increase stiffness or decrease to reduce
the noise. Continue to tune until the performance is satisfied. Then, tuning is complete.
Servo off. Set P2-32 to 1. Then, Servo on.
Set P0-02 to 15. The panel

will display inertia ratio*.
Alternately accelerate and

decelerate.
1. Decrease the value of P2-31 to reduce the

noise. Yes Any
2. If not decrease the value of P2-31, then resonance?
adjust the value of P2-23 and P2-24 to
suppress the resonance.
(Please refer to Chapter 5.6.6)
No
Satisfactory Yes Tuning

performance? completed.
No
High response No
is required?
Yes
Increase the value of P2-31
to increase the response and
stiffness.
* refers to“the inertia ratio”for rotary motors or“the total weight (kg) of the coil assembly, magnetic way,
and load ”for linear motors.
5-14
5.6.4 Flowchart of Semi-Auto Tuning
Set P2-32 to 2 (semi-auto mode, non-continuous tuning)

After tuning for a while and wait until the system inertia is stable, it stops estimating. The estimated
inertia ratio will be saved to P1-37. When switching the mode from manual or auto to semi auto,
the system starts tuning again. During the process of estimation, the system will refer the stiffness
and bandwidth setting of P2-31.
P2-31 Response setting in auto mode (The default value is 80)
In auto and semi-auto modes, the bandwidth setting of speed circuit is:
1 ~ 50 Hz: low-stiffness, low-response
51 ~ 250 Hz: medium-stiffness, medium-response
251 ~ 850 Hz: high-stiffness, high-response
851 ~ 1000 Hz: extremely high-stiffness, extremely high-response
Response setting in semi-auto tuning mode: the bigger the value is, the better the response will be.
Adjust the value of P2-31: Increase the value of P2-31 to increase the response or decrease to
reduce the noise. Continue to tune until the performance is satisfied. Then, tuning is complete.
Servo off. Set P2-32 to 2. Then, Servo on again.

displays inertia ratio.
The servo drive issues the

command of alternately
acceleration/deceleration.

noise. Yes Any
2. If not desire to decrease the value of P2- resonance?
31, the value of P2-23 and P2-24 can be
used to suppress the resonance as well.
(Please refer to Chapter 5.6.6)
No
The value of inertia ratio is No

stable. Check if P2-33 bit0 is
1*.
Yes
Satisfactory No Increase the value of P2-31

performance to increase response and
? stiffness.
Yes
Tuning
completed.
Note:
1. If P2-33 bit 0 is set to 1, it means the inertia estimation in semi-auto mode is completed. The result can be
accessed by P1-37.
2. If the value of P2-33 bit 0 is cleared to 0, the system will start to estimate again.
5-15
5.6.5 Limit of Inertia Ratio
Acceleration / Deceleration time of reaching 2000 r/min should be less than 1 second.
The speed in forward and reverse directions should be higher than 200 r/min.
The load inertia should be under 100 times of motor inertia.
The change of external force of inertia ratio cannot be too severe.
In auto mode, the inertia value will be saved to P1-37 every 30 minutes; while in semi-auto mode,
the inertia value will be saved to P1-37 only until the system inertia is stable and stops the
estimation of load inertia.
Servo off. Set P2-32 to 2. Then, Servo on again.

displays inertia ratio*.

command of alternative
acceleration/deceleration.

noise. Yes Any
2. If not desire to decrease the value of P2-
resonance?
31, value of P2-23 and P2-24 can be used to
suppress the resonance as well. (Please
refer to Chapter 5.6.6)
No
The inertia ratio shown on No

the panel is stable.
Yes
Satisfactory
No Increase the value of P2-31
performance to increase response and
? stiffness.
Yes
If the value of inertia ratio

remains almost the same, then
servo off and set P2-32 to 0.
Yes
Tuning
completed.
5-16
5.6.6 Mechanical Resonance Suppression Method
Three groups of Notch filter are provided to suppress mechanical resonance. Two of them can be
set to the auto resonance suppression and manual adjustment.
The procedure of manually suppressing the resonance is as the followings:
Use the analytic tool provided by

PC Software to display the point of
resonance.

command of alternatively
acceleration / deceleration.
High-frequency No
Complete
resonance?
Yes
Save the value of resonance frequency to

P2-23 and set P2-24 to 4.
No Increase the value of

No resonance?
P2-24
Yes
Tuning
completed
5-17
The procedure of the auto resonance suppression is as the followings:

Motor alternately
accelerates and
decelerates
High-frequency No
Complete
resonance?
Yes
Set P2-47 to 1
No
No Repeatedly set P2-47 to

No resonance? 1 for over 3 times
Note 1
Yes
Yes
Set P2-47 to 0
No P2-47 is set to 0
P2-44 = 32 (max);
Remain the value of P2-43
P2-46 = 32 (max)
Tuning and P2-45
Note 2
Completed
Yes
Suppress resonance by
It is suggested to reduce P2-44 and P2-46
the speed bandwidth.
Motor alternately accelerates

and decelerates
Yes High-frequency
resonance?
No
Note:
1. Parameters P2-44 and P2-46 are the setting values of resonance suppression. If you have set to the
maximum (32dB) and cannot suppress the resonance, please reduce the speed bandwidth. After setting
P2-47, you can check the values of P2-44 and P2-46. If the value of P2-44 is not 0, it means there is a
resonance frequency in the system. Then, you can access P2-43 to see the resonance frequency (Hz).
When there is another resonance frequency, the information will be shown in P2-45 and P2-46.
2. If resonance still occurs, after you set P2-47 to 1 for 3 times, please manually adjust the setting of
resonance.
5-18
5.6.7 Tuning Mode and Parameters
Auto-set
Tuning mode P2-32 User-defined parameters Inertia adjustment
parameters
P1-37 (Inertia ratio of the motor)
P2-00 (Position control gain)
P2-04 (Speed control gain)
0
Manual mode N/A P2-06 (Speed integral The value remains
(default
compensation)
setting)
P2-25 (Low-pass filter of resonance
suppression)
P2-26 (Anti-interference gain)
P1-37
P2-00
Auto mode P2-04 P2-31 Frequency response of Continuous tuning
(continuous 1 P2-06 speed loop setting in auto (update the inertia
estimation) P2-25 mode (response level) every 30 minutes)
P2-26
P2-49
P1-37
P2-00 Non-continuous
Semi-auto mode P2-04 tuning (stop
P2-31 Frequency response of
updating the
(non-continuous 2 P2-06 speed loop setting in semi-
inertia after
estimation) P2-25 auto mode (response level)
operating for a
P2-26 while)
P2-49
When switching the mode from auto mode 1 to manual mode 0, the values of P1-37, P2-00, P2-04,
P2-06, P2-25, P2-26, and P2-49 will be modified to the ones in auto mode.
When switching the mode from semi-auto mode 2 to manual mode 0, the values of P1-37, P2-00,
P2-04, P2-06, P2-25, P2-26, and P2-49 will be modified to the ones in semi-auto mode.
5-19
5.6.8 Tuning in Manual Mode
The selection of position or speed response bandwidth should be determined by the machinary
stiffness and applications. Generally speaking, machines that requrie high-frequency positioning or
high precision need higher response bandwidth. However, it might easily cause the resonance.
And the machinary with higher sitffness is needed to avoid the resonance. When using the
unknown response bandwidth machinary, users could gradually increase the gain setting value to
increase the response bandwidth. Then, decrease the gain setting value until the resonance exists.
The followings are the related descriptions of gain adjustment.
 Position control gain (KPP, parameter P2-00)
This parameter determines the response of position loop. The bigger KPP value will cause the
higher response bandwidth of position loop. And it will cause better following error, smaller
position error, and shorter settling time. However, if the value is set too high, the machinery
will vibrate or overshoot when positioning. The calculation of position loop response bandwidth
is as the following:
KPP
Response bandwidth of position loop (Hz) = 2π
 Speed control gain (KVP, parameter P2-04)
This parameter determines the response of speed loop. The higher KVP value will cause the
higher response bandwidth of speed loop and better following error. However, if the value is
set too high, it would easily cause machinery resonance. The response bandwidth of speed
loop must be 4 ~ 6 times higher than the response bandwidth of position loop. Otherwise, the
machinery might vibrate or overshoot when positioning. The calculation of speed loop
response bandwidth is as the following:
KVP (1+P1−37/10)
Response bandwidth of speed loop (Hz) = ( ) × [ (1+JL/JM)
]
2π
JM: Motor Inertia; JL: Load Inertia; P1-37: 0.1 times
When P1-37 (estimation or setting) equals the real inertia ratio (JL/JM), the real speed loop
response bandwidth will be:
KVP (1 + P1.037/10)
Response bandwidth of speed loop (Hz) = ( ) × [ ]
2π (1 + JL/JM)
5-20
 Speed integral compensation (KVI, parameter P2-06)
The higher the KVI value is, the better the capability of eliminating the deviation will be.
However, if the value is set too big, it might easily cause the vibration of machinery. It is
suggested to set the value as the following:
KVI ≤ 1.5 × Response bandwidth of speed loop(Hz)
 Low-pass filter of resonance suppression (NLP, parameter P2-25)
The high value of inertia ratio will reduce the response bandwidth of speed loop. Therefore,
the KVP value must be increased to maintain the response bandwidth. During the process of
increasing the KVP value, it might cause machinary resonance. Please use this parameter to
elimiate the noise of resonance. The higher the value is, the better the capability of reducing
high-frequency noise will be. However, if the value is set too high, it would cause the
unstability of speed loop and overshoot. It is suggested to set the value as the following:
10000
NLP ≤
6 ×Response bandwidth of speed loop (Hz)
 Anti-interference gain (DST, parameter P2-26)
This parameter is used to strengthen the ability of resisting external force and gradually
eliminate overshoot during acceleration and deceleration. Its default value is 0. It is suggested
not to adjust the value in manual mode, unless it is for fine-tuning.
 Position feed forward gain (PFG, parameter P2-02)
It can reduce the position error and shorten the settling time. However, if the value is set too
high, it might cause overshoot. If the setting of e-gear ratio is bigger than 10, it might cause
the noise as well.
5-21
5-22
Chapter 6 Control Mode of
Operation
6.1 Selection of Operation Mode
Three basic operation modes are provided in this servo drive, position, speed, and torque. Users
can use single mode (only in one-mode control) or dual mode to control. The following table lists all
operation modes and description.
Short Setting
Mode Name Description
Name Code
The servo drive receives position command and
Position mode commands the motor to the target position. The
PT 00
(Terminal input) position command is input via terminal block and
receives pulse signal.
The servo drive receives position command and
commands the motor to the target position. The
Position mode
PR 01 position command is issued by register (64 sets
(Register input)
of register in total) and uses DI signal to select
the register.
The servo drive receives speed command and
commands the motor to the target speed. The
speed command can be issued by register (3
Speed Mode S 02 sets of registers in total) or the analog voltage
(-10V ~ +10V) transmitted through the external
Single
terminal block. DI signal is used to select the
Mode
command source.
The servo drive receives speed command and
commands the motor to the target speed. The
Speed mode speed command is issued by register (3 sets of
Sz 04
(No analog input) registers in total) and cannot be issued by the
external terminal block. DI signal is used to
select the command source.
The servo drive receives torque command and
commands the motor to the target torque. The
torque command can be issued by register (3
Torque mode T 03 sets of registers in total) or the analog voltage
(-10V ~ +10V) transmitted through the external
terminal block. DI signal is used to select the
command source.
6-1
Chapter 6 Control Mode of Operation ASDA-A2
Short Setting
Name Code
The servo drive receives torque command and
commands the motor to the target torque. The
Torque mode torque command can be issued by register (3
Tz 05
(No analog input) sets of registers in total) and cannot be issued
by the external terminal block. DI signal is used
to select the command source.
PT-S 06 Switch the mode of PT and S via DI signal.
PT-T 07 Switch the mode of PT and T via DI signal.
PR-S 08 Switch the mode of PR and S via DI signal.
Dual Mode
PR-T 09 Switch the mode of PR and T via DI signal.
S-T 0A Switch the mode of S and T via DI signal.
PT-PR 0D Switch the mode of PT and PR via DI signal.
PT-PR-S 0E Switch the mode of PT, PR, and S via DI signal.
Multi-mode
PT-PR-T 0F Switch the mode of PT, PR, and T via DI signal.
CANopen mode (use with Delta PLC)
CANopen 0B
DMCNET mode
Communication Mode
CANopen mode
CANopen 0C
EtherCAT mode
The steps of changing modes:

(1) Switch the servo drive to Servo Off status. Turning SON signal of digit input to be off can
complete this action.
(2) Use parameter P1-01. (Refer to chapter 8).
(3) After the setting is completed, cut the power off and restart the drive again.
The following sections describe the operation of each control mode, including control structure,
command source, and loop gain adjustment, etc.
6-2
ASDA-A2 Chapter 6 Control Mode of Operation
6.2 Position Mode
Position control mode is applicable in precise positioning, such as industrial machinery. The ASDA-
A2 servo drive has two command input modes: pulse and internal register. The servo drive
receives the pulse command for motor running direction and pulse input of up to 4 Mpps. For better
position control, the ASDA-A2 provides 64 sets of position command registers with two input
applications. The first one is that you can set different position values for the 64 command registers
before operation, and then use DI.POS0 – POS5 of the CN1 for switching. For the second
application, you can change the command register value through communication. To avoid the
discontinuousness when the command register switches, the servo drive provides Position Spine
Line (P-curve) for you to plan the motion. In the position closed-loop system, it mainly applies
Speed mode and uses the external incremental type position controller and pre-compensation as
auxiliary. Same as the Speed mode, two types of control mode (manual and auto) are available for
selection. This chapter only provides descriptions for incremental type position controllers, pre-
compensation and position command processing. There are two types of Position mode, PT and
PR. The PT command is the pulse input through the connector while the PR command is
determined by P6-00 – P7-27.
6.2.1 Position Command in PT Mode
PT position command is the pulse input from terminal block. There are three types of pulse and
each type has positive / negative logic which can be set in parameter P1-00. See as the followings.
Address: 0100H
P1-00▲ PTT External Pulse Input Type
0101H
Operational Related Section:
Panel / Software Communication
Interface： 6.2.1
Default： 0x0002
Control
PT
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0x0000 ~ 0x1142
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Hexadecimal
6-3
Settings：
 Pulse Type
0: AB phase pulse (4x)
1: Clockwise (CW) and Counterclockwise (CCW) pulse
2: Pulse + symbol
Other settings: reserved
 Filter Width
If the received frequency is much higher than the setting, it will be regarded as
the noise and filtered out.
Setting Min. pulse width*note1 Setting Min. pulse width*note1
Value (Low-speed filter frequency) Value (High-speed filter frequency)
0 600 ns (0.83 Mpps) 0 150 ns (3.33 Mpps)
1 2.4 us (208 Kpps) 1 600 ns (0.83 Mpps)
2 4.8 us (104 Kpps) 2 1.2 us (416 Kpps)
3 9.6 us (52 Kpps) 3 2.4 us (208 Kpps)
4 No filter function 4 No filter function
Note: 1) When the source of external pulse is from the high-speed differential signal and the setting
value is 0 (the high-speed filter frequency is 3.33 Mpps at the moment), then:
<150ns <150ns
150ns
150ns
Pulse Input Pulse Input
filtered signal filtered signal
When this pulse width is shorter than When this pulse width is shorter than
150 ns, it will be regarded as low level. 150 ns, it will be regarded as high level.
Two input pulses will be regarded as one. Two input pulses will be regarded as one.
>150 ns
>150 ns
When High, Low duty of the pulse width are longer than 150 ns,
it can ensure the pulse command will not be filtered.
If the user uses 2 ~ 4 MHz input pulse, it is suggested to set the filter value to 4.
Note: When the signal is the high-speed pulse specification of 4 Mpps and the settings value
of the filter is 4, then the pulse will not be filtered.
6-4
 Logic Type
High-speed and Low-speed Pulse Input
Logic Pulse Type
Forward Reverse
A Pulse Phase Lead A Pulse Phase Lag
(43) (43)
AB phase Pulse TH Pulse TH
(41) (41)
pulse
(36) (36)
Sign T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 Sign T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1
(37) (37)
Positive Logic
(43)
Pulse TH
(41)
0 CW and
CCW pulse (36)
T2 T2 T2 T2 T2 T2 T3 T2 T2 T2 T2 T2 T2
Sign TH
(37)
HSign = high HSign = low

(38) (38)
Pulse + HPulse TH HPulse TH
(29) (29)
Symbol T4 T5 T6 T5 T6 T5 T4 T4 T5 T6 T5 T6 T5 T4
(46) (46)
HSign HSign
(40) (40)
High-speed Pulse Input

Logic Pulse Type
Forward Reverse
Positive Logic
(38) (38)
0 (29) (29)
(46) (46)
HSign HSign
(40) (40)
Low-speed Pulse Input

Logic Pulse Type
Forward Reverse
Sign = low Sign = high
Positive Logic
(43) (43)
Pulse + Pulse TH Pulse TH
0 (41) (41)
(36) (36)
Sign Sign
(37) (37)
6-5
For digital circuit, it uses 0 and 1 to represent two status, high voltage and low voltage. In
Positive Logic, 1 represents high voltage and 0 represents low voltage and vice versa in
Negative Logic.
For example:
Positive Logic
Negative Logic
Max. Input Minimum time width

Pulse Specification
Frequency T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6
High-speed Differential
4 Mpps 62.5ns 125ns 250ns 200ns 125ns 125ns
pulse Signal
Differential
500 Kpps 0.5μs 1μs 2μs 2μs 1μs 1μs
Low-speed Signal
pulse Open-
200 Kpps 1.25μs 2.5μs 5μs 5μs 2.5μs 2.5μs
collector
Max. Input Voltage

Pulse Specification Forward Current
Frequency Specification
High-speed pulse Differential Signal 4 Mpps 5V < 25 mA
Differential Signal 500 Kpps 2.8V ~ 3.7V < 25 mA

Low-speed pulse
Open-collector 200 Kpps 24V (Max.) < 25 mA
 The Source of External Pulse:

0: Low-speed optical coupler (CN1 Pin: PULSE, SIGN)
1: High-speed differential (CN1 Pin: HPULSE, HSIGN)
Position pulse can be input from CN1 terminal, PULSE (43), /PULSE (41), HPULSE (38),
/HPULSE (29) and SIGN (36), /SIGN (37), HSIGN (46), /HSIGN (40). It could be open-collector
or Line Driver. Please refer to section 3.4.3 for wiring method.
6-6
6.2.2 Position Command in PR Mode
PR position command source of each axis is from the 64 sets of register which are constituted by
parameters (P6-00, P6-01) ~ (P7-26, P7-27). When going with the external DI/DO (CN1, POS0 ~
POS5 and CTRG), one of the previous 64 sets of register can be selected as the position
command. See the following table:
Position
POS5 POS4 POS3 POS2 POS1 POS0 CTRG Parameters
Command
P6-00
P0 0 0 0 0 0 0
P6-01
P6-02
P1 0 0 0 0 0 1
P6-03
~ ~
P6-98
P50 1 1 0 0 1 0
P6-99
P7-00
P51 1 1 0 0 1 1
P7-01
~ ~
P7-26
P63 1 1 1 1 1 1
P7-27
Status of POS0 ~ POS5: 0 means the DI is OFF; 1 means the DI is ON.
CTRG : the moment DI is from OFF to ON.
The application of absolute type and incremental type registers is rather extensive. It is more like a
simple procedure control. Users can complete the cyclic operation by referring to the above table.
For example, position command P1 is 10 turns and P2 is 20 turns. P1 is issued first and P2 comes
after. The following diagram shows the difference of both.
Absolute Type Incremental Type
20 turns
20 turns
10 turns 10 turns
6-7
6.2.3 Control Structure of Position Mode
The basic control structure is as the following diagram:
Position
Command
Position
Command
Processing
Unit
Position Control Speed Current

Motor
Unit Loop Loop
For a better control, the pulse signal should be processed and modified through position command
processing unit. The structure is shown as the diagram below.
Position command processing unit
GNUM0, GNUM1
Command Accel/Decel Moving

Delay time
CN1 source time speed S-curve
P5-40 1st Numerator (P1-44)
POS5~POS0 P6-00 P5-20 P5-60 filter
∣ Command
CTRG ∣ ∣
P5-55
∣ P1-36 selection
2nd Numerator (P2-60)
P7-27 P5-35 P5-75 P1-01
3rd Numerator (P2-61)
4th Numerator (P2-62)

Moving filter
High speed P1-01
Pulse Pulse type Denominator (P1-45)
Signal counter
P1-00
Low speed
Low-pass filter
P1-08
INHIBIT
Notch Filter
P1-25
∣
P1-26
Notch Filter
P1-27
∣
P1-28
The upper path of the above diagram is PR mode and the lower one is PT mode, which could be
selected via P1-01. Both modes can set E-gear ratio for the proper position resolution. Moreover,
either S-curve filter or low-pass filter can be used to smooth the command. See the description in
later parts.
6-8
Pulse Command Inhibit Input Function (INHP)

Use DI to select INHP (Refer to P2-10 to P2-17 and Table 8.1 INHP (45)) before using this function.
If not, this function will be unable to use. When DI (INHP) is ON, the pulse command will be
cleared in position control mode and the motor will stop running. (Only DI8 supports this function.)
INHP
ON OFF ON
Pulse
command
6.2.4 S-curve Filter (Position)
S-curve filter smoothes the motion command. With S-curve filter, the process of acceleration
becomes more continuous and the jerk will be smaller. It not only improves the performance when
the motor accelerates or decelerates, but also smoothes the operation of mechanical structure.
When the load inertia increases, the operation of the motor will be influenced by friction and inertia
during the time of activation and stop. However, the situation can be improved by increasing the
value of Acceleration / Deceleration Constant of S-Curve (TSL), Acceleration Constant of S-Curve
(TACC), and Deceleration Constant of S-Curve (TDEC). When the position command source is
pulse, its speed and angular acceleration is continuous. Thus, S-curve filter is not a must.
position
time (ms)
speed
rated
speed
time (ms)
torque
time (ms)
AC0 ~ 15
P1-36 P1-36
2 2 AC0 ~ 15
P1-36 P1-36
2 2
Position and speed S-curve and time setting (acceleration for position command)
6-9
position
time (ms)
speed time (ms)
rated
speed
torque
time (ms)
AC0 ~ 15 AC0 ~ 15
P1-36 P1-36 P1-36 P1-36
2 2 2 2
Position and speed S-curve and time setting (deceleration for position command)
Related Parameters:
Address: 0144H
P1-34 TACC Acceleration Constant of S-Curve
0145H
Interface： 6.3.3
Default： 200
Control
S
Mode：
Unit： ms
Range： 1 ~ 65500
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： Acceleration Constant of Speed:

P1-34, P1-35, P1-36, and the acceleration time of speed command
from zero to the rated speed all can be set individually. Even when
P1-36 is set to 0, it still has acceleration / deceleration of trapezoid-
curve.
Note: 1）When the source of speed command is analog and P1-36 is set to
0, it will disable S-curve function.
2）When the source of speed command is analog, the max. range of
P1-34 will be set within 20000 automatically.
6-10
Address: 0146H
P1-35 TDEC Deceleration Constant of S-Curve
0147H
Interface： 6.3.3
Default： 200
Control
S
Mode：
Unit： ms
Range： 1 ~ 65500
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： Deceleration Constant of Speed:

P1-34, P1-35, P1-36, and the deceleration time of speed command
from the rated speed to zero all can be set individually. Even when
curve.
Note: 1）When the source of speed command is analog, and P1-36 is set to
Acceleration / Deceleration Constant of S- Address: 0148H

P1-36 TSL
Curve 0149H
Interface： 6.3.3
Default： 0
Control
S / PR
Mode：
Unit： ms
Range： 0 ~ 65500 (0: disable this function)
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
6-11
Settings： Acceleration / Deceleration Constant of S-Curve:
P1-34: Set the acceleration time of acceleration / deceleration of

trapezoid-curve
P1-35: Set the deceleration time of acceleration / deceleration of
trapezoid-curve
P1-36: Set the smoothing time of S-curve acceleration and
deceleration
P1-34, P1-35, and P1-36 can be set individually. Even when P1-36 is
set to 0, it still has acceleration / deceleration of trapezoid-curve.
Version after V1.036 sub00 provides the compensation function of
following error.
P1-36 = 0 P1-36 = 1 P1-36 > 1
Smoothing function of
Disable Disable Enable
S-curve
Compensation
function of following Disable Enable Determined by P2-68.X
error
6.2.5 Electronic Gear Ratio
Related parameters:
Address: 0158H
P1-44▲ GR1 Gear Ratio (Numerator) (N1)
0159H
Interface： 6.2.5
Default： 128
Control
PT / PR
Mode：
Unit： Pulse
Range： 1 ~ (229-1)
Data Size： 32-bit
6-12
Format： Decimal
Settings： Please refer to P2-60 to P2-62 for the setting of multiple gear ratio
(numerator).
Note: 1）In PT mode, the setting value can be changed when Servo ON.
2）In PR mode, the setting value can be changed when Servo OFF.
3）In communication mode (DMCNET / CANopen / EtherCAT), if you
cycle power to the drive, the E-Gear ratio is set to the default value
of the communication protocol. Resetting to the default value
results in the reconstruction of the absolute coordinate system, so
you must re-do the homing procedure. If you do not want the
absolute coordinates to be reset to the default value, please set
P3-12.Z to 1. For details, please refer to P3-12.
Address: 015AH
P1-45 GR2 Gear Ratio (Denominator) (M)
015BH
Interface： 6.2.5
Default： 10
Control
PT / PR
Mode：
Unit： Pulse
Range： 1 ~ (231-1)
Data Size： 32-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： If the setting is wrong, the servo motor will easily have sudden
unintended acceleration.
Please follow the rules for setting:
The setting of pulse input:
Pulse Position
input N command N
f2 = f1 x
f1 M f2 M
Range of command pulse input: 1／50＜Nx／M＜25600
Note: 1） The setting value cannot be changed when Servo ON is neither in

PT nor in PR mode.
2） In communication mode (DMCNET / CANopen / EtherCAT), if you
cycle the power to the drive, the E-Gear ratio is set to the default
value of the communication protocol. Resetting to the default value
6-13
Electronic gear provides simple ratio change of travel distance. The high electronic gear ratio
would cause the position command to be the stepped command. S-curve or low-pass filter can
be used to improve the situation. When electronic gear ratio is set to 1, the motor will turn one
cycle for every 10000 pulse/rev. When electronic gear ratio is changed to 0.5, then every two
pulses from the command will be referred to one pulse of motor encoder.
For example (rotary motor): after setting the electronic gear ratio properly, the moving distance
of the object is 1 μm/pulse, which is easier to use.
WL: Working Load

WT: Working Table
Ball Screw
Motor (Encoder resolution: A/B, Z) Pitch: 3 mm
Encoder: 2500 pulse/rev
Gear Ratio Moving distance of each pulse command

Electronic gear 1 3  1000 3000
    m
is unapplied. 1 4  2500 10000
Electronic gear 10000
  1m
is applied. 3000
6-14
6.2.6 Low-pass Filter
Related parameter:
Smooth Constant of Position Command (Low- Address: 0110H
P1-08 PFLT
pass Filter) 0111H
Interface： 6.2.6
Default： 0
Control
PT / PR
Mode：
Unit： 10 ms
Range： 0 ~ 1000
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Example： 11 = 110 ms
Settings： 0: Disabled
6-15
6.2.7 Timing Diagram in Position Mode (PR)
In PR mode, the position command is selected by DI signal (POS0 ~ POS5 and CTRG) of CN1.
Please refer to Section 6.2.2 for the information about DI signal and its selected register.
Followings are the timing diagrams.
Internal register
External DI
Internal DO
TPOS: TPOS is on when the motor speed is lower than the speed set in
P1-38.
6-16
6.2.8 Gain Adjustment of Position Loop
Before setting the position control unit, users have to manually (P2-32) complete the setting of
speed control unit since the speed loop is included in position loop. Then, set the proportional gain
(parameter P2-00) and feed forward gain (parameter P2-02) of position loop. Users also can use
the auto mode to set the gain of speed and position control unit automatically.
1) Proportional gain: Increase the gain so as to enhance the response bandwidth of position loop.
2) Feed forward gain: Minimize the deviation of phase delay.
fv
The position loop bandwidth cannot exceed the speed loop bandwidth. It is suggested that fp  .
4
fv: response bandwidth of speed loop (Hz).
KPP = 2 ×  × fp.
fp: response bandwidth of position loop (Hz).
For example, the desired position bandwidth is 20 Hz  KPP = 2 ×  × 20= 125.
Related parameters:
Address: 0200H
P2-00 KPP Position Loop Gain
0201H
Interface： 6.2.8
Default： 35
Control
PT / PR
Mode：
Unit： rad/s
Range： 0 ~ 2047
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： When the value of position loop gain is increased, the position
response can be enhanced and the position error can be reduced.
If the value is set too big, it may easily cause vibration and noise.
6-17
Address: 0204H
P2-02 PFG Position Feed Forward Gain
0205H
Interface： 6.2.8
Default： 50
Control
PT / PR
Mode：
Unit： %
Range： 0 ~ 100
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： If the position command is changed smoothly, increasing the gain

value can reduce the position following error.
If the position command is not changed smoothly, decreasing the gain
value can tackle the problem of mechanical vibration.
Position Control Unit
Position Feed
Position Feed
Forward Low-pass
Differentiator Forward Gain
Filter
P2-02
P2-03
Propotional +
Position +
Gain Max. Speed Limit
Command + P2-00 P1-55
- Switching Rate of
Propotional Gain
P2-01 Gain Switching
P2-27 Speed
Command
+
Position
Encoder
Counter
6-18
When the value of proportional gain, KPP, is set too big, the bandwidth of position loop will be
increased and diminish the phase margin. And the motor rotor rotates vibrantly in forward and
reverse directions at the moment. Thus, KPP has to be decreased until the rotor stops vibrating.
When the external torque interrupts, the over-low KPP cannot meet the demand of position error.
In this situation, parameter P2-02 can effectively reduce the following error.
6-19
6.2.9 Low-frequency Vibration Suppression in Position Mode
If the stiffness is not enough, the mechanical transmission will continue to vibrate even when the
motor stops after completing the positioning command. The function of low-frequency vibration
suppression can eliminate the vibration of mechanical transmission. The range is between 1.0 Hz
and 100.0 Hz. Both manual setting and auto setting are provided.
Auto setting:
If it is difficult to find the frequency, enable the function of auto low-frequency vibration suppression
to automatically search the frequency of low-frequency vibration. If P1-29 is set to 1, the system
will disable the function of low-frequency vibration suppression automatically and start to search
the vibration frequency. When the detected frequency remains at the same level, P1-29 will be set
to 0 automatically and set the first frequency in P1-25 and set P1-26 to 1. The second frequency
will be set in P1-27 and then set P1-28 to 1. If P1-29 is automatically set back to 0 and the low-
frequency vibration still exists, please check if the function of P1-26 or P1-28 is enabled. If the
values of P1-26 and P1-28 are both 0, it means no frequency has been detected. Please decrease
the value of P1-30 and set P1-29 to 1 so as to search the vibration frequency again. Please note
that when the detection level is set too small, the noise will be regarded as the low-frequency
vibration.
Flowchart of auto low-frequency vibration suppression:
6-20
Note 1: When the values of P1-26 and P1-28 are both 0, it means it is unable to search the frequency.
It is probably because the detection level is set too high and is unable to detect the low-frequency
vibration.
Note 2: When the value of P1-26 or P1-28 is not set to 0 and the vibration still cannot be reduced, it is
probably because the detection level is set too low, and the system regards the noise or other non-
primary frequency as the low-frequency vibration.
Note 3: When the process of auto vibration suppression is completed and the vibration still cannot be
diminished, P1-25 or P1-27 can be manually set to suppress the vibration if the frequency (Hz) of the
low-frequency vibration is identified.
Related parameters:
Auto Low-frequency Vibration Supression Address: 013AH
P1-29 AVSM
Setting 013BH
Interface： 6.2.9
Default： 0
Control
PT / PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0 ~ 1
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： 0: Disable the automatic low-frequency vibration detection function.

1: Disable the function automatically after vibration suppression. The
value resets to 0 automatically.
Description of Auto Mode Setting:
When the value is 1, vibration suppression is in automatic mode. When
the vibration cannot be detected or the vibration frequency is stable,
the system resets the parameter to 0 and automatically saves the
vibration suppression frequency to P1-25.
6-21
Address: 013CH
P1-30 VCL Low-frequency Vibration Detection
013DH
Interface： 6.2.9
Default： 500
Control
PT / PR
Mode：
Unit： Pulse
Range： 1 ~ 8000
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： When enabling the auto suppression (P1-29 = 1), it will automatically
search the detection level. The lower the value is, the more sensitive
the detection will be. However, it is easy to misjudge the noise or
regard the other low-frequency vibration as the suppression frequency.
If the value is bigger, it will make more precise judgment. However,
if the vibration of the mechanism is smaller, it might not detect the
frequency of low-frequency vibration.
P1-30 is to set the range to detect the magnitude of low-frequency vibration. When the
frequency is not being detected, it is probably because the value of P1-30 is set too big which
exceeds the range of vibration. It is suggested to decrease the value of P1-30. Please note that
if the value is too small, the system might regard the noise as the vibration frequency. If the
SCOPE is available, it can be used to observe the range of position error (pulse) between upper
and lower magnitude of the curve and set up the appropriate value of P1-30.
Manual Setting:
There are two sets of low-frequency vibration suppression filters. One is parameters P1-25 ~
P1-26 and the other is parameters P1-27 ~ P1-28. These two sets of filters can be used to
eliminate two different frequency vibrations. Parameters P1-25 and P1-27 are used to suppress
the low-frequency vibration. The function is working only when the parameter setting value of
low-frequency vibration is close to the real vibration frequency. Parameters P1-26 and P1-28 are
used to set the response after filtering. The bigger the setting value of P1-26 and P1-28 is, the
better response will be. However, if the value is set too big, the motor might not operate
smoothly. The default values of parameters P1-26 and P1-28 are 0, which means the function is
disabled. Followings are the related parameters:
6-22
Address: 0132H
P1-25 VSF1 Low-frequency Vibration Suppression (1)
0133H
Interface： 6.2.9
Default： 1000
Control
PT / PR
Mode：
Unit： 0.1 Hz
Range： 10 ~ 1000
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Example： 150 = 15 Hz
Settings： The setting value of the first low-frequency vibration suppression.

If P1-26 is set to 0, then it will disable the first low-frequency vibration
suppression filter.
Low-frequency Vibration Suppression Gain Address: 0134H

P1-26 VSG1
(1) 0135H
Interface： 6.2.9
Default： 0
Control
PT / PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0 ~ 9 (0: Disable the first low-frequency

vibration suppression filter)
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： The first low-frequency vibration suppression gain. The bigger value it
is, the better the position response will be. However, if the value is set
too big, the motor will not be able to smoothly operate. It is suggested
to set the value to 1.
6-23
Address: 0136H
0137H
Interface： 6.2.9
Default： 1000
Control
PT / PR
Mode：
Unit： 0.1 Hz
Range： 10 ~ 1000
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： The setting value of the second low-frequency vibration suppression.

If P1-28 is set to 0, then it will disable the second low-frequency
vibration suppression filter.
Address: 0138H
P1-28 VSG2 Low-frequency Vibration Suppression Gain (2)
0139H
Interface： 6.2.9
Default： 0
Control
PT / PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0 ~ 9 (0: Disable the second low-frequency

vibration suppression filter)
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： The second low-frequency vibration suppression gain. The bigger value
it is, the better the position response will be. However, if the value is set
too big, the motor will not be able to smoothly operate. It is suggested to
set the value to 1.
6-24
6.3 Speed Mode
Speed control mode (S or Sz) is applicable in precision speed control, such as CNC machine tools.
This servo drive includes two types of command input, analog and register. Analog command input
can use external voltage to control the motor speed. There are two methods in register input. One
is used before operation. Users set different value of speed command in three registers, and then
use the CN1 DI signals, SP0 and SP1, for switching. The other method is to change the value of
register by communication. In order to deal with the problem of non-continuous speed command
when switching register, a complete S-curve program is provided. In close-loop system, this servo
drive adopts gain adjustment and integrated PI controller and two modes (manual and auto) for
selection.
In manual mode, users can set all parameters and all auto or auxiliary functions will be disabled.
While in auto mode, it provides the functions of load inertia estimation and parameter adjustment.
Meanwhile, parameters set by users will be regarded as the default value.
6.3.1 Selection of Speed Mode
There are two types of speed command source, analog voltage and internal parameters.
The selection is determined by CN1 DI signal. See as the followings.
Speed CN1 DI signal

Command Source Content Range
Command SPD1 SPD0
External Voltage difference
S analog between V-REF -10V ~ +10V
S1 0 0 Mode signal and GND
Speed command is
Sz N/A 0
0
S2 0 1 P1-09
S3 1 0 Register parameters P1-10 -60000 ~ 60000
S4 1 1 P1-11
 Status of SPD0 - SPD1: 0 means DI is OFF, 1 means DI is ON.
 When both SPD0 and SPD1 are 0, if it is in Sz mode, the command will be 0. Thus, if there
is no need to use analog voltage as the speed command, Sz mode can be applied to tackle
the problem of zero-drift. If it is in S mode, the command will be the voltage difference
between V-REF and GND. The range of input voltage is between -10V and +10V, and its
corresponding speed is adjustable (P1-40).
 When one of SPD0 and SPD1 is not 0, the speed command is from the internal parameter.
The command is activated after changing the status of SPD0 - SPD1. There is no need to
6-25
use CTRG for triggering.
 The setting range of internal parameters is between -60000 and 60000.

Setting value = setting range x unit (0.1 r/min).
For example: P1-09 = +30000, setting value = +30000 x 0.1 r/min = +3000 r/min
The speed command not only can be issued in speed mode (S or Sz), but also in torque mode
(T or Tz) as the speed limit.
6.3.2 Control Structure of Speed Mode
The basic control structure is shown as the following diagram:
Speed Command
Speed
Command
Processing
Unit
Speed
Estimator
Resonance Current
Speed Control Torque Limit Motor
Suppression Loop
Unit
Unit
The speed command processing unit is to select speed command source according to Section
6.3.1, including the scaling (P1-40) setting and S-curve setting. The speed control unit manages
the gain parameters of the servo drive and calculates the current command for servo motor in time.
The resonance suppression unit is to suppress the resonance of mechanism. Detailed descriptions
are shown as the following:
Here firstly introduces the function of speed command processing unit. Its structure is as the
following diagram.
SPD0, SPD1 signal of CN1
Register S-curve Filter

P1-09 ~ P1-11 P1-36
Command
Low-pass Filter
Selection
P1-06
P1-01
Analog Command
Scaling
A/D Filter
P1-40
P1-59
Analog signal
6-26
The upper path is the command from register while the lower one is external analog command.
The command is selected according to the status of SPD0, SPD1, and P1-01(S or Sz). Usually,
S-curve and low-pass filter are applied for having a smooth resonance of command.
6.3.3 Smooth Speed Command
S-curve Filter
During the process of acceleration or deceleration, S-curve filter applies the program of three-stage
acceleration curve for smoothing the motion command, which generates the continuous
acceleration. It is for avoiding the jerk (the differentiation of acceleration) came from the sudden
command change and indirectly causes the resonance and noise. Users can use acceleration
constant of S-curve (TACC) to adjust the slope changed by acceleration, deceleration constant of
S-curve (TDEC) to adjust the slope changed by deceleration, and acceleration / deceleration
constant of S-curve (TSL) to improve the status of motor activation and stop. The calculation of the
time to complete the command is provided.
T (ms) signifies the operation time and S (r/min) signifies the absolute Speed command, which is
the absolute value of the initial speed minus the end speed.
Speed
Rated Acceleration Deceleration
speed
Time
0 (ms)
Torque
Time
0
(ms)
P1-36 P1-34 P1-36
2 2
P1-36 P1-35 P1-36
2 2
S-curve and Time setting
6-27
Related parameters:
Address: 0144H
0145H
Interface： 6.3.3
Default： 200
Control
S
Mode：
Unit： ms
Range： 1 ~ 65500
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： Acceleration Constant of speed:

P1-34, P1-35, P1-36, and the acceleration time of speed command
from zero to the rated speed all can be set individually. Even when
curve.
Address: 0146H
0147H
Interface： 6.3.3
Default： 200
Control
S
Mode：
Unit： ms
Range： 1 ~ 65500
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： Deceleration Constant of speed:

P1-34, P1-35, P1-36, and the deceleration time of speed command
from the rated speed to zero all can be set individually. Even when
curve.
6-28

P1-36 TSL
Curve 0149H
Interface： 6.3.3
Default： 0
Control
S / PR
Mode：
Unit： ms
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal

trapezoid-curve
trapezoid-curve
deceleration
following error.
P1-36 = 0 P1-36 = 1 P1-36 > 1
S-curve
Compensation
error
6-29
Analog Speed Command Filter

Analog speed command filter is provided especially for ASDA-A2 series users. It mainly helps with
buffer when the analog input signal changes too fast.
Speed (rpm) Analog speed command Motor Torque
3000
0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Time (sec)
-3000
Analog speed command filter smoothes the analog input command. Its time program is the same
as S-curve filter in normal speed. Also, the speed curve and the acceleration curve are both
continuous. The above is the diagram of analog speed command filter. The slope of speed
command in acceleration and deceleration is different. Users could adjust the time setting (P1-34,
P1-35, and P1-36) according to the actual situation to improve the performance.
Command End Low-pass Filter

It is usually used to eliminate the unwanted high-frequency response or noise. It also can smooth
the command.
Related parameter:
Address: 010CH
P1-06 SFLT Analog Speed Command (Low-pass Filter)
010DH
Interface： 6.3.3
Default： 0
Control
S / Sz
Mode：
Unit： ms
Data Size： 16-bit
6-30
Format： Decimal
6.3.4 The Scaling of Analog Command
The motor speed command is controlled by the analog voltage difference between V_REF and
VGND. Use parameter P1-40 to adjust the speed-control slope and its range.
5000rpm
The speed control ramp is
determined by parameter P1-40
3000rpm
-10 -5
5 10 Analog Input Voltage (V)
-3000rpm
-5000rpm
Related parameter:
For example, if you set P1-40 to 2000, when the input voltage is 10V, the speed command is
2000 r/min.
Address: 0150H
P1-40 VCM Maximum Speed of Analog Speed Command
0151H
Interface： 6.3.4
Default： Same as the rated speed of each model

Control
S/T
Mode：
Unit： r/min
Range： 0 ~ 5000
Data Size： 32-bit
Format： Decimal
6-31
Settings： Maximum Speed of Analog Speed Command:

In speed mode, the analog speed command inputs the swing speed
setting of the max. voltage (10V).
For example, if the setting is 3000, when the external voltage input is
10V, it means the speed control command is 3000 r/min. If the external
voltage input is 5V, then the speed control command is
1500 r/min.
Speed control command = input voltage value x setting value/10
In torque mode, analog speed limit inputs the swing speed limit setting
of the max. voltage (10V).
Speed limit command = input voltage value x setting value/10
6.3.5 Timing Diagram in Speed Mode
S4 (P1-11)
Internal speed
Internal register S3 (P1-10)
command
S2 (P1-09)
External analog
voltage or zero (0) S1
SPD0 OFF ON OFF ON
External I/O signal SPD1 OFF ON
SON ON
Note:
1) OFF means the contact point is open while ON means the contact point is close.
2) When it is in Sz mode, the speed command S1 = 0; when it is in S mode, the speed command S1 is the
external analog voltage input.
3) When the servo drive is On, please select the command according to SPD0 - SPD1 status.
6-32
6.3.6 Gain Adjustment of Speed Loop
Here introduces the function of speed control unit. The following shows its structure.
Speed Control Unit
Speed Feed
Differentiator Forward Gain
P2-07 System Inertia J
(1+P1-37)*JM
Propotional + +
Gain +
+ + P2-04
- + +
Integrator
Gain Switching
Switching
P2-27 Load Inertia
Rate
Ratio
P2-05
Speed Integral P1-37
Compensation
P2-06
Motor Inertia
Gain Switching JM
P2-27
Torque Constant Torque

Current Command
Reciprocal
Command
1/KT
Low-pass Filter Speed

Encoder
P2-49 Estimator
Many kinds of gain in speed control unit are adjustable. Two ways, manual and auto, are provided
for selection.
Manual: All parameters are set by users and the auto or auxiliary function will be disabled in this
mode.
Auto: General load inertia estimation is provided. It adjusts the parameter automatically. Its
framework is divided into PI auto gain adjustment and PDFF auto gain adjustment.
Parameter P2-32 can be used to adjust the gain.

Address: 0240H
P2-32▲ AUT2 Tuning Mode Selection
0241H
Interface： 5.6 and 6.3.6
Default： 0x0000
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0x0000 ~ 0x0002
6-33
Data Size： 16-bit
Settings: 0: Manual Mode
1: Auto Mode (continuous adjustment)
2: Semi-auto Mode (non-continuous adjustment)
Relevant description of manual mode setting:
When P2-32 is set to 0, parameters related to gain control, such as
P2-00, P2-04, P2-06, P2-07, P2-25, and P2-26, all can be set by the
user.
When switching mode from auto or semi-auto to manual, parameters
about gain will be updated automatically.
Relevant description of auto mode setting:

Continue to estimate the system inertia, save the inertia ratio to P1-37
every 30 minutes automatically and refer to the stiffness and bandwidth
setting of P2-31.
1. Set the system to manual mode 0 from auto 1 or semi-auto 2, the
system will save the estimated inertia value to P1-37 automatically
and set the corresponding parameters.
2. Set the system to auto mode 1 or semi-auto mode 2 from manual
mode 0, please set P1-37 to the appropriate value.
3. Set the system to manual mode 0 from auto mode 1, P2-00, P2-04,
P2-06, P2-25, P2-26, and P2-49 will be modified to the
corresponding parameters of auto mode.
4. Set the system to manual mode 0 from semi-auto mode 2, P2-00,
P2-04, P2-06, P2-25, P2-26, and P2-49 will be modified to the
corresponding parameters of semi-auto mode.
Relevant description of semi-auto mode setting:

1. When the system inertia is stable, the value of P2-33 will be 1 and
the system stops estimating. The inertia value will be saved to
P1-37 automatically. When switching mode to semi-auto mode
(from manual or auto mode), the system starts to estimate again.
2. When the system inertia is over the range, the value of P2-33 will
be 0 and the system starts to estimate and adjust again.
Manual Mode
When P2-32 is set to 0, users can define Speed Loop Gain (P2-04), Speed Integral Compensation
(P2-06), and Speed Feed Forward Gain (P2-07). Influence of each parameter is as the followings.
Proportional gain: To increase proportional gain can enhance the response bandwidth of speed
loop.
Integral gain: To increase the integral gain could increase the low-frequency stiffness of speed loop,
reduce the steady-state error and sacrifice the phase margin. The overhigh integral
gain will cause the instability of the system.
Feed forward gain: Diminish the deviation of phase delay.
6-34
Related parameters:
Address: 0208H
P2-04 KVP Speed Loop Gain
0209H
Interface： 6.3.6
Default： 500
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： rad/s
Range： 0 ~ 8191
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： Increasing the value of speed loop gain can enhance the speed
response. However, if the value is set too big, it would easily cause
resonance and noise.
Address: 020CH
P2-06 KVI Speed Integral Compensation
020DH
Interface： 6.3.6
Default： 100
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： rad/s
Range： 0 ~ 1023
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： Increasing the value of speed integral compensation can enhance

speed response and diminish the deviation of speed control. However,
if the value is set too big, it would easily cause resonance and noise.
6-35
Address: 020EH
P2-07 KVF Speed Feed Forward Gain
020FH
Interface： 6.3.6
Default： 0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： %
Range： 0 ~ 100
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： When the speed control command runs smoothly, increasing the gain
value can reduce the speed following error. If the command does not
run smoothly, decreasing the gain value can reduce the mechanical
vibration during operation.
Theoretically, stepping response can be used to explain proportional gain (KVP), integral gain
(KVI), and feed forward gain (KVF). Here, the frequency domain and time domain are used to
illustrate the basic principle.
6-36
Frequency Domain
6-37
Time Domain
The bigger KVP value causes higher

bandwidth and shortens the rising
time. However, if the value is set too
big, the phase margin will be too
small.
To steady-state error, the result is
not as good as KVI. But it helps to
reduce the dynamic following error.
The bigger KVI value causes greater low-

frequency gain and shortens the time the
steady-state error returns to zero. However,
the phase margin will dramatically decrease
as well.
To steady-state error, it is very helpful but
shows no benefit to dynamic following error.
If the KVF value closes to 1, the feed

forward compensation will be more
complete and the dynamic following
error will become smaller. However,
if the KVF value is set too big, it
would cause vibration.
6-38
Generally, instrument is needed when applying frequency domain for measurement. Users are
required to adopt the measurement techniques; while time domain only needs a scope and goes
with the analog input/output terminal provided by the servo drive. Thus, time domain is frequently
used to adjust PI controller. The abilities of PI controller to deal with the resistance of torque load
and the following command are the same. That is to say, the following command and resistance of
torque load have the same performance in frequency domain and time domain. Users can reduce
the bandwidth by setting the low-pass filter in command end.
Auto Mode
Auto mode adopts adaptive principle. The servo drive automatically adjusts the parameters
according to the external load. Since the adaptive principle takes longer time, it will be unsuitable if
the load changes too fast. It would be better to wait until the load inertia is steady or changes
slowly. Depending on the speed of signal input, the adaptive time will be different from one another.
Motor Speed
Inertia Estimation
Inertia Measurement
6-39
6.3.7 Resonance Suppression
When resonance occurs, it is probably because the stiffness of the control system is too strong or
the response bandwidth is too fast. Eliminating these two factors might improve the situation. In
addition, low-pass filter (parameter P2-25) and notch filter (parameter P2-23 and P2-24) are
provided to suppress the resonance if not changing the control parameters.
Related parameters:
Address: 022EH
P2-23 NCF1 Resonance Suppression (Notch filter) (1)
022FH
Interface： 6.3.7
Default： 1000
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： Hz
Range： 50 ~ 1000
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： The first setting value of resonance frequency. If P2-24 is set to 0,

this function is disabled. P2-43 and P2-44 are the second Notch filter.
Resonance Suppression (Notch filter) Address: 0230H

P2-24 DPH1
Attenuation Rate (1) 0231H
Interface： 6.3.7
Default： 0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -dB
Range： 0 ~ 32 (0: disable the function of Notch filter)
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： The first resonance suppression (notch filter) attenuation rate.

When this parameter is set to 0, the function of Notch filter is disabled.
Note： If the value of attenuation rate is set to 5, then, it would be -5 dB.
6-40
Address: 0256H
0257H
Interface： 6.3.7
Default： 1000
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： Hz
Range： 50 ~ 2000
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： The second setting value of resonance frequency. If P2-44 is set to 0,

this function is disabled. P2-23 and P2-24 are the first Notch filter.

P2-44 DPH2
Interface： 6.3.7
Default： 0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -dB
Range： 0 ~ 32 (0: disable Notch filter)
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： The second resonance suppression (notch filter) attenuation rate.

Note: If the value of attenuation rate is set to 5, then it would be -5 dB.
Address: 025AH
025BH
Operation Related Section:
Panel / Software Communication 6.3.7
Interface：
Default： 1000
Control
ALL
Mode：
6-41
Unit： Hz
Range： 50 ~ 2000
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： DEC
Settings： The third setting value of resonance frequency. If P2-46 is set to 0, this
function is disabled. P2-23 and P2-24 are the first Notch filter.
Resonance Suppression (Notch filter) Address: 025CH

P2-46 DPH3
Attenuation Rate (3) 025DH
Interface： 6.3.7
Default： 0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -dB
Range： 0 ~ 32
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： The third group of resonance suppression (Notch filter) attenuation

rate. Set the value to 0 to disable the function of Notch filter.
Address: 0232H
P2-25 NLP Low-pass Filter of Resonance Suppression
0233H
Interface： 6.3.7
Default： 0.2 (under 1 kW) or 2 (under 1 kW) or

0.5 (other models) 5 (other models)
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： 1 ms 0.1 ms
Range： 0.0 ~ 100.0 0 ~ 1000
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： One decimal Decimal
Example： 1.5 = 1.5 ms 15 = 1.5 ms
6-42
Settings： Set the low-pass filter of resonance suppression. When the value is set
to 0, the function of low-pass filter is disabled.
Feed Forward
Differentiator Gain
P2-07 Speed Control Unit
Low-pass Filter
P2-25
PI Controller
P2-04, P2-06
Current
Sensor
Notch Filter 1
P2-23, P2-24
Notch Filter 2 Notch Filter 3 Current Controller
P2-43, P2-44 P2-45, P2-46
PWM
Auto Resonance Suppression Mode Setting Torque

and Resonance Suppression Detection Level Load
P2-47, P2-48
Motor
Speed Estimator Encoder
There are two sets of auto resonance suppression, one is P2-43 and P2-44 and the other is P2-45
and P2-46. When the resonance occurs, set P2-47 to 1 or 2 (enable the function of resonance
suppression), the servo drive searches the point of resonance frequency and suppresses the
resonance automatically. Write the point of frequency into P2-43 and P2-45 and write the
attenuation rate into P2-44 and P2-46. When P2-47 is set to 1, the system will set P2-47 to 0
(disable the function of auto suppression) automatically after completing resonance suppression
and the system is stable for 20 minutes. When P2-47 is set to 2, the system will keep searching the
point of resonance.
When P2-47 is set to 1 or 2, but resonance still exists, please confirm the value of parameter
P2-44 and P2-46. If one of them is 32, it is suggested to reduce the speed bandwidth first and then
start to estimate again. If the value of both is smaller than 32 and resonance still exists, please set
P2-47 to 0 first and then manually increase the value of P2-44 and P2-46. It is suggested to reduce
the bandwidth if the resonance has not been improved. Then use the function of auto resonance
suppression.
When manually increasing the value of P2-44 and P2-46, please check if the value of both is
bigger than 0. If yes, it means the frequency point of P2-43 and P2-45 is the one searched by auto
resonance suppression. If the value of both is 0, it means the default, 1000 of P2-43 and P2-45 is
not the one searched by auto resonance suppression. Deepen the resonance suppression
attenuation rate might worsen the situation.
6-43
Settings of P2-47
Current Value Desired Value Function
Clear the setting value of P2-43 ~ P2-46 and enable
0 1
auto resonance suppression function.
0 2
Save the setting value of P2-43 ~ P2-46 and disable
1 0
1 1
Do not clear the setting value of P2-43 ~ P2-46 and
1 2 enable auto resonance suppression function
continuously.
Save the setting value of P2-43 ~ P2-46 and disable
2 0
2 1
Do not clear the setting value of P2-43 ~ P2-46 and
2 2 enable auto resonance suppression function
continuously.
6-44
Flowchart of Auto Resonance Suppression:
Drive the machine

by servo system
Check if vibration No
occurs
Yes
Set P2-47 = 1
No
Check if vibration
occurs
Yes
No Set P2-47 = 1 for

three times
Yes
Yes P2-44 = 32
Decrease bandwidth
or P2-46 = 32
No
Set P2-47 = 0
If P2-44 >0, value of P2-44 should + 1

If P2-46 >0, value of P2-46 should + 1
No Check if vibration
condition has improved
Yes
Yes
Check if vibration
occurs
No
Set P2-47 = 0
Complete
6-45
Here illustrates the effect via low-pass filter (parameter P2-25). The following diagram is the
system open-loop gain with resonance.
Gain
Frequency
When the value of P2-25 is increased from 0, BW becomes smaller (See as the following diagram).
Although it solves the problem of resonance frequency, the response bandwidth and phase margin
is reduced.
Gain
0dB Frequency
BW
If users know the resonance frequency, notch filter (parameter P2-23 and P2-24) can directly
eliminate the resonance. The frequency setting range of notch filter is merely from 50 to 1000 Hz.
The suppression strength is from 0 to 32 dB. If the resonance frequency is not within the range, it
is suggested to use low-pass filter (parameter P2-25).
Here firstly illustrates the influence brought by notch filter (P2-23 and P2-24) and low-pass filter
(P2-25). The following diagrams are the system of open-loop gain with resonance.
Resonance suppression with notch filter
Resonance
Resonance
Gain conditions
Point Gain Gain
Notch Filter is suppressed
0db
Low-pass Low-pass
Frequency Attenuation Frequency
Rate P2-24
Resonance Frequency Frequency Resonance Frequency

Resonance
Frequency . Frequency Frequency .
P2-23
6-46
Resonance suppression with low-pass filter

.
Resonance
Resonance conditions
Gain Gain Low-pass Filter Gain
Point is suppressed
Attenuation
Rate -3db Cut-off Frequency
0db
Low-pass of Low-pass Filter Low-pass
Frequency -
= 10000 / P2-25 Hz Frequency
Resonance Frequency Frequency Frequency

Resonance
Frequency Frequency .
When the value of P2-25 is increased from 0, BW becomes smaller. Although it solves the problem
of resonance frequency, the response bandwidth and phase margin is reduced. Also, the system
becomes unstable.
If users know the resonance frequency, notch filter (parameters P2-23 and P2-24) can directly
eliminate the resonance. In this case, notch filter will be more helpful than low-pass filter. However,
if the resonance frequency drifts because of time or other factors, notch filter will not do.
6-47
6.4 Torque Mode
Torque control mode (T or Tz) is appropriate in torque control applications, such as printing
machine, winding machine, etc. There are two kinds of command source, analog input and register.
Analog command input uses external voltage to control the torque of the motor while register uses
the internal parameters (P1-12 ~ P1-14) as the torque command.
6.4.1 Selection of Torque Command
Torque command sources are external analog voltage and parameters. It uses CN1 DI signal for
selection. See as below.
Torque DI signal of CN1
Command Source Content Range
Command TCM1 TCM0
Voltage difference
External analog between
T -10V ~ +10V
command
T1 0 0 Mode T-REF and GND
Torque command
Tz None 0
is 0
T2 0 1 P1-12
-300% ~
T3 1 0 Register Parameters P1-13
300%
T4 1 1 P1-14
 The status of TCM0 ~ TCM1: 0 means DI is OFF and 1 means DI is ON.
 When TCM0 = TCM1 = 0, if it is in Tz mode, then the command is 0. Thus, if there is no

need to use analog voltage as torque command, Tz mode is applicable and can avoid the
problem of zero drift. If it is in T mode, the command will be the voltage deviation between
T-REF and GND. Its input voltage range is -10V～+10V, which means the corresponding
torque is adjustable (P1-41).
 When neither TCM0 nor TCM1 is 0, parameters become the source of torque command.
The command will be executed after TCM0 ~ TCM1 are changed. There is no need to use
CTRG for triggering.
The torque command can be used in torque mode (T or Tz) and speed mode (S or Sz). When it is
in speed mode, it can be regarded as the command input of torque limit.
6-48
6.4.2 Control Structure of Torque Mode
The basic control structure is as the following diagram:

Output Torque
Torque
Torque
Command Resonance
+ Current
Motor
Command Processing Suppression Unit Control Unit
Unit
-
Current
Sensor
The torque command processing unit is to select torque command source according to Section
6.4.1, including the scaling (P1-41) setting and S-curve setting. The current control unit manages
the gain parameters of the servo drive and calculates the current for servo motor in time. Since the
current control unit is very complicated and is not relevant to the application, there is no need to
adjust parameters. Only command end setting is provided.
The structure of torque command processing unit is as the following diagram.
TCM0, TCM1 signal of CN1
Register
P1-12
~P1-14
Command
Low-pass Filter
Selection
P1-07
P1-01
Scaling
A/D
P1-41
Analog Signal
The upper path is the command from register while the lower one is external analog command.
The command is selected according to the status of TCM0, TCM1 and P1-01 (T or Tz). The torque
represented by analog voltage command can be adjusted via the scaling and can obtain a
smoother response via low-pass filter.
6-49
6.4.3 Smooth Torque Command
Related parameter:
Address: 010EH
P1-07 TFLT Analog Torque Command (Low-pass Filter)
010FH
Interface： 6.4.3
Default： 0
Control
T / Tz
Mode：
Unit： ms
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
6-50
6.4.4 The Scaling of Analog Command
The motor torque command is controlled by the analog voltage difference between T_REF and
GND and goes with parameter P1-41 to adjust the torque slope and its range.
Related parameter:
Address: 0152H
P1-41▲ TCM Maximum Output of Analog Torque Command
0153H
Interface： 6.4.4
Default： 100
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： %
Range： 0 ~ 1000
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： Maximum Output of Analog Torque Command:

In torque mode, the analog torque command inputs the torque setting
of the max. voltage (10V). When the default setting is 100, if the
external voltage inputs 10V, it means the torque control command is
100% rated torque. If the external voltage inputs 5V, then the torque
control command is 50% rated torque.
Torque control command = input voltage value x setting value/10 (%)
In speed, PT, and PR mode, the analog torque limit inputs the torque
limit setting of the max. voltage (10V).
Torque limit command = input voltage value x setting value/10 (%)
6-51
6.4.5 Timing Diagram in Torque Mode
Internal register
External
analog voltage
or zero (0)
External I/O
Note:
1）OFF means the contact point is open while ON means the contact point is close.
2）When it is in Tz mode, the torque command T1 = 0; when it is in T mode, the torque command T1 is the
external analog voltage input.
3）When it is Servo On, please select the command according to TCM0 ~ TCM1 status.
6-52
6.5 Dual Mode
Apart from single mode, dual mode is also provided for operation. According to Section 6.1, dual
modes are as followings:
1. Speed / position dual mode (PT-S, PR-S, PT-PR)

2. Speed / torque dual mode (S-T)
3. Torque / position dual mode (PT-T, PR-T)
4. Position speed multiple mode (PT-PR-S)
5. Position torque multiple mode (PT-PR-T)
Short Setting
Name Code
PT-S 06 PT and S can be switched via DI signal, S_P.
PT-T 07 PT and T can be switched via DI signal, T_P.
PR-S 08 PR and S can be switched via DI signal, S_P.
Dual Mode
PR-T 09 PR and T can be switched via DI signal, T_P.
S-T 0A S and T can be switched via DI signal, S_T.
PT-PR 0D PT and PR can be switched via DI signal, PT_PR.
PT-PR-S 0E PT, PR, and S can be switched via DI signal, S_P and PT_PR.
Multiple Mode
PT-PR-T 0F PT, PR, and T can be switched via DI signal, T_P and PT_PR.
Sz and Tz dual mode is not provided here. For avoiding occupying too many digital inputs in dual
mode, speed and torque mode can use external analog voltage as the command source so as to
reduce digital input (SPD0, SPD1 or TCM0, TCM1). Please refer to Section 3.4.2, Table 3.1,
Default Value of DI Input Function and Table 3.2, Default Value of DO Output Function for the
default DI/DO of each mode.
The relationship between DI/DO signals and PIN definition are set after the mode is selected. If
users desire to change the setting, please refer to section 3.4.4.
6-53
6.5.1 Speed / Position Dual Mode
There are PT-S and PR-S in speed/position dual mode. The command source of the former one
comes from external pulse while the latter one comes from internal parameters (P6-00 ~ P7-27).
Speed command could be issued by external analog voltage or internal parameters
(P1-09 ~ P1-11). The switch of speed/position mode is controlled by S-P signal and the switch of
PR-S mode is controlled by DI signal, which is more complicated. The timing diagram is shown as
below.
CTRG
S-P ON OFF ON
POS0 ~ 6 invalid POS0 ~ 6 valid POS0 ~ 6 invalid
SPD0 ~ 1 valid SPD0 ~ 1 invalid SPD0 ~ 1 valid

Speed mode Position mode Speed mode
In speed mode (S-P is ON), the speed command is selected via SPD0 and SPD1. CTRG is not
working at the moment. When switching to position mode (S-P is OFF), since position command
has not been issued (needs to wait the rising edge of CTRG), the motor stops. The position
command is determined by POS0 ~ POS5 and triggered by rising edge of CTRG, and the motor
moves towards that position immediately. When S-P is ON, it goes back to speed mode again.
Please refer to the introduction of single mode for DI signal and the selected command of each
mode.
6.5.2 Speed / Torque Dual Mode
S-T is the only mode. The speed command comes from the external analog voltage and internal
parameters (P1-09 ~ P1-11), which is selected via SPD0 ~ SPD1. Similarly, the source of torque
command could be external analog voltage and internal parameters (P1-12 ～ P1-14) and is
selected via TCM0 ~ TCM1. The switch of speed/torque mode is controlled by S-T signal.
The timing diagram is shown as below.
S-T ON OFF ON
SPD0 ~ 1 invalid SPD0 ~ 1 valid SPD0 ~ 1 invalid
TCM0 ~ 1 valid TCM0 ~ 1 invalid TCM0 ~ 1 valid
Torque mode Speed mode Torque mode
6-54
In torque mode (S-T is ON), the torque command is selected via TCM0 and TCM1. When
switching to speed mode (S-T is OFF), the torque command is selected via SPD0 and SPD1.
The motor operates according to the speed command. When S-T is ON, it goes back to the torque
mode again. Please refer to the introduction of single mode for DI signal and the selected
command of each mode.
6.5.3 Torque / Position Dual Mode
There are PT-T and PR-T in speed/position dual mode. The command source of the former one
comes from external pulse while the latter one comes from internal parameters (P6-00 ~ P7-27).
Torque command could be issued by external analog voltage or internal parameters (P1-12 ~
P1-14). The switch of torque/position mode is controlled by T-P signal and the switch of PR-T
mode is controlled by DI signal, which is more complicated. The timing diagram is shown as below.
CTRG
S-P ON OFF ON
POS0 ~ 6 invalid POS0 ~ 6 valid POS0 ~ 6 invalid
TCM0 ~ 1 valid TCM0 ~ 1 invalid TCM0 ~ 1 valid

Torque mode Position mode Torque mode
In torque mode (T-P is ON), the torque command is selected via TCM0 and TCM1. CTRG is not
working at the moment. When switching to position mode (T-P is OFF), since position command
has not been issued (needs to wait the rising edge of CTRG), the motor stops. The position
command is determined by POS0 ~ POS5 and triggered by rising edge of CTRG, and the motor
moves towards that position immediately. When T-P is ON, it goes back to torque mode again.
Please refer to the introduction of single mode for DI signal and the selected command of each
mode.
6-55
6.6 Others
6.6.1 The Use of Speed Limit
The maximum speed in each mode is limited by internal parameter (P1-55), not matter it is in
position, speed, or torque mode.
The issuing method of speed limit command and speed command is the same. The command
source could be external analog voltage or internal parameters (P1-09 ~ P1-11). Please refer to
Section 6.3.1 for descriptions.
Speed limit can be used in torque mode (T) only. It is used for limiting the motor speed. When the
command in torque mode is issued by external analog voltage, DI signal is enough and can be
regarded as SPD0 ~ SPD1, which is used to determine the speed limit command (internal
parameters). If the DI signal is not enough, speed limit command can be issued by analog voltage.
When the disable/enable limit function in P1-02 is set to 1, the speed limit function is enabled. See
the timing diagram as below.
Disable the speed limit function Enable the speed limit function
of P1-02 of P1-02
SPD0 ~ 1 invalid SPD0 ~ 1 valid
Command source selection of speed limit
6-56
6.6.2 The Use of Torque Limit
The issuing method of torque limit command and torque command is the same. The command
source could be external analog voltage or internal parameters (P1-12 ~ P1-14). Please refer to
section 6.4.1 for descriptions.
Torque limit can be used in position mode (PT, PR) or speed mode (S). It is used for limiting the
motor torque output. When the command in position mode is issued by external pulse or the
command in speed mode is issued by external analog voltage, DI signal is enough and can be
regarded as TCM0 ~ TCM1, which is used to determine torque limit command (internal
parameters). If the DI signal is not enough, torque limit command can be issued by analog voltage.
When the disable/enable torque limit function in P1-02 is set to 1, the torque limit function is
enabled. See the timing diagram as below.
Disable the torque limit function Enable the torque limit function
of P1-02 of P1-02
TCM0 ~ 1 invalid TCM0 ~ 1 valid
Command source selection of torque speed limit
6-57
6.6.3 Analog Monitor
Users could observe the needed voltage signal via analog monitor. Two analog channels are
provided by the servo drive and located in terminal 15 and 16 of CN1. The related parameter
settings are as the followings.
Address: 0006H
P0-03 MON Analog Output Monitor
0007H
Operational Related Section: 4.3.5
Interface：
Default： 0x0000
Control Mode： ALL
Unit： -
Range： 0x0000 ~ 0x0077
Data Size： 16-bit
Settings：
MON2
MON1
Not used
MON1,
MON2
Description
Setting
Value
0 Motor speed (+/-8 Volts/Max. speed)
1 Motor torque (force) (+/-8 Volts/Max. torque (force))
2 Pulse command frequency (+8 Volts／4.5 Mpps)
3 Speed command (+/-8 Volts/ Max. speed command)
Torque (force) command (+/-8 Volts/Max. torque
4
(force) command)
5 VBUS voltage (+/-8 Volts／450V)
6 Reserved
7 Reserved
6-58
Note: Please refer to parameter P1-04 and P1-05 for proportional setting
of analog output voltage.
For example: P0-03 = 01 (MON1 is the analog output of motor

speed; MON2 is the analog output of motor torque (force))
Motor speed
MON1 output voltage = 8 × P1−04 (unit: Volts)
(Max. speed × )
100
Motor torque
(Max. torque × )
100
Address: 0106H
P1-03 AOUT Polarity Setting of Encoder Pulse Output
0107H
Interface： 3.3.3
Default： 0x0000
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0x0000 ~ 0x0013
Data Size： 16-bit
Settings：
Polarity of monitor analog output

Polarity of encoder pulse output
Not in use
 Polarity of monitor analog output

0: MON1(+), MON2(+)
1: MON1(+), MON2(-)
2: MON1(-), MON2(+)
3: MON1(-), MON2(-)
 Polarity of encoder pulse output
0: Forward output
1: Reverse output
Address: 0108H
P1-04 MON1 MON1 Analog Monitor Output Proportion
0109H
Interface： 6.4.4
Default： 100
6-59
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： % (full scale)
Range： 0 ~ 100
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： Please refer to parameter P0-03 for the setting of analog output
selection.
For example:
P0-03 = 0x0 (MON1 is the speed analog output)
When the output voltage value of MON1 is V1:
Motor speed = (Max. speed ×V1/8) ×P1-04/100
Address: 0108H
0109H
Interface： 6.4.4
Default： 100
Control
ALL
Mode：
Range： 0 ~ 100
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
selection.
For example:
P0-03 = 0x (MON2 is the speed analog output)
Motor speed = (Max. ×V2/8) ×P1-05/100
Offset Adjustment Value of Analog Monitor Address: 0428H

P4-20 DOF1
Output (Ch1) 0429H
Interface： 6.4.4
Default： 0
Control
ALL
Mode：
6-60
Unit： mV
Range： -800 ~ 800
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Offset adjustment value (cannot reset). The calibration function needs
Settings：
to be enabled by P2-08.
Offset Adjustment Value of Analog Monitor Address: 042AH

P4-21 DOF2
Output (Ch2) 042BH
Interface： 6.4.4
Default： 0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： mV
Range： -800 ~ 800
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： Offset adjustment value (cannot reset). The calibration function needs
For example, if users desire to observe the voltage signal in channel 1, when the pulse command
frequency 325 Kpps corresponds to 8V output voltage, users need to adjust the monitor output
proportion of P1-04 to 50 (= 325 Kpps/ Max. input frequency). Other related settings include P0-03
(X= 3) and P1-03 (The polarity setting range of monitor analog output is between 0 and 3, and it
can set positive/negative polarity output). Generally speaking, the output voltage of Ch1 is V1; the
pulse command frequency is (Max. input frequency ×V1/8) ×P1-04/100.
Because of the offset value, the zero voltage level of analog monitor output does not match to the
zero point of the setting. This can be improved via the setting of offset adjustment value of analog
monitor output, DOF1 (P4-20) and DOF2 (P4-21). The voltage level of analog monitor output is
±8V, if the output voltage exceeds the range, it will be limited within ±8V. The provided resolution is
about 10 bits, which equals to 13 mV/LSB.
6-61
8V
DOF
-8V
6.6.4 The Use of Brake
When operating brake via servo drive, if the DO signal, BRKR, is set to OFF, it means the brake is
not working and the motor will be locked. If BRKR is set to ON, it means the brake is working and
the motor can operate. The operation of brake has two kinds. Users can set the relevant delay time
with registers MBT1 (P1-42) and MBT2 (P1-43).
To avoid the mechanism from falling down, the magnetic brake is usually used to output an upward
force in the Z-axis direction so as to prevent the servo motor’s continuous resistance which leads
to the overheat and shorter lifetime of the motor. In order to avoid the error of brake, it must be
worked when the servo drive is off.
Timing diagram of brake control:

ON
SON
OFF OFF
(DI Input)
ON
BRKR OFF OFF
(DO Output)
MBT1(P1-42) MBT2(P1-43)
ZSPD(P1-38)
Motor Speed
The output timing of BRKR:
1. When Servo Off, when the time set by P1-43 is exceeded and the motor speed is faster than
the setting in P1-38, DO.BRKR is OFF (the brake is locked).
2. When Servo Off, when the time set by P1-43 is not yet reached but the motor speed is
slower than the setting in P1-38, DO.BRKR is OFF (the brake is locked.).
6-62
The wiring diagram of using magnetic brake:
Servo Drive Do not connect VDD-COM+

DOX：(DOX+,DOX-) Ensure the polarity of
X=1,2,3,4,5 Diode is correct, or it When emergency stop signal
might damage the drive is activated, this circuit Motor
breaker will be enabled.
DO1：(7,6)
DO2：(5,4) Brake 1(blue)
DO3：(3,2)
DO4：(1,26) Brake
DO5：(28,27)
DOX+
for brake
Relay DC24V DC24V Encoder
DOX-
Brake 2(brown)
Note:
1）Please refer to Chapter 3, Wiring.
2）The brake signal controls the solenoid valve, provides power to the brake, and enables the brake.
3）Please note that the brake coil has no polarity.
4）Do not use brake power and control power (VDD) at the same time.
Timing diagram of control power and main power:

L1C,L2
L1, L2C
Control Circuit
Control
Power
Power
1 sec
5V
Control Circuit
Power
> 0msec
R, S, T
Main Circuit
Power
800ms
BUS Voltage
READY
2 sec
SERVO
READY
SERVO ON
(DI Input)
1 msec (min)+ Response Filter Time of Digital Input ( P2-09)
SERVO ON
(DO Output)
Input available
Position \ Speed \
Torque Command
Input
6-63
6-64
Chapter 7 Motion Control
7.1 Motion Control Functions of ASDA-A2
1) Single-axis motion controller of PR (Procedure) control

2) Function of Capture (data capture) / Compare (data compare)
3) Electronic Cam (E-Cam) function (ASDA-A2 series L type models do not support this function.)
7.2 System Information
The information of the servo drive can be divided into three parts: System parameters, Monitoring
variables, and Data array.
Descriptions are as follows:
System Parameters Monitoring variables

It is used to be the reference mode,
important data, or operation The status of the servo drive or motor,
Functional
condition when the servo drive is e.g. motor position, speed, electric
Description
operating, e.g. Control Mode, Servo current, etc.
Loop Gain, etc.
Set P0-02 to Monitoring variables code
The panel displays PX-XX. and enter Monitoring Mode. The panel
Pressing the SET Key to display will display the value of the variable.
Display Format parameters and start setting. Or press the MODE Key on the panel
Please refer to Chapter 4 for Panel to switch to Monitoring Mode.
Display and Operation. Please refer to Chapter 4 for Panel
Display and Operation.
Readable and writable (depends on
Access Method Read-only
parameters)
16-bit or 32-bit (depends on
Data Size 32-bit integers only
parameters)
 It can only be monitored by
Access via MODBUS / CANopen / connecting to PC software with USB.
USB.  It does not directly support
Communication MODBUS / CANopen access, unless
Each parameter occupies two
mapping is for corresponding the
MODBUS addresses. specified monitoring variables to
system parameters.
Mapping 8 groups of parameter, P0-25 ~ 5 groups of parameter, P0-09 ~ P0-13
Support P0-32 (set by P0-35 ~ P0-42). (set by P0-17 ~ P0-21).
7-1
ASDA-A2 Chapter 7 Motion Control
System Parameters Monitoring variables

In Monitoring Mode, pressing the UP /
DOWN keys on the panel to switch the
Note commonly used monitoring variables
(code 0 ~ 26); however, it cannot
display all (about 150 in total).
7.2.1 Description of Monitoring Variables
Description of monitoring variables:
Item Descriptions
Variable Each monitoring variable has a code. Set the code via P0-02 so that the users
Code can monitor the variable.
Every monitoring variable is saved with the format of 32-bit (long integer) in the
Format
servo drive.
They are divided into basic variables and expansion variables:
1. Basic variables: Use the Monitoring Mode on the panel to find the variable
Classification (variables in the cycle) by pressing the UP / DOWN Key (P0-02 = 0 ~ 26)
2. Expansion variables: Variables other than the basic ones (P0-02 = 27 ~
127)
Two methods, Panel display and Mapping:
Monitor 1. Panel display: View through the panel directly.
Method 2. Mapping: Correspond the variables to the system parameters and view
the variables via parameters.
1. Switch to the Monitoring Mode by pressing the MODE Key and select the
desired monitoring variables via the UP / DOWN Key.
Panel 2. Directly enter the desired monitoring code via P0-02 for viewing.
Display Pressing the SHF Key on the panel can switch the display of high / low word;
pressing the SET Key on the panel can switch the display of decimal /
hexadecimal format.
1. Mapping parameters that support monitoring variables are P0-09 ~ P0-13.
Please refer to section 8.3 for parameter description.
2. Monitoring variables can be read via communication by mapping
parameters.
Mapping 3. The value of mapping parameters (P0-09 ~ P0-13) is the content of basic
variables (17h, 18h, 19h, 1Ah). To monitor P0-09, set P0-17 to the value to
read (refer to P0-02). When accessing data via communication, the value
of P0-17 can be read or monitored via the panel (set P0-02 to 23). When
the panel shows ”VAR-1,” it means it is the value of P0-09.
7-2
Chapter 7 Motion Control ASDA-A2
The descriptions of monitoring variables attribute are as follows.
Attribute Descriptions
BASE: basic variables. Variables that can be viewed by UP/DOWN Key on the
B
panel.
When the panel displays, the position of the decimal point will be D1 which
Dn
means it only shows one decimal point; D2 means it shows two decimal points.
When the panel displays, the information only can be shown in decimal format.
Dec
Pressing the SET Key on the panel cannot switch it to hexadecimal format.
When the panel displays, the information only can be shown in hexadecimal
Hex
format. Pressing the SET Key on the panel cannot switch it to decimal format.
Explanation of monitoring variables:
Name of Variables /
Code Descriptions
Attribute
000 Feedback position The current feedback position of the motor encoder.
(00h) (PUU) B The unit is PUU (user unit).
The current coordinate of position command. The unit is
PUU (user unit).
PT mode: it represents the pulse number the servo drive
001 Position command received.
(01h) (PUU) B PR mode: the value of absolute coordinate from position
command
Equals to the pulse number sent by the controller.
002 Position deviation The deviation between the position command and feedback
(02h) (PUU) B position. The unit is PUU (user unit).
003 Feedback position Current feedback position of the motor encoder.
(03h) (pulse) B The unit is pulse (encoder unit).
The current coordinate of the position command.
004 Position command The unit is pulse (encoder unit).
(04h) (pulse) B
The command that had gone through E-gear.
005 Position deviation The deviation between the position command and feedback
(05h) (pulse) B position. The unit is pulse (encoder unit).
Frequency of pulse command received by the servo drive.
006 Pulse command The unit is Kpps.
(06h) frequency B
It is suitable in PT/PR mode.
Current speed of the motor. The unit is 0.1 r/min.
007 Speed feedback
(07h) The value is more stable since it has been through low-
B D1 Dec
pass filter.
Speed command
008 The speed command is issued from analog channel.
(analog)
(08h) The unit is 0.01 Volt.
B D2 Dec
009 Speed command The integrated speed command. The unit is 1 r/min.
(09h) (processed) B The source might be analog, register, or position loop.
7-3
Name of Variables /
Code Descriptions
Attribute
Torque command
010 (analog) The torque command is issued from analog channel.
(0Ah) The unit is 0.01 Volt.
B D2 Dec
The integrated torque command.
011 Torque command The unit is percentage (%).
(0Bh) (processed) B
The source might be analog, register, or speed loop.
Average load output by the servo drive (moving average for
012
Average load B every 20 ms).
(0Ch)
The unit is percentage (%).
013 The maximum load output by the servo drive.
Peak load B
(0Dh) The unit is percentage (%).
014
DC Bus voltage B Capacitor voltage after rectification. The unit is Volt.
(0Eh)
015 Load Inertia ratio
Ratio of load inertia and motor inertia. The unit is 0.1 times.
(0Fh) B D1 Dec
016
IGBT temperature B IGBT temperature. The unit is °C.
(10h)
Resonance frequency of the system, including 2 groups of
frequency, F1 and F2.
When monitoring via panel, pressing SHF can switch the
display of both:
017 Resonance frequency F2 shows no decimal point while F1 shows one.
(11h) B Dec When reading through communication (mapping
parameter):
Low-16 Bit (Low WORD) returns frequency F2.
High-16 Bit (High WORD) returns frequency F1.
The offset between the motor position and Z phase.
018 Z phase offset The range is from -5000 to +5000.
(12h) B Dec Where it overlaps with Z phase, its value is 0.
The bigger the value is, the more the offset will be.
019 Mapping parameter Return the value of parameter P0-25 which is mapped by
(13h) #1 B P0-35.
(14h) #2 B P0-36.
(15h) #3 B P0-37.
(16h) #4 B P0-38.
023 Mapping monitoring Return the value of parameter P0-09 which is the
(17h) variable ＃1 B monitoring variables mapped by P0-17.
7-4
Name of Variables /
Code Descriptions
Attribute
(1Ah) variable # 4 B monitoring variables mapped by P0-20.
028 Alarm codes of DMCNET mode (applicable to A2-F, A2-N,
Alarm codes and A2-M/U/L)
(1Ch)
029 Feedback of auxiliary The position feedback from auxiliary encoder (CN5)
(1Dh) encoder (PUU) (applicable to A2-F)
030 Position error of

Position deviation between position feedback (from CN5)
auxiliary encoder
(1Eh) and command (applicable to A2-F)
(PUU)
031 Position error or

Feedback position deviation between main encoder and
main/auxiliary encoder
(1Fh) auxiliary encoder (applicable to A2-F)
(PUU)
035 Indexing coordinate The current command of the indexing coordinates.
(23h) command The unit is PUU (user unit).
Display the compare data. This actual compare data is a
037 Compare data of compare value plus an offset value via P1-23 and P1-24.
(25h) COMPARE
CMP_DATA = DATA_ARRAY[*] + P1-23 + P1-24
038 Voltage level of
The voltage level of battery for an absolute encoder.
(26h) battery
The integrated DI status of the servo drive. Each bit
039 DI status (Integrated) corresponds to one DI channel.
(27h) Hex The source includes hardware channel / software P4-07
which is determined by P3-06.
040 DO status (Hardware) The real status of Digital Output hardware. Each bit
(28h) Hex corresponds to one DI channel.
041 Return the value of P0-46. Please refer to the description of
Drive Status
(29h) the parameter.
043 The Data captured by CAP hardware from the latest time
CAP, data capturing
(2Bh) Note: CAP could continuously capture many points.
048
Auxiliary encoder CNT The value of pulse counter from auxiliary encoder (CN5)
(30h)
049
Pulse command CNT The value of pulse counter from pulse command (CN1)
(31h)
Speed command The processed speed command. The unit is 0.1 r/min.
050 (integrated)
(32h) The source might be analog, register, or position loop.
D1 Dec
Speed feedback
051 (immediate) Current actual speed of the motor. The unit is 0.1 r/min.
(33h)
D1 Dec
052 Speed feedback (filter) Current actual speed of the motor. The unit is 0.1 r/min.
(34h) D1 Dec (The low-pass filter has been applied to this value)
7-5
Name of Variables /
Code Descriptions
Attribute
Torque command The integrated torque command.
053 (integrated) The unit is 0.1 percent (%).
(35h)
D1 Dec The source might be analog, register, or speed loop.
054 Torque feedback Current actual torque (force) of the motor.
(36h) D1 Dec The unit is 0.1 percent (%).
Electric current
055 feedback Current actual current of the motor.
(37h) The unit is 0.01 ampere (Amp).
D2 Dec
056 DC Bus voltage
Capacitor voltage after rectification. The unit is 0.1 volt.
(38h) D1 Dec
Pulse from E-Cam The accumulative pulse number of E-Cam master axis.
059 master axis It is the same as P5-86. A2-L does not support this
(3Bh)
(accumulation) function.
Pulse from E-Cam The incremental pulse number from master axis. The unit is
060
master axis pulse number per msec. A2-L does not support this
(3Ch)
(increment) function.
The lead pulse of E-Cam master axis which is used to
judge the engaging condition.
Pulse from E-Cam When it is disengaged: lead pulse = P5-87 or P5-92. When
061 mast axis the value is 0, it will be engaged.
(3Dh)
(lead pulse) When it is engaged: lead pulse = P5-89. When the value is
0, it will be disengaged.
A2-L does not support this function.
The position of E-Cam master axis. The input of E-Cam
table (master axis).
062 The position of E-Cam Unit: The pulse is from the master axis. When the
(3Eh) axis incremental pulse from master axis is P, the axis rotates
M cycle (P5-83＝M, P5-84＝P).
The position of E-Cam slave axis. The input of E-Cam table
063 Position of E-Cam (slave axis).
(3Fh) slave axis Unit: PUU
064 Terminal register of
In PR mode, the termination of position command (Cmd_E)
(40h) PR command
065 Output register of PR
In PR mode, the accumulative output of position command
(41h) command
067 The target speed of path command in PR mode. The unit is
PR target speed PPS (Pulse Per Second).
(43h)
The input commands of S-curve filter which is used to
068 smooth the input command.
S-curve filter (input)
(44h) It is effective in PR mode, E-Cam, and speed command.
7-6
Name of Variables /
Code Descriptions
Attribute
The output commands of S-curve filter which is used to
069 smooth the output command.
S-curve filter (output)
(45h) It is effective in PR mode, E-Cam and speed command.
072 Speed command The speed command is issued from analog channel.
(analog) The unit is 0.1 r/min.
(48h) B D1 Dec This function is supported by A2-M/U/L.
In PR mode, the programmed trapezoid speed curve is
076 determined by the target speed, acceleration time,
Speed command of
deceleration time, and moving distance (before S-curve
(4Ch) PR contour
filter).
The unit is PPS (Pulse Per Second).
Synchronous capture
When synchronous capture axis is enabled, the received
081 axis
pulse number between two captures can be used to
(51h) Incremental input
measure the real distance of Mark.
pulse
082 PR number that is To inform HMC the PR number that is being executed. (It is
(52h) currently executed applicable to A2-F.)
Synchronous capture
The deviation between the real output pulse and the target
084 axis
pulse when synchronous capture axis is enabled. If it
(54h) Deviation pulse
reaches the synchronization, the value will be close to 0.
number
091 The feedback of The immediate feedback position of indexing coordinates.
(5Bh) indexing coordinate The unit is PUU (user unit).
It includes two versions, DSP and CPLD.
When monitoring via the panel, pressing the SHF Key can
switch the display of both:
096 Firmware version DSP shows no decimal point while CPLD shows one.
(60h) Dec When reading through communication (parameter
mapping):
Low-16 Bit (Low WORD) returns DSP version number.
High-16 Bit (High WORD) returns CPLD version number.
098
PLC scan time The update time of DI/DO. The unit is 0.5 msec.
(62h)
109 The amount of data Returns the amount of data array.
(6Dh) array The unit is DWORD (32 Bits)
111 Error code of the Error code of the servo drive: only for the control loop, not
(6Fh) servo drive including the motion controller.
CANopen SYNC TS
112 The time the servo drive receives SYNC signal
(hasn’t been through
(70h) (TimeStamp).The unit is usec.
the filter)
CANopen SYNC TS
113 The time the servo drive receives SYNC signal and has
(has been through the
(71h) been through the filter. The unit is usec.
filter)
114 CANopen To synchronize the device timing with the controller during
(72h) timing synchronization the operation. The unit is usec.
7-7
Name of Variables /
Code Descriptions
Attribute
The differential The differential between the current position and Z phase
116 between position and position of auxiliary encoder
(74h) Z phase of auxiliary
encoder (pulse) (applicable to A2-F)
DMCNET connection
DMCNET connection status (applicable to A2-F and A2-N)
status
120
EtherCAT
(78h)
communication error EtherCAT communication error rate (applicable to A2-E)
rate
The PDO packet of Accumulative number of the lost DMCNET PDO packet
DMCNET is lost (applicable to A2-F and A2-N)
121
during transmission Format: chAchB | chB | chA
(79h) (communication error For example, 459010 = 0x070102
rate) chAchBerror = 7, chBerror = 1, chAerror = 2
The returned value
123
when monitoring via The returned value when monitoring via the panel
(7Bh)
panel
7-8
7.2.2 Description of Data Array
Many functions of motion control, such as CAPTURE, COMPARE, and E-Cam (A2-L does not
support E-Cam function), are the data that needs to be saved in large amount of memory space.
Therefore, the servo drive reserves a continuous internal space to satisfy the need. The main
feature of the data array is as the followings:
Feature Introduction of Data Array
 Save the captured data of CAPTURE
 Save the compared value of COMPARE
 Save the contour table of E-Cam
Note:
Usage 1. The system does not partition off the data array into the individual space
of CAP, CMP, and E-Cam. The user could program it according to the
demand. Therefore, the space might be overlapped. Please pay close
attention to it when using.
2. A2-L does not support E-Cam function.
 32-bit integer x 800 (refer to P5-10)
 Each data has its corresponding address. Specify the address is
Size of Data Array
a must when reading or writing the data.
 The 800 data is from 0 to 799.
 Manually set up the saving (P2-08 = 30, 35) is a must and the
data should be saved in EEPROM of the servo drive.
Data Retained  Save the data when it is Servo Off.
 The data will be loaded into data array automatically when it is
Servo On.
Accessing Window  Should be accessed via parameters P5-10 ~ P5-13.
The content of the data array cannot be read or written directly. You need to read or write the
data via parameters P5-10 ~ P5-13. The description of the parameters is as the followings:
Description of Related Parameter about Data Array

Parameter Name Description
Size of
P5-10 Return the size of data array (read-only).
data array
Reading /
P5-11 Set the desired address of reading and writing.
writing address
Read via panel: After reading the content of P5-11, the value
of P5-11 will not change.
Write via panel: After writing the content of P5-11, the value
of P5-11 will increase 1 automatically.
Reading / ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
P5-12 writing window Read via communication: After reading the content of P5-11,
#1 the value of P5-11 will increase 1
automatically.
Write via communication: After writing the content of P5-11,
the value of P5-11 will increase 1
automatically.
7-9
Description of Related Parameter about Data Array

Parameter Name Description
Read via panel: After reading the content of P5-11, the value
of P5-11 will increase 1 automatically.
Write via panel: It cannot be written via panel.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Reading /
P5-13 writing window Read via communication: After reading the content of P5-11,
#2 the value of P5-11 will increase 1
automatically.
Write via communication: After writing the content of P5-11,
the value of P5-11 will increase 1
automatically.
Set the desired reading / writing address via P5-11 first. Then, read / write P5-12 or P5-13 in
order to access the content of data array. If users desire to continuously write 3 data, 100, 200,
and 300 into the address of data array, 11, 12, and 13, the operation steps are as follows:
A. Write via panel: Use P5-12 (reading / writing window #1), since P5-13 does not support writing
via panel:
1. Set address: Set P5-11 to 11 (The first written address)
2. Write into data: Set P5-12 to 100 (After writing 100 into address 11 in data array, the value of
P5-11 will increase 1 automatically.)
Set P5-12 to 200 (After writing 200 into address 12 in data array, the value of
Set P5-12 to 300 (After writing 300 into address 13 in data array, the value of
The last step is to read address 11, 12, and 13, and check if the content is the value that you just
wrote into.
B. Read via panel: Use P5-13 (reading / writing window #2) so as to continuously read the
content.
1. Set address: Set P5-11 to 11 (The first read address)
2. Read the data: When the panel displays P5-13,

Press the SET Key for the first time and show the content of address 11.
Then, press the MODE Key to exit.
Press the SET Key for the second time and show the content of address
12. Then, press the MODE Key to exit.
Press the SET Key for the second time and show the content of address
13. Then, press the MODE Key to exit.
Note: Every time when reading the data via P5-13, the value of P5-11 will increase 1 automatically. Thus
the user could continuously read the data.
If reading the data via P5-12, then the value of P5-11 will not change. The user is unable to read
the next data automatically.
7-10
If users desire to read / write the data array via communication, the operation procedure is similar
to that of the panel. Moreover, the functions of P5-12 and P5-13 are the same. If users desire to
write 6 data, 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, and 600 into the address of data array via Modbus
communication command 0x10 (continuous writing), the content of the issued command is as the
followings:
Content of Communication Command: Write into Data Array
P5-11 P5-12 P5-13
Start Written
No. Command Low High Low High Low High
Add. Amount
Word Word Word Word Word Word
11 0 100 0 200 0
6
1 0x10 P5-11 The second
(Word) The first address The first data
data
6 13 0 300 0 400 0
2 0x10 P5-11
(Word) The third address The third data The fourth data
6 15 0 500 0 600 0
3 0x10 P5-11
(Word) The fifth address The fifth data The sixth data
If users desire to read the value of data array in order to check the previous written content,
users can write the desired reading start address into P5-11 via MODBUS communication
command 0x06 (write 1 data). The issuing communication command is as the following:
Content of Communication Command: Set the Reading Address of Data Array
No. Command Start Add. Written Data
4 0x06 P5-11 11
Then, read the content of specified address by communication command 0x03 (continuous
reading). The issuing communication command is as follows:
Content of Communication Command:
Return Data
Read Data Array
P5-11 P5-12 P5-13
Start Read
No. Command Low High Low High Low High
Add. Amount
Word Word Word Word Word Word
11 0 100 0 200 0
6
5 0x03 P5-11 Data of Data of
(Word) Read address
address 11 address 12
13 0 300 0 400 0
6
(Word) Read address
15 0 500 0 600 0
6
(Word) Read address
The return value on the right-hand side of the above table represents the read parameters, P5-11,
P5-12, and P5-13, which is also the content of address 11 ~ 16 in data array.
7-11
7.3 Description of Motion Axes
The motion axis is an internal counter of the servo drive. It is used for counting the absolute
position of the axis (32-bit integer). The following motion axes are included in this servo drive:
Name of the Axis Description Access Attribute
1. Main Encoder It represents the absolute feedback position of the Physical
R
(P5-16) motor. The unit is PUU (user unit). Axis
2. Auxiliary It is counted by the pulse signal from CN5 and
Encoder Physical
usually connects to the second encoder or linear R/W
Axis
(P5-17) scale. Its pulse is A/B type.
3. Pulse It is counted by the pulse signal from CN1 and
Command Physical
usually connects to the pulse command of the R/W
Axis
(P5-18) controller. The pulse type could be set by P1-00.
It is the axis which has CAP function. Its command
source could be the above-mentioned axes 1 ~ 3,
4. Capture Axis which can write the new value into it and has an Functional
R/W
(P5-37) offset from the physical axis. Moreover, after Axis
capturing the first point, the axis position can be
redefined.
It is the axis which has CMP function. Its command
5. Compare Axis source could be the above-mentioned axes 1 ~ 4, Functional
R/W
(P5-57) which can write the new value into it and has an Axis
offset from the physical axis.
It is the master axis of E-Cam. Its command source
6. Master Axis could be the above-mentioned axes 2, 3, 4, and 7, Functional
R/W
(P5-86) which can write the new value into it and has an Axis
offset from the physical axis.
7. Command Axis The command position is from the path generator in
R Virtual Axis
in PR Mode PR mode.
8. Internal Time It is the internal accumulative time counter of the
R Virtual Axis
Axis servo drive. The value increases 1 every 1ms.
It is similar to Capture Axis (P5-37); however, it
9. Synchronous automatically adjusts the incremental pulse between
Capture Axis two CAPs to the setting value of P5-78. (This R/W Virtual Axis
(P5-77) function is available in the firmware version V1.009
or above versions)
Note: Physical Axis: The position value is counted from the actual hardware signal.
Functional Axis: It is the virtual axis which has been processed by the physical. The value might not be
the same as the source of physical axis. However, the incremental value is the same
as the one in physical axis.
Virtual Axis: The axis position comes from the internal firmware of the servo drive. The command axis
of PR mode is not instantaneous; therefore, it cannot be the command source axis of
CAP and CMP function. However, it could be the command source of master axis of
E-Cam.
7-12
7.4 Description of PR Mode
PR Procedure: It is the smallest unit of command. Command could be one or many procedures to
constitute.
Procedure is triggered by DI.CTRG. POS0 ~ POS5 are used to specify the triggered procedure
number.
The triggered procedure is completed and will trigger the next one automatically. The procedure
number can be set and the delay time between procedures as well.
The E-Cam function is provided in PR mode. It can be enabled via PR procedure. After it is
disabled, it can return to the specified PR procedure.
7.5 The Difference between General PR Mode and the One in ASDA-A2
General PR Mode PR Mode in A2

Command
8 64
Number
Positioning / Constant speed Command
Command Type Positioning Command
PR jump, write in parameters
 Absolute / incremental can be set
 Absolute or incremental
individually
Position  Acceleration / Deceleration
 Acceleration / Deceleration time x
Command time x 1 set
16 sets
Parameter  Motion speed x 8 sets
 Motion speed x 16 sets
 Delay time x 8 sets
 Delay time x 16 sets
Anytime will do. It could specify the next
Command It has to wait until DO.ZSPD is
command issuing method (in sequence /
Triggering Time ON.
interrupt / overlap)
 Use DI.CTRG + POSn
Command
 Event trigger: DI.Event＋CAP
Triggering  Use DI.CTRG + POSn
Method complete
 P5-07, fill in PR number to trigger.
 Trapezoid curve with
Position S-curve filter  Trapezoid curve with S-curve filter
Command (If S-curve is not enabled, then it (Trapezoid curve and S-curve can
PROFILE has no function of acceleration / be set individually.)
deceleration)
Format of  Two registers for turns and
Position pulse within one turn  PUU (32-bit)
Command respectively.
 The function is enabled
automatically when the power is On.
 The function is enabled (Servo ON for the first time)
automatically when the
Homing  Use DI.SHOM to trigger
power is On. (Servo ON for
Function  PR 0 = Homing
the first time)
 Use DI.SHOM to trigger.  After homing is completed, the
specified PR will be executed
automatically.
7-13
General PR Mode PR Mode in A2

Software limit
No Yes
protection
7.6 The Position Unit of PR Mode
The position data of PR mode is represented by PUU (Pulse of User Unit). It is also the proportion
between the controller position unit and the internal position unit of the servo drive, which is the so-
called electronic gear ratio of the servo drive.
1. The position unit of the servo drive (pulse): Encoder unit: 1280000 (pulse/rev), which will not
change.
2. User unit (PUU): The unit of the controller.
P pulse per revolution (PUU/rev), the gear ratio should set as:
GEAR_NUM (P1-44) / GEAR_DEN (P1-45) = 1280000 / P
7.7 Description of Register in PR Mode
1. Position register of PR mode: All is represented in PUU (Pulse of User Unit).

2. Command register (monitoring variable 064): Command termination register Cmd_E.
It represents the absolute terminal coordinate of position command.
3. Command output register (monitoring variable 001): Cmd_O; it represents the absolute
coordinate from the current output command.
4. Feedback register (monitoring variable 000): Fb_PUU; it shows the absolute coordinate from
the feedback position of the motor.
5. Deviation register (monitoring variable 002): Err_PUU; it is the deviation between the register
from command output and feedback register.
6. In PR mode, either in operation or stop status, it satisfies the condition of Err_PUU = Cmd_O -
Fb_PUU.
Influence brought by position command:
Type of When issuing the command ＝＞When command is ＝＞ Command is

Command ＝＞ executing＝＞ completed
Cmd_E does not

Cmd_E = command data
change. Cmd_E does not change.
Absolute (absolute)
Positioning Cmd_O continuously Cmd_O = Cmd_E
Cmd_O does not change.
Command output
DO.CMD_OK is ON
DO.CMD_OK is OFF
...
7-14
Type of When issuing the command ＝＞When command is ＝＞ Command is

Command ＝＞ executing＝＞ completed
Cmd_E does not

Cmd_E+= command data
change. Cmd_E does not change.
Incremental (incremental)
Positioning Cmd_O continuously Cmd_O = Cmd_E
Cmd_O does not change.
Command output
DO.CMD_OK is ON
DO.CMD_OK is OFF
...
Issue the
command of Cmd_E does not change. Cmd_E does not Cmd_E does not change.
change.
DI：STP to Cmd_O continuously output Cmd_O = position after
Cmd_O stops stop
stop the DO.CMD_OK is according to the
command unchangeable deceleration curve DO.CMD_OK is ON
anytime
Cmd_E continuously Cmd_E = the absolute

Cmd_E does not change. output position of Z
Homing Cmd_O does not change. Cmd_O continuously Cmd_O = position after
Command output stop
DO.CMD_OK is OFF
... DO.CMD_OK is ON
DO.HOME is OFF
... DO.HOME is ON
Cmd_E continuously output.

Speed Cmd_O continuously output. When the speed command is completed, it means
Command the speed reaches the setting value and does not stop.
DO.CMD_OK is OFF
Enter PR (Servo Off->On or switch the mode

Cmd_O = Cmd_E = current feedback position
and enter into PR mode)
Note: The incremental positioning command is accumulated by command termination Cmd_E. It is neither
related to the current position of the motor nor the command time.
7-15
7.8 Homing Description of PR Mode
The purpose of homing is to connect the Z pulse position of motor encoder to the internal
coordinate of the servo drive. The coordinate value corresponded by Z pulse can be specified.
After homing is completed, the stopped position will not be the Z pulse. It is because it has to
decelerate to stop when finding the Z pulse. It might therefore exceed a bit. However, since the
position of Z pulse has correctly setup, it would not influence the accuracy of positioning. For
example, when specifying the coordinate value corresponded by Z pulse is 100 and it is
Cmd_O = 300 after homing, it means the deceleration distance is 300 – 100 = 200 (PUU). Since
Cmd_E = 100 (Z’s absolute coordinate), if desiring to return to Z pulse position, issue the
positioning command, absolute 100 command or incremental 0 command.
After homing is completed, it will execute the specified PR automatically, which can move a
distance of offset after homing.
When it is executing homing, software limit is disabled.
7.9 DI / DO Provided by PR Mode and Diagrams
DI signal:
CTRG, SHOM, STP, POS 0 ~ 5, ORG, PL (CCWL), NL (CWL), EV1 ~ 4
DO signal:
Cmd_OK, MC_OK, TPOS, ALM, CAP_OK, CAM_AREA
System frame:
DI.CTRG
DO.Cmd_OK
DLY
Command is issuing
Servo positioning
DO.TPOS is complete
DI.Cmd_OK and
DO.MC_OK DI.TPOS are both
on
7-16
Description of command triggered method in PR mode:
64 command procedures are in each axis of PR mode. Procedure #0 is homing and the others
(#1 ~ #63) are the procedures that users can self-define. The command triggered method is
concluded as the followings:
Command Source Description
Use DI.POS0 ~ 5 to trigger the desired procedure number.
Standard Then, use the rising edge of DI.CTRG to trigger PR
DI.CTRG + POS0 ~ 5 command.
trigger
Application: PC or PLC that issues command via DI
When DI.STP is from OFF  ON, the command stops in
Functional half way.
DI.STP, SHOM
trigger
When DI.SHOM is from OFF  ON, it starts homing.
The status changing of DI.EV1 ~ 4 can be the triggering
event.
Set the triggered procedure number from OFF  ON by
Event parameter P5-98.
DI.EV1 ~ 4
trigger Set the triggered procedure number from ON  OFF by
parameter P5-99.
Application: connect to the sensor and trigger the preset
procedure.
Directly write the procedure number into P5-07 and trigger
command.
Software Both panel and communication (RS-232/485 / CANopen)
P5-07
trigger can do.
Application: PC or PLC that issues command via
communication.
After the capture is completed, procedure #50 can be
triggered and activated by the setting value Bit 3 of P5-39.X.
CAP trigger
When E-cam is disengaged and returns to PR mode, the
Other E-CAM disengage procedure specified by P5-88 BA setting value can be
trigger triggered.
A2-L does not support E-Cam function.
7-17
7.10 Parameter Settings
1) Target speed: P5-60 ~ P5-75, 16 PR in total
Bit 15 ~ 0
W0 TARGET_SPEED: 0.1 ~ 6000.0 (r/min)
2) Accel / Decel time: P5-20 ~ P5-35, 16 PR in total
Bit 15 ~ 0
W0 T_ACC / T_DEC: 1 ~ 65500 (msec)
Note: The deceleration time used by DI: STP/EMS/NL(CWL)PL(CCWL) is defined via P5-07.
3) Pause time: P5-40 ~ P5-55, 16 PR in total
Bit 15 ~ 0
W0 IDLE：0 ~ 32767 (msec)
4) PR parameters: P5-00 ~ P5-09, P6-00 ~ P6-01, 12 DWORD in total
32-bit
P5-00 Reserved
P5-01 Reserved (for test only; do not use it)
P5-02 Reserved (for test only; do not use it)
P5-03 Deceleration time of auto protection
P5-04 Homing mode
P5-05 1st Speed setting of high speed homing
P5-06 2nd Speed setting of low speed homing
P5-07 PR command register
P5-08 Forward software limit
P5-09 Reverse software limit
P6-00 Homing setting
P6-01 Origin definition (Z pulse position)
Note: Path (procedure)
5) PR Definition: P6-02 ~ P7-27, (64-bit), 63 sets of PR in total (2N)
Bit 31 ~ 28 27 ~ 24 23 ~ 20 19 ~ 16 15 ~ 12 11 ~ 8 7~4 3~0

DW0 … … … … … … … TYPE
DW1 DATA (32-bit)
Each PR has two parameters; the PR function is determined by TYPE. DATA represents position
or speed data while the others are the additional information.
7-18
6) SPEED, Constant speed control: TYPE = 1
Bit 31 ~ 28 27 ~ 24 23 ~ 20 19 ~ 16 15 ~ 12 11 ~ 8 7~4 3~0

DW0 - - DLY - DEC ACC OPT 1
DW1 DATA (32 bit): Target speed. Unit: Defined by OPT.UNIT
When this command is executing, the motor accelerates or decelerates from the current speed
until it reaches the target speed. After the command is completed, the motor will remain at the
same speed and never stop.
OPT:
OPT
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4
- UNIT AUTO INS
※DI.STP stop and software limit are acceptable.

INS: When this PR is executing, it will interrupt the previous PR.
AUTO: When the speed reaches the constant speed area, the next PR will be loaded
automatically.
UNIT: 0 means the unit is 0.1 r/min; 1 means the unit is PPS (Pulse Per Second)
ACC / DEC: 0 ~ F, Accel / Decel number

ACC (4-bit) / DEC (4-bit) Index P5-20 ~ P5-35
SPD: 0 ~ F, target speed number

SPD (4-bit) Index P5-60 ~ P5-75
DLY: 0 ~ F, delay time number. The delay after executing this PR. The external INS is invalid.
DLY (4-bit) Index P5-40 ~ P5-55
7) POSITION, Positioning control: (TYPE = 2, PR is completed and stopped), (TYPE = 3, the next
PR is executed automatically after the PR is completed)
Bit 31 ~ 28 27 ~ 24 23 ~ 20 19 ~ 16 15 ~ 12 11 ~ 8 7~4 3~0

DW0 - - DLY SPD DEC ACC OPT 2 or 3
DW1 DATA (32 bit): Target position, Unit: Pulse of User Unit
7-19
OPT:
OPT
Explanation
CMD OVLP INS
0 0 Absolute position command: Cmd_E = DATA (Note 1)
1 0 Incremental position command: Cmd_E = Cmd_E + DATA
(Note 2)
0 1 - - Relative position command: Cmd_E = Current feedback
position + DATA (Note 3)
1 1 Capture position command: Cmd_E = Capture position +
DATA (Note 4)
※DI.STP stop and software limit are acceptable.

INS: When this PR is executing, it will interrupt the previous PR
OVLP: It is allowed to overlap the next PR. When overlapping, please set DLY to 0.
CMD: The calculation of the position terminal command (Cmd_E) is as the followings:
Note 1: Position terminal command is determined by DATA.
Note 2: Position terminal command is determined by the previous terminal command (Monitoring variable
40h) plus DATA.
Note 3: Position terminal command is determined by the current feedback position (Monitoring variable 00h)
plus DATA.
Note 4: Position terminal command is determined by the position latched by CAP (Monitoring variable 2Bh)
plus DATA.
8) Special code: TYPE = 7, jump to the specified PR.
Bit 31 ~ 28 27 ~ 24 23 ~ 20 19 ~ 16 15 ~ 12 11 ~ 8 7~4 3~0

DW0 - - DLY - FUNC_CODE - OPT 7
DW1 PR Number (0 ~ 63)
OPT:
OPT
- - - INS
PATH_NO: The jump target procedure number
FUNC_CODE: Reserved
DLY: The delay time after jump
9) Special code: TYPE = 8, write the specified parameter.
Bit 31 ~ 28 27 ~ 24 23 ~ 20 19 ~ 16 15 ~ 12 11 ~ 8 7~4 3~0

DW0 0 S_D DLY DESTINATION OPT 8
DW1 SOURCE
DLY: Delay time after writing the parameters

Bit28 ~ Bit31 are not 0x0, then AL213 occurs.
7-20
S_D: Specified data source and written target.

S_D
Bit 27 Bit 26 Bit 25 Bit 24 Explanation
SOUR Rsvd DEST Data Source Write Destination
0 0 0 Constant Parameter Px-xx
0 1 0 Parameter Px-xx Parameter Px-xx
1 0 0 Data Array Parameter Px-xx
1 1 0 Monitoring variable Parameter Px-xx
0
0 0 1 Constant Data Array
0 1 1 Parameter Px-xx Data Array
1 0 1 Data Array Data Array
1 1 1 Monitoring variable Data Array
Rsvd is not 0, then AL213 occurs.
OPT:
OPT
- ROM AUTO INS
Para_Data: the written data

INS: When executing this PR, it interrupts the previous one.
AUTO: When this PR is completed, it will execute the next PR automatically.
ROM: 1 means to write into EEPROM at the same time. (The supported written target is
parameter, if the target is data array, then it will not be written into EEPROM.)
DESTINATION: Setting of the written target

DESTINATION
Bit 19 ~ 16 Bit 15 ~ 12 Bit 11 ~ 8
When DEST = 0, it
represents parameter, P_Grp P_Idx
Px-xx
When DEST = 1, it
Array_Addr
represents data array.
P_Grp, P_Idx: Specified parameter group and number

Array_Addr: Position of the specified data array.
7-21
SOURCE: Settings of data source

SOURCE
Bit 31 ~ 28 27 ~ 24 23 ~ 20 19 ~ 16 15 ~ 12 11 ~ 8 7~4 3~0
SOUR = 00 means
Para_Data
constant
SOUR = 01 means
Rsvd (0x0000 0) P_Grp P_Idx
parameter Px-xx
SOUR = 10 means
Rsvd (0x0000 0) Array_Addr
data array
SOUR = 11 means
Rsvd (0x0000 00) Sys_Var
monitoring variable
P_Grp, P_Idx: specified parameter group and number
Array_Addr: specified the position of data array
Para_Data: the written constant
Sys_Var: monitor parameter code. Refer to P0-02 for its setting.
When Rsvd is not 0, it will display AL213. When P_Grp exceeds the range, it will display AL207.
When displaying AL209, it means P_Idx exceeds the range.
When Array_Addr exceeds the range, it will display AL213. And AL231 is for Sys_Var exceeding
the range.
Note: 1. Firmware version 1.013 (or previous versions): Even when the written parameter is retained, the
new value will not be written into EEPROM. Too frequent written will not shorten the lifetime of
EEPROM.
2. Firmware version 1.013 (or later versions):
Writing parameters via PR (TYPE = 8) does not write new value into EEPROM, so it does not
shorten the lifetime of EEPROM.
Note: The aim of writing parameters via PR procedure is for turning ON/OFF or adjusting some functions. (E.g.
according to different positioning command to adjust P2-00, Position Loop Gain.) This procedure will
continuously repeat during the operation. If the data is all written into EEPROM, it will shorten the lifetime of
EEPROM.
3. If writing parameters fails, alarm AL.213 ~ 217 will occur (Refer to Chapter 10 of the manual) and
the next PR which is enabled by AUTO function will not be executed.
10) Special Function: TYPE = 0xA, Indexing command.
Bit 31 ~ 28 27 ~ 24 23 ~ 20 19 ~ 16 15 ~ 12 11 ~ 8 7~4 3~0

DW0 - OPT2 DLY SPD DEC ACC OPT 0xA
DW1 DATA (32-bit): Indexing Coordinate Command, Unit: PUU
7-22
OPT:
OPT
DIR
00: Always move forward (Forward Rotation)
01: Always move reverse (Reverse Rotation)
10: Shortest distance (Judging by the current position and target
position)
11: Reserved
Shortest
Indexing distance
Coordinate Always move
Command reverse Current
position
Always OVLP INS
move
forward
Current
Position
Target
Position
Rotation
Direction
INS: When this PR is executing, it interrupts the previous one.

OVLP: It is allowed to overlap the next PR. When overlapping, please set DLY to 0.
OPT2:
OPT2
- AUTO - S_LOW
AUTO: Position reached and the next PR is loaded automatically.
S_LOW: Selection of speed unit. 0 means the unit is 0.1 r/min; while 1 means 0.01 r/min
DATA (DW1): Data format

DW1: DATA (32 bits)
PUU: 0 ~ (P2-52-1)
P2-52: Size of indexing coordinates
7-23
11) Homing Definition: P6-00 ~ P6-01, (64 bits) one set of PR.
Bit 31 ~ 28 27 ~ 24 23 ~ 20 19 ~ 16 15 ~ 12 11 ~ 8 7~6 5~0

DW0 BOOT - DLY DEC2 DEC1 ACC Reserved PATH
DW1 ORG_DEF (32-bit)
PATH (PR): 0 ~ 3F. (6 bits)

00 (Stop): Homing completed and stops
01 ~ 3F (Auto): Homing completed and executes the specified PR: 1 ~ 63.
Note: PATH (procedure)
ACC: Acceleration time
DEC1/DEC2: The first / second deceleration time
DLY: Delay time
BOOT: Activation mode. When the POWER is ON:
0: will not do homing
1: start homing (Servo ON for the first time)
ORG_DEF: the coordinate value of the origin definition which might not be 0
1) After finding the origin (Sensor or Z), the motor has to decelerate to stop. The stop position will
slightly exceed the origin. After the positioning is completed, users can determine and setup the
motor position:
Speed
Homing command is
executed
Motor stop
position after
homing
Absolute
position
Position Return to coordinate
home
Home sensor or Z
pulse, ORG_DEF CMD_E CMD_O
If not returning to the original point, set PATH to０.

If desiring to return to the original point, set PATH to non-zero value and setup that PR:
absolute positioning command＝ORG_DEF.
CMD_O: Command Output Position
CMD_E: Command End Position
2) Homing does not define the offset value but uses PATH to specify a path as the offset value.
After finding the origin, if the user desires to move a short distance of offset S (relative to the
home Sensor or Z) and set the coordinate to P after moving: set PATH to non-zero value, set
7-24
ORG_DEF= P – S, and setup that PR: absolute positioning command = P (incremental

positioning command = S will do as well)
7.10.1 The Relation between the Previous Path and the Next Path
1) Interrupt (the previous path) and overlap (the next path) can be set in every path
INS OVLP INS OVLP
Path 1 Path 2
Note: Path (procedure)
2) The priority of interrupt command is higher than overlap
PATH 1 PATH 2 Relation Output Note

In PATH 1/2 which could be the
OVLP = 0 INS = 0 DLY 1
sequence combination of speed/position
PATH 2 is SPEED and does not support
OVLP = 1 INS = 0 Overlap NO DLY
overlap
OVLP = 0 PATH 1/2 which could be the
INS = 1 Interrupt N/A
OVLP = 1 combination of speed/position
7-25
7.10.2 Programming the Path in PR Mode
1) Sequence command
Speed
Path 1: is AUTO and has set DLY
Path 2: does not set INS
(DLY starts to count after completing
Path 1 Path 2 the command)
Time
DLY 1
Speed
Path 1: speed command and has set
DLY 1 DLY
Path 2: position command
Path 2
Path 1 (DLY starts to count after completing
Time the command)
2) Overlap
Speed
Path 1: has set OVLP but cannot
set DLY
Path 2: does not set INS
Path 1 Path 2
Time
3) Internal Interrupt
Path 1: AUTO and has set DLY
Speed Path 2: has set INS
(DLY is effective to the internal
interrupt)
Path 1
Path 2(INS) It can be used to pre-constitute
Time
DLY 1 complicated Profile
4) External Interrupt
Path 1: AUTO or SINGLE regardless of
Speed the setting of DLY
DLY 1 Path 2: has set INS
(DLY is ineffective to the external
interrupt)
Path 1 Path 2
Time Profile can be changed from external
any time
CTRG+INS
7-26
7.11 The Description of E-Cam Function (A2-L does not support this
function)
E-Cam is a virtual cam which is implemented by software. It includes Master axis and Slave axis.
The illustration is as the following:
In PT mode, the position command (slave) is issued by the external pulse input (master). The
relation between the two is merely linear scaling (its scaling equals to e-gear ratio). However, instead
of linear scaling, E-Cam is defined by cyclic curve profile, just like the cam shape. In physical
machine cam, slave axis can operate as variable speed motion, alternating motion, intermittent
motion, etc. by master axis with the constant speed motion. It is very extensive in application. Using
E-Cam could have similar effect. The following table describes the differences between E-Cam and
Machine Cam.
Machine Cam E-Cam

It might not return to the original position
Return to the original position after rotating a cycle. The structure could
Structure
after rotating a cycle. be in spiral shape like mosquito coil
incense.
Smooth It is determined by the fineness of It is interpolated by cubic curve via
Performance the real process. software.
The command is very precise, but the
Position Very precise (when it has no
actual position might have deviation due
Accuracy vibration)
to the servo delay.
The longer the slave axis is, the
Long Distance Change the value of the table will do. It is
bigger the cam will be. It is not
Motion easy to realize.
easy to make.
The master axis is unnecessary when it is
The Necessity applied to constant speed motion. It will
The master axis is necessary.
of Master Axis do by using the internal signal of the
servo drive.
It is inconvenient to change and
Flexibility modify, and it is expensive as It will do by re-setting the parameter.
well.
7-27
Machine Cam E-Cam

Machine will wear and the
Maintenance No need to maintain.
maintenance is necessary.
The master axis needs space and Save the space and energy which
Others
it consumes energy as well. protects the environment.
The main feature of E-Cam is as the followings:
Features of E-Cam
Operation Operate the E-cam in PR mode only.
Active the E-Cam Function 0: disable E-cam function and force to disengage (default).
P5-88.X 1: enable E-cam function and starts to judge the engaged condition.
E-Cam Status Stop / Pre-engage / Engage
 Physical axis: auxiliary encoder (linear scale)
 Physical axis: pulse command
Source of Master Axis  Functional axis: CAP axis (defined by CAP function)
 Virtual axis: PR command / Time axis / Synchronous capture
axis
The overlap motion command issued by PR and E-Cam
Command of the Servo Drive = E-Cam command + PR command
 The command will be issued only in Engaged status
Motion Command of the  PR command is effective regardless of the E-Cam status. Only
Servo Drive when E-cam is engaging and the source of master axis is PR
command, PR command is 0.
When E-Cam is operating, its position still can be adjusted by PR
command (incremental command in general).
Data Storage Address of
 It is stored in Data array and the start address is set by P5-81.
E-Cam table
 It is set by P5-82. 720 points is the maximum and 5 points is
Data Size of E-Cam table
the minimum.
Data Format of E-Cam
 32-bit signed value.
table
Data Content of E-Cam
 Save the position of slave axis (User unit, PUU)
table
 The master axis operates by incremental command input.
 The slave axis issues position command incrementally.
The operation of E-Cam  The start and the end of E-Cam curve profile could not always
position be the same. It depends on the value of E-Cam table.
 The command is interpolated by cubic curve. The torque on
each point will be smoothly connected because of quadratic
differential operation.
DO: CAM_AREA  DO: CAM_AREA: If it is on, it means the current E-Cam
(DO no.= 0x18) position is within the set position.
7-28
E-Cam provided by this servo drive and below is its functional diagram:
Master Gear P5-84: Pulse number sent by master axis

Clutch P5-83: E-Cam rotation cycle
axis Box#1
P5-88.ZU engaged
P5-88.Y
method E-Cam axis
setting value
P5-87 lead pulse
Source P5-89 engaged distance
selection Slave Pulse
axis Gear command Position
Box#2 controller
Data Array E-Cam
(PUU) (PUU)
…
P1-44: gear ratio P5-88.X
POS 0
(numerator) setting value
POS1 P5-81: Table address
P1-45: gear ratio
~ P5-82: Data amount N Enable E-Cam
(denominator)
POS N P5-85: Entering point function
P5-19: Table scale
 Master Axis, the description is as follows:
The moving distance of the master axis is the source which could
Function
drive the E-Cam
Source selected by P5-88.Y:
Source of Master  Physical axis: auxiliary encoder (linear scale)
Axis  Physical axis: pulse command
The Setting Value  Virtual axis: PR command / Time axis / Synchronous capture
of P5-88 Y axis
 Functional axis: CAP axis (defined by CAP function)
Position of Master The position of master axis can be monitored via P5-86. It also can
Axis be written before the E-cam engaged. To change this parameter
will not influence the position of the slave. It is because the moving
P5-86 distance of master axis remains.
 Clutch, the description is as follows:
It is used to determine the status of engaged / disengaged between

the master axis and gear box # 1.
Function
The moving distance of the master axis can drive the E-Cam not until
the cam is engaged.
Enable E-cam 0: disable E-cam function (default value). If the cam is engaged,
function the cam will be forced to disengage.
P5-88.X 1: enable E-cam function and start to judge the engaged condition
Status can be known via parameter P5-88.S: 0 – Stop; 1 – Engage;

E-Cam Status
2 – Pre-engage
7-29
Status Description:
 Stop: It is the initial status of the cam. The E-cam will not operate
with the master pulse. When E-cam function is disabled
(P5-88.X=0), it returns to this status.
 Pre-engage: When the engaged condition (path 1) is established,
it enters this status. The E-cam still will not operate
with the master pulse.
 Engage: When it reaches pre-engaged status (path 3), it enters
this status. The E-cam starts to operate with the master
pulse.
Path Description:
 Path 1：When the engaged condition is established (P5-88.Z),
the status is Stop → Pre-engaged.
The lead pulse is determined by P5-87.
 Path 2：When the E-cam function is disabled (P5-88.X=0), it
returns to Stop status.
 Path 3：When it is in pre-engaged status, the status is Pre-
engaged → Engaged.
 Path 4：When the disengaged condition is established (P5-88.U =
4), the status is Engaged → Pre-engaged. The lead pulse
is determined by P5-92. (It is available after firmware
version V1.006 sub04)
 Path 5：When the disengaged condition is established (P5-88.U =
1, 2, 6), or the E-cam function is disabled (P5-88.X = 0),
the status is Engaged → Stop.
When the E-cam is in Stop status, the method of determining engaged

(path 1) is as the following:
0: Engaged immediately. If P5-88.X is set to 1, the engaged condition
Engage is established.
Condition 1: When DI.CAM is ON, E-cam is engaged.
P5-88.Z 2: From CAP to engaged: E-cam is engaged when CAP function is
enabled. After engaged, it starts to count the moving distance. Since
the CAP position is captured by hardware, it has good instantaneity
and no software delay, which is suitable for the operating master
axis before engaged.
7-30
 In pre-engaged status, the lead pulse is the moving distance of

master axis before the E-cam is engaged (path 3). It can be
observed through the monitoring variable (061). Its value
decreases when inputting the master pulse. When the value is 0,
it enters Engaged status.
 Enter Pre-engaged status via path 1, the lead pulse is determined
by the value of P5-87.
Lead Pulse  Enter Pre-engaged status via path 4, the lead pulse is determined
Monitoring by the value of P5-92.
Variables  If the setting is 0, it means no lead pulse and will enter Engaged
status immediately.
(061)
Symbol ＋/－ represents the direction of lead pulse. Please note that
the E-cam will be unable to engage if setting the wrong direction.
If setting the wrong direction, the value of monitoring variable (061) will
increase, which is far from 0, and causes overflow at the end. If it
overflows, the E-cam function will be disabled (P5-88.X=0) and the E-
cam will be forced to return to Stop status.
When the E-cam is in Engaged status, the method of determining
disengaged is as the following:
Note: 2, 4, and 6 cannot be selected at the same time
U Disengage Condition After Disengaged

(Path 5)
0 Never disengaged.
Enter Stop Status
(Path 5)
1 Disengage when DI.CAM is OFF.
Enter Stop Status
Master axis receives the pulse
number which is set by P5-89 and
2
stops immediately. (The symbol
Disengage
represents the direction)
Condition
P5-88.U (Provided by firmware version (Path 5)
V1.009 or later versions) Enter Stop Status
Same as 2, the E-cam starts to
6 decelerate when disengaging. It is
suitable for the application of calling
the next PR position command right
after disengaged.
(Provided by firmware version (Path 4)
V1.009 or later versions)
Returns to Pre-
Master axis receives the pulse
4 engage Status
number which is set by P5-89 and
stops immediately. (The symbol The lead pulse is
represents the direction) P5-92
8 Disable the E-cam after disengaging Set P5-88.X＝0
Auxiliary When the E-cam disengaged, if it is in the setting distance

Selection (P5-88.U=2), it returns to Stop status and can determine the execution
P5-88.BA PR number.
7-31
 Gear＃1, the description is as follows:
 Set the relativity of master axis and E-cam axis.

Function E.g. The master axis operates one cycle; the E-cam axis has
no need to operate one cycle.
 E-cam axis is a virtual axis.
 The E-cam axis operates one cycle (360 degrees) means the
cam operates one cycle and the slave axis operates one
Description
cycle.
 The pulse number is the unit of moving distance of the master
axis. Its resolution is determined by the source.
Setting Method  If the pulse number of master axis is P, the E-cam axis
P5-83: M operates M cycle.
P5-84: P Then, the setting of gear ratio is P5-83＝M, P5-84＝P
 Cam, the description is as follows:
 Set the relation between E-cam axis and slave axis and define it in
the E-cam table.
Function
E-cam axis operates one cycle and the slave axis operates one
cycle.
Data Storage
Address of  Data array. The start address is set by P5-81.
E-Cam table
Data Format  32-bit (It has positive and negative signs, user unit: PUU)
 It is used to magnify (minify) the E-cam shape.
E-Cam Curve  It equals to the value of data multiplies P5-19.
Scaling  Switching the symbol, ＋/－, will change the operation direction of
P5-19 slave axis.
0 ~ +/- 32.700  If P5-19 is set to 0, the E-cam command will not be output.
(The setting will be 0 for good).
 It is divided into N parts via P5-82 (> = 5) and does not exceed the
Data Size limit of data array. It means 360 degrees a cycle of E-cam are
divided into N areas. Each area is (360/N) degrees.
 The position data of slave axis is saved in E-cam table. (User unit:
PUU).
 If E-cam is divided into N areas, the position of each area must be
included in the table. It must set N＋1 points in total. It is because
the position of the first point (0 degree) and the final point (360
degree) might not be the same.
The data of The data of
1.0° and 360° 2.0° and 360°
Data Content is identical is different
7-32
 If:
1. The start and final position is the same, it means after the E-
cam operates a cycle, the slave axis returns to the origin
position.
E-Cam operates a cycle
The position of
slave axis
The position of E-Cam
2. The start and final position is different, it means after the E-

cam operates a cycle, the slave axis does not return to the
origin position.
E-Cam operates a cycle
The position of
slave axis
The position of E-Cam
 The slave axis is a virtual axis and the unit of slave position is PUU.
 After the E-cam is engaged, the position of the master is the
entering point of P5-85. The position of the slave axis is in the
corresponding point to the P5-85 in E-cam table.
 After engaging, if the master does not operate, the slave axis will
not operate. If the master operates, the slave will travel according to
Operation the E-cam table.
Description  For one cycle of the chart, the slave axis operates a cycle.
 E-cam axis can operate in forward / reverse direction.
 If the E-cam position is between two points of the E-cam table, the
position of the slave axis will be interpolated with cubic curve
function. The adjacent curve remains quadratic differential at the
point in order to smooth torque. The point amount of the table will
not influence the smoothing operation of E-cam.
 Gear＃2, the description is as follows:
 Set the relation between slave axis and pulse command

Function  The slave axis operates a cycle, but the pulse command might
not operate a cycle.
 The slave axis is a virtual axis and the unit of slave position is
PUU.
Description  The pulse command is the encoder unit (pulse). The resolution
is 1280000 pulse/rev.
 For one cycle of the chart, the slave axis operates a cycle.
7-33
 If the pulse number of slave axis is L, the motor axis operates

Setting Method R cycle.
P1-44:numerator
Then, the setting of gear ratio is P1-44/P1-45＝1280000 x R/L
P1-45:denominator
 The gear ratio of PT and PR is the same.
 Digital Output of E-cam, the description is as follows:
DO Name and
 DO.CAM_AREA (DO no.= 0x18)
Number
 If DO.CAM_AREA is ON, it means the position of E-cam axis
Function
is in the setting range.
When the E-cam is  Set the angle range of DO ON by P5-90 and P5-91.
engaging  Please refer to Table 1 and 2 below.
When the E-cam is
 DO.CAM_AREA is OFF.
disengaging
Table 1 P5-90 <= P5-91:

E-Cam angle 0° ~ P5-90 ~ P5-91 ~ 360°
DO:CAM_AREA OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF
Table 2 P5-90 > P5-91:

E-Cam angle 0° ~ P5-91 ~ P5-90 ~ 360°
DO:CAM_AREA ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON
7.11.1 Function Description of CAPTURE (Data Capture)
The concept of CAPTURE is to capture the position of motion axis instantaneously by using the
external trigger signal DI7, then save it in data array so as to be used for motion control
afterwards. Since CAPTURE is finished by hardware, there is no software delay issue.
It also can accurately capture the high-speed motion axis. The CAPTURE features provided by
this servo drive is as follows.
CAPTURE Features
 Main encoder of the motor
 Auxiliary encoder (linear scale)
 Pulse command
Pulse Source
The selected axis will be displayed in P5-37, and the default value can
be written in before capture.
Note: When the source of COMPARE is CAP axis, the CAP source cannot be changed.
 Triggered by DI7. The response time is 5 usec.
Note: DI7 directly connects to CAPTURE hardware. Thus, regardless of the setting
Trigger signal value of P2-16 (DI Code), CAPTURE can work. When using CAPTURE, in order
to avoid DI error, the system will force to disable DI function, which means the
setting will be P2-16 = 0x0100 automatically. Since the value is not written into
EEPROM, P2-16 will return to the default value after re-powering on.
7-34
CAPTURE Features
 Edge trigger can select contact A/B
 It is able to continuously capture more than one point.
Trigger method  It can set the trigger interval.
(The interval between this trigger and the next one.)
Data storage
 Data array. The start address is set by P5-36.
position
Capture number  It is set via P5-38 and will not exceed the limit of data array.
Capture format  32-bit (It has positive and negative signs.)
 After capturing the first data, the CAP axis coordinate system will
be set to the value the same as P5-76.
 After capturing the first data, the COMPARE function is enabled
Auxiliary selection automatically.
 After capturing all points, PR procedure＃50 is triggered
automatically.
 The default value is OFF.
 After capturing the last point, this DO is ON.
DO.CAP_OK
 Set P5-39.X0 to 1 so as to activate CAPTURE function and this
DO is OFF.
 If P5-38=0, set the value of P5-39 X, Bit0 to 1 will disable the
CAPTURE function. Clear the setting value of P5-39 X, Bit0 to 0
Note and set DO.CAP_OK to OFF.
 Since the capture axis is 32-bit wide, the accumulation will cause
overflow. Please avoid this.
The CAP data is saved in data array and the first CAP data locates in P5-36. The CAP number
has no limit, thus it can be set via P5-38. The last CAP data is saved in P5-36＋P5-38－1.
Set the value of P5-39 X, Bit0 to 1 so as to activate CAP function. Every time when DI7 is
triggered, one data will be captured and saved in data array. Then, the value of P5-38 will
decrease one automatically until the CAP number reaches the setting value (P5-38 = 0). The
CAP procedure is completed, the setting value of P5-39 X, Bit0 will be cleared to 0 and
DO.CAP_OK is ON.
When capturing the first data, the position of CAP axis can be reset. The first CAP value will be
the value set by P5-76. And the value of the second CAP data will be the incremental value
from the first data. This method is called Relative Capture. If not selecting the first data reset,
it is called Absolute Capture.
When capturing the first data, it automatically activates COMPARE function, which means the
COMPARE function, is activated via DI7.
7-35
The diagram of CAP:
Data Array
Enable Compare function
The first axis ……
position can be The first point is saved in P5-36 POS 1
reset to the value POS 2
as P5-76 The second point is saved in P5-36 + 1 POS 3
~
POS N
The third point is saved in P5-36 + 2
Capture axis
(P5-37)
Capture signal
(DI7) The CAP number is set via P5-38
1 2 3 N
DO.CAP_OK
· P5-39.X0 = 0 after CAP is complete
· Call PR#50 when all in P5-38 CAP
completed.
P5-38.X0 = 1 to activate the next

CAP and switch off the DO
7.11.2 Function Description of COMPARE (Data Compare)
The concept of COMPARE is to compare the instant position of motion axis with the value which
is saved in data array. Then output DO4 after the COMPARE condition is established for motion
control. Since COMPARE is finished by hardware, there is no problem of software delay. It also
can accurately compare the high-speed motion axis. The COMPARE features provided by this
servo drive is as follows.
COMPARE Features
 Main Encoder of the Motor
 Auxiliary Encoder (linear scale)
 Pulse Command
Pulse Source  CAP Axis (set by CAPTURE). When selecting this axis, CAP
source cannot be changed.
The selected axis is displayed in P5-57. Before compare, the
default value can be written in.
 Output by DO4 and the response time is 5 usec.
Note: DO4 directly connects to COMPARE hardware, thus, regardless the setting
value of P2-21 (DO Code), the function can work. When using COMPARE, in
Output Signal order to avoid DO error, the system will force to disable DO function, which
means the setting will be P2-21 = 0x0100 automatically. Since the value is
not written into EEPROM, P2-21 will return to the default value after re-power
on.
 Pulse output can select contact A/B.
Output Method  It is able to continuously output more than one point.
 It can set the pulse output time.
Data Storage Position  Data array. The start address is set by P5-56.
7-36
COMPARE Features
Compare Number  It is set via P5-58 and will not exceed the limit of data array.
Compare Format  32-bit (It has positive and negative signs.)
 It will be triggered when the source of compare axis pass
Compare Condition through the compare value. (The values can be from great to
small or vice versa.)
 Cycle mode: When comparing to the last point, it automatically
returns to the first point and starts to compare.
Auxiliary Selection
 When the last compare is completed, the CAPTURE function is
activated automatically.
 If P5-58 is set to 0, set the value of P5-59 X, Bit0 to1 will be
unable to compare. Set the value of P5-59 X, Bit0 to 0.
Note
 Since the capture axis is 32-bit wide, the accumulation will
cause overflow. Please avoid this.
The value of COMPARE is saved in data array and the first compare data locates in P5-56. The
CMP number has no limit, thus it can be set via P5-58. The last CMP data is saved in P5-56 +
P5-58 - 1. Set the value of P5-59.X, Bit0 to 1 so as to activate CMP function and start to compare
the first data of data array. Every time when a position saved in data array is compared, the
compare DO will be outputted. Then, the value of P5-58 will decrease one automatically and
compare the next value until the CMP number reaches the setting value (P5-58 = 0). When the
CMP procedure is completed, the setting value of P5-59.X, Bit0 will be cleared to 0.
When comparing to the last point, it can select if it returns to the first data for comparing. This is
called cycle mode. Or it can activate CAPTURE function and wait DI7 for triggering CAP/CMP
procedure.
The diagram of COMPARE:
Data Array
……
The first point is saved in P5-56 POS 1
POS 2
The second point is saved in P5-56 + 1 POS 3
~
POS N
The third point is saved in P5-56 + 2
Compare axis
(P5-57)
Compare signal
(DO4)
1 2 3 N
Set the compared number via P5-58.

Output pulse can be set in P5-59.CBA.
· Enable CAP function. (It is invalid if

CAP function is enabled already.)
After the last pulse outputs completely:

· Non-cycle mode: CMP is complete, set
P5-59.X0 to 0.
· Cycle mode: Compare the 1st point
again; the value of P5-59.X0 is 1.
7-37
7-38
Chapter 8 Parameters
8.1 Parameter Definition
Parameters are divided into eight groups which are shown as follows. The first character after the
start code P is the group character and the second character is the parameter character.
As for the communication address, it is the combination of group number along with two-digit
number in hexadecimal. The definition of parameter groups is as the followings:
Group 0: Monitor parameters (example: P0-xx)
Group 1: Basic parameters (example: P1-xx)
Group 2: Extension parameters (example: P2-xx)
Group 3: Communication parameters (example: P3-xx)
Group 4: Diagnosis parameters (example: P4-xx)
Group 5: Motion control parameters (example: P5-xx)
Group 6: PR parameters (example: P6-xx)
Group 7: PR parameters (example: P7-xx)
Control Mode Description:

PT : Position control mode (Input the position command via the terminal block)
PR : Position control mode (The internal register issues the position command)
S : Speed control mode
T : Torque control mode
DMC : DMCNET control mode
Special Symbol Description

(★) Read-only register. Can only read the status. For example: parameters P0-00, P0-10, and
P4-00, etc.
(▲) Setting is invalid when Servo On, e.g. parameters P1-00, P1-46, and P2-33, etc.
() Not effective until re-power on or off the servo drive, e.g. parameters P1-01 and P3-00.
() Parameters of no data retained setting, e.g. parameters P2-31 and P3-06.
8-1
Chapter 8 Parameters ASDA-A2
8.2 List of Parameters
Monitor and General Output Parameter
Control Mode Related

Parameter Abbr. Function Default Unit
PT PR S T Section
Factory
P0-00★ VER Firmware Version N/A O O O O -
Setting
10.1
Alarm Code Display of Drive
P0-01■ ALE N/A N/A O O O O 10.2
(Seven-segment Display)
10.3
P0-02 STS Drive Status 00 N/A O O O O 7.2
P0-03 MON Analog Output Monitor 0x0 N/A O O O O 4.3.5
P0-08★ TSON Servo On Time 0 Hour -
P0-09★ CM1 Status Monitor Register 1 N/A N/A O O O O 4.3.5

Status Monitor Register 1
P0-17 CM1A 0 N/A -
Selection
P0-18 CM2A 0 N/A -
Selection
P0-19 CM3A 0 N/A -
Selection
P0-20 CM4A 0 N/A -
Selection
P0-21 CM5A 0 N/A -
Selection
No need to
P0-25 MAP1 Mapping Parameter # 1 N/A O O O O 4.3.5
initialize
No need to
initialize
No need to
initialize
No need to
initialize
No need to
initialize
No need to
initialize
No need to
initialize
No need to
initialize
8-2
ASDA-A2 Chapter 8 Parameters
Monitor and General Output Parameter

PT PR S T Section
Target Setting of Mapping
P0-35 MAP1A 0x0 N/A O O O O 4.3.5
Parameter P0-25
P0-36 MAP2A 0x0 N/A O O O O 4.3.5
Parameter P0-26
P0-37 MAP3A 0x0 N/A O O O O 4.3.5
Parameter P0-27
P0-38 MAP4A 0x0 N/A O O O O 4.3.5
Parameter P0-28
P0-39 MAP5A 0x0 N/A O O O O 4.3.5
Parameter P0-29
P0-40 MAP6A 0x0 N/A O O O O 4.3.5
Parameter P0-30
P0-41 MAP7A 0x0 N/A O O O O 4.3.5
Parameter P0-31
P0-42 MAP8A 0x0 N/A O O O O 4.3.5
Parameter P0-32
Servo Digital Output Status
P0-46★ SVSTS 0x0 N/A O O O O -
Display
MON1 Analog Monitor %(full
P1-04 MON1 100 O O O O 6.6.3
Output Proportion scale)
MON2 Analog Monitor %(full
P1-05 MON2 100 O O O O 6.6.3
Output Proportion scale)
(★) Read-only register. Can only read the status. For example: parameters P0-00, P0-10, and P4-00, etc.
8-3
Filter and Resonance Suppression Parameter

PT PR S T Section
Analog Speed Command
P1-06 SFLT 0 ms O 6.3.3
(Low-pass Filter)
Analog Torque Command
P1-07 TFLT 0 ms O 6.4.3
(Low-pass Filter)
Smooth Constant of
P1-08 PFLT Position Command 0 10 ms O O 6.2.6
(Low-pass Filter)
Low-frequency Vibration
P1-25 VSF1 1000 0.1 Hz O O 6.2.9
Suppression (1)
P1-26 VSG1 0 N/A O O 6.2.9
Suppression Gain (1)
P1-27 VSF2 1000 0.1 Hz O O 6.2.9
Suppression (2)
P1-28 VSG2 0 N/A O O 6.2.9
Suppression Gain (2)
Auto Low-frequency
P1-29 AVSM Vibration Supression 0 N/A O O 6.2.9
Setting
P1-30 VCL 500 pulse O O 6.2.9
Detection
Acceleration Constant of
P1-34 TACC 200 ms O 6.3.3
S-Curve
Deceleration Constant of
P1-35 TDEC 200 ms O 6.3.3
S-Curve
Acceleration / Deceleration
P1-36 TSL 0 ms O O 6.3.3
Constant of S-Curve
P1-59 MFLT Analog Speed Command 0 0.1 ms O -
P1-62 FRCL Friction Compensation 0 % O O O O -
P1-63 FRCT Friction Compensation 0 ms O O O O -
Position Command Moving
P1-68 PFLT2 4 ms O O -
Filter
Low-pass Filter Time
P1-75 FELP Constant of Full-closed 100 ms O O -
Loop control
Resonance suppression
P2-23 NCF1 1000 Hz O O O O 6.3.7
(Notch filter) (1)
Resonance Suppression
P2-24 DPH1 (Notch filter) Attenuation 0 dB O O O O 6.3.7
Rate (1)
P2-43 NCF2 1000 Hz O O O O 6.3.7
(Notch filter) (2)
Rate (2)
P2-45 NCF3 1000 Hz O O O O 6.3.7
(Notch filter) (3)
8-4
Filter and Resonance Suppression Parameter

PT PR S T Section
Rate (3)
Auto Resonance
P2-47 ANCF 1 N/A O O O O -
Suppression Mode Setting
P2-48 ANCL 100 N/A O O O O -
Detection Level
Low-pass Filter of
P2-25 NLP 2 or 5 0.1ms O O O O 6.3.7
Semi-auto Inertia
P2-33▲ INF 0x0 N/A O O O O -
Adjustment
P2-49 SJIT Speed Detection Filter 0x0 N/A O O O O -
Gain and Switch Parameter

PT PR S T Section
P2-00 KPP Position Loop Gain 35 rad/s O O 6.2.8

Switching Rate of Position
P2-01 PPR 100 % O O
Loop Gain
Position Control Feed
P2-02 PFG 50 % O O 6.2.8
Forward Gain
Smooth Constant of
P2-03 PFF 5 ms O O -
Position Feed Forward Gain
P2-04 KVP Speed Control Gain 500 rad/s O O O O 6.3.6
Switching Rate of Speed
P2-05 SPR 100 % O O O O -
Control Gain
Speed Integral
P2-06 KVI 100 rad/s O O O O 6.3.6
Compensation
P2-07 KVF Speed Feed Forward Gain 0 % O O O O 6.3.6
P2-26 DST Anti-interference Gain 0 rad/s O O O O -
Gain Switching and
P2-27 GCC 0x0 N/A O O O O -
Switching Selection
Gain Switching Time 10
P2-28 GUT 10 O O O O -
Constant ms
8-5
Gain and Switch Parameter

Related
Parameter Abbr. Function Default Unit Control Mode
Section
pulse
P2-29 GPE Gain Switching 1280000 Kpps O O O O -
r/min
Speed Loop Frequency 5.6
P2-31■ AUT1 Response Setting in Auto 40 Hz O O O O
and Semi-auto Mode 6.3.6
5.6
P2-32▲ AUT2 Tuning Mode Selection 0x0 N/A O O O O
6.3.6
(▲) Setting is unable when Servo On, e.g. parameters P1-00, P1-46, and P2-33, etc.
Position Control Parameter

PT PR S T Section
Input Setting of Control
P1-01● CTL Mode and Control 0* - O O O O 6.1
Command
Speed and Torque Limit
P1-02▲ PSTL 0x0 N/A O O O O 6.6
Setting
P1-12 ~
TQ1 ~ 3 Internal Torque Limit 1 ~ 3 100 % O O O O 6.4.1
P1-14
Pulse Number of Encoder
P1-46▲ GR3 2500 pulse O O O O -
Output
P1-55 MSPD Maximum Speed Setting rated r/min O O O O -
Resolution of Linear Scale Pulse/
P1-72 FRES 5000 O O -
for full-closed loop control rev
Error Protection Range for
P1-73 FERR 30000 pulse O O -
Full-closed Loop Control
Full-closed Loop Control of
P1-74 FCON 000h - O O -
Linear Scale
P2-50 DCLR Pulse Clear Mode 0 N/A O O -
Deceleration Time of Auto
P5-03 PDEC 0XF00FFFFF N/A O O O O -
Protection
P5-20 ~ AC0 ~ Acceleration / Deceleration 30 ~
ms O O O O 7.10
P5-35 AC15 Time 8000
Axis Position - Motor
P5-16 AXEN N/A N/A O O O O 7.3
Encoder
Axis Position - Auxiliary
P5-17 AXAU N/A N/A O O O O 7.3
Encoder
Axis Position - Pulse
P5-18 AXPC N/A N/A O O O O 7.3
Command
8-6
Position Control Parameter

PT PR S T Section
External Pulse Command (PT mode)
P1-00▲ PTT External Pulse Input Type 0x2 N/A O 6.2.1
P1-44▲ GR1 Gear Ratio (Numerator) (N1) 128 pulse O O 6.2.5
Gear Ratio (Denominator)
P1-45▲ GR2 10 pulse O O 6.2.5
(M)
P2-60 GR4 Gear Ratio (Numerator) (N2) 128 pulse O -
Register Control Command (PR mode)
P6-02 ~ PO1 ~ Internal Position Command
0 N/A O 7.10
P7-27 PO63 1 ~ 63
P5-60 ~ POV1 ~ Target Speed Setting #0 ~ 20 ~
0.1r/min O 7.10
P5-75 POV15 15 3000
P5-04 HMOV Homing Mode 0x0 N/A O -
1 Speed Setting of High
st
P5-05 HSPD1 100 r/min O -
Speed Homing
2nd Speed Setting of Low
P5-06 HSPD2 20 r/min O -
Speed Homing
Trigger Position Command
P5-07 PRCM 0 N/A O -
(PR mode only)
P5-40 ~ DLY0 ~ Delay Time after Position 0~
ms O 7.10
P5-55 DLY15 Completed 5500
Position Command of Event
P5-98 EVON 0x0 N/A O -
Rising-edge Trigger
Position Command of Event
P5-99 EVOF 0x0 N/A O -
Falling-edge Trigger
PATH#1 ~ PATH#2 No Data
P5-15 PMEM 0x0 N/A O -
Retained Setting
P5-08 SWLP Forward Software Limit +231 PUU O -
P5-09 SWLN Reverse Software Limit -231 PUU O -
Note: (* ) please refer to the detailed description of the parameter.
8-7
Speed Control Parameter

PT PR S T Section
pulse
Input Setting of Control Mode
P1-01● CTL 0* r/min O O O O 6.1
and Control Command
N-M
P1-02▲ PSTL Speed and Torque Limit Setting 0x0 N/A O O O O 6.6
Output Pulse Counts Per One
P1-46▲ GR3 2500 pulse O O O O -
Motor Revolution
P1-55 MSPD Maximum Speed Limit rated r/min O O O O -
P1-09 ~ 1000 ~ 0.1
SP1 ~ 3 Internal Speed Command 1 ~ 3 O O 6.3.1
P1-11 3000 r/min
P1-12 ~
TQ1 ~ 3 Internal Torque Limit 1 ~ 3 100 % O O O O 6.6.2
P1-14
Maximum Speed of Analog
P1-40▲ VCM rated r/min O O 6.3.4
Speed Command
Maximum Output of Analog
P1-41▲ TCM 100 % O O O O -
Torque Speed
Maximum Rotation Setting of
P1-76 AMSPD 5500 r/min O O O O -
Encoder Setting (OA, OB)
8-8
Torque Control Parameter

PT PR S T Section
pulse
Input Setting of Control Mode and
P1-01● CTL 0* r/min O O O O 6.1
Control Command
N-M
P1-02▲ PSTL Speed and Torque Limit Setting 0x0 N/A O O O O 6.6
Output Pulse Counts Per One
P1-46▲ GR3 2500 pulse O O O O -
Motor Revolution
P1-55 MSPD Maximum Speed Limit rated r/min O O O O -
P1-09
1000 ~
~ SP1~3 Internal Speed Limit 1~3 r/min O O 6.6.1
3000
P1-11
P1-12
~ TQ1~3 Internal Torque Command 1~3 100 % O O O O 6.4.1
P1-14
Maximum Speed of Analog
P1-40▲ VCM rated r/min O O -
Speed Command
Maximum Output of Analog
P1-41▲ TCM 100 % O O O O 6.4.4
Torque Limit
Planning of Digital Input / Output Pin and Output Setting Parameter

PT PR S T Section
General Range Compare Digital
P0-53 ZDRT 0x0 ms O O O O -
Output – Filtering Time
P0-54 ZON1L Output – Lower Limit of 1st 0 N/A O O O O -
Monitoring Variable
P0-55 ZON1H Output – Upper Limit of 1st 0 N/A O O O O -
Monitoring Variable
P2-09 DRT DI Debouncing Time 2 ms O O O O -
Table
P2-10 DI1 DI1 Functional Planning 0x0101 N/A O O O O
8.1
Table
8.1
8-9

PT PR S T Section
Table
8.1
Table
8.1
Table
8.1
Table
8.1
Table
8.1
Table
8.1
Table
P2-36 EDI9 DI9 Functional Planning 0x0 N/A O O O O
8.1
Table
8.1
Table
8.1
Table
8.1
Table
8.1
Table
8.1
Table
P2-18 DO1 DO1 Functional Planning 0x0101 N/A O O O O
8.2
Table
8.2
Table
8.2
Table
8.2
Table
8.2
0.1 Table
P1-38 ZSPD Zero Speed Range Setting 100 O O O O
r/min 8.2
Table
P1-39 SSPD Target Motor Detection Level 3000 r/min O O O O
8.2
P1-42 MBT1 Enable Delay Time of Brake 0 ms O O O O 6.6.4
P1-43 MBT2 Disable Delay Time of Brake 0 ms O O O O 6.6.4
Speed Reached (DO: SP_OK) Table
P1-47 SCPD 10 r/min O
Range 8.2
8-10

PT PR S T Section
Table
P1-54 PER Position Completed Range 12800 pulse O O
8.2
Table
P1-56 OVW Output Overload Warning Level 120 % O O O O
8.2
Communication Parameter

PT PR S T Section
P3-00● ADR Address Setting 0x007F N/A O O O O 9.2

P3-01 BRT Transmission Speed 0x3203 bps O O O O 9.2
P3-02 PTL Communication Protocol 0x6 N/A O O O O 9.2
P3-03 FLT Communication Error Disposal 0 N/A O O O O 9.2
P3-04 CWD Communication Timeout 0 sec O O O O 9.2
P3-05 CMM Communication Mechanism 0x0 N/A O O O O 9.2
Control Switch of Digital Input
P3-06■ SDI 0x0 N/A O O O O 9.2
(DI)
Communication Response
P3-07 CDT 0 ms O O O O 9.2
Delay Time
P3-09 SYC CANopen Synchronize Setting 0x505557A1 N/A
DMCNET Synchronize Setting 0x3511
P3-09 SYC N/A
CANopen Protocol Setting 0x5055
DMCNETProtocol Setting 0x0001
P3-10 CANEN N/A
CANopen Selection 0x0000
DMCNET Selection 0
P3-12 QSTPO N/A
CANopen Support Setting 0
8-11
Diagnosis Parameter

PT PR S T Section
P4-00★ ASH1 Fault Record (N) 0x0 N/A O O O O 4.4.1
P4-01★ ASH2 Fault Record (N-1) 0x0 N/A O O O O 4.4.1
P4-05 JOG Servo Motor Jog Control 20 r/min O O O O 4.4.2

Digital Output Register
P4-06■ FOT 0x0 N/A O O O O 4.4.5
(Readable and Writable)
4.4.5
P4-07 ITST Multi-function of Digital Input 0x0 N/A O O O O
P4-08★ PKEY Input Status of the Drive Keypad N/A N/A O O O O -
P4-09★ MOT Digital Output Status N/A N/A O O O O 4.4.5

P4-10▲ CEN Adjustment Selection 0 N/A O O O O -
Analog Speed Input Offset Factory
P4-11 SOF1 N/A O O O O -
Adjustment 1 Setting
Analog Speed Input Offset Factory
P4-12 SOF2 N/A O O O O -
Analog Torque Input Offset Factory
P4-13 TOF1 N/A O O O O -
Analog Torque Input Offset Factory
P4-14 TOF2 N/A O O O O -
Current Detector (V1 Phase) Factory
P4-15 COF1 N/A O O O O -
Offset Adjustment Setting
Current Detector (V2 Phase) Factory
Current Detector (W1 Phase) Factory
Current Detector (W2 Phase) Factory
IGBT NTC Adjustment Detection Factory
P4-19 TIGB N/A O O O O -
Level Setting
Offset Adjustment Value of
P4-20 DOF1 0 mV O O O O 6.6.3
Analog Monitor Output (Ch1)
Offset Adjustment Value of
P4-21 DOF2 0 mV O O O O 6.6.3
Analog Monitor Output (Ch2)
P4-22 SAO Analog Speed Input OFFSET 0 mV O -
P4-23 TAO Analog Torque Input OFFSET 0 mV O -
8-12
8-13
8.3 Parameter Description
P0-xx Monitor Parameters
Address: 0000H
P0-00★ VER Firmware Version
0001H
Operational Related Section: -
Interface：
Default： Factory Setting

Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： This parameter shows the firmware version of the servo drive.
Alarm Code Display of Drive (Seven-segment Address: 0002H

P0-01■ ALE
Display) 0003H
Interface： 10.1, 10.2, 10.3
Default： -
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0x0000
Data Size： 16-bit
Settings： Hexadecimal format: displays the alarm code

0x0000: alarm cleared (same as DI.ARST)
0x0000～0xFFFF: display the current alarm (read-only)
For the alarm list, please refer to Section 10.1.
8-14
Address: 0004H
P0-02 STS Drive Status
0005H
Interface： 7.2
Default： 00
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0 ~ 127
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： Displays the parameter setting. You can set the monitoring variable for
P0-02 to monitor the variable through the panel.
Please refer to Section 7.2.1 Monitoring Variables.
Address: 0006H
P0-03 MON Analog Output Monitor
0007H
Operational Related Section: 6.6.4
Interface：
Default： 0x0000
Control Mode： ALL
Unit： -
Range： 0x0000 ~ 0x0077
Data Size： 16-bit
Settings：
MON2
MON1
Not used
8-15
MON1,
MON2
Description
Setting
Value
0 Motor speed (+/-8 Volts/Max. speed)
1 Motor torque (+/-8 Volts/Max. torque)
2 Pulse command frequency (+8 Volts／4.5 Mpps)

3 Speed command (+/-8 Volts/ Max. speed command)
4 Torque command (+/-8 Volts/Max. torque command)
5 VBUS voltage (+/-8 Volts／450V)

6 Reserved
7 Reserved
Note: Please refer to parameter P1-04 and P1-05 for proportional setting
of analog output voltage.
For example: P0-03 = 01 (MON1 is the analog output of motor

speed; MON2 is the analog output of motor torque)
Motor speed
(Max. speed × )
100
Motor torque
(Max. torque × )
100
P0-04 ~
Reserved
P0-07
Address: 0010H
P0-08★ TSON Power On Time
0011H
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
-
Mode：
Unit： Hour
Range： 0 ~ 65535
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
8-16
Settings： It shows the total startup time of the servo drive.
Address: 0012H
P0-09★ CM1 Status Monitor Register 1
0013H
Interface： 4.3.5
Default： -
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -
Data Size： 32-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： Set the value to be monitored in P0-17 through the drive panel or
communication. (Please refer to Chapter 7.2.1, Description of
Monitoring Variable for the setting value.) To get the status, the
communication port must read the communication address.
For example, if P0-17 is set to 3, when accessing P0-09, it obtains the

total feedback pulse number of motor encoder. For MODBUS
communication, two 16-bit data, 0012H and 0013H will be read as a
32-bit data; (0013H : 0012H) = (Hi-word：Low-word).
Set P0-02 to 23, the panel displays VAR-1 first, and then shows the
content of P0-09.
Address: 0014H
0015H
Interface： 4.3.5
Default： -
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -
Data Size： 32-bit
Format： Decimal
8-17
communication. (Please refer to section 7.2.1, Description of
Monitoring variable for the setting value.) To get the status, the
communication port must read the communication address. Set P0-02
to 24, the panel displays VAR-2 first, and then shows the content of
P0-10.
Address: 0016H
0017H
Interface： 4.3.5
Default： -
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -
Data Size： 32-bit
Format： Decimal
commuincation. (Please refer to section 7.2.1, Description of
P0-11.
Address: 0018H
0019H
Interface： 4.3.5
Default： -
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -
Data Size： 32-bit
Format： Decimal
8-18
P0-12.
Address: 001AH
001BH
Interface： 4.3.5
Default： -
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -
Data Size： 32-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： Set the value to be monitored in P0-21 throug the drive panel or
communication port must read the communication address.
P0-14 ~
Reserved
P0-16
8-19
Address: 0022H
P0-17 CM1A Status Monitor Register 1 Selection
0023H
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
-
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0 ~ 127
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： Please refer to section 7.2.1, Description of Monitoring Variable for the
setting value.
For example, if P0-17 is set to 07, then reading P0-09 means
reading ”Motor speed (r/min).“
Address: 0024H
0025H
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
-
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0 ~ 127
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
setting value.
8-20
Address:0026H
0027H
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
-
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0 ~ 127
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
setting value.
Address: 0028H
0029H
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
-
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0 ~ 127
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
setting value.
Address: 002AH
002BH
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
-
Mode：
Unit： -
8-21
Range： 0 ~ 127
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
setting value.
P0-22 ~
Reserved
P0-24
Address: 0032H
P0-25 MAP1 Mapping Parameter # 1
0033H
Interface： 4.3.5
Default： No need to initialize

Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： determined by the corresponding parameter

of P0-35
Data Size： 32-bit
Settings： Users can rapidly continuously read and write parameters that are not
in the same group. You can use P0-35 to specify the mapping
parameter number through the panel or communication. The content of
parameter that is specified by P0-35 will be shown in P0-25.
Please refer to the description of P0-35 for parameter setting.
Address: 0034H
0035H
Interface： 4.3.5

Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -

of P0-36
Data Size： 32-bit
8-22
Settings： The using method is the same as P0-25. The mapping target is set by
parameter P0-36.
Address: 0036H
0037H
Interface： 4.3.5

Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -

of P0-37
Data Size： 32-bit
parameter P0-37.
Address: 0038H
0039H
Interface： 4.3.5

Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -

of P0-38
Data Size： 32-bit
parameter P0-38.
8-23
Address: 003AH
003BH
Interface： 4.3.5

Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -

of P0-39
Data Size： 32-bit
parameter P0-39.
Address: 003CH
003DH
Interface： 4.3.5

Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -

of P0-40
Data Size： 32-bit
parameter P0-40.
Address: 003EH
003FH
Interface： 4.3.5

Control
ALL
Mode：
8-24
Unit： -

of P0-41
Data Size： 32-bit
parameter P0-41.
Address: 0040H
0041H
Interface： 4.3.5

Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -

of P0-42
Data Size： 32-bit
parameter P0-42.
P0-33 ~
Reserved
P0-34
Address: 0046H
P0-35 MAP1A Target Setting of Mapping Parameter P0-25
0047H
Interface： 4.3.5
Default： 0x00000000
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： determined by the communication address of

the parameter group
Data Size： 32-bit
8-25
Settings： Select the data block to access the parameter corresponded by

register 1.
The mapping content is 32 bits wide and can map to two 16-bit
parameters or one 32-bit parameter.
P0-35:
Mapping parameter: P0-35; Mapping content: P0-25.

When PH≠PL, it means the content of P0-25 includes two 16-bit
parameters.
VH=*(PH), VL=*(PL)
Mapping parameter: P0-35; Mapping content: P0-25.

When PH=PL=P, it means the content of P0-25 includes one 32-bit
parameter.
If P=060Ah (parameter P6-10), then V32 is P6-10.
The setting format of PH, PL is:
A: The hexadecimal of parameter indexing

B: The hexadecimal of parameter group
For example:
If the mapping target is P2-06, set P0-35 to 0206.
If the mapping target is P5-42, set P0-35 to 052A.
For example:
If users desire to read / write P1-44 (32-bit) through P0-25, set P0-35
to 0x012C012C via panel or communication. Then, when reading /
writing P0-25, it also reads / writes P1-44.
Moreover, users can also access the value of P2-02 and P2-04
through P0-25.
P2-02 Position feed forward gain (16-bit)
P2-04 Speed control gin (16-bit)
Users only need to set P0-35 to 0x02040202. Then, when reading /
writing P0-25, it also reads / writes the value of P2-02 and P2-04.
8-26
Address: 0048H
0049H
Interface： 4.3.5
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -

the parameter group
Data Size： 32-bit
Settings：
高位元
High-bit 低位元
Low-bit
Position of Position of
P0-36 映射參數位置
mapping parameter 映射參數位置
mapping parameter
Content of Content of
P0-26 映射參數內容
mapping parameter 映射參數內容
mapping parameter
Address: 004AH
004BH
Interface： 4.3.5
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -

the parameter group
Data Size： 32-bit
Settings：
高位元
High-bit 低位元
Low-bit
mapping parameter
mapping parameter
8-27
Address: 004CH
004DH
Interface： 4.3.5
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -

the parameter group
Data Size： 32-bit
Settings：
高位元
High-bit 低位元
Low-bit
P0-38
mapping parameter
P0-28
mapping parameter
Address: 004EH
004FH
Interface： 4.3.5
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -

the parameter group
Data Size： 32-bit
Settings：
高位元
High-bit 低位元
Low-bit
P0-39
mapping parameter
P0-29
mapping parameter
8-28
Address: 0050H
0051H
Interface： 4.3.5
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -

the parameter group
Data Size： 32-bit
Settings：
高位元
High-bit 低位元
Low-bit
P0-40
mapping parameter
P0-30
mapping parameter
Address: 0052H
0053H
Interface： 4.3.5
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -

the parameter group
Data Size： 32-bit
Settings：
高位元
High-bit 低位元
Low-bit
P0-41
mapping parameter
P0-31
mapping parameter
8-29
Address: 0054H
0055H
Interface： 4.3.5
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -

the parameter group
Data Size： 32-bit
Settings：
高位元
High-bit 低位元
Low-bit
P0-42
mapping parameter
P0-32
mapping parameter
P0-43 Reserved
Address: 0058H
P0-44★ PCMN Status Monitor Register (for PC software)
0059H
Interface： 4.3.5
Default： 0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -

the parameter group
Data Size： 32-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： Same as parameter P0-09.
8-30
Status Monitor Register Selection Address: 005AH

P0-45■ PCMNA
(for PC software) 005BH
Interface： 4.3.5
Default： 0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0~127
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： Same as parameter P0-17
Address: 005CH
P0-46★ SVSTS Servo Digital Output Status Display
005DH
Interface：
Default： 0x0000
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0x0000 ~ 0x00FF
Data Size： 16-bit
Settings： Bit 0: SRDY (Servo is ready)

Bit 1: SON (Servo ON)
Bit 2: ZSPD (Zero speed detection)
Bit 3: TSPD (Target speed reached)
Bit 4: TPOS (Target position reached)
Bit 5: TQL (Torque limiting)
Bit 6: ALRM (Servo alarm)
Bit 7: BRKR (Brake control output)
Bit 8: HOME (Homing finished)
Bit 9: OLW (Early warning for overload)
Bit 10: WARN (When Servo warning, CW, CCW, EMGS, under
voltage, Communication error, etc., occurs, DO is ON)
Bit 11 ~ Bit 15: Reserved
8-31
Address: 0062H
P0-49■ UAP Renew Encoder Absolute Position
0063H
Operational Related Section: N/A
Interface：
Default： 0x0000
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： N/A
Range： 0x0000~0x0002
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Hexadecimaladecimal
Settings：This parameter is used to renew the absolute position data of the

encoder.
Parameter Renew Setting:

1: Renew the encoder data to parameters P0-50 ~ P0-52 only.
2: Renew the parameters P0-50 ~ P0-52, and clear the position error
as well. While this setting is activated, the current position of the
motor will be reset as the target position of position command (same
function as CCLR).
Address: 0064H
P0-50★ APSTS Absolute Coordinate System Status
0065H
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： N/A
Range： -
Data Size： 16-bit
Settings：
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
8-32
Bit 0: Absolute position status

0: Normal
1: Absolute position is lost
Bit 1: Voltage level of battery
0: Normal
1: Low battery
Bit 2: Status of encoder multiturn
0: Normal
1: Overflow
Bit 3: Status of PUU
0: Normal
1: Overflow
Bit 4: Absolute coordinate system status
0: Normal
1: Absolute coordinate system has not been set
Bit 5 ~ Bit 15: Reserved. Set to 0.
Address: 0066H
P0-51★ APR Encoder Absolute Position (Multiturn)
0067H
Interface：
Default： 0x0000
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： rev
Range： -
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： While the Bit 1 of P2-70 is set to 1 to read the encoder pulse number,
this parameter represents the turns of encoder absolute position. While
the Bit 1 of P2-70 is set to 0 to read the PUU number, this parameter
becomes disabled and the setting value of this parameter is 0.
Display range for number of revolution: -32768 to +32767
Encoder Absolute Position Address: 0068H

P0-52★ APP
(Pulse number within Single turn or PUU) 0069H
Interface：
8-33
Default： 0x0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： Pulse or PUU
Range： -
Data Size： 32-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings：While the Bit 1 of P2-70 is set to 1 to read the pulse number, this
parameter represents the pulse number of encoder absolute position.
While the Bit 1 of P2-70 is set to 0 to read the PUU number, this
parameter represents the PUU number of motor absolute position.
Display range for number of revolution:
0 ~1280000-1 (Pulse); -2147483648 to +2147483647 (PUU)
General Range Compare Digital Output – Address: 006AH

P0-53 ZDRT
Filtering Time 006BH
Interface：
Default： 0x0000
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： ms
Range： 0x0000 ~ 0x000F
Data Size： 16-bit
Settings：
X: Filtering time for 1st monitoring variable

UYZ: Reserved
While the value of the monitoring variable is changed within the range
between the setting values of P0-54 and P0-55, this parameter is used
to set the filter timing for the monitoring variable. The value of
monitoring variable will output after the filtering time determined by
parameter P0-53.
8-34
For example: when P0-09 is used
General Range Compare Digital Output – Address: 006CH

P0-54 ZON1L
Lower Limit of 1st Monitoring Variable 006DH
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings：The value of parameter P0-09 will change within the range set in P0-54
and P0-55 and then output after the filtering time determined by
parameter P0-53.X.
8-35
General Range Compare Digital Output – Address: 006EH

P0-55 ZON1H
Upper Limit of 1st Monitoring Variable 006FH
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： The value of parameter P0-09 will change within the range set in P0-54
and P0-55 and then output after the filtering time determined by
parameter P0-53.X.
P0-56 ~
Reserved
P0-62
Address: 007EH
P0-63 VGT The Time when Voltage Exceeding 400V
007FH
Interface：
Default： 0x0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： ms
Range： -
Data Size： 32-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： Record the accumulative time when the drive’s voltage exceeding
400V.
Display range: 0x00000000 ~ 0x7FFFFFFF
8-36
P1-xx Basic Parameters
Address: 0100H
P1-00▲ PTT The Type of External Pulse Input
0101H
Interface： 6.2.1
Default： 0x0002
Control
PT
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0x0000 ~ 0x1142
Data Size： 16-bit
Settings：
 Pulse Type
0: AB phase pulse (4x)
1: Clockwise (CW) and Counterclockwise (CCW) pulse
2: Pulse + symbol
Other setting: reserved
 Filter Width
If the received frequency is much higher than the setting, it will be
regarded as the noise and filtered out.
Min. pulse width*note1 Min. pulse width*note1
Setting Setting
Value (Low-speed filter Value (High-speed filter
frequency) frequency)
0 600 ns (0.83 Mpps) 0 150 ns (3.33 Mpps)
1 2.4 us (208 Kpps) 1 600 ns (0.83 Mpps)
2 4.8 us (104 Kpps) 2 1.2 us (416 Kpps)
3 9.6 us (52 Kpps) 3 2.4 us (208 Kpps)
4 No filter function 4 No filter function
8-37
Note: When the source of external pulse is from the high-speed differential signal
and the setting value is 0 (the high-speed filter frequency is 3.33 Mpps at the
moment), then:
<150ns <150ns
150ns
150ns
Pulse Input Pulse Input
filtered signal filtered signal
When this pulse width is shorter than 150 When this pulse width is shorter than 150
ns, it will be regarded as low level. Two ns, it will be regarded as high level. Two
input pulse will be seen as one. input pulse will be seen as one.
>150 ns
>150 ns
When High, Low duty of the pulse width are longer than 150 ns,
it can ensure the pulse command will not be filtered.
If the user uses 2 ~ 4 MHz input pulse, it is suggested to set the filter value to 4.
Note: When the signal is the high-speed pulse specification of 4 Mpps and the settings
value of the filter is 4, then the pulse will not be filtered.
 Logic Type
High-speed and Low-speed Pulse Input

Pulse
Logic
Type Forward Reverse
A Pulse Phase Lead A Pulse Phase Lag

(43)
(43)
AB Pulse TH Pulse TH
Phase (41) (41)
Positive Logic
Pulse (36) (36)

Sign T1 T1 T1 T1 T1
Sign T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1
(37)
0 (37)
(43)
Pulse TH
CW and (41)
CCW T2 T2 T2 T2 T2 T2 T3 T2 T2 T2 T2 T2 T2
(36)
Pulse Sign TH
(37)
8-38
Pulse High-speed Pulse Input

Logic
Type Forward Reverse
Positive Logic
(38) (38)
0 (29) (29)
Symbol
T4 T5 T6 T5 T6 T5 T4 (46)
T4 T5 T6 T5 T6 T5 T4
(46)
HSign HSign
(40) (40)
Low-speed Pulse Input

Pulse
Logic
Type
Forward Reverse
Sign = low Sign = high

Positive Logic
Pulse + (43) (43)
0 Pulse TH Pulse TH
Symbol (41) (41)
T4 T5 T6 T5 T6 T5 T4 T4 T5 T6 T5 T6 T5 T4
(36) (36)
Sign Sign
(37) (37)
For digital circuit, it uses 0 and 1 to represent two status, which is high voltage and
low voltage. In Positive Logic, 1 represents high voltage and 0 represents low voltage
and vice versa in Negative Logic.
For example:
Positive Logic
Negative Logic
Max. Input Minimum time width

Pulse Specification
Frequency T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6
4 Mpps 62.5ns 125ns 250ns 200ns 125ns 125ns
pulse Signal
Differential
500 Kpps 0.5μs 1μs 2μs 2μs 1μs 1μs
Low-speed Signal
pulse Open-
200 Kpps 1.25μs 2.5μs 5μs 5μs 2.5μs 2.5μs
collector
8-39
Max. Input Voltage

Pulse Specification Forward Current
Frequency Specification
4 Mpps 5V < 25 mA
pulse Signal
Differential
Low-speed 500 Kpps 2.8V ~ 3.7V < 25 mA
Signal
pulse
Open-collector 200 Kpps 24V (Max.) < 25 mA
 The Source of External Pulse:
0: Low-speed optical coupler (CN1 Pin: PULSE, SIGN)
1: High-speed differential (CN1 Pin: HPULSE, HSIGN)
Input Setting of Control Mode and Control Address：0102H

P1-01● CTL
Command 0103H
Interface： Section 6.1
Table 8.1
Default： 0x000C (for EtherCAT models)
0x000B (for DMCNET models)
0x0000 (for other models)
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit：
Range： 0x0000 ~ 0x111F
Data Size： 16-bit
8-40
Settings：
control mode setting

direction control of torque output
DIO setting value
not in use
 Control Mode Settings

Mode PT PR S T Sz Tz
Single Mode
00 ▲
01 ▲
02 ▲
03 ▲
04 ▲
05 ▲
Dual Mode
06 ▲ ▲
07 ▲ ▲
08 ▲ ▲
09 ▲ ▲
0A ▲ ▲
CANopen Mode
0B (work with Delta’s PLC)
DMCNET Mode
CANopen Mode
0C
EtherCAT Mode
0D ▲ ▲
Multiple Mode
0E ▲ ▲ ▲
0F ▲ ▲ ▲
8-41
PT: Position control mode; the command source is from the

external pulse and the external analog voltage.
PR: Position control mode; the command source is from the 64
sets of internal registers which you can select with DI.POS0
– DI.POS5. Multiple homing methods are also available.
S: Speed control mode; the command source is from the external
analog voltage and the internal register which you can select
with DI.SPD0 and DI.SPD1.
T: Torque control mode; the command source is from the
external analog voltage and the internal register which you
can select with DI.TCM0 and DI.TCM1.
Sz: Speed control mode; the command source is from the zero
speed and the internal speed register
Tz: Torque control mode; the command source is from the zero
torque and the internal torque register
Dual Mode: It can switch mode via the external Digital Input (DI).
For example, if it is set to the dual mode of PT/S
(Control mode setting: 06), the mode can be
switched via DI. S-P (Please refer to table 8.1).
Multiple Mode: It can switch mode via the external Digital Input
(DI). For example, if it is set to multiple mode of
PT/PR/S (Control Mode Setting: 12), the mode
can be switched via DI. S-P, PT-PR (Please refer
to table 8.1).
 Torque Output Direction Settings
0 1
Forward
Reverse
 Digital Input / Digital Output (DIO) Setting

0: When switching mode, DIO (P2-10 ~ P2-22) remains the
original setting value and will not be changed.
1: When switching mode, DIO (P2-10 ~ P2-22) can be reset to the
default value of each operational mode automatically.
8-42
Address: 0104H
P1-02▲ PSTL Speed and Torque Limit Setting
0105H
Table 8.1
Default： 0x0000
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0x0000 ~ 0x0011
Data Size： 16-bit
Settings：
Disable / enable speed limit function

Disable / enable torque limit function
Not in use
 Disable / enable speed limit function

0: Disable speed limit function
1: Enable speed limit function (it is effective in T / Tz mode only)
Others: Reserved
Block diagram of speed limit setting:
(0)
Vref
Speed Limit
P1-09(1) Command
P1-10(2)
P1-11(3)
SPD0
SPD1
 Disable / enable torque limit function
0: Disable torque limit function
1: Enable torque limit function (it is effective in P / S / Sz mode)
Others: Reserved
Block diagram of torque limit setting:
(0)
Tref
Torque Limit
P1-12(1) Command
P1-13(2)
P1-14(3)
TCM0
TCM1
8-43
When desiring to use the torque limit function, users could use
parameter to set this value to 1 and limit the torque for good.
Thus, the user can save one DI setting. Also, users could enable
or disable the limit function via DI.TRQLM, which is a more
flexible way but would need to take one DI setting. Torque limit
can be enabled by P1-02 or DI.
DI.TCM0 and DI.TCM1 are for selecting the limiting source.
Address: 0106H
P1-03 AOUT Polarity Setting of Encoder Pulse Output
0107H
Interface： 3.3.3
Default： 0x0000
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0x0000 ~ 0x0013
Data Size： 16-bit
Settings：
Polarity of monitor analog output

Polarity of encoder pulse output
Not in use
 Polarity of monitor analog output

0: MON1(+), MON2(+) 2: MON1(-), MON2(+)
1: MON1(+), MON2(-) 3: MON1(-), MON2(-)
 Polarity of encoder pulse output

0: Forward output 1: Reverse output
Address: 0108H
0109H
Interface： 6.4.4
Default： 100
Control
ALL
Mode：
8-44
Range： 0 ~ 100
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
selection.
For example:
P0-03 = 0x0 (MON1 is the speed analog output)
Motor speed = (Max. speed ×V1/8) ×P1-04/100
Address: 0108H
0109H
Interface： 6.4.4
Default： 100
Control
ALL
Mode：
Range： 0 ~ 100
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
selection.
For example: P0-03 = 0x00 (MON2 is the speed analog output)
Motor speed = (Max. ×V2/8) ×P1-05/100
Address: 010CH
P1-06 SFLT Analog Speed Command (Low-pass Filter)
010DH
Interface： 6.3.3
Default： 0
Control
S / Sz
Mode：
Unit： ms
8-45
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Address: 010EH
P1-07 TFLT Analog Torque Command (Low-pass Filter)
010FH
Interface： 6.4.3
Default： 0
Control
T / Tz
Mode：
Unit： ms
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Smooth Constant of Position Command (Low- Address: 0110H

P1-08 PFLT
pass Filter) 0111H
Interface： 6.2.6
Default： 0
Control
PT／PR
Mode：
Unit： 10 ms
Range： 0 ~ 1000
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
8-46
Internal Speed Command 1／Internal Speed Address: 0112H

P1-09 SP1
Limit 1 0113H
Interface： 6.3.1
Default： 1000
Control
S/T
Mode：
Unit： 0.1 r/min
Range： -60000 ~ +60000
Data Size： 32-bit
Format： Decimal
Example： Internal speed command:

120 = 12 r/min
Internal Speed Limit: Positive value and
negative value is the same. Please refer to
the following description.
Settings： Internal Speed Command 1: The setting of the first internal speed
command
Internal Speed Limit 1: The setting of the first internal speed limit
Example of inputting internal speed limit:
Speed limit
Allowable Speed Forward Speed Reverse Speed
setting value
Range Limit Limit
of P1-09
1000
-100 ~ 100 r/min 100 r/min -100 r/min
-1000

P1-10 SP2
Limit 2 0115H
Interface： 6.3.1
Default： 2000
Control
S/T
Mode：
Unit： 0.1 r/min
Range： -60000 ~ +60000
Data Size： 32-bit
Format： Decimal
8-47
Example： Internal speed command:

120 = 12 r/min
Internal Speed limit: Positive value and
Settings： Internal Speed Command 2: The setting of the 2 internal speed
nd
command
Internal Speed Limit 2: The setting of the second internal speed limit
Speed limit setting Allowable Forward Speed Reverse
value of P1-10 Speed Range Limit Speed Limit
1000
-100 ~ 100 r/min 100 r/min -100 r/min
-1000

P1-11 SP3
Limit 3 0117H
Interface： 6.3.1
Default： 3000
Control
S/T
Mode：
Unit： 0.1 r/min
Range： -60000 ~ +60000
Data Size： 32-bit
Format： Decimal
Example： Internal Speed Command:

120 = 12 r/min
Internal Speed limit: Positive value and
Settings： Internal Speed Command 3: The setting of the third internal speed
command
Internal Speed Limit 3: The setting of the third internal speed limit
Speed limit Allowable Speed Forward Speed Reverse
setting of P1-11 Range Limit Speed Limit
1000
-100 ~ 100 r/min 100 r/min -100 r/min
-1000
8-48
Internal Torque Command 1／Internal Torque Address: 0118H

P1-12 TQ1
Limit 1 0119H
Interface： 6.4.1
Default： 100
Control
T / P, S
Mode：
Unit： %
Range： -380 ~ +380 *1
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Example： Internal Torque Command: 30 = 30%

Internal Torque Limit: Positive value and
Settings： Internal Torque Command 1: The setting of the first internal torque
command
Internal Torque Limit 1: The setting of the first internal torque limit
Example of inputting internal torque limit:
Torque limit
Allowable Forward Torque Reverse Torque
setting value
Torque Range Limit Limit
of P1-12
30
-30 ~ 30% 30% -30%
-30
Note: please refer to the motor specification for the actual motor torque. If the
actual maximum motor torque is 300%, the actual torque output will be
300% even when this parameter is set to 380%.
P1-13 TQ2 Internal Torque Command 2／Internal Torque Address: 011AH

Limit 2 011BH
Interface： 6.4.1
Default： 100
Control
T / P, S
Mode：
Unit： %
Range： -380 ~ +380 *1
Data Size： 16-bit
8-49
Format： Decimal

Settings： Internal Torque Command 2: The setting of the second internal torque
command
Internal Torque Limit 2: The setting of the second internal torque limit
Torque limit setting Allowable Forward Reverse
value of P1-13 Torque Range Torque Limit Torque Limit
30
-30 ~ 30% 30% -30%
-30
Note: please refer to the motor specification for the actual motor torque. If the
actual maximum motor torque is 300%, the actual torque output will be
300% even when this parameter is set to 380%.
P1-14 TQ3 Internal Torque Command 3／Internal Torque Address: 011CH

Limit 3 011DH
Interface： 6.4.1
Default： 100
Control
T / P, S
Mode：
Unit： %
Range： -380 ~ +380 *1
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal

Settings： Internal Torque Command 3: The setting of the third internal torque
command
Internal Torque Limit 3: The setting of the third internal torque limit
Torque limit setting Allowable Forward Reverse
value of P1-14 Torque Range Torque Limit Torque Limit
30
-30 ~ 30% 30% -30%
-30
8-50
Note: please refer to the motor specification for the actual motor torque. If
the actual maximum motor torque is 300%, the actual torque output
will be 300% even when this parameter is set to 380%.
P1-15 CXFT Capture Synchronous Axis – Threshold of Address: 011EH

Correction 011FH
Interface：
Default： 0x0000
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0x0000 ~ 0x1F5F
Data Size： 16-bit
Settings：
YX: Threshold of correction (%)

Z: Filter intensity
U: Filter is functioning (read-only)
(It will be provided after the version of V1.0.38 sub15)
YX: When synchronous axis captures the signal, the system will
calculate the error. This function is enabled only when the error is
less than the setting range. Otherwise, the system will use the
new threshold of correction to perform the operation.
YX 00 01 ~ 05F
It will be enabled when error is
Function Disabled
between 1% and YX%.
8-51
Z 0 1~F
Function Disabled Average of 2Z: Enabled
Z: The setting of filter intensity (Bigger value brings less severe

change and better filter effect)
U: Value Definition (read-only):

0: Filter function is disabled. It means the error is greater than Y & X
Range.
1: Filter function is enabled. It means the error is within Y & X range.
If value Z or YX is 0, filter function is disabled.
CSOF Capture Synchronous Axis – Offset

Address: 0120H
P1-16
Compensation 0121H
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： Pulse unit of Capture Axis
Range： -32768 ~ +32767
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： When capture synchronous axis is enabled, if desire to change the

synchronous error (P5-79), setting this parameter will do.
Write P1-16: P5-79 ＝ P5-79 + writing value
Read P1-16: Read value ＝ P5-79
Note: 1） The setting value of this parameter is the accumulative value,

which will not be influenced by current error value.
2） The value of P5-79 can be monitored by monitoring variable 0x54.
8-52
Compensation of Following Error－Additional Address: 0122H

P1-17 TEET
Time Setting 0123H
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： ms; the smallest unit is usec
Range： -20.000 ~ +20.000 (three decimal places)
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Example： 1.5 = Motor speed x 1.5 ms (PUU)
Settings： When this function is enabled (P1-36 = 1), the system will make the
position error (PUU) close to 0 according to the compensation amount
of command. If the time delay is caused by other reasons, users could
setup the additional compensation time to compensate the position
error. (This function is available in firmware version V1.038 sub15 and
later models only.))
Additional compensation distance ＝ P1-17 x Motor speed
Note: 1) The position error is proportioned to the speed.

2) Value of P1-36 has to set to 1.
Electronic Cam (E-Cam) Pulse Phase Address: 0124H

P1-18 CPCT
Compensation – Time Setting 0125H
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： ms with fraction down to usec
Range： -20.000 ~ +20.000 (Three decimal places)
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings：(This function is available in firmware version V1.038 sub48 and later

models only)
This parameter is used to compensate the delay pulse phase when the
electronic cam function is enabled during operation. Please use this
8-53
parameter with P1-21.

Compensated Pulse Phase (pls) = P1-18 x (Pulse Frequency of E-Cam
Master Axis (Kpps) – P1-21)
Note:
1. The setting value of this parameter is proportioned to the value of
the pulse frequency of E-Cam master axis.
2. The pulse phase compensation function is enabled only when the
setting value of parameter P1-18 is not equal to 0.
value of the pulse frequency of E-Cam master axis (monitoring
variable is 060) Pulse number of E-Cam master axis (Incremental))
is higher than the setting value of parameter P1-21.
CAPTURE / COMPARE – Additional Function Address: 0126H

P1-19 CPEX
Settings 0127H
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0x0000 ~ 0x0103
Data Size： 16-bit
Settings：
X: Bit settings of Capture additional function settings:

Bit 3 2 1 0
Function - - - Cycle Mode
Enable the cycle mode. After the last
position is captured, the system will
automatically repeat executing this
Explanation - - - CAPTURE function. The captured data is
still stored in the data array that the starting
address is specified by P5-36.
(This function is available in firmware
8-54
version V1.038 sub19 and later models only)
Y: Reserved
Z: Bit settings of Compare additional function settings:
Bit 3 2 1 0
Function - - - Automatically set P1-24 to 0.
When Bit0 is set to 1, P1-24 will only be
effective once and reset to 0 automatically.
Otherwise, the value of P1-24 will remain
Explanation - - - unchanged.
(This function is available in firmware
version V1.038 sub19 and later models only)
U: Reserved
Address: 0128H
P1-20 CPMK CAPTURE – Masking Range Setting
0129H
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： The Pulse Unit of Capture Axis
Range： 0 ~ +100000000
Data
32-bit
Size：
Format： Decimal
Settings：When multiple points are required to be captured, after each point is

captured, the masking range can be set in this parameter. In the
masking area, the CAPTURE function will not work. The masking range
is defined as follows:
(CAP_DATA-P1-20，CAP_DATA+P1-20)
Note:
When the setting value of this parameter is set to 0, the masking
function is disabled.
8-55
E-Cam Pulse Phase Compensation – Min. Address: 012AH

P1-21 CPCL 012BH
Frequency Setting of Master Axis
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： Kpps (Kpulse/sec)
Range： 0 ~ 30000
Data
16-bit
Size：
Format： Decimal

models only)
This parameter is used to compensate the delay pulse phase when the
electronic cam function is enabled during operation. Please use this
parameter with P1-18.
Compensated Pulse Phase (pls) = P1-18 x (Pulse Frequency of E-Cam
Master Axis (Kpps) – P1-21)
Note:
1. The setting value of this parameter is proportioned to the value
of the pulse frequency of E-Cam master axis.
setting value of parameter P1-18 is not equal to 0.
value of the pulse frequency of E-Cam master axis (monitoring
variable is 060) is higher than the setting value of parameter P1-21.
8-56
Address: 012CH
P1-22 SPF1 PR Special Filter Settings
012DH
Interface：
Default： 0x0000
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0x0000 ~ 0x107F

Data
16-bit (format = UZYX)
Size：
Settings：YX: Acceleration time limit (0: Disabled, [1~127] x 10 ms). Units: 10 ms

Z: Reserved
U: Reverse inhibit (0: Disabled; 1: Enabled)
YX: The acceleration time limit is 0 ~ 1270 ms. When the changes of PR
(or E-Cam) commands are too fast, it will cause the vibration of the
mechanical system and affect the system performance. This
function can be used to control the acceleration (deceleration)
speed without exceeding the limit and can smooth the operation,
reduce the noise and extend the system life.
This function is different from the general filter. The traditional one
filter the command regardless the command change. This causes
the delay of command delivered and reduces the efficiency of the
system. This function can help to disable the filter function when the
command changes within the limit. Then, the commands can be
delivered without any time delay. The definition of this setting is the
required acceleration time when the motor runs from 0 to
3000 r/min. The required time is longer, the effect of the filter
function is better and the acceleration / deceleration will become
smoother.
Note:
The unit of acceleration time limit is 10 ms. For example, if YX=12h,
the acceleration time limit is 180 ms. It means the filter function is
enabled when the acceleration or deceleration time is faster than
180 ms. Otherwise, the command will remain unchanged.
8-57
Original Command
Filtered Command
Speed
Command
(PUU/ms)
Time
Normal Commands Overexcited
Two commands are Commands
overlapped. Filter function is
enabled.
Note: When this filter function is enabled, it may cause the motor goes beyond the
original position. Usually, the motor will return to the original position after the
command becomes stable. However, if the command does not become stable,
the internal position errors may be accumulated and result in AL404.
Note: The filter time has to be set properly. It should be shorter than the acceleration
time and longer than the abnormal command.
Note: The function of U item can be used to avoid the reverse operation.
U: Reverse Inhibit Function (0: Disable the function; 1: enable the function)
When this reverse inhibit function is enabled, the reverse command will be
inhibited. The reverse command will be reserved and output after the received
forward command exceeds the reserved reverse command.
Reverse inhibit Reverse Command

function is disabled
Position
Command
(PUU)
Time
Reverse inhibit
function is enabled
Position
Command
After reverse inhibit
(PUU)
function is enabled
Time
8-58
Address: 012EH
P1-23 CMOF COMPARE－Offset Data of CMP (non-volatile)
012FH
Operational Related Section：
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： Pulse unit of compare source
Range： -10000000 ~ +10000000
Data Size： 32-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： The real compared data is offset by this value.

Note: 1）P1-23: Non-volatile parameter
2）P1-24: After setting, if P1-19.Z0 = 1, the value will be 0

automatically.
3）CMP_DATA can be monitored via monitoring variable V25h(037).
COMPARE－Offset Data of CMP (can reset to Address: 0130H

P1-24■ CMOF
0 automatically) 0131H
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： Pulse unit of compare source
Range： -32768 ~ +32767
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings：
The real compared data is offset by this value.
8-59
Note: 1）P1-24: volatile parameter.
2）After setting, if P1-19.Z0 = 1, the value will be 0 automatically.

3）CMP_DATA can be monitored via monitoring variable V25h(037).
Address: 0132H
0133H
Interface： 6.2.9
Default： 1000
Control
PT / PR
Mode：
Unit： 0.1 Hz
Range： 10 ~ 1000
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： The setting value of the first low-frequency vibration suppression. If

P1-26 is set to 0, then it will disable the first low-frequency filter.
Low-frequency Vibration Suppression Gain Address: 0134H

P1-26 VSG1
(1) 0135H
Interface： 6.2.9
Default： 0
Control
PT / PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0 ~ 9 (0: Disable the first low-frequency filter)
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： The first low-frequency vibration suppression gain. The bigger value it
is, the better the position response will be. However, if the value is set
too big, the motor will not be able to smoothly operate. It is suggested
to set the value to 1.
8-60
Address: 0136H
0137H
Interface： 6.2.9
Default： 1000
Control
PT / PR
Mode：
Unit： 0.1 Hz
Range： 10 ~ 1000
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： The setting value of the second low-frequency vibration suppression. If

P1-28 is set to 0, then it will disable the second low-frequency filter.
Address: 0138H
P1-28 VSG2 Low-frequency Vibration Suppression Gain (2)
0139H
Interface： 6.2.9
Default： 0
Control
PT / PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0 ~ 9 (0: Disable the second low-frequency

filter)
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： The second low-frequency vibration suppression gain. The bigger value
it is, the better the position response will be. However, if the value is set
too big, the motor will not be able to smoothly operate. It is suggested to
set the value to 1.
8-61
Auto Low-frequency Vibration Supression Address: 013AH

P1-29 AVSM
Setting 013BH
Interface： 6.2.9
Default： 0
Control
PT / PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0 ~ 1
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： DEC
Settings： 0: The function is disabled.

1: The value resets to 0 after vibration suppression.
When the parameter is set to 1, it is in auto suppression. When the
vibration frequency is not being detected or the value of searched
frequency is stable, the parameter will set to 0 and save the low-
frequency vibration suppression to P1-25 automatically.
Address: 013CH
P1-30 VCL Low-frequency Vibration Detection
013DH
Interface： 6.2.9
Default： 500
Control
PT / PR
Mode：
Unit： Pulse
Range： 1 ~ 8000
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： When enabling the auto suppression (P1-29 = 1), it will automatically
search the detection level. The lower the value is, the more sensitive
the detection will be. However, it is easy to misjudge the noise or
regard the other low-frequency vibration as the suppression frequency.
If the value is bigger, it will make more precise judgment. However, if
the vibration of the mechanism is smaller, it might not detect the
frequency of low-frequency vibration.
8-62
P1-31 Reserved
Address: 0140H
P1-32 LSTP Motor Stop Mode
0141H
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0 ~ 0x20
Data Size： 16-bit
Settings：
Not in use
Selection of executing dynamic brake
Not in use
Selection of executing dynamic brake: Stop Mode when Servo Off or

Alarm (including EMGS) occurs.
0: Execute dynamic brake
1: Motor free run
2: Execute dynamic brake first, then execute free run until it stops
(The motor speed is slower than P1-38).
When PL and NL occur, please refer to event time setting value of
P5-03 for determining the deceleration time. If the setting is 1 ms, the
motor can stop instantaneously.
P1-33 Reserved
Address: 0144H
0145H
Interface： 6.3.3
Default： 200
Control
S
Mode：
8-63
Unit： ms
Range： 1 ~ 65500
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： Acceleration Constant of Speed:

P1-34, P1-35 and P1-36, the acceleration time of speed command
from zero to the rated speed, all can be set individually. Even when
curve.
Address: 0146H
0147H
Interface： 6.3.3
Default： 200
Control
S
Mode：
Unit： ms
Range： 1 ~ 65500
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： Deceleration Constant of Speed:

P1-34, P1-35 and P1-36, the deceleration time of speed command
from the rated speed to zero, all can be set individually. Even when P1-
36 is set to 0, it still has acceleration / deceleration of trapezoid-curve.
8-64

P1-36 TSL
Curve 0149H
Interface： 6.3.3
Default： 0
Control
S, PR
Mode：
Unit： ms
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal

trapezoid-curve
trapezoid-curve
deceleration

following error.
P1-36 = 0 P1-36 = 1 P1-36 > 1
S-curve
Compensation
error
8-65
Inertia Ratio and Load Weight Ratio to Servo Address: 014AH

P1-37 GDR
Motor 014BH
Interface：
Default： 1.0 10
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： 1 times 0.1 times
Range： 0.0 ~ 200.0 0 ~ 2000
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： One decimal DEC
Example： 1.5 = 1.5 times 15 = 1.5 times
Settings： Inertia ratio to servo motor (rotary motor):

(J_load／J_motor)
Among them:
J_motor: Rotor inertia of the servo motor
J_load: Total equivalent of inertia of external mechanical load.
Address: 014CH
P1-38 ZSPD Zero Speed Range Setting
014DH
Interface： Table 8.2
Default： 10.0 100

Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： 1 r/min 0.1 r/min
Range： 0.0 ~ 200.0 0 ~ 2000
Data Size： 16-bit
Example： 1.5 = 1.5 r/min 15 = 1.5 r/min
Settings： Setting the output range of zero-speed signal (ZSPD). When the
forward / reverse speed of the motor is slower than the setting value,
the digital output will be enabled.
8-66
Address: 014EH
P1-39 SSPD Target Motor Detection Level
014FH
Default： 3000
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： r/min
Range： 0 ~ 5000
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： When the target speed is reached, DO (TSPD) is enabled. It means

when the motor speed in forward / reverse direction is higher than the
setting value, the target speed is reached and enables DO.
Address: 0150H
P1-40 VCM Maximum Output of Analog Speed Command
0151H
Interface： 6.3.4

Control
S/T
Mode：
Unit： r/min
Range： 0 ~ 5000
Data Size： 32-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： Maximum Speed of Analog Speed Command:

In speed mode, the analog speed command inputs the swing speed
setting of the max. voltage (10V).
For example, if the setting is 3000, when the external voltage input is
10V, it means the speed control command is 3000 r/min. If the external
voltage input is 5V, then the speed control command is 1500r/min.
Speed control command = input voltage value x setting value/10
In torque mode, analog speed limit inputs the swing speed limit setting
of the max. voltage (10V).
Speed limit command = input voltage value x setting value/10
8-67
Address: 0152H
P1-41▲ TCM Maximum Output of Analog Torque Speed
0153H
Interface： 6.4.4
Default： 100
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： %
Range： 0 ~ 1000
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： Maximum Output of Analog Torque Speed:

In torque mode, the analog torque command inputs the torque setting
of the max. voltage (10V). When the default setting is 100, if the
external voltage inputs 10V, it means the torque control command is
100% rated torque. If the external voltage inputs 5V, then the torque
control command is 50% rated torque.
Torque control command = input voltage value x setting value/10 (%)
In speed, PT, and PR modes, the analog torque limit inputs the torque
limit setting of the max. voltage (10V).
Torque limit command = input voltage value x setting value/10 (%)
Address: 0154H
P1-42 MBT1 Enable Delay Time of Brake
0155H
Interface： 6.5.5
Default： 0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： ms
Range： 0 ~ 1000
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： Set the delay time from servo ON to activate the signal of mechanical
brake (BRKR).
8-68
Address: 0156H
P1-43 MBT2 Disable Delay Time of Brake
0157H
Interface： 6.5.5
Default： 0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： ms
Range： -1000 ~ 1000
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： Set the delay time from servo OFF to switch off the signal of brake
(BRKR).
Note: 1）If the delay time of P1-43 has not finished yet and the motor speed
is slower than P1-38, the signal of brake (BRKR) will be disabled.
2）If the delay time of P1-43 is up and the motor speed is higher than
P1-38, the signal of brake (BRKR) will be disabled.
3）When Servo OFF due to Alarm (except AL022) or emergency,
the setting of P1-43 is equivalent to 0 if P1-43 is set to a negative
value.
Address: 0158H
P1-44▲ GR1 Gear Ratio (Numerator) (N1)
0159H
Interface： 6.2.5
Default： 128
Control
PT / PR
Mode：
Unit： Pulse
Range： 1 ~ (229-1)
Data Size： 32-bit
Format： Decimal
8-69
Settings： Please refer to P2-60 ~ P2-62 for the setting of multiple gear ratio
(numerator).
Note: 1） In PT mode, the setting value can be changed when Servo ON.
2） In PR mode, the setting value can be changed when Servo OFF.

Address: 015AH
P1-45 GR2 Gear Ratio (Denominator) (M)
015BH
Interface： 6.2.5
Default： 10
Control
PT / PR
Mode：
Unit： Pulse
Range： 1 ~ (231-1)
Data Size： 32-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： If the setting is wrong, the servo motor will easily have sudden
unintended acceleration.
Please follow the rules for setting:
The setting of pulse input:
Pulse Position
input N command N
f2 = f1 x
f1 M f2 M
Range of command pulse input: 1／50＜Nx／M＜25600
Note: 1） The setting value cannot be changed when Servo ON neither in

PT nor in PR mode.
8-70
Address: 015CH
P1-46▲ GR3 Pulse Number of Encoder Output
015DH
Interface：
Default： 2500
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： Pulse
Range： 20 ~ 320000
Data Size： 32-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： The number of single-phase pulse output per revolution.

Setting range: 20 – 320000
The maximum output frequency of the hardware is 19.8 MHz.
Note: The following circumstances might exceed the max. allowable input
pulse frequency and occurs AL018:
1. Abnormal encoder
2. The motor speed is faster than the setting of P1-76.
3. Motor Speed  P1  46  4  19.8  10 6
60
Address: 015EH
P1-47 SPOK Speed Reached (DO：SP_OK) Range
015FH
Interface：
Default： 10
Control
S / Sz
Mode：
Unit： rpm
Range： 0 ~ 300
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： When the deviation between speed command and motor feedback
speed is smaller than this parameter, then the digital output
DO.SP_OK (DO code is 0x19) is ON.
8-71
Block diagram:
1. Speed command: It is the command issued by the user (without

acceleration / deceleration), not the one of front end speed circuit.
Source: Analog voltage and register
2. Feedback speed: The actual speed of the motor and have gone
through the filter.
3. Obtain the absolute value.
4. DO.SP_OK will be ON when the absolute value of speed error is
smaller than P1-47, or it will be OFF. If P1-47 is 0, DO.SP_OK is
always OFF.
Operation Selection of Motion Reached Address: 0160H

P1-48 MCOK
(DO.MC_OK) 0161H
Interface：
Default： 0x0000
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0x0000 ~ 0x0011
Data Size： 16-bit
Settings： Control selection of digital output DO.MC_OK (DO code is 0x17).

(It will be available after firmware version V1.003 sub08)
The format of this parameter: 00YX
X＝0: It will not remain the digital output status
1: It will remain the digital output status
Y＝0: AL380 (position deviation) is not working
1: AL380 (position deviation) is working
8-72
Block diagram:
Description:
1. Command triggered: It means the new PR command is effective.
Position command starts to output and clear signal 2, 4, 5, 6 at the
same time.
Command triggering source: DI.CTRG, DI.EV1/EV2, P5-07
(triggered through software), etc.
2. CMD_OK: It means the position command is completely output
and can set the delay time (DLY).
3. Command output: Output the profile of position command according
to the setting acceleration / deceleration.
4. TPOS: It means the position error of the servo drive is smaller than
the value of P1-54.
5. MC_OK: It means the position command is completely output, which
indicates that CMD_OK and TPOS are both on.
6. MC_OK (remains the digital output status): It is the same as 5.
However, once this DO is ON, its status will be remained regardless
signal 4 is OFF or not.
7. Can only select one of signal 5 or signal 6 to output. The output
profile is determined by parameter P1-48.X.
8. Position Deviation: When number 7 happens, if 4 (or 5) is OFF, it
means the position is deviated and AL380 can be triggered. Set this
alarm via parameter P1-48.Y.
8-73
Address: 0162H
P1-49 SPOKWT Accumulative Time of Speed Reached
0163H
Panel / Software Communication Table 8.2
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
S / Sz
Mode：
Unit： ms
Range： 0 ~ 65535
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： DEC
Settings： In speed mode, when the deviation value between speed command
and motor feedback speed is smaller than the range set by P1-47 and
reaches the time set by P1-79, DO.SP_OK (DI code: 0x19) will be
On. If the deviation value exceeds the range set by P1-47, it has to
reclock the time.
P1-50 ~
Reserved
P1-51
Address: 0168H
P1-52 RES1 Regenerative Resistor Value
0169H
Interface： 2.7
Default： Determined by the model. Please refer to the

following table.
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： Ohm
8-74
Range： 220V
Setting
Model
Range
400 W (included) or
30 ~ 750
below
750 W ~ 1.5 kW 20 ~ 750
2 kW ~ 4.5 kW 10 ~ 750
5.5 kW 8 ~ 750
7.5 kW 5 ~ 750
11 kW 8 ~ 750
15 kW 5 ~ 750
400V
Setting
Model
Range
750 W ~ 1.5 kW 60 ~ 750
1.5 kW ~ 2 kW 40 ~ 750
3 kW 30 ~ 750
4.5 kW ~ 5.5 kW 20 ~ 750
7.5 kW 15 ~ 750
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： 220V:
Model Default
1.5 kW (included) or below 40Ω
2 kW ~ 4.5 kW (included) 20Ω
5.5 kW 15Ω
7.5 kW 15Ω
400V:
Model Default
750 W ~ 7.5 kW 80Ω
Please refer to the description of P1-53 for the setting value when
connecting regenerative resistor with different method.
Address: 016AH
P1-53 RES2 Regenerative Resistor Capacity
016BH
Interface： 2.7
Default： Determined by the model. Please refer to the

following table.
8-75
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： Watt
Range： 0 ~ 6000
(for 11 kW and 15 kW, the setting range is
from 0 to 15000)
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： 220V
Model Default
200 W (included) or below 0W
400 W 40 W
750 W ~ 1.5 kW 60 W
2 kW ~ 4.5 kW (included) 100 W
5.5 kW 0W
7.5 kW 0W
400V
Model Default
750 W ~ 1.5 kW 40 W
2 kW ~ 7.5 kW 0W
Following describes the setting value when connecting regenerative

resistor with different method:
External regenerative resistor
P Setting:
P1-52=10 (Ω)
1kW, 10Ω
P1-53=1000 (W)
C
External regenerative resistor
(serial connection)
P
Setting:
1kW, 10Ω
P1-52=20 (Ω)
P1-53=2000 (W)
1kW, 10Ω
8-76

(parallel connection)
P Setting:
P1-52=5 (Ω)
1kW, 10Ω 1kW, 10Ω
P1-53=2000 (W)
C
Address: 016CH
P1-54 PER Position Completed Range
016DH
Default： 12800
Control
PT / PR
Mode：
Unit： Pulse
Range： 0 ~ 1280000
Data Size： 32-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： In position mode (PT), if the deviation pulse number is smaller than the
setting range (the setting value of parameter P1-54), DO.TPOS is ON.
In position register (PR) mode, if the deviation between the target
position and the actual motor position is smaller than the setting range
(the setting value of parameter P1-54), DO.TPOS is ON.
Address: 016EH
P1-55 MSPD Maximum Speed Limit
016FH
Interface：

Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： r/min
Range： 10 ~ max.speed
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： The default of the max. speed of servo motor is set to the rated speed.
8-77
Address: 0170H
P1-56 OVW Output Overload Warning Level
0171H
Interface：
Default： 120
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： %
Range： 0 ~ 120
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： The setting value is 0 ~ 100, if the servo motor continuously outputs
the load and is higher than the setting proportion (P1-56), the early
warning for overload (DO is set to 10, OLW) will occur.
If the setting value is over 100, it will disable this function.
Address: 0172H
P1-57 CRSHA Motor Crash Protection (torque percentage)
0173H
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： %
Range： 0 ~ 300
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： Setup protection level (for the percentage of rated torque, set the value
to 0 means to disable the function; set the value to 1 or number above
means to enable the function)
8-78
Address: 0174H
P1-58 CRSHT Motor Crash Protection Time
0175H
Interface：
Default： 1
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： ms
Range： 1 ~ 1000
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： Setup the protection time:

When it reaches the level, AL030 occurs after exceeding the protection
time.
Note: This function is only suitable for non-contactable application, such as
electric discharge machines. (Please setup P1-37 correctly).
Address: 0176H
P1-59 MFLT Analog Speed Command
0177H
Interface：
Default： 0.0 0
Control
S
Mode：
Unit： 1 ms 0.1 ms
Range： 0.0 ~ 4.0 0 ~ 40
Data Size： 16-bit
Example： 1.5 = 1.5 ms 15 = 1.5 ms
Settings： (Moving Filter)

0: Disabled
P1-06 is low-pass filter and P1-59 is moving filter. The difference
between both is that moving filter can smooth the command in the
beginning and end of the step command; while the low-pass filter
brings better smooth effect to command end.
Therefore, it is suggested that if the speed loop receives the command
from the controller for forming the position control loop, then low-pass
filter can be used. If it is only for the speed control, then it should use
Moving Filter for better smoothing.
8-79
Original step analog speed command
Holding Time
Command that has

gone through moving
filter
P1-60 ~
Reserved
P1-61
Address: 017CH
P1-62 FRCL Friction Compensation
017DH
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
PT / PR / S
Mode：
Unit： %
Range： 0 ~ 100
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： The level of friction compensation (the percentage of rated torque. Set
the value to 0 means to disable the function; setting the value to 1 or
number above means to enable this function.)
8-80
Address: 017EH
P1-63 FRCT Friction Compensation
017FH
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
PT / PR / S
Mode：
Unit： ms
Range： 1 ~ 1000
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： Setup smoothing constant of friction compensation.
Analog Position Command: Activation Address: 0180H

P1-64 PCCT
Control 0181H
Interface：
Default： 0x0000
Control
PT
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0x0000~0x0011
Data Size： 16-bit
Settings：
X:
0: Disable the function of position command which is issued by the
analog signal
1: Enable the function of position command which is issued by the
analog signal
8-81
Y: Initial position setting

0: After the servo is on, the motor will regard the current position as
the position when the voltage is 0. Then the motor will operate to
the position according to the analog input command.
Motor position (Turn)
When executing
this function, the
motor will operate
to the position
which corresponds
to the current
voltage command
Analog
See the current input
position as the Current command
position when command (V)
voltage is 0 level
1: After the servo is on, if the command level is not changed, the motor
will not operate. The position the motor stops at is the position that
corresponds to the current command level.
Motor position
(Turn)
The current When executing this

function, if the
position of the
command level is not
motor changed, the motor
will not operate
Analog input
The position which
Command command
corresponds to 0V
level (V)
remains
Z: Reserved
U: Reserved
Note: Version after firmware v1.031 sub8 supports this function.
Address: 0182H
P1-65 Smooth Constant of Analog Position Command
0183H
Interface：
Default： 1
Control
PT
Mode：
Unit： 10 ms
8-82
Range： 0 ~ 1000
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： The smooth constant of analog position command is only effective to
analog position command.
Note: This function is available for firmware version v1.031 sub8 and above.
Max. Rotation Number of Analog Position Address: 0184H

P1-66 PCM
Command 0185H
Interface：
Default： 0.0 0
Control Mode： PT
Unit： 1 cycle 0.1 cycle
Range： 0.0 ~ 200.0 0 ~ 2000
Data Size： 16-bit
Example： 1.5 = 1.5 cycles 15 = 1.5 cycles
Settings： It is the rotation number setting when analog speed command

inputs the max. voltage (10V). If it is set to 3.0 and the external
voltage inputs 10V, it means the position command is +3 cycles.
5V means the speed control command is 1.5 cycles.
-10V means the position command is -3 cycles.
Position control command = Input voltage value x Setting value/10
Note: This function is available for firmware version v1.031 sub8 and above.
P1-67 Reserved
Address: 0188H
P1-68 PFLT2 Position Command Moving Filter
0189H
Interface：
Default： 4
Control
PT / PR
Mode：
Unit： ms
8-83
Range： 0 ~ 100
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Moving Filter can activate smooth function in
the beginning and the end of step command,
but it will delay the command.
P1-69 ~
Reserved
P1-71
Resolution of Linear Scale for Full-closed Address: 0190H

P1-72 FRES
Loop Control 0191H
Interface：
Default： 5000
Control
PT
Mode：
Unit： pulse/rev
Range： 4 ~1800000
Data Size： 32-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： A/B pulse corresponded by full-closed loop when motor runs a cycle
(after quadruple frequency)
8-84
Error Protection Range for Full-closed Loop Address: 0192H

P1-73 FERR
Control 0193H
Interface： P2-34
Default： 30000
Control
PT
Mode：
Unit： Pulse (based on the feedback of full-closed

loop)
Range： 1 ~ (231-1)
Data Size： 32-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： The protection is for excessive deviation between feedback position of

linear scale A/B Counter and the encoder. When the deviation is
excessive, it might result from the loose of connector or other
mechanism problems.
Address: 0194H
P1-74▲ FCON Full-closed Loop Control of Linear Scale
0195H
Interface： P1-46
Default： 0x0000
Control
PT
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0x0000 ~ 0x4122
Data Size： 16-bit
Settings：
Switch of full-closed loop

Selection of OA/OB/OZ output source
Positive/negative direction selection of linear
scale feedback
Filter setting of linear scale
Not in use
8-85
 Switch of full-closed loop control

0: Function of full-closed loop is not used
1: Function of full-closed loop is used
2: Use the function of synchronous control
 Selection of OA/OB/OZ output source
0: Motor encoder is the output source
1: Encoder of linear scale is the output source
Firmware version DSP V1.016 + CPLD 0.07(or the later version)
will provide:
2: Pulse command of CN1 is the output source
 Positive / negative direction selection of linear scale feedback:
0: It is in positive direction when A phase leads B phase of linear
scale
1: It is in negative direction when B phase leads A phase of linear
scale
 Filter setting of linear scale
0: Bypass
1: 6.66 M
2: 1.66 M
3: 833 K
4: 416 K
Low-pass Filter Time Constant of Full-closed Address: 0196H

P1-75 FELP
Loop control 0197H
Interface：
Default： 100
Control
PT
Mode：
Unit： ms
Range： 0 ~ 1000
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： When the stiffness of mechanical system between full- and half-closed
loops is insufficient, users can set the appropriate time constant to
enhance the stability of the system. In other words, temporarily create
the half-closed loop effect, and after stabilizing, the full-closed loop
effect is created. When the stiffness is sufficient, set to bypass.
Set the value to 0 to disable the function of low-pass filter (Bypass)
The stiffness of mechanical system ↑, the setting value of P1-75 ↓
The stiffness of mechanical system ↓, the setting value of P1-75 ↑
8-86
Maximum Rotation of Encoder Output Setting Address: 0198H

P1-76 AMSPD
(OA, OB) 0199H
Interface： P1-46
Default： 5500
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： r/min
Range： 0 ~ 6000
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： According to the real application, this parameter is set for the maximum
speed and the servo drive will generate smooth function automatically
for encoder output signals.
When the value is set to 0, the function is disabled.
P1-77 ~
Reserved
P1-80
Address: 01A2H
P1-81 VCM2 Max. Speed of 2nd Analog Speed Command
01A3H
Interface： P1-40
Default： Motor rated speed

Control
S/T
Mode：
Unit： rpm/10V
Range： 0 ~ 50000
Data Size： 32-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： Please refer to the description of P1-40.
8-87
Filter Switching Time between P1-40 and P1- Address: 01A4H

P1-82 VCMLPF
81 01A5H
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
S
Mode：
Unit： msec
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Address: 01A6H
P1-83 VCMLPF Abnormal Analog Input Voltage Level
01A7H
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
S
Mode：
Unit： mV
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： When the analog input voltage is higher than the setting value for over
50 ms, AL042 will occur. The compared level for this parameter is the
original analog input voltage which has not been added by an offset
value via parameter P4-22, Analog Speed Input Offset.
8-88
Address:
P1-87 HMTQL Torque Limit Setting 01A8H
01A9H
Interface：
Default： 1
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： %
Range： 0 ~ 300
Data
16-bit
Size：
Format： Decimal
Settings： The Torque limit setting is only for torque limit homing mode. As shown
in the following diagram, when the homing command is triggered, the
motor runs in one direction until it reaches the Hard Stop protector. After
reaching the Hard Stop protector, the servo drive outputs a larger motor
current to counter the external force from the Hard Stop protector. The
servo drive uses the motor current and the Torque limit time to
determine homing, and then it runs the opposite direction to find the Z
pulse.
防撞墊
Protector
Torque limit time

扭力限制時間設定
setting
P1-88P1-88
最大扭力輸出
Max. torque output
Torque limit setting
扭力限制設定 10%
P1-87
P1-87
Torque curve for
尋找碰撞點時的
finding the point
扭力曲線
of collision 起始點point
Starting
TorquePulse時的
尋找Z curve for
finding Z pulse
扭力曲線
Z Pulse
Note: the actual max. torque output of the motor is 10% higher than the torque
limit setting (P1-87). For Example, if you set the torque limit P1-87 to
50%, and the max. torque output of the motor will be 60%.
8-89
Address: 01AAH
P1-88 HMTQT Torque Limit Time Setting
01ABH
Interface：
Default： 2000
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： ms
Range： 0 ~ 2000
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： Torque limit time setting in torque limit homing mode.
Disconnection detection protection (UVW) Address: 01CAH

P1-98
response time 01CBH
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
All
Mode：
Unit： mV
Range： 0, 100 ~ 800
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： DEC
Settings： when the disconnection detection protection (UVW) function is enabled

(P2-65 [Bit 9] = 1), select the response time of the detection mode with
this parameter.
Set P1-98 to 0 to use the servo’s default response time.
When P1-98 is not set to 0, the the detection response time range
should be between 100 and 800.
Note:
1. If it is necessary to shorten the response time, it is recommended that you
use this parameter.
2. When the servo is on and has not started running, it is recommended that
you set this parameter if you need to detect disconnection.
8-90
P2-xx Extension Parameters
Address: 0200H
P2-00 KPP Position Loop Gain
0201H
Interface： 6.2.8
Default： 35
Control
PT / PR
Mode：
Unit： rad/s
Range： 0 ~ 2047
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： When the value of position control gain is increased, the position
response can be enhanced and the position error can be reduced. If
the value is set too big, it may easily cause vibration and noise.
Address: 0202H
P2-01 PPR Switching Rate of Position Loop Gain
0203H
Interface： 6.2.8
Default： 100
Control
PT / PR
Mode：
Unit： %
Range： 10 ~ 500
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： Switch the changing rate of position control gain according to the gain-
switching condition.
8-91
Address: 0204H
P2-02 PFG Position Feed Forward Gain
0205H
Interface： 6.2.8
Default： 50
Control
PT / PR
Mode：
Unit： %
Range： 0 ~ 100
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： If the position control command is changed smoothly, increasing the

gain value can reduce the position error.
If the position control command is not changed smoothly, decreasing
the gain value can tackle the problem of mechanical vibration.
Smooth Constant of Position Feed Forward Address: 0206H

P2-03 PFF
Gain 0207H
Interface：
Default： 5
Control
PT / PR
Mode：
Unit： ms
Range： 2 ~ 100
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： If the position control command is changed smoothly, decreasing the

value can reduce the position error. If the position control command is
not changed smoothly, increasing the value can tackle the problem of
mechanical vibration.
8-92
Address: 0208H
P2-04 KVP Speed Loop Gain
0209H
Interface： 6.3.6
Default： 500
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： rad/s
Range： 0 ~ 8191
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： Increase the value of speed control gain can enhance the speed
response. However, if the value is set too big, it would easily cause
resonance and noise.
Address: 020AH
P2-05 SPR Switching Rate of Speed Loop Gain
020BH
Interface：
Default： 100
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： %
Range： 10 ~ 500
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： Switch the changing rate of speed control gain according to the gain
switching condition.
8-93
Address: 020CH
P2-06 KVI Speed Integral Compensation
020DH
Interface： 6.3.6
Default： 100
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： rad/s
Range： 0 ~ 1023
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： Increasing the value of speed control integral compensation can

enhance speed response and diminish the deviation of speed control.
However, if the value is set too big, it would easily cause resonance
and noise.
Address: 020EH
P2-07 KVF Speed Feed Forward Gain
020FH
Interface： 6.3.6
Default： 0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： %
Range： 0 ~ 100
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： When the speed control command runs smoothly, increasing the gain
value can reduce the speed command error. If the command does not
run smoothly, decreasing the gain value can reduce the mechanical
vibration during operation.
8-94
Address: 0210H
P2-08■ PCTL Special Parameter Write-in
0211H
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0 ~ 501
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： Special parameter write-in:

Parameter
Function
code
10 Reset the parameter (Apply to the power again after reset)
20 P4-10 is writable
22 P4-11 ~ P4-21 are writable
30, 35 Save the data of COMPARE, CAPTURE, and E-Cam
406 Enable forced DO mode

When forced DO mode is enabled, it can switch back to
400 the normal DO mode.
Note: A2-L does not support E-Cam function.
Address: 0212H
P2-09 DRT DI Debouncing Time
0213H
Interface：
Default： 2
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： ms
Range： 0 ~ 20
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Example： 4 = 8 ms
8-95
Settings： When the environmental noise is big, increasing the setting value can
enhance the control stability. However, if the value is set too big, the
response time will be influenced.
Address: 0214H
P2-10 DI1 DI1 Functional Planning
0215H
Default： 0x0101
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0x0000 ~ 0x015F (the last two codes are DI

codes)
Data Size： 16-bit
Settings：
Input function selection

Input contact
Not in use
 Input function selection: Please refer to Table 8.1

 Input contact: a or b contact
0: Set the input contact as normally closed (b contact)
1: Set the input contact as normally opened (a contact)
(P2-10 ~ P2-17) The setting value of function programmed
When parameters are modified, please re-start the servo drive to
ensure it can work normally.
Note: Parameter P3-06 is used to set how digital inputs (DI) accept
commands, through external terminal or the communication determined
by P4-07.
Address: 0216H
0217H
Default： 0x0104
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
8-96

codes)
Data Size： 16-bit
Address: 0218H
0219H
Default： 0x0116
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -

codes)
Data Size： 16-bit
Address: 021AH
021BH
Default： 0x0117
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -

codes)
Data Size： 16-bit
8-97
Address: 021CH
021DH
Default： 0x0102
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -

codes)
Data Size： 16-bit
Address: 021EH
021FH
Default： 0x0022
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -

codes)
Data Size： 16-bit
Address: 0220H
0221H
Default： 0x0023
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
8-98

codes)
Data Size： 16-bit
Address: 0222H
0223H
Default： 0x0021
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -

codes)
Data Size： 16-bit
Address: 0224H
P2-18 DO1 DO1 Functional Planning
0225H
Default： 0x0101
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0x0000 ~ 0x013F (the last two codes are DO

codes)
Data Size： 16-bit
8-99
Settings：
Output function selection

Output contact
Not in use
 Output function selection: Please refer to Table 8.2

 Output contact: a or b contact
0: Set the output contact as normally closed (b contact)
1: Set the output contact as normally opened (a contact)
Address: 0226H
0227H
Default： 0x0103
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -

codes)
Data Size： 16-bit
Address: 0228H
0229H
Default： 0x0109
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -

codes)
Data Size： 16-bit
8-100
Address: 022AH
022BH
Default： 0x0105
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -

codes)
Data Size： 16-bit
Address: 022CH
022DH
Default： 0x0007
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -

codes)
Data Size： 16-bit
8-101
Address: 022EH
022FH
Interface： 6.3.7
Default： 1000
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： Hz
Range： 50 ~ 1000
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： The first setting value of resonance frequency. If P2-24 is set to 0, this
function is disabled. P2-43 and P2-44 are the second Notch filter.

P2-24 DPH1
Interface： 6.3.7
Default： 0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -dB
Range： 0 ~ 32 (0: disable the function of Notch filter)
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： The first resonance suppression (notch filter) attenuation rate. When
this parameter is set to 0, the function of Notch filter is disabled.
Note: If the value of attenuation rate is set to 5, then, it would be -5 dB.
Address: 0232H
P2-25 NLP Low-pass Filter of Resonance Suppression
0233H
Interface： 6.3.7
Default： 0.2 (under 1 kW) or 2 (under 1 kW) or

0.5 (other models) 5 (other models)
Control
ALL
Mode：
8-102
Unit： 1 ms 0.1 ms
Range： 0.0 ~ 100.0 0 ~ 1000
Data Size： 16-bit
Example： 1.5 = 1.5 ms 15 = 1.5 ms
Settings： Set the low-pass filter of resonance suppression. When the value is set
to 0, the function of low-pass filter is disabled.
Address: 0234H
P2-26 DST Anti-interference Gain
0235H
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： rad/s
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： Increasing the value of this parameter can increase the damping of speed
loop. It is suggested to set P2-26 equals to the value of P2-06. If users
desire to adjust P2-26, please follow the rules below.
1. In speed mode, increase the value of this parameter can reduce
speed overshoot.
2. In position mode, decrease the value of this parameter can reduce
position overshoot.
Address: 0236H
P2-27 GCC Gain Switching and Switching Selection
0237H
Interface：
Default： 0x0000
Control
ALL
Mode：
8-103
Unit： -
Range： 0x0000 ~ 0x0018
Data Size： 16-bit
Settings：
Gain switching conditon

Gain switching method
Not in use
 Gain switching condition:

0: Disable gain switching function.
1: The signal of gain switching (GAINUP) is ON.
2: In position control mode, the position error is bigger than the value
of P2-29.
3: The frequency of position command is bigger than the value of
P2-29.
4: When the speed of servo motor is faster than the value of P2-29.
5: The signal of gain switching (GAINUP) is OFF.
6: In position control mode, the position error is smaller than the
value of P2-29.
7: When the frequency of position command is smaller than the value
of P2-29.
8: When the speed of servo motor is slower than the value of P2-29.
 Gain switching method:

0: Gain switching
1: Integrator switching, P -> PI
Setting
Control Mode P Control Mode S
Value
P2-00 x 100%
P2-04 x 100% Before switching
P2-04 x 100%
0
P2-00 x P2-01
P2-04 x P2-05 After switching
P2-04 x P2-05
P2-06 x 0%
Before switching
P2-26 x 0%
1
P2-06 x 100%
After switching
P2-26 x 100%
8-104
Address: 0238H
P2-28 GUT Gain Switching Time Constant
0239H
Interface：
Default： 10
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： 10 ms
Range： 0 ~ 1000
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： It is for switching the smooth gain. (0: disable this function)
Address: 023AH
P2-29 GPE Gain Switching
023BH
Interface：
Default： 1280000
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： pulse, Kpps, r/min
Range： 0 ~ 3840000
Data Size： 32-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： The setting of gain switching (pulse error, Kpps, r/min) is determined
by the selection of gain switching (P2-27).
8-105
Address: 023CH
P2-30■ INH Auxiliary Function
023DH
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -8 ~ +8
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： 0: Disable all functions described below

1: Force to Servo On the software
2 ~ 4: (reserved)
5: This setting allows the written parameters not retain after power off.
When the data is no need to save, it can avoid the parameters
continuously writing into EEPROM and shortening the lifetime of
EEPROM.
Setting this parameter is a must when using communication control.
6: In simulation mode (command simulation), the external Servo On
signal cannot work and DSP Error (variable 0x6F) is regarded as 0.
Parameter P0-01 only shows the external Error (positive/negative
limit, emergency stop, etc)
In this status, DO.SRDY is ON. Command is accepted in each
mode and can be observed via scope software. However, the motor
will not operate. The aim is to examine the command accuracy.
7: (It will be available after firmware version V1.013)
High-speed oscilloscope, disable Time-Out function (It is for PC
software)
8: (It will be available after firmware version V1.013)
Back up all parameters (current value) and save in EEPROM. The
value still exists when re-power on.
The panel displays “to.rom” during execution. (It can be executed when
Servo ON.)
-1, -5, -6, -7: (It will be available after firmware version V1.013)
Individually disable the function of 1,5,6,7
-2 ~ -4, -8: (Reserved)
Note: Please set the value to 0 in normal operation. The value returns to 0
automatically after re-power on.
8-106
Speed Loop Frequency Response Setting in Address: 023EH

P2-31 AUT1
Auto and Semi-auto Mode 023FH
Default： 40
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： Hz
Range： 1 ~ 1000
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： 1 ~ 50 Hz: Low stiffness, low response

51 ~ 250 Hz: Medium stiffness, medium response
251 ~ 850 Hz: High stiffness, high response
851 ~ 1000 Hz: Extremely high stiffness, extremely high response
Note: 1）According to the speed loop setting of P2-31, the servo drive sets
the position loop response automatically.
2）The function is enabled via parameter P2-32. Please refer to
section 5.6 for corresponding bandwidth size of the setting value.
Address: 0240H
P2-32▲ AUT2 Tuning Mode Selection
0241H
Default： 0x0000
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0x0000 ~ 0x0002
Data Size： 16-bit
Settings： 0: Manual Mode

1: Auto Mode (continuous adjustment)
2: Semi-auto Mode (non-continuous adjustment)
8-107
Relevant description of manual mode setting:

When P2-32 is set to 0, parameters related to gain control, such as
P2-00, P2-04, P2-06, P2-25 and P2-26, all can be set by the user.
When switching mode from auto or semi-auto to manual, parameters
about gain will be updated automatically.
Relevant description of auto mode setting:

Continue to estimate the system inertia, save the inertia ratio to P1-37
every 30 minutes automatically and refer to the stiffness and bandwidth
setting of P2-31.
1. Set the system to manual mode 0 from auto 1 or semi-auto 2, the
system will save the estimated inertia value to P1-37 automatically
and set the corresponding parameters.
2. Set the system to auto mode 1 or semi-auto mode 2 from manual
mode 0, please set P1-37 to the appropriate value.
3. Set the system to manual mode 0 from auto mode 1, P2-00, P2-04,
P2-06, P2-25, P2-26 and P2-49 will be modified to the
corresponding parameters of auto mode.
4. Set the system to manual mode 0 from semi-auto mode 2, P2-00,
P2-04, P2-06, P2-25, P2-26 and P2-49 will be modified to the
corresponding parameters of semi-auto mode.
Relevant description of semi-auto mode setting:
1. When the system inertia is stable, the value of P2-33 will be 1 and
the system stops estimating. The inertia value will be saved to P1-
37 automatically. When switching mode to semi-auto mode (from
manual or auto mode), the system starts to estimate again.
2. When the system inertia is over the range, the value of P2-33 will
be 0 and the system starts to estimate and adjust again.
Address: 0242H
P2-33▲ AUT3 Semi-auto Inertia Adjustment
0243H
Interface：
Default： 0x0000
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0x0000 ~ 0x0001
Data Size： 16-bit
8-108
Settings：
Semi-auto setting
Reserved
Not in use
 Semi-auto Setting:
1: It means the inertia estimation in semi-auto mode is completed.
The inertia value can be accessed via P1-37.
0: When the display is 0, it means the inertia adjustment is not
completed and the adjustment is in progress.
When the setting is 0, it means the inertia adjustment is not
completed and the adjustment is in progress.
Address: 0244H
P2-34 SDEV The Condition of Overspeed Warning
0245H
Interface：
Default： 5000
Control
S
Mode：
Unit： r/min
Range： 1 ~ 6000
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： The setting of over speed warning in servo drive error display (P0-01)
Condition of Excessive Position Control Address: 0246H

P2-35 PDEV
Deviation Warning 0247H
Interface：
Default： 3840000
Control
PT / PR
Mode：
Unit： pulse
Range： 1 ~ 128000000
Data Size： 32-bit
Format： Decimal
8-109
Settings： The setting of excessive position control deviation warning in servo

drive error display (P0-01)
Address: 0248H
P2-36 EDI9 Extended EDI9 Functional Planning
0249H
Default： 0x0000
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0x0000 ~ 0x015F (the last two codes are EDI

codes)
Data Size： 16-bit
Settings：
Input function selection

Input contact
Not in use
 Input function selection: Please refer to Table 8.1

 Input contact: a or b contact
0: Set the input contact as normally closed (b contact)
1: Set the input contact as normally opened (a contact)
Address: 024AH
024BH
Default： 0x0000
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -

codes)
Data Size： 16-bit
8-110
Address: 024CH
024DH
Default： 0x0000
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -

codes)
Data Size： 16-bit
Address: 024EH
024FH
Operational Related Section
Interface： Table: 8.1
Default： 0x0000
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -

codes)
Data Size： 16-bit
8-111
Address: 0250H
0251H
Default： 0x0000
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -

codes)
Data Size： 16-bit
Address: 0252H
0253H
Default： 0x0000
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -

codes)
Data Size： 16-bit
P2-42 Reserved
8-112
Address: 0256H
0257H
Interface： 6.3.7
Default： 1000
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： Hz
Range： 50 ~ 2000
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： The second setting value of resonance frequency. If P2-44 is set to 0,

this function is disabled. P2-23 and P2-24 are the first Notch filter.

P2-44 DPH2
Interface： 6.3.7
Default： 0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -dB
Range： 0 ~ 32 (0: disable Notch filter)
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： The second resonance suppression (notch filter) attenuation rate.

8-113
Address: 025AH
025BH
Interface： 6.3.7
Default： 1000
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： Hz
Range： 50 ~ 2000
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： The third group of mechanism resonance frequency setting value. If

P2-46 is set to 0, this function will be disabled. P2-23 and P2-24 are
the first group of resonance suppression (Notch filter).
Resonance Suppression (Notch filter) Address: 025CH

P2-46 DPH3
Attenuation Rate (3) 025DH
Interface： 6.3.7
Default： 0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -dB
Range： 0 ~ 32
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： The third group of resonance suppression (Notch filter) attenuation

rate. Set the value to 0 to disable the function of Notch filter.
Note： If the value of attenuation rate is set to 5, then it would be -5 dB.
Address: 025EH
P2-47 ANCF Auto Resonance Suppression Mode Setting
025FH
Interface：
Default： 1
8-114
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0 ~ 2
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： 0: The value of P2-43, P2-44 and P2-45, P2-46 will retain.
1: The value of P2-43, P2-44 and P2-45, P2-46 will retain after
resonance suppression.
2: Continuous resonance suppression
When it is set to 1: Auto resonance, the value returns to 0
automatically and saves the point of resonance
suppression when it is stable. If it is unstable,
re-power on or set back to 1 for re-estimation again.
When it is set to 2: Continuous suppression automatically. When it is
stable, the point of resonance suppression will be
saved. If it is unstable, re-power on for re-
estimation.
When switching to mode 0 from mode 2 or 1, the setting of P2-43,
P2-44, P2-45 and P2-46 will be saved automatically.
Address: 0260H
P2-48 ANCL Resonance Suppression Detection Level
0261H
Interface：
Default： 100
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 1 ~ 300
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： (The smaller the setting value is, the more sensitive the resonance will
be.)
P2-48↑, resonance sensitiveness↓
P2-48↓, resonance sensitiveness↑
8-115
Address: 0262H
P2-49 SJIT Speed Detection Filter
0263H
Interface：
Default： 0x000B
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0x0000 ~ 0x001F
Data Size： 16-bit
Settings：The filter of speed estimation
Setting Value Speed Estimation Bandwidth (Hz)

00 2500
01 2250
02 2100
03 2000
04 1800
05 1600
06 1500
07 1400
08 1300
09 1200
0A 1100
0B 1000
0C 950
0D 900
0E 850
0F 800
10 750
11 700
12 650
13 600
14 550
15 500
16 450
17 400
8-116
Setting Value Speed Estimation Bandwidth (Hz)

18 350
19 300
1A 250
1B 200
1C 175
1D 150
1E 125
1F 100
Address: 0264H
P2-50 CCLR Pulse Clear Mode
0265H
Interface：
Default： 0x0000
Control
PT
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0x0000 ~ 0x0001
Data Size： 16-bit
Settings： Please refer to Table 8.1 for digital input setting.

When you set digital input (DI) as CCLR, the function of pulse clear is
effective. Clear the position error (It is applicable in PT and PR modes).
If this DI is ON, the accumulative position error will be cleared to 0.
0: CCLR is rising-edge triggered.
1: CCLR is action-level triggered.
P2-51 Reserved
8-117
Address: 0268H
P2-52▲ IDXS Indexing Coordinates Scale
0269H
Interface：
Default： 1000000000
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： PUU
Range： 0 ~ 1000000000
Data Size： 32-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings：This parameter is used to set the scale of the indexing coordinates,

indexing command position and indexing feedback position. If the
setting value is too small, it may cause the error of indexing
coordinates.
Range of setting value of P2-52:
1280000 P 1 - 45
P 2 - 52 > 1.05 × Max. Motor Speed ( r / min) × ×
60000 P 1 - 44
P1 - 45
> 22 .4 × Max. Motor Speed (r/min) ×
P1 - 44
Address: 026AH
P2-53 KPI Position Integral Compensation
026BH
Interface： 6.3.6
Default： 0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： rad/s
Range： 0 ~ 1023
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： When increasing the value of position control integral, reducing the
position steady-state error, it may easily cause position overshoot and
noise if the value is set too big.
8-118
Address: 026CH
P2-54▲ SVP The Gain of Synchronous Speed Control
026DH
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： rad/s
Range： 0 ~ 8191
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： When increasing the value of synchronous speed control, it can
enhance the speed following of two motors. However, if the value is
set too big, it may easily cause vibration and noise.
Integral Compensation to Synchronous Address: 026EH

P2-55▲ SVI
Speed 026FH
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： rad/s
Range： 0 ~ 1023
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： When increasing integral compensation to synchronous speed, two
motors speed following can be enhanced and the speed error between
two motors can be reduced. However, if the value is set too big, it may
easily cause vibration and noise.
Integral Compensation to Synchronous Address: 0270H

P2-56▲ SPI
Position 0271H
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： rad/s
Range： 0 ~ 1023
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
8-119
Settings： When increasing integral compensation to synchronous position, two

motors speed following can be enhanced and the speed error between
two motors can be reduced. However, if the value is set too big, it may
easily cause vibration and noise It is suggested to set the value the
same as P2-06.
Address: 0272H
P2-57▲ SBW The Bandwidth of Synchronous Control
0273H
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： Hz
Range： 0 ~ 1023
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： If users do not know how to set P2-54 ~ P2-56, setting the bandwidth
of synchronous control value will do since the value will correspond to
P2-54 ~ P2-56. The bigger the bandwidth of synchronous control value
is, the better the synchronous effect will be. When the bandwidth of
speed loop plus the bandwidth of synchronous control is greater than
the system’s allowable bandwidth, it causes system resonance. When
increasing the bandwidth of speed loop and synchronous control, pay
special attention to the response of P2-25 which should be faster than
the setting of the both bandwidth.
Address: 0274H
P2-58 SVL Low-pass Filter of Synchronous Speed Error
0275H
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： 0.1 ms
Range： 0 ~ 1000
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Example： 15 = 1.5 ms
Settings： If the synchronous control is influenced by low resolution and causes
noise (not a high-pitched but rough sound), low-pass filter can be used
to solve this problem. Please note that bandwidth of the synchronous
control should be set as large as possible and should larger than the
bandwidth of speed-loop.
8-120
P2-59 Reserved
Address: 0278H
P2-60 GR4 Gear Ratio (Numerator) (N2)
0279H
Interface：
Default： 128
Control
PT
Mode：
Unit： pulse
Range： 1 ~ (229-1)
Data Size： 32-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： The numerator of electronic gear ratio can be selected via DI.GNUM0
and DI.GNUM1 (Please refer to Table 8.1). If DI.GNUM0 and
DI.GNUM1 are not set, P1-44 will automatically be the numerator of
electronic gear ratio. Please switch GNUM0 and GNUM1 in stop status
to avoid the mechanical vibration.
Address: 027AH
027BH
Interface：
Default： 128
Control
PT
Mode：
Unit： pulse
Range： 1 ~ (229-1)
8-121
Data Size： 32-bit
Format： Decimal
Address: 027CH
027DH
Interface：
Default： 128
Control
PT
Mode：
Unit： pulse
Range： 1 ~ (229-1)
Data Size： 32-bit
Format： Decimal
P2-63 ~
Reserved
P2-64
Address: 0282H
P2-65 GBIT Special-bit Register
0283H
Interface：
Default： 0x0000
Control
PT / PR / S
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0x0000 ~ 0xFFFF
Data Size： -
Format： -
8-122
Settings：
Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0

 Bit 4, Bit 7, and Bit14: Reserved, please set to 0.
 Bit 0 ~ Bit1
Bit 0: SPD0/SPD1 speed trigger mode
(0: action-level triggered; 1: rising-edge triggered)
Bit 1: TCM0/TCM1 torque trigger mode
(0: action-level triggered; 1: rising-edge triggered)
When rising-edge is triggered, refer to the following for the setting of
register command:
A: Execute internal register command 1

B: Execute internal register command 2
C: Execute internal register command 3
D: Execute internal register command 3
 Bit 2: IGBT software protection
0: Enable the function of IGBT software protection
1: Disable the function of IGBT software protection
 Bit 3: New regenerative brake function switch
0: Disable the new regenerative brake function switch
1: Enable the new regenerative brake function switch
This function provides protection and detection when the mains
voltage is too high.
 Bit 5: Detection for undervoltage and phase loss
0: When Servo off, disable the detection for undervoltage and
phase loss.
1: When Servo off, enable the detection for undervoltage and phase
loss.
 Bit 6: In PT mode, the switch of pulse error protection function
(pulse frequency is over high)
0: Normally use the function of pulse error protection
1: Disable the function of pulse error protection
 Bit 8: U, V, W wiring error protection
1: Enable U, V, W wiring error protection
 Bit 9: U, V, W wiring cut-off detection
1: Enable U, V, W wiring cut-off detection
 Bit 10: DI.ZCLAMP function selection
When the following conditions are all established, the function of
ZCLAMP is enabled.
Condition 1: speed mode
Condition 2: DI. ZCLAMP is on.
Condition 3: Motor speed is slower than the value of P1-38.
8-123
0: The command source is analog, ZCLAMP function will use the

analog speed command without acceleration / deceleration
processing to judge if this function should be enabled. The motor
will be locked at the position where ZCALMP conditions are
established.
0: The command source is register. ZCLAMP function will use the

register speed command with acceleration / deceleration
processing to judge if this function is enabled. The motor will be
locked at the position where ZCALMP conditions are established.
1: The command source is analog speed command. ZCLAMP

function will use the analog speed command without acceleration
/ deceleration processing to judge if this function is enabled.
When ZCALMP conditions are established, the motor speed
decelerates to 0 through S-curve. If not, the motor follow the
analog speed command through S-curve.
1: The command source is register. ZCLAMP function will use the

register with acceleration / deceleration processing to judge if this
function is enabled. When ZCLAMP conditions are established,
the motor speed will be set to 0.
8-124
 Bit 11: Pulse inhibit function

0: Disable NL / PL pulse input inhibit function. In PT mode, the
external position pulse command will be input into the
servo drive in any condition.
1: Enable NL / PL pulse input inhibit function. In PT mode, if NL
exists, the external NL pulse will be inhibited to input to
the servo. PL pulse input will be accepted. In PT mode, if
PL exists, the external PL pulse will be inhibited to input
to the servo. NL pulse will be accepted.
Please note: In PT mode, if NL and PL both exist, both of them will
be inhibited to input to the servo.
 Bit12: Lack phase detection
0: Enable lack phase (AL022) detection
1: Disable lack phase (AL022) detection
 Bit13: Encoder output error detection function
0: Enable encoder output error (AL018) detection function
1: Disable encoder output error (AL018) detection function
 Bit15: Friction compensation mode selection
0: If the speed is slower than the value of P1-38, the compensation
value remains.
1: If the speed is slower than the value of P1-38, the compensation
will become 0 according to the smoothing time of P1-63.
Address: 0284H
P2-66 GBIT2 Special-bit Register 2
0285H
Interface：
Default： 0x0000
Control
PT / PR / S
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0x0000 ~ 0x183F
Data Size： 16-bit
8-125
Settings： Special-bit Register 2:


Bit0 ~ Bit1: Reserved
Bit2: Cancel latch function of low-voltage error
0: Latch function of low-voltage error: the error will not be cleared
automatically.
1: Cancel latch function of low-voltage error: the error will be cleared
automatically.
Bit3: Reserved
Bit4: Cancel the detection of AL044
0: AL044 will occur
1: AL044 will be ignored
Bit5: Enable disconnection detection of linear scale (only when the full-
closed loop control function is enabled)
0: AL041 will be ignored
1: AL041 will occur
Bit9: Set AL003 as ALM or WARN
0: Set AL003 as WARN
1: Set AL003 as ALM
Bit12: Set AL022 as ALM or WARN
0: Set AL022 as WARN
1: Set AL022 as ALM
Address: 0286H
P2-67 JSL The Stable Level of Inertia Estimation
0287H
Interface：
Default： 1.5 15
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： 1 times 0.1 times
Range： 0 ~ 200.0 0 ~ 2000
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： One decimal Decimal
Example： 1.5 = 1.5 times 15 = 1.5 times
8-126
Settings： In semi-auto mode, if the value of inertia estimation is smaller than P2-
67 and the status remains for a while, the system will regard the inertia
estimation as completed.
Address: 0288H
P2-68 TEP Switch of Following Error Compensation
0289H
Interface：
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0x00000000 ~ 0x00002101
Data Size： 32-bit
Settings： X＝0: P1-36＞1, following error compensation is disabled.

1: P1-36＞1, following error compensation is enabled.
(The function is available after V1.036 sub00)
Y＝0: When E-CAM is engaged, JOG is not operable.
1: When E-CAM is engaged, JOG is operable.
(This function is not available now.)
Z＝0: DI.STP is triggered by rising edge.
1: DI.STP is action-level triggered.
(The function is available after V1.042 sub00)
U＝0: unit is 0.1 rpm in speed mode
1: unit is 0.01 rpm in speed mode
2: unit is 0.05 rpm in speed mode
Address: 028AH
P2-69● ABS Absolute Encoder Setting
028BH
Interface：
Default： 0x0000
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0x0000 ~ 0x0111
Data Size： 16-bit
8-127
Settings： Format: U Z Y X
X: Setup the operation mode
0: Incremental mode. Servo motor with absolute encoder can be
operated as incremental motor.
1: Absolute mode. (This setting is only available for the servo motor
with absolute encoder. When an incremental servo motor is
connected, AL069 will occur.)
Y: Setup the pulse command when absolute position is lost
0: When AL060 or AL06A occurs, it cannot accept pulse command
1: When AL060 or AL06A occurs, it can accept pulse command
Z: Function setting when index coordinates overflow
0: Index coordinates is lost when overflows
1: Index coordinates will not overflow, but absolute coordinates
(Fb_PUU)will not remain
U: Reserved
Note: This parameter is effective only after you cycle power to the servo drive. You
can establish the absolute origin coordinates after completing setting this
parameter.
Address: 028CH
P2-70 MRS Read Data Format Selection
028DH
Interface：
Default： 0x0000
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0x0000 ~ 0x0007
Data Size： 16-bit
Settings：

Bit 0: Data unit setting of digital input/output (DI/DO); 1: Pulse, 0: PUU
Bit 1: Communication data unit setting; 1: Pulse, 0: PUU
Bit 2: Overflow warning; 1: No overflow warning,
0: Overflow warning, AL289 (PUU),
AL062 (number of turns).
8-128
Bit 3 ~ Bit15: Reserved. Must be set to 0.
Address: 028EH
P2-71■ CAP Absolute Position Homing
028FH
Interface：
Default： 0x0000
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0 ~ 1
Data Size： 16-bit
Settings： When P2-71 is set to 1, the current position will be set as home position.
This function is the same as the digital input, ABSC. This function can
be enabled only when parameter P2-08 is set to 271 and P2-69.X to 1.
P2-72 Reserved
Address: 0292H
P2-73 ALOP E-Cam Alignment - Operation Setting
0293H
Interface：
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0x00000000 ~ 0x5F3F6F5F
Data Size： 32-bit (format = DCBA : UZYX)

models)
YX: Range of filter (0 ~ 95%)
UZ: Max. allowable correction rate (0 ~ 100%)
BA: PR number (0 ~ 63)
DC: Masking range setting (0 ~ 95%)
8-129
YX: Range of filter (%)

When digital input, ALGN is triggered, E-Cam alignment function is
enabled. The system will detect the current E-Cam position. When
the error between current E-Cam position and the last alignment
position is less than this setting range (%), filter function is
enabled. Otherwise, the system will use the new position to do the
correction.
YX 00 01 ~ 05F
Function Disabled | Error | <= (1~YX) % : Enabled
*Using filter will allow the alignment action to be more stable and
reduce position error caused by digital input noise.
UZ: Max. allowable correction rate (%)
When alignment correction is enabled, the limitation of max.
correction rate (C) for each correction is defined as follows:
| C | <= (P5-84/P5-83) x P2-73 UZ %
*When the alignment error is too big, to correct this error with one time
may cause the motor vibration or overloading. Using this parameter
will break the alignment correction into several smaller actions to
smooth the correction action. But it may need more time to finish the
alignment correction.
BA: PR number
After each alignment action is done, the shortage of pulse
numbers of slave axis will be stored in this specified PR. Using
this PR can compensate the slave position at appropriate timing.
*If BA is set to 0, it will not store the shortage of pulse numbers to
PR.
DC: Masking range setting (%)
When digital input, ALGN is triggered, no another alignment action
is allowed before the increasing pulse numbers of master axis
exceeds the masking distance (M). After the increasing pulse
numbers of master axis is greater than the distance (M) masking,
the next alignment action is allowed.
The masking distance (M) is defined as follows:
M >= (P5-84/P5-83) x P2-73 DC %
*This masking function only allows increasing pulse input. This function
will not work for decreasing pulse input.
E-Cam Alignment - DI Delay Time Address: 0294H

P2-74 ALDY
Compensation 0295H
Interface：
Default： 0.000
Control
PR
Mode：
8-130
Unit： ms with fraction down to usec
Range： -25.000 ~ +25.000, with 3 fraction digits
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： (This function is available in firmware version V1.038 sub26 and later
models)
This parameter is used to set for the compensation of delay time from
digital input.
Address: 0296H
P2-75■ ALTG E-Cam Alignment - Alignment Target Position
0297H
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： The pulse unit of Master axis
Range： 0 ~ (P5-84 /P5-83)-1
Data Size： 32-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： (This function is available in firmware version V1.038 sub26 and later
models)
Note: When the input value is over the setting range, an error will occur. Then,
the user cannot input the setting value.
Note: When a correct value is already set in P2-75 and does not exceed the
setting range, if a change on P5-84 or P5-83 cause the value to exceed
the setting range, this parameter will be reset to 0 automatically.
New value of P2-75 = 0 if P2-75 >=(P5-84 /P5-83)
Address: 0298H
P2-76■ ALCT E-Cam Alignment - Source Setting
0299H
Interface：
Default： 0x0000
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
8-131
Range： 0x0000 ~ 0x6FF7
Data Size： 16-bit

models)
Format＝UZYX. The functions are listed below.
X: E-CAM Alignment Control
Bit Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Phase Alignment in Trigger PR Enable

Function Reserved
reverse direction immediately Alignment
Set 1 to enable. When
the alignment DI is
triggered, the
Set 0 to disable the correcting error will be Set 0 to disable.
function. calculated and stored
Set 1 to enable.
Set 1 to enable the in PR specified by
function. P2-73. If this bit is set If enable, the E-
Description - to 1, trigger the PR CAM alignment
This function is
immediately after DI correction will
applicable to film
activated, otherwise be executed
delivery control of
the user should trigger when DI.ALGN
reverse rotary
the PR manually or ON.
shear.
use P5-88.BA to call
the PR when E-Cam
disengaged.
Y: Filter intensity
Y 0 1~F
Function Disabled Average of 2^Z: Enabled
When the value of Y is increased, the change of correction is getting

slow and it can expedite the performance of the filter function. This can
avoid the disturbance caused by a sensor noise and a big error to be
corrected within one time. Setting P2-76 too big will cause the
alignment not able to work properly. The recommendatory value is 3.
UZ: Alignment path definition. Forward direction as setting reference
here (0 ~ 100%)
0: Backward alignment only
30: Forward 30%, Backward 70%
50: Alignment with the shortest distance
80: Forward 80%, Backward 20%
>=100: Forward alignment only
Address: 029AH
P2-77■ CMSK E-Cam Master Axis – Pulse Masking Setting
029BH
Interface：
8-132
Default： 0x0000
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0x0000 ~ 0xFF7D
Data Size： 16-bit (format = U Z Y X)
Settings：(This function is available in firmware version V1.038 sub54 and

later models)
X: Pulse masking function of master axis /
JOG function of master axis / INCH function of master axis
Y: Correction of lead command length for pulse masking
UZ: Pulse data when the master axis performs JOG or INCH function
Definition of Y: (Each bit is triggered by the rising edge)
Y3 Y2 Y1 Y0
- Extra 1 Cycle Write to ROM CALC
Calculate the value of P5-87

Calculate the value and write the value of P5-87
of P5-87 and plus a into EEPROM at the same time Calculate
- cycle of a resolution to ensure the correct position of the value of
of pulse command, E-Cam after the servo drive is P5-87.
i.e. (P5-84/P5-83). restarted (after switching power
off and on).
Y=0  1: Calculate the value of P5-87 correctly according to actual

masking pulse number and additional virtual pulse number.
Y=0  2: Calculate the value of P5-87 correctly according to
actual masking pulse number and additional virtual pulse
number. Then, write the revised value of P5-87 into
EEPROM to keep the same phase after the servo drive is
restarted.
Y=0  7: Calculate the value of P5-87 correctly according to actual
masking pulse number and additional virtual pulse number.
But, the revised value of P5-87 will plus a value of (P5-84/P5-
83) to make lead pulse wait for an E-Cam cycle.
For example:
Start masking  UZYX = 0x0001
JOG +3 Kpps  UZYX = 0x0302
JOG +20 Kpps  UZYX = 0x1402
JOG -32 Kpps  UZYX = 0x2003
INCH +255 PLS  UZYX = 0xFF04
INCH -18 PLS  UZYX = 0x1205
8-133
Complete and correct lead pulse  UZYX = 0x0020 (Write into

EEPROM)
Disable this function  UZYX = 0x0000 (This step can be ignored)
E-Cam: Area Number #2 + (Polarity is Address: 029CH

P2-78 CMAP
Positive) 029DH
Interface：
Default： 270
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： degree (it becomes degree in firmware

version V1.038 sub25 and later models)
Range： 0 ~ 360
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings：The relationship between DO:CAM_Area2 and parameter values is

shown below:
P2-78 <= P2-79:
E-Cam degree 0° ～ P2-78 ～ P2-79 ～ 360°
DO:CAM_AREA2 OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF

P2-78 > P2-79:
E-Cam degree 0° ～ P2-79 ～ P2-78 ～ 360°
DO:CAM_AREA2 ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON
When the E-Cam is disengaged, the status of digital output,

CAM_AREA2 is always OFF.
E-Cam: Area Number #2 - (Polarity is Address: 029EH

P2-79 CMAP
Negative) 029FH
Interface：
Default： 360
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： degree (it becomes degree in firmware

version V1.038 sub25 and later models)
Range： 0 ~ 360
8-134
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings：The relationship between DO:CAM_Area2 and parameter values is

shown below:
P2-78 <= P2-79:
E-Cam degree 0° ～ P2-78 ～ P2-79 ～ 360°
DO:CAM_AREA2 OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF

P2-78 > P2-79:
E-Cam degree 0° ～ P2-79 ～ P2-78 ～ 360°
DO:CAM_AREA2 ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON
When the E-Cam is not engaged, the status of digital output,

CAM_AREA2 is always OFF.
P2-80~
Reserved
P2-93
Address: 02BCH
P2-94 GBIT3 Special Bit Register 3
02BDH
Interface：
Default： 0x0000
Control
PT / PR / S
Mode：
Unit：
Range： 0x0000 ~ 0x7022
Data Size： 16-bit
Settings： Special-bit Register 3:


B0 ~ B3 and B5 ~ 15: Reserved, please set to 0.
B4: New dynamic brake switch
0: Disable new dynamic brake
1: Enable new dynamic brake
Note: when you enable the new dynamic brake function, the new regenerative
brake is enabled, which is the same as setting P2-65 bit 3 to 1.
8-135
P3-xx Communication Parameters
Address: 0300H
P3-00● ADR Address Setting
0301H
Interface： 9.2
Default： 0x007F
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0x0001 ~ 0x007F
Data Size： 16-bit
Settings： The communication address setting is divided into Y, X (hexadecimal):

0 0 Y X
Range －－ 0~7 0~F
When using RS-232/RS-485 to communicate, one servo drive can only
set one address. The duplicate address setting will cause abnormal
communication.
This address represents the absolute address of the servo drive in
communication network. It is also applicable to RS-232, RS-485,
CANopen, and DMCENT.
When the communication address setting of MODBUS is set to 0xFF,
the servo drive will automatically reply and receive data regardless of
the address. However, P3-00 cannot be set to 0xFF.
8-136
Address: 0302H
P3-01 BRT Transmission Speed
0303H
Interface： 9.2
Default： 0x3203 (for DMCNET models)

Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： bps
Range： 0x0000 ~ 0xF405
Data Size： 16-bit
Settings： The setting of transmission speed is divided into Z, Y, X (hexadecimal):

U Z Y X
Communication
DMC CAN / DMC － RS-232/485
Port
Range 0/3 0~4 0 0~5
 Definition of X setting value
0: 4800
1: 9600
2: 19200
3: 38400
4: 57600
5: 115200
 Definition of Z setting value
0: 125 Kbit/s
1: 250 Kbit/s
2: 500 Kbit/s
3: 750 Kbit/s
4: 1.0 Mbit/s
 Definition of U setting value
0: Use Delta’s controller, such as PLC and HMI
3: Use Delta’s motion card
Note: 1）If this parameter is set via CAN, only Z can be set and the others
remain.
2）The communication speed of USB is 1.0 Mbit/s only and is
unchangeable.
8-137
Address: 0304H
P3-02 PTL Communication Protocol
0305H
Interface： 9.2
Default： 0x0006
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0x0000 ~ 0x0008
Data Size： 16-bit
Settings： The definition of the setting value is as the followings:

0: 7, N, 2 (MODBUS, ASCII)
1: 7, E, 1 (MODBUS, ASCII)
2: 7, O,1 (MODBUS, ASCII)
5: 8, O, 1 (MODBUS, ASCII)
6: 8, N, 2 (MODBUS, RTU)
7: 8, E, 1 (MODBUS, RTU)
8: 8, O, 1 (MODBUS, RTU)
Address: 0306H
P3-03 FLT MODBUS Communication Error Disposal
0307H
Interface： 9.2
Default： 0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0 ~ 1
Data Size： 16-bit
Settings： The definition of the setting value is as the following:

0: Show warning and the motor keeps running
1: Show warning and the motor decelerates to stop (The deceleration
time is set to parameter P5-03.B)
8-138
Address: 0308H
P3-04 CWD Communication Timeout
0309H
Interface： 9.2
Default： 0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： sec
Range： 0 ~ 20
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： DEC
Settings： If the setting value is not 0, enable communication timeout

immediately. If it is set to 0, disable the function.
Address: 030AH
P3-05 CMM Communication Mechanism
030BH
Interface： 9.2
Default： 0x0000
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0x0000 ~ 0x0001
Data Size： 16-bit
Settings： Communication port can select one or more than one communications.
 Communication Interface
0: RS232 (only applicable to A2-L and A2-M models)
1: RS485 (only applicable to A2-L, A2-M, and A2-LN models)
8-139
Address: 030CH
P3-06■ SDI Control Switch of Digital Input (DI)
030DH
Interface： 9.2
Default： 0x0000
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0x0000 ~ 0x3FFF
Data Size： 16-bit
Settings： The source of DI controls the switch.

Each bit of this parameter decides one input source of DI signal:
Bit0 ~ Bit7 correspond to DI1 ~ DI8.
Bit8 ~ Bit13 correspond to extended DI EDI9 ~ EDI14;
The setting of bit is as the followings:
0: The input status is controlled by the external hardware.
1: The input status is controlled by P4-07.
For the functional planning of digital input, please refer to:
DI1 ~ DI8: P2-10 ~ P2-17
EDI9 ~ EDI14: P2-36 ~ P2-41
Address: 030EH
P3-07 CDT Communication Response Delay Time
030FH
Interface： 9.2
Default： 0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： 0.5 ms
Range： 0 ~ 1000
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： Delay the time of communication response from servo drive to

controller.
8-140
P3-08 Reserved
Address: 0312H
P3-09 SYC CANopen / DMCNET Synchronize Setting
0313H
Interface： 9.2

Control
CANopen / DMC
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： Shown as below
Data Size： 16-bit
Settings： The synchronous setting of CANopen / DMCNET is divided into E, T, D

and M (hexadecimal):
Item E T D M
Range of
Adjusting
Function Synchronous Target Value Deadband
amount
error
Range 1~9 0~9 0~F 1~F
The slave of CANopen / DMCNET synchronizes with the master via
SYNC. See as the followings:
M: If the slave needs to synchronize with the master, correct the clock
is a must. This parameter sets the maximum correction value per
time. (Unit: usec)
D: Set the size of deadband (Unite: usec). If the deviation between the
SYNC reaching time and the target value does not exceed the
deadband, correction is no need.
T: SYNC arrival time. The standard value is 500usec but it might be
different from the target value. Thus, the buffer is necessary.
Target value＝400 + 10 x T.
For instance, if T=5, the target value will be 450.
E: If the deviation between SYNC reaching time and the target value is
smaller than the range, it means the synchronization is successful.
(Unit: 10 usec)
8-141
Address: 0314H
P3-10 CANEN CANopen / DMCNET Protocol Setting
0315H

Control
CANopen / DMC
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： Shown as below
Data Size： 16-bit
Settings： CANopen / DMCNET synchronization setting is divided into X, Y, Z, U

(hexadecimal):
Item U Z Y X
If motor will
servo off
If PDO alarm
when CAN
Function will be cleared Reserved Reserved
Bus /
automatically
DMCNET
error occurs
Range 0~1 0~F 0~1 0~1
Definition:
X: Reserved
Y: 0: The motor keeps running when communication error (AL170)
occurs (only functions in 0B mode of CANopen);
1: The motor servo Off when communication error (AL180) occurs.
Z: Reserved
U: 0: If PDO error occurs, it must be cleared by Alarm Rest
1: If PDO error occurs, it will be cleared automatically.
Note:
For A2-M, Y bit is valid while X bit is invalid.
For A2-F, it is suggested to set X to 1.
P3-11 Reserved
8-142
Address: 0318H
P3-12 QSTPO CANopen / DMCNET Support Setting
0319H
Default： 0x0000
Control
CANopen / DMC
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0x0000 ~ 0x0111
Data Size： 16-bit
Settings：
Item U Z Y X
Load in the If the motor will enter
If OD-6040
CANopen / Quick Stop mode
Function None supports
DMCNET when in auto
Quick Stop
value protection.
Range None 0~1 0~1 0~1
Aiming to CANopen Quick Stop mode, we have X and Y setting
(Hexadecimal.) which is showed as below. It is only suitable in CAN
mode: 0xb mode selection (P1-01 = b).
X: Trigger Servo ON sequence and Quick Stop support setting
X = 0: Servo On the servo drive by turning On OD-0x6040 Bit 3
(Enable Operation). OD-0x6040 Bit 2 enters Quick Stop mode is
not supported.
X = 1: The servo drive can be Servo ON only when OD-0x6040 Bit 0,
Bit 1, Bit 3 are ON. And will enter Quick Stop mode via OD-
0x6040 Bit 2 (Quick Stop)
Y: When warning alarms (positive / negative limit, communication error,

under voltage, abnormal fan) occur, it can determine if Quick Stop
mode can be triggered.
Y = 0: When warning alarms occur, if motor decelerates to stop
because of auto protection function, it will not enter Quick Stop
mode. Users only need to troubleshoot the alarm and clear the
alarm message from the servo drive, the servo drive status will
resume.
Y = 1: When warning alarms occur, if motor decelerates to stop
because of auto protection function, OD-0x6040 will enter Quick
Stop mode. Users have to issue Fault Reset (Bit 1 = 1 → 0) to
OD-0x6040 Bit to troubleshoot the alarm and clear the alarm
message from the servo drive, and the servo drive status will
resume.
The following table shows P parameters and its corresponding
8-143
CANopen OD or DMCNET parameter. The setting of Z (Hexadecimal)

can determine if it should be modified. This function is applicable in
CAN mode: 0xB or 0xC (P1-01 = b or c) or DMC mode: 0xB (P1-01 =
b).
Z: Determine if the value of default parameters will overlap parameters

from P groups.
Z = 0: When re-servo on the servo drive or reset the communiation, P
parameters that mentioned in the following table will be overlapped
by the value of default parameters in CANoen / DMCNET.
Z = 1: When re-servo on the servo drive or reset the communiation, P
parameters that mentioned in the following table will keep the value
that before power off.
CANopen mode:
Related variables
P3-12.Z = 0 P3-12.Z = 1 Note
during initialization
P1-32 0x0010 EEPROM
P2-35 3840000 EEPROM
P1-47 10 EEPROM
P1-49 0 EEPROM
P1-38 100 EEPROM
Used in HM
Home offset 0 EEPROM
mode
Used in PT
Torque slope 200 EEPROM
mode
P1-44 1 EEPROM
P1-45 1 EEPROM
DMCNET mode:
Related variables
P3-12.Z = 0 P3-12.Z = 1 Note
during initialization
P1-32 0x0010 EEPROM
P2-35 3840000 EEPROM
P1-47 100 EEPROM
P1-49 0 EEPROM
P1-38 100 EEPROM
Used in HM
Home offset 0 Undefined
mode
Used in PV, PP
Acc 200 Undefined
mode
Used in PV, PP
Dec 200 Undefined
mode
Used in PT
Torque 200 Undefined
mode
P1-44 1 EEPROM
P1-45 1 EEPROM
8-144
Methods that save parameters in EEPROM (even when the power is

off):
SDO: When setting parmeters, parameters will be stored in EEPROM.
Note: In CANopen mode, when using the function of OD 1010 Store Parameter
and P3-12.Z = 0, the default value will be different from the value shown
above. Please refer to CANopen Standard for further information.
8-145
P4-xx Diagnosis Parameters
Address: 0400H
P4-00★ ASH1 Fault Record (N)
0401H
Interface： 4.4.1
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -
Data Size： 32-bit
Settings： The last abnormal status record

Low word: LXXXX: display ALM number
High word: hYYYY: display the corresponding CANopen / DMCNET
error code.
Address: 0402H
P4-01★ ASH2 Fault Record (N-1)
0403H
Interface： 4.4.1
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -
Data Size： 32-bit
Settings： The last second abnormal status record

error code
8-146
Address: 0404H
0405H
Interface： 4.4.1
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -
Data Size： 32-bit
Settings： The last third abnormal status record

error code
Address: 0406H
0407H
Interface： 4.4.1
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -
Data Size： 32-bit
Settings： The last fourth abnormal status record

error code
8-147
Address: 0408H
0409H
Interface： 4.4.1
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -
Data Size： 32-bit
Settings： The last fifth abnormal status record

error code
Address: 040AH
P4-05 JOG Servo Motor Jog Control
040BH
Interface： 4.4.2
Default： 20
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： r/min
Range： 0 ~ 5000
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： Three control methods are as follows:

1. Operation Test
After the JOG speed is set by P4-05 via panel, the panel will
display the symbol of JOG. Pressing the UP Key can control JOG
operation in positive direction, and pressing the DOWN Key can
control negative direction. Stop pressing to stop the JOG operation.
If there is any error in this setting, then the motor cannot operate.
The maximum JOG speed is the maximum speed of the servo
motor.
2. DI Control
If the DI is set to JOGU and JOGD (refer to table 8.1), then the
JOG operation in positive or negative direction can be controlled
via this DI.
8-148
3. Communication Control
1 ~ 5000: JOG speed
4998: JOG operation in positive direction
4999: JOG operation in negative direction
0: Stop operation
Note: When writing via communication, if the frequency is high, please set
P2-30 to 5.
Digital Output Register (Readable and Address: 040CH

P4-06■ FOT
Writable) 040DH
Interface： 4.4.3
Default： 0x0000
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0x0000 ~ 0x00FF
Data Size： 16-bit
Settings： bit 00: correspond to DO code=0x30

bit 01: correspond to DO code=0x31
bit 10: correspond to DO code=0x3A
bit 11: correspond to DO code=0x3B
bit 12: correspond to DO code=0x3C
bit 13: correspond to DO code=0x3D
bit 14: correspond to DO code=0x3E
bit 15: correspond to DO code=0x3F
If P2-18 is set to 0x0130, then the DO#1is bit 0 status of P4-06, and so
forth.
DO Code (0x30 ~ 0x3F) can be set via communication DO, and then
write into P4-06.
8-149
Address: 040EH
P4-07■ ITST Multi-function of Digital Input
040FH
Interface： Section 4.4.4
Section 9.2
Default： 0x0000
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0x0000 ~ 0x3FFF
Data Size： 16-bit
Settings： The DI input signal can come from external terminal (DI1 ~ DI8; EDI9 ~
EDI14) or software SDI1 ~ 14 (Bit 0 ~ 13 of corresponding parameter
P4-07) and is determined by P3-06. The corresponding bit of P3-06 is
1, which means the source is software SDI (P4-07). If the
corresponding bit is 0, then the source is hardware DI. See the
following graph:
P3-06
External DI: DI1 ~ DI8
DI after combination
Software DI,
SDI1~SDI14
(P4-07 bit)
Read parameters: shows the DI status after combination

Write parameters: writes the software SDI status
(This function is the same whether using the panel or communication
to set the parameter.)
For example:
The value of reading P4-07 is 0x0011, which means DI1 and DI5 is ON
after combination.
The value of writing P4-07 is 0x0011, which means software SDI1 and
SDI5 is ON.
Please refer to P2-10 ~ P2-17 for the function program of digital input
pin DI (DI1 ~ DI8) and P2-36 ~ P2-41 for extended DI (EDI9 ~ EDI14).
8-150
Address: 0410H
P4-08★ PKEY Input Status of the Drive Keypad (Read-only)
0411H
Interface：
Default： -
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： (read-only)
Data Size： 16-bit
Settings： The aim is to check if the five keys, MODE, UP, DOWN, SHIFT, and
SET, can work normally. This parameter is also used to check if the
Keys are all functional when producing servo drives.
Address: 0412H
P4-09★ MOT Digital Output Status (Read-only)
0413H
Interface： 4.4.5
Default： -
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0x0000 ~ 0x001F
Data Size： 16-bit
Settings： Note: There is no difference when you read the status through the panel or
communication.
Address: 0414H
P4-10■ CEN Adjustment Selection
0415H
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
8-151
Range： 0 ~ 6
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： 0: reserved
1: Execute the calibration of analog speed input offset
2: Execute the calibration of analog torque input offset
3: Execute the calibration of current detector (V phase) hardware offset
4: Execute the calibration of current detector (W phase) hardware
offset
5: Execute the calibration of 1 ~ 4 hardware offset
6: Execute the calibration of IGBT ADC
Note: The calibration function needs to be enabled by P2-08. When
calibration, the external wiring which connects to analog speed or
torque needs to be removed completely and must be in Servo Off
status.
Address: 0416H
P4-11 SOF1 Analog Speed Input Offset Adjustment 1
0417H
Interface：
Default： Factory default

Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0 ~ 32767
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： Manually calibrate the hardware offset. The calibration function needs
to be enabled by P2-08. It is not suggested to adjust the auxiliary
calibration function. This parameter cannot be reset.
8-152
Address: 0418H
P4-12 SOF2 Analog Speed Input Offset Adjustment 2
0419H
Interface：

Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0 ~ 32767
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Address: 041AH
P4-13 TOF1 Analog Torque Input Offset Adjustment 1
041BH
Interface：

Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0 ~ 32767
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
8-153
Address: 041CH
P4-14 TOF2 Analog Torque Input Offset Adjustment 2
041DH
Interface：

Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0 ~ 32767
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Current Detector (V1 Phase) Offset Address: 041EH

P4-15 COF1
Adjustment 041FH
Interface：

Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0 ~ 32767
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
8-154
Current Detector (V2 Phase) Offset Address: 0420H

P4-16 COF2
Adjustment 0421H
Interface：

Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0 ~ 32767
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Current Detector (W1 Phase) Offset Address: 0422H

P4-17 COF3
Adjustment 0423H
Interface：

Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0 ~ 32767
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
8-155
Current Detector (W2 Phase) Offset Address: 0424H

P4-18 COF4
Adjustment 0425H
Interface：

Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0 ~ 32767
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
IGBT NTC Adjustment Detection Level Address: 0426H

P4-19 TIGB
(cannot reset) 0427H
Interface：

Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 1 ~ 4
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： Please cool down the drive to 25 Celsius degree when adjusting. The
calibation function needs to be enabled by P2-08.
8-156
Offset Adjustment Value of Analog Monitor Address: 0428H

P4-20 DOF1
Output (Ch1) 0429H
Interface： 6.4.4
Default： 0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： mV
Range： -800 ~ 800
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： Offset calibration value (cannot reset). The calibration function needs
Offset Adjustment Value of Analog Monitor Address: 042AH

P4-21 DOF2
Output (Ch2) 042BH
Interface： 6.4.4
Default： 0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： mV
Range： -800 ~ 800
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： Offset calibration value (cannot reset). The calibration function needs
Address: 042CH
P4-22 SAO Analog Speed Input OFFSET
042DH
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
S
Mode：
Unit： mV
8-157
Range： -5000 ~ 5000
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： Users manually adjust the offset value.
Address: 042EH
P4-23 TAO Analog Torque Input OFFSET
042FH
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
T
Mode：
Unit： mV
Range： -5000 ~ 5000
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： Users manually adjust the offset value.
220V Series
Address: 0430H
P4-24 LVL Level of Under voltage Error
0431H
Interface：
Default： 160
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： V (rms)
Range： 140 ~ 190
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： When the voltage of DC BUS is lower than P4-24* 2 , the under
voltage alarm occurs.
8-158
400V Series
Address: 0430H
P4-24 LVL Level of Under voltage Error
0431H
Interface：
Default： 320
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： V (rms)
Range： 140 ~ 380
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： When the voltage of DC BUS is lower than P4-24* 2 , the under
voltage alarm occurs.
8-159
P5-xx Motion Setting Parameters
P5-00 ~
Reserved
P5-02
Address: 0506H
P5-03 PDEC Deceleration Time of Auto Protection
0507H
Interface：
Default： 0XEEFEEFF
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0x00000000 ~ 0xFFFFFFFF
Data Size： 32-bit
Settings： The parameter setting is divided into D, C, B, A, W, Z, Y, X

(hexadecimal), including:
1. The deceleration time when activating the auto-protection function:
OVF (DO.0x11, poisiiton command / feedback overflows), CTO
(communication timeout AL020), SPL, SNL, PL, NL
2. Deceleration time of Stop Command: STP
Item D C B A W Z Y X
Function STP PFQS CTO OVF SNL SPL NL PL
Range ０~ F 0~F ０~ F ０~ F ０~ F ０~ F ０~ F ０~ F
0 ~ F is used to indexing the deceleration time of P5-20 ~ P5-35.

For example: If X is set to A, then the deceleration time of PL is
determined by P5-30.
8-160
Address: 0508H
P5-04 HMOV Homing Mode
0509H
Interface：
Default： 0x0000
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0x0000 ~ 0x0128
Data Size： 16-bit
Settings：
X: Homing method
Y: Z pulse setting
Z: Limit setting
W: Reserved
Not in use
8-161
The definition of the setting value is as the followings:

W Z Y X
Reserved Limit Setting Z pulse Setting Homing Method
- 0~1 0~2 0~8
Y = 0: Stop and X = 0: Homing in forward
return to Z direction and regard
pulse PL as the homing
Y = 1: Go forward origin.
to Z pulse X = 1: Homing in reverse
Y = 2: Do not look direction and regard
for Z pulse NL as the homing
origin.
When X = 2: Homing in forward
encounter limit: direction
Z = 0: shows ORGP: OFF > ON, as the
error homing origin
Z = 1: rotates X = 3: Homing in reverse
backwards direction
ORGP: OFF > ON, as the
homing origin
X = 4: Look for Z pulse in
forward direction and
regard it as the homing
origin
X = 5: Look for Z pulse in
reverse direction and
regard it as the homing
origin
X = 6: Homing in forward
direction
ORGP: ON >OFF, as the
homing origin
X = 7: Homing in reverse
direction
ORGP: ON > OFF, as the
homing origin
8-162
W Z Y X
Reserved Limit Setting Z pulse Setting Homing Method
- 0~1 0~2 0~8
When Y = 0: Stop and X = 7: Homing in reverse
encounter limit: return to Z direction
Z = 0: shows pulse ORGP: ON > OFF, as the
error Y = 1: Go forward homing origin
Z = 1: rotates to Z pulse
X = 8: directly define the
backwards Y = 2: Do not look current position as the
for Z pulse origin
Y = 0: Return to Z X = 9: Regard the Hard Stop

pulse as the original point in
Y = 1: Do not look forward direction
for Z pulse X = A: Regard the Hard Stop
as the original point in
reverse direction
Address: 050AH
P5-05 HSPD1 1st Speed Setting of High Speed Homing
050BH
Interface：
Default： 100.0 1000

Control
PR (This has to be set with P5-04)
Mode：
Range： 0.1 ~ 2000.0 1 ~ 20000
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： The 1st speed of high speed homing
HSP1 HSP1
HSP2
ORG ORG
Z HSP2 Z
Pulse Pulse
8-163
Address: 050CH
P5-06 HSPD2 2nd Speed Setting of Low Speed Homing
050DH
Interface：
Default： 20.0 200

Control
PR (This has to be set with P5-04)
Mode：
Range： 0.1 ~ 500.0 1 ~ 5000
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： The 2nd speed setting of low speed homing
Address: 050EH
P5-07■ PRCM Trigger Position Command (PR mode only)
050FH
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0 ~ 1000
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： Set P5-07 to 0 to start homing

Set P5-07 to 1 ~ 63 to execute PR procedure which is the same as
DI.CTRG+POSn
It is prohibited to set P5-07 to 64 ~ 9999 (The value exceeds the valid
range)
Set P5-07 to 1000 to execute Stop Command which is the same as
DI.STP
When reading P5-07:
If the command is incomplete, the drive will read the current command.
If the command is completed, the drive will read the current command
+10000.
If the command is completed and DO.TPOS is ON, reach the motor
position, the drive will read the current command +20000.
8-164
When PR is triggered by DI, the reading value is the same

For example:
Set P5-07 to 3, PR#3 will be triggered.
If the reading value is 3, it means PR #3 is incomplete.
If the reading value is 10003, it means PR#3 is issued completely, but
the motor has not reached the target position yet.
If the reading value is 20003, it means PR#3 is issued completely and
the motor has reached the target position.
Address: 0510H
P5-08 SWLP Forward Software Limit
0511H
Interface：
Default： 2147483647
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： PUU
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： In PR mode, if the motor rotates in forward direction and its command
position exceeds the setting value of P5-08, it will trigger AL283.
Address: 0512H
P5-09 SWLN Reverse Software Limit
0513H
Interface：
Default： -2147483648
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： PUU
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： In PR mode, if the motor rotates in reverse direction and its command
position exceeds the setting value of P5-09, it will trigger AL285.
8-165
Address: 0514H
P5-10★ AYSZ Data Array－Data Size
0515H
Interface： 7.2
Default： -
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： Read-only
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： Data size (N x 32 bits) means size N of data array.
Address: 0516H
P5-11■ AYID Data Array - Address of Reading / Writing
0517H
Interface： 7.2
Default： 0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0 ~ (value set by P5-10 minus 1)
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： The address of specified data when reading or writing data array.
Address: 0518H
P5-12■ AYD0 Data Array－Window #1 for Reading / Writing
0519H
Interface： 7.2
Default： 0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
8-166
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： Window #1 (Array[P5-11++])

When reading the parameter via panel, the value set by P5-11 will not
add 1, but the others will.
Address: 051AH
P5-13■ AYD1 Data Array - Window #2 for Reading / Writing
051BH
Interface： 7.2
Default： 0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： Window #2 (Array[P5-11++])

When reading and writing the parameter via panel or communication,
the value set by P5-11 will add 1. Panel is write-protected.
P5-14 Reserved
8-167
Address: 051EH
P5-15■ PMEM PATH#1 ~ PATH#2 No Data Retained Setting
051FH
Interface：
Default： 0x00000
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0x0000 ~ 0x0011
Data Size： 16-bit
Settings： The parameter is divided into 00YX:

X=0: PATH#1 Data retained
X=1: PATH#1 No data retained
Y=0: PATH#2 Data retained
Y=1: PATH#2 No data retained
Others are reserved
Users can continuously write the new position into the drive through
communication by P5-05.
Address: 0520H
P5-16■ AXEN Axis Position - Motor Encoder
0521H
Interface： 7.3
Default： 0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： PUU (User position unit)
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： Read: The feedback position of the motor encoder, which is the
monitor various V000 + the offset value. (This function is
supported after firmware version V1.015)
Write: Any value can be written into the parameter and will neither
change V000 nor influence the positioning coordinate system. It
is only for observation when adjusting the offset value.
8-168
Address: 0522H
P5-17 AXAU Axis Position - Auxiliary Encoder
0523H
Interface： 7.3
Default： 0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： Pulse number
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： Sends back: pulse counts of the auxiliary encoder (linear scale)
Address: 0524H
P5-18 AXPC Axis Position - Pulse Command
0525H
Interface： 7.3
Default： 0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： Pulse number
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： Sends back: pulse counts of pulse command
8-169
Address: 0526H
P5-19 TBS E-Cam Curve Scaling
0527H
Interface：
Default： 1.000000
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： 0.000001 times, which is 1 / (10^6)
Range： -2147.000000 ~ +2147.000000
Data Size： 32-bit
Format： DEC
Example： 1100000 = 1.1 times
Settings： (It will be provided after firmware version V1.017)

This parameter is used to magnify or minify the E-Cam table without
changing its setting value.
For example, the data in the table is 0,10,20,30,40,20, magnification x
2.000000 equals to the data in the table: 0,20,40,60,80,40,
magnification x 1.000000.
Enable the operation of E-Cam by using the same pulse frequency of
the master axis. Magnifying the magnification will enlarge the route of
E-Cam operation. The speed will be magnified as well.
Note: (1) This parameter can be set anytime, but will be effective only when
pre-engaged → engaged.
(2) A2-L does not support E-Cam function.
Address: 0528H
P5-20 AC0 Acceleration/Deceleration Time (Number #0)
0529H
Interface： 7.10
Default： 200
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： ms
Range： 1 ~ 65500
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： The setting time of acceleration/deceleration in PR mode, which is the

time it needs when accelerating from 0 to 3000 r/min.
8-170
Address: 052AH
052BH
Interface： 7.10
Default： 300
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： ms
Range： 1 ~ 65500
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： Please refer to P5-20 for the setting of acceleration/deceleration time in

PR mode.
Address: 052CH
052DH
Interface： 7.10
Default： 500
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： ms
Range： 1 ~ 65500
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal

PR mode.
Address: 052EH
052FH
Interface： 7.10
Default： 600
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： ms
8-171
Range： 1 ~ 65500
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal

PR mode.
Address: 0530H
0531H
Interface： 7.10
Default： 800
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： ms
Range： 1 ~ 65500
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal

PR mode.
Address: 0532H
0533H
Interface： 7.10
Default： 900
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： ms
Range： 1 ~ 65500
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal

PR mode.
8-172
Address: 0534H
0535H
Interface： 7.10
Default： 1000
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： ms
Range： 1 ~ 65500
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal

PR mode.
Address: 0536H
0537H
Interface： 7.10
Default： 1200
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： ms
Range： 1 ~ 65500
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal

PR mode.
Address: 0538H
0539H
Interface： 7.10
Default： 1500
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： ms
8-173
Range： 1 ~ 65500
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal

PR mode.
Address: 053AH
053BH
Interface： 7.10
Default： 2000
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： ms
Range： 1 ~ 65500
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal

PR mode.
Address: 053CH
053DH
Interface： 7.10
Default： 2500
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： ms
Range： 1 ~ 65500
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal

PR mode.
8-174
Address: 053EH
053FH
Interface： 7.10
Default： 3000
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： ms
Range： 1 ~ 65500
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal

PR mode.
Address: 0540H
0541H
Interface： 7.10
Default： 5000
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： ms
Range： 1 ~ 65500
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal

PR mode.
Address: 0542H
0543H
Interface： 7.10
Default： 8000
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： ms
8-175
Range： 1 ~ 65500
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal

PR mode.
Address: 0544H
0545H
Interface： 7.10
Default： 50
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： ms
Range： 1 ~ 1500
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： The default value of this parameter is smaller (short deceleration time)
and it is used for deceleration time setting of auto protection.
Address: 0546H
0547H
Interface： 7.10
Default： 30
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： ms
Range： 1 ~1200
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： The default value of this parameter is smaller (short deceleration time)
and it is used for deceleration time setting of auto protection.
The default valie of this parameter is smaller and it is used for high-
Note:
speed deceleration and stop.
8-176
Address: 0548H
P5-36 CAST CAPTURE - Start Address of Data Array
0549H
Interface： 7.11.1
Default： 0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0 ~ (value set by P5-10 minus 1)
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： The first data CAPTURE obtained should be saved in the address of
data array.
Note: It is writable only when COMPARE stops (please refer to P5-39).
Address: 054AH
P5-37■ CAAX CAPTURE－Axis Position CNT
054BH
Interface： 7.11.1
Default： 0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： Shows the axis position of CAPTURE pulse source
Note: 1）It is writable only when COMPARE stops (please refer to P5-39).
2）If the source is the main encoder, this parameter is write-protected

and the content is the feedback position of the motor (monitoring
variable 00h).
8-177
Address: 054CH
P5-38■ CANO CAPTURE－The Number of Capturing Times
054DH
Interface： 7.11.1
Default： 1
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 1 ~ (the value set by P5-10 minus the value

set by P5-36)
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： When CAPTURE stops, it means the number of data that expect to
capture (readable and writable).
When CAPTURE activates, it means the number of data that has not
been captured (read-only); every time, when it captures one data, the
value of P5-38 will subtract one. When the value is 0, it means the
capturing is completed.
Note: 1. The number of data which is used by COMPARE, CAPTURE, and
E-Cam cannot exceed 800.
Address: 054EH
P5-39■ CACT CAPTURE－Activate CAP Control
054FH
Interface： 7.11.1
Default： 0x2010
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0x0000 ~ 0xF13F
Data Size： 16-bit
8-178
Settings：
X
Y
Z
U
Low word
X: See the following table

bit 3 2 1 0
After
Execute PR Reset the
capturing the
when position of
X function first data, Activate CAP
finishing the first
CMP is
capturing data
activated.
Starts to
After
capture when
Execute PR capturing
It is invalid it is set to 1.
the first
Description ＃50 after when CMP is After finishing
data, reset
finishing CAP activated. capturing, this
the position
bit becomes 0
coordinate
automatically.
Y: 0－CAPTURE is not working

1－AUX ENC (linear scale) is set as the source
2－PULSE Cmd
3－Main ENC (main encoder)
When the source of CMP is CAP axis, the source Y of CAP cannot
be changed.
Z: 0－NO, 1－NC
U: trigger the minimum interval (Unit: ms)
bit 0: When the value set by P5-38 is bigger than 0, set bit 0 to 1 will
activate CAP function and DO.CAP_OK is OFF. Every time,
when a data is captured, the value of P5-38 will subtract one.
When the P5-38 is 0, it means the capture function is completed,
DO.CAP_OK is ON and bit 0 will be reset to 0 automatically. If
P5-38 equals to 0, set bit 0 to 1 will not activate CAP function.
DO.CAP_OK is OFF and bit 0 will automatically be set to 0. If
CAP function is activated, it cannot set 1 to bit 0. It only can be
written 0 to disable CAP function.
bit 1: If this bit is 1, when capturing the first data, the current position of
CAP axis will be set to the value of P5-76.
bit 2: If this bit is 1, when capturing the first data, CMP will be activated.
(When bit 0 of P5-59 is set to 1 and P5-58 is set to the previous
value.) If CMP has been activated, then this function is invalid.
bit 3: If this bit is 1, as soon as the CAP finished, PR procedure #50 will
be triggered automatically.
8-179
Delay Time After Position Completed (Number Address: 0550H

P5-40 DLY0
#0) 0551H
Interface： 7.10
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： ms
Range： 0 ~ 32767
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： The 1st Delay Time of PR mode

P5-41 DLY1
#1) 0553H
Interface： 7.10
Default： 100
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： ms
Range： 0 ~ 32767
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： The 2nd Delay Time of PR mode
8-180

P5-42 DLY2
#2) 0555H
Interface： 7.10
Default： 200
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： ms
Range： 0 ~ 32767
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： The 3rd Delay Time of PR mode

P5-43 DLY3
#3) 0557H
Interface： 7.10
Default： 400
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： ms
Range： 0 ~ 32767
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： The 4th Delay Time of PR mode

P5-44 DLY4
#4) 0559H
Interface： 7.10
Default： 500
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： ms
8-181
Range： 0 ~ 32767
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Delay Time After Position Completed (Number Address: 055AH

P5-45 DLY5
#5) 055BH
Interface： 7.10
Default： 800
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： ms
Range： 0 ~ 32767
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Delay Time After Position Completed (Number Address: 055CH

P5-46 DLY6
#6) 055DH
Interface： 7.10
Default： 1000
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： ms
Range： 0 ~ 32767
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
8-182
Delay Time After Position Completed (Number Address: 055EH

P5-47 DLY7
#7) 055FH
Interface： 7.10
Default： 1500
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： ms
Range： 0 ~ 32767
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal

P5-48 DLY8
#8) 0561H
Interface： 7.10
Default： 2000
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： ms
Range： 0 ~ 32767
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal

P5-49 DLY9
#9) 0563H
Interface： 7.10
Default： 2500
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： ms
8-183
Range： 0 ~ 32767
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： The10th Delay Time of PR mode

P5-50 DLY10
#10) 0565H
Interface： 7.10
Default： 3000
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： ms
Range： 0 ~ 32767
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal

P5-51 DLY11
#11) 0567H
Interface： 7.10
Default： 3500
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： ms
Range： 0 ~ 32767
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
8-184

P5-52 DLY12
#12) 0569H
Interface： 7.10
Default： 4000
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： ms
Range： 0 ~ 32767
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Delay Time After Position Completed (Number Address: 056AH

P5-53 DLY13
#13) 056BH
Interface： 7.10
Default： 4500
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： ms
Range： 0 ~ 32767
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Delay Time After Position Completed (Number Address: 056CH

P5-54 DLY14
#14) 056DH
Interface： 7.10
Default： 5000
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： ms
8-185
Range： 0 ~ 32767
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Delay Time After Position Completed (Number Address: 056EH

P5-55 DLY15
#15) 056FH
Interface： 7.10
Default： 5500
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： ms
Range： 0 ~ 32767
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Address: 0570H
P5-56 CMST COMPARE－Start Address of Data Array
0571H
Interface： 7.11.2
Default： 0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0 ~ (The value of P5-10 minus 1)
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： The first COMPARE data is saved in the address of data array.
Note: It is writable only when COMPARE stops (please refer to P5-59).
8-186
Address: 0572H
P5-57■ CMAX COMPARE－Axis Position
0573H
Interface： 7.11.2
Default： 0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： The axis position of COMPARE pulse source is displayed here.

It is writable only when COMPARE stops (please refer to P5-59).
Note: 1）It is write-protected when the source is Capture axis.
2） When the source is the main encoder, P5-57 is also write-

protected. The pulse revolution is determined by parameter P1-46.
When P5-59.Y is set to the main encoder, this parameter is set to
the motor feedback position (monitoring variable 00h). If this
parameter is not the same as the motor feedback position due to
homing or reset by CAP function, the user can set P5-59.Y = 0 and
then P5-59.Y = 3. In this way, this parameter will be reset to the
motor feedback position.
Address: 0574H
P5-58■ CMNO COMPARE－Compare Amount
0575H
Interface： 7.11.2
Default： 1
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 1 ~ (the value set by P5-10 minus the value

set by P5-56)
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
8-187
Settings： When COMPARE stops, it means the number of data that expect to
compare (readable and writable).
When COMPARE activates, it means the number of data that has not
been compared (read-only); every time, when it compares one data,
the value of P5-38 will subtract one. When the value is 0, it means the
comparing is completed.
Address: 0576H
P5-59 CMCT COMPARE－Activate CMP Control
0577H
Interface： 7.11.2
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0x00010000 ~ 0x0FFF313F
Data Size： 32-bit
8-188
Settings：
X
Y CBA: duration
of pulse output
Z
U Reserved
Low bit High bit
X: See the following table.

bit 3 2 1 0
After When
finishing finishing
CMP is
X function comparing, comparing, Cycle mode
activated
the counter CAP is
returns to 0. activated.
Starts to
compare
As soon as
when this
the last data It is invalid
bit is set to
Description is compared, when CAP is Never end
1. It returns
P5-57 is set activated.
to 0 when
to 0.
finishing
comparing.
Y: 0－When selecting CAPTURE AXES, the source of CAP cannot be

changed.
1－AUX ENC (linear scale) is set as the source
2－PULSE Cmd
3－Main ENC (main encoder)
Z: 0－NO, 1－NC outputs the polarity
U: See the table below:
bit 15 14 13 12
U function - - - Trigger PR
When this bit is set to

1, PR#45 will be
triggered after the last
Description - - - compare is completed.
It is provided in V1.038
sub09 (or the later
version)
CBA: Output the pulse length; Unit: 1 ms
8-189
bit 0: When the value of P5-58 is more than 0, setting bit 0 to 1 will
activate CMP. When comparing one data, the value of P5-58 will
subtract 1. When P5-58 is set to 0, the comparing is completed
and returns to 0. If P5-58 is 0, setting bit 0 to 1 will not do any
comparing and return to 0 automatically. If bit 0 has already been
set to 1, it is not allowed to write 1 as the new value into the
parameter. But it is ok to write 0 to disable CMP.
bit 1: If this bit is 1, P5-58 will be reset after comparing the last data.
Then, start from the first data again. The cycle will never end and
bit 0 is always 1.
bit 2: If this bit is 1, CAP will be activated after comparing the last data
(Set bit 0 of P5-39 to 1 and reset P5-38 to the previous value). If
CAP has already been activated, this function is invalid.
bit 3: If this bit is 1, set the counter (P5-57) to 0 after comparing the last
data. For example, if the comparing data is set to 3000 (one data
in total), the default value of the counter (P5-57) is 0. It is
expected to input 4000 pulse. When it reaches the 3000th pulse,
the CMP is completed and P5-57 returns to 0. When the pulse
reaches 4000, P5-57=1000. (No accumulative error)
Address: 0578H
P5-60 POV0 Target Speed Setting #0
0579H
Interface： 7.10
Default： 20.0 200

Control
PR
Mode：
Range： 0.1 ~ 6000.0 1 ~ 60000
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Example： 15 = 15 r/min 150 = 15 r/min
Settings： The 1st target speed of PR mode
8-190
Address: 057AH
057BH
Interface： 7.10
Default： 50.0 500

Control
PR
Mode：
Range： 0.1 ~ 6000.0 1 ~ 60000
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Example： 1= 1 r/min 10 = 1r/min
Settings： The 2nd target speed of PR mode
Address: 057CH
057DH
Interface： 7.10
Default： 100.0 1000

Control
PR
Mode：
Range： 0.1 ~ 6000.0 1 ~ 60000
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Example： 1= 1 r/min 10 = 1 r/min
Settings： The 3rd target speed of PR mode
8-191
Address: 057EH
057FH
Interface： 7.10
Default： 200.0 2000

Control
PR
Mode：
Range： 0.1 ~ 6000.0 1 ~ 60000
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： The 4th target speed of PR mode
Address: 0580H
0581H
Interface： 7.10
Default： 300.0 3000

Control
PR
Mode：
Range： 0.1 ~ 6000.0 1 ~ 60000
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： The 5 target speed of PR mode

th
8-192
Address: 0582H
0583H
Interface： 7.10
Default： 500.0 5000

Control
PR
Mode：
Range： 0.1 ~ 6000.0 1 ~ 60000
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Address: 0584H
0585H
Interface： 7.10
Default： 600.0 6000

Control
PR
Mode：
Range： 0.1 ~ 6000.0 1 ~ 60000
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
8-193
Address: 0586H
0587H
Interface： 7.10
Default： 800.0 8000

Control
PR
Mode：
Range： 0.1 ~ 6000.0 1 ~ 60000
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Address: 0588H
0589H
Interface： 7.10
Default： 1000.0 10000

Control
PR
Mode：
Range： 0.1 ~ 6000.0 1 ~ 60000
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
8-194
Address: 058AH
058BH
Interface： 7.10
Default： 1300.0 13000

Control
PR
Mode：
Range： 0.1 ~ 6000.0 1 ~ 60000
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Address: 058CH
058DH
Interface： 7.10
Default： 1500.0 15000

Control
PR
Mode：
Range： 0.1 ~ 6000.0 1 ~ 60000
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
8-195
Address: 058EH
058FH
Interface： 7.10
Default： 1800.0 18000

Control
PR
Mode：
Range： 0.1 ~ 6000.0 1 ~ 60000
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Address: 0590H
0591H
Interface： 7.10
Default： 2000.0 20000

Control
PR
Mode：
Range： 0.1 ~ 6000.0 11 ~ 60000
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
8-196
Address: 0592H
0593H
Interface： 7.10
Default： 2300.0 23000

Control
PR
Mode：
Range： 0.1 ~ 6000.0 1 ~ 60000
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Address: 0594H
0595H
Interface： 7.10
Default： 2500.0 25000

Control
PR
Mode：
Range： 0.1 ~ 6000.0 1 ~ 60000
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
8-197
Address: 0596H
0597H
Interface： 7.10
Default： 3000.0 30000

Control
PR
Mode：
Range： 0.1 ~ 6000.0 1 ~ 60000
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Address: 0598H
P5-76★ CPRS CAPTURE－First Position Reset Data
0599H
Interface： 7.10
Default： 0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -1073741824 ~ +1073741823
Data Size： 32-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： Please refer to the description of P5-39 X1.
8-198
The Position of Synchronous Capture Axis Address: 059AH

P5-77■ CSAX
(CAP SYNC AXES) 059BH
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： The position of this axis will synchronize with CAP signal. That is to
say, when activating CAP every two times, the motor moving distance
of this axis is the value of P5-78. (There is no accumulative error and
only in single-way operation) The synchronous capture axis can be the
source of Master.
The Interval Pulse Number between Each Address: 059CH

P5-78 CSDS
Synchronous Capture Axis 059DH
Interface：
Default： 100
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： Pulse
Range： 10 ~ +100000000
Data Size： 32-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： It is the moving distance of synchronous capture axis between two

CAP actions.
The new value can be written into the parameter not until CAP is
disabled (P5-39, X0=0).
8-199
Error Pulse Number of Synchronous Capture Address: 059EH

P5-79■ CSDS
Axis 059FH
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： Pulse unit of capture axis
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： When synchronous capture axis is operating, the synchronous error

should be 0. This parameter shows this error value. The followings are
its concept:
Synchronous Error ＝ Output value of synchronous axis－Setting
value of synchronous axis
＝ the accumulative amount of P5-77－(P5-78 x
Capturing number of times)
When capturing the data, the synchronous axis works normally. This
parameter updates once.
This parameter can be written into as well. It indicates the offset of
synchronous master. When the synchronous capture axis is regarded
as the master of flying shear, modify this parameter can deviate the
cutting position to the left/right.
Max. Correction Rate of Synchronous Capture Address: 05A0H

P5-80 CSDS
Axis 05A1H
Interface：
Default： 10
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： %
Range： 0 ~ 90
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
8-200
Settings： This parameter limits the percentage (%) of synchronous adjustment.

Correction rate
= pulse number output by synchronous axis
/pulse number input by synchronous axis (100 − P5
− 80)% < 𝑐𝑜𝑟𝑟𝑒𝑐𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛𝑟𝑎𝑡𝑒 < (100 + 𝑃5 − 80)%
The bigger correction rate, the faster the synchronous error becomes
0. However, the speed changing will be more severe.
The smaller correction rate, the slower the synchronous error becomes
0. However, the speed changing will be smoother.
In the application of flying shear, after adjusting the synchronous error,
P5-79: the bigger parameter value will reduce the time the slave axis
goes to the desired position. However, the speed is not synchronized.
Address: 05A2H
P5-81 ECHD E-CAM: Start Address of Data Array
05A3H
Interface： 7.11
Default： 100
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0 ~ (800－P5-82)
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： The first data of E-Cam table is saved in the address of data array.
Note: 1. Version V1.015 (before): This parameter cannot be modified when

E-Cam is activated (P5-88, X = 1).
2. Version V1.015 (included or after): This parameter can be set
anytime, but will be effective only when pre-engaged → engaged.
3. A2-L does not support this function.
Address: 05A4H
P5-82 ECMN E-CAM: Area Number N (at least >=5)
05A5H
Interface： 7.11
Default： 5
Control
PR
Mode：
8-201
Unit： -
Range： 5 ~ 720, must < = (P5-10－P5-81)
And P5-82 x P5-84 ＜＝ 2147483647
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： It means the E-Cam curve is divided into N area, and the table should
include N+1 data.
Note: 1. This parameter can be wrote when E-Cam stops (Please refer
toP5-88, X=0).
Address: 05A6H
P5-83 ECMM E-CAM: Master Gear Ratio Setting M
05A7H
Interface： 7.11
Default： 1
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 1 ~ 32767
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： When receiving pulse number P of the Master, E-Cam will rotate M
circle, which means the M cycle of the E-Cam table.
Note: 1. This parameter can be wrote when E-Cam stops (Please refer
toP5-88, X=0).
Address: 05A8H
P5-84 ECMP E-CAM: Master Gear Ratio Setting P
05A9H
Interface： 7.11
Default： 3600
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
8-202
Range： 10 ~ 1073741823,
and P5-82 x P5-83 ＜＝ P5-84
and P5-82 x P5-84 ＜＝ 2147483647
Data Size： 32-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： When receiving pulse number P of the Master, E-Cam will rotate M
circle, which means the M cycle of the E-Cam table.
Note: 1. This parameter can be written when E-Cam stops (Please refer
toP5-88, X=0).
2. Version V1.018 (included or after): This parameter can be modified
anytime, and has no limit that mentioned above.
Address: 05AAH
P5-85 ECME E-CAM: Number of Area
05ABH
Interface： 7.11
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0 ~ (P5-82－1)
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： The area number of E-cam when E-cam engaged.

Address: 05ACH
P5-86■ ECAX E-CAM: Master Axis Position
05ADH
Interface： 7.11
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
8-203
Data Size： 32-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： The position counter of the E-Cam Master
Note: 1. This parameter can be written when E-Cam stops (Please refer to
P5-88, X=0).
Address: 05AEH
P5-87 PLED E-CAM: Lead Pulse
05AFH
Panel / Software Communication 7.11
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -1073741824 ~ +1073741823
Data Size： 32-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： When the engaging condition (P5-88.Z) of E-cam is satisfied, the pulse
number from the master has to exceed the setting value of this
parameter, so that E-cam is fully engaged.
In other words, E-cam engages after neglecting the lead pulse
specified by this parameter.
If the symbol of this parameter is +, it means the received forward pulse
is regarded as the lead pulse.
If the symbol of this parameter is - , it means the received reverse
pulse is regarded as the lead pulse.
Address: 05B0H
P5-88■ ECON E-CAM: Activate E-Cam Control
05B1H
Interface： 7.11
Control
PR
Mode：
8-204
Unit： -
Range： 0x00000000 ~ 0x203FF257

Data
32-bit
Size：
Settings： The format of this parameter: (High word h) S0BA：(Low word L) UZYX
Definition of each column is as follows:
 X: E-Cam command
Description of each bit:
X3 - -
X2 P5-19 is It is available after V1.038 sub48:
effective 0: P5-19 is effective after the next engage.
immediately
1: P5-19 is effective immediately.
X1 E-Cam does It is available after V1.038 sub29:
not disengage 0: E-Cam does not work
when Servo
1: When E-Cam stops because of alarm or Servo
OFF
Off, it can keep in engaged status. When re-
servo on, E-cam can operate directly. It can
return to the correct position by macro #D.
X0 E-Cam is 0: E-Cam is disabled
enabled 1: E-Cam is enabled (E-CAM is enabled while
other functions cannot be modified.)
 Y: Command source
0: CAP axis
1: AUX ENC
2: Pulse Cmd
3: PR command
4: Time Axis (1 ms)
5: Synchronous Capture Axis (P5-77)
6: Analog channel 1 (virtual axis, Unit: 1M pulse/s /10V)
 Z: Engaging Time (No multiple choice)
0: Immediately
1: DI.CAM ON
2: Any one of the Capture
8-205
 U: Disengaging Condition (2, 4 and 6 cannot be selected at the

same time)
Action after
U Disengaged Condition
disengaged
0 Never disengaged －
1 Disengage after DI.CAM is OFF In STOP status
Master axis receives the pulse number
which is set by P5-89 and stops
2
immediately.
(The symbol represents the direction)
(It is available after firmware version
V1.009) In STOP status
Same as 2, the E-cam starts to
6 decelerate when disengaging. It is
suitable for the application of calling the
next PR position command right after
disengaged.
(It is available after firmware version Back to the pre-engage
V1.009) status
4
Master axis exceeds the setting value of The lead pulse is P5-
P5-89 (Sign indicates the direction) 92
When U = 1, 2 or 6:
Set X to 0
Disable E-Cam after it is disengaged.
8 When U = 4:
To avoid jittering when it returns to lead N/A
status.
Note: (1) The servo is Off, when ALM or forward/reverse limit occur or PR is
doing homing procedure, it disengages (P5-88, X = 0)
 BA: When disengaging condition is satisfied (P5-88, U＝2, 4, 6), a
PR 00 ~ 63 (hexadecimal; 00 means no action) will automatically be
executed.
 S:Shows the engage status (Read-only, the setting is invalid)
0: Stop
1: Engage status
2: Pre-engage status
(2) A2-L does not support E-cam function.
8-206
Address: 05B2H
P5-89 ECRD E-CAM: Information of Disengaging Time
05B3H
Interface： 7.11
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -1073741824 ~ +1073741823
Data Size： 32-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： (Please refer to the definition of P5-88 U setting value 2)
Address: 05B4H
P5-90 CMAP E-CAM: AREA No.＋The Point of DO ON
05B5H
Interface： 7.11
Default： 270
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： Degree (It was changed after firmware

V1.009)
Range： 0 ~ 360
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： When E-cam is engaged, set the start angle of DO output (DO.
CAM_AREA).
8-207
Address: 05B6H
P5-91 CMAN E-CAM: AREA No. - The Point of DO OFF
05B7H
Interface： 7.11
Default： 360
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： Degree (It was changed after firmware

V1.009)
Range： 0 ~ 360
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： When E-cam is engaged, set the end angle of DO output (DO.
CAM_AREA).
Note: A2-L does not support E-cam function.
Address: 05B8H
P5-92 PLED E-CAM: Pre-engaged Time of Each Cycle
05B9H
Interface： 7.11
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： Version V1.006 sub04 (included or after):

This parameter goes with the selection of P5-88, U=4 (E-cam will
disengage if it exceeds the moving distance):
After disengaging, it does not enter the Stop status but pre-engaged
status. The lead pulse is determined by this parameter.
8-208
The pulse number sent by the Master must exceed the setting value of
this parameter so that E-cam will engage again.
In other words, E-cam will engage not until the lead pulse is ignored.
If the symbol of this parameter is ＋, it means the received positive
pulse will be regarded as the lead pulse.
If the symbol of this parameter is －, it means the received negative
pulse will be regarded as the lead pulse.
Note: A2-L does not support E-cam function.
Motion Control Macro Command: Command Address: 05BAH

P5-93 CSDS
Parameter # 4 05BBH
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -100000000 ~ +100000000
Data Size： 32-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： Before issuing the macro command, the relevant parameters # 4 must
be set in advance.
The function of the parameter is determined by the macro command.
Not every macro command has its relevant parameters.
Motion Control Macro Command: Command Address: 05BCH

P5-94 CSDS
Parameter # 3 05BDH
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32-bit
Format： Decimal
8-209
be set in advance.
Motion Control Macro Command: Command Address: 05BEH

P5-95 CSDS
Parameter # 2 05BFH
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32-bit
Format： Decimal
be set in advance.
Motion Control Macro Command: Command Address: 05C0H

P5-96 CSDS
Parameter # 1 05C1H
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32-bit
Format： Decimal
be set in advance.
8-210
Motion Control Macro Command: Issue Address: 05C2H

P5-97■ CSDS
Command / Executing Result 05C3H
Interface：
Default： 0x0000
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0x0000~0x099F
Data Size： 16-bit
Settings： Write-in: It is used to issue the macro command (0x0CBA)

Read: It is used to examine the execution result of macro command (If
success, the result will be sent back to 0x1CBA).
If the command issues 0001, 0x1001 will be sent back when success;
and 0xFxxx when failed (depending on the command description).
If issuing the command that is not supported, the failure code 0xF001
will be sent back.
The provided command code is as the followings.

The following macros are available from Version V1.027 (included):
Command code Motion parameter protection: password setting, protection
0x0003 activation
Macro parameters P5-93 = parameter write-protected level (0 ~ 1) (0: no
protection, 1: enable protection)
P5-94 = protection level of data array (-1 to 7)
0: password protection of all data array
1: password protection of data array #100 ~ #799
7: no password protection of data array
P5-95 = set new password (1 ~ 16777215)
P5-96 = confirm new password (1 ~ 16777215)
Note: P5-95 must be equal to P5-96 to be successfully set and the
password must be set within the allowable range.
This function can be executed before activating the function of parameter
protection.
If the protection function is activated, when repeat execute this function, the failure
code will be sent back.
Failure code Protection function has been activated and cannot be set
8-211
0xF031 repeat.
Failure code Wrong password setting: P5-95 is not equal to P5-96.
0xF032
Failure code Password setting exceeds the allowable range (1 ~
0xF033 16777215).
Failure code The protection level, P5-94 exceeds the allowable range (-1
0xF034 ~ 7).
Failure code The protection level, P5-93 exceeds the allowable range (0 ~
0xF035 1).
Success code
0x1003
The following macros are available from version V1.026 (included):
Command code
Motion parameter protection: unlock the protection
0x0004
Macro parameters P5-96= enter the password (1 ~ 16777215)
This function can be executed when activating the function of parameter protection.
If the protection function is unlocked, repeat execute this function will sent back the
failure code.
If entering the wrong password, failure code Ennn will be sent back. nnn means the
rest decode number. It will be misused one number after one failure. When the
number is 0, it will be locked for good.
Failure code
Protection function is unlocked and it cannot repeat unlock.
0xF041
Failure code The password setting exceed the allowable range (1 ~
0xF043 16777215)
Failure code The number of times of entering wrong password exceeds
0xF044 the limit: Lock for good.
Reset the parameter (P2-08=10) to unlock it is the only
method. However, all parameter will return to the default
value.
Failure code Incorrect password setting: Failed to unlock.
0xEnnn nnn: the rest decode number. It will be minuses one number
after one failure. When the number is 0, it will be locked for
good.
Success code
0x1004
The following macros are available from version 1.024 (included):
Command code Build up E-Cam table: flying shear, including synchronous

0x0006 area (7 areas)
General P5-81= Address of table (Data array)
parameters P5-82 = 7 (This macro is fixed to 7 areas)
P1-44, P1-45 = E-gear ratio (it has to be setup in advance)
Macro parameters P5-94 = A (Deceleration ratio: numerator) x C (Number of
cutter)
8-212
P5-95= B (Deceleration ratio: denominator)

P5-96= 1000000 x R x V
Among them:
R (cutting ratio) = L (cutting length)／ℓ (Girth of cutter)
Allowable cutting ratio: (0.3 ~ 2.5) times
Ｖ(Speed factor) = target cutting speed／speed of delivered
product
V=1.0: When cutting, the speed of cutter is the same as the
product
V=1.1: When cutting, the speed of cutter is 10% faster than
the product
V=0.9: When cutting, the speed of cutter is 10% slower than
the product
…, and so forth.
This macro will calculate the data of E-Cam table according to the above-
mentioned parameters, and store in data array which designated by P5-
81.Parameters listed above are related to E-Cam table calculation. Please correctly
setup those parameters before executing this macro.
After this macro is executed, if the above parameters have been changed, it has to
recreate the E-Cam table and this macro will have to be executed again. Data in E-
Cam table will be changed after executing this macro; thus, do not execute it when
E-Cam is in engaged status.
In E-Cam application, parameters, such as P5-83 and P5-84 that are not related to
this macro are not listed here. Users could setup parameters according to the real
application. Please refer to Chapter 7, sections about E-Cam.
After executing this macro, E-Cam table will not be saved to EEPROM
automatically.
Failure code
When creating the table, E-Cam is in engaged status.
0xF061
Failure code
The setting value of P5-94 exceeds the range: (1 ~ 65535)
0xF062
Failure code
The setting value of P5-95 exceeds the range: (1 ~ 65535)
0xF063
Failure code The setting value of P5-96 exceeds the range: (300000 ~
0xF064 2500000)
Failure code The address specified by P5-81 is too long and the space of
0xF065 data array is not enough.
Failure code The setting value of P5-82 should be set to 7. Otherwise the
0xF066 command cannot be executed.
Failure code Data calculation error. Please decrease the setting value of
0xF067 (P1-44, P1-45) and keep the proportion will do.
8-213
Command code
Create E-Cam table: Flying cut (multi-degree of freedom)
0x0007
General P5-81 = Address of table (data array)
parameters P5-82 = N (30~72) (Area number of E-Cam)
P1-44, P1-45 = E-gear ration (has to be setup first)
Macro parameters P5-93.H16 (high 16-bit) = S
P5-93.L16 (low 16-bit) = W
Among them:
S (curve level) = 1 ~ 4 levels
W (degree of waiting area) = -1 ~ 170 degrees
W = -1 is available in firmware version V1.038 (sub29)
(or the later version)
P5-94 = Y (degree of synchronous area) = 0 ~ 330 degrees
P5-95.H16 (high 16-bit) = A x C
P5-95.L16 (low 16-bit) = B
Among them:
A (Deceleration ratio: numerator), C (Number of cutter)
B (Deceleration ratio: denominator)
P5-96 = 1000000 x R x V
Among them:
R (cutting ratio) = L (target cutting length)／ ℓ (Length of
cutter)
Allowable cutting ratio: (0.05 ~ 5.0) times
V (speed factor) = target cutting speed／speed of delivered
product
V=1.0: When cutting, the speed of cutter is the same as the
product
V=1.1: When cutting, the speed of cutter is 10% faster than
the product
V=0.9: When cutting, the speed of cutter is 10% slower
than the product
…, and so forth.
Note:
Ｗ´ = 180 + 360/N – 360/R + Y/2
When
1. P5-93.L16 ＜Ｗ´, E-cam table is in error (failure code F07Ah)
2. P5-93.L16 = Ｗ´, the initial speed is 0 in E-Cam table
3. P5-93.L16 ＞Ｗ´, the initial speed > 0 in E-Cam table
This macro will calculate the data of E-Cam table according to the above-
mentioned parameters, and store in data array which designated by P5-
81.Parameters listed above are related to E-Cam table calculation. Please
correctly setup those parameters before executing this macro.
After this macro is executed, if the above parameters have been changed, it has
to recreate the E-Cam table and this macro will have to be executed again. Data
in E-Cam table will be changed after executing this macro; thus, do not execute
8-214
it when E-Cam is in engaged status.

In E-Cam application, parameters, such as P5-83 and P5-84 that are not related
to this macro are not listed here. Users could setup parameters according to the
real application. Please refer to Chapter 7, sections about
After executing this macro, E-Cam table will not be saved to EEPROM
automatically.
Failure code
When creating the table, E-Cam is in engaged status.
0xF071
Failure code P5-94 degree of synchronous area exceeds the range: (0 ~
0xF072 330)
Failure code
P5-93.H16 curve level exceeds the range: (1 ~ 4)
0xF073
Failure code P5-93.L16 degree of waiting area exceeds the range: (1 ~
0xF074 170)
Failure code The setting value of P5-96 exceeds the range: (50000 ~
0xF075 5000000)
Failure code
P5-82 area number of E-Cam exceeds the range: (30 ~ 72)
0xF076
Failure code The address specified by P5-81 is too long and the space
0xF077 of data array is not enough.
Failure code Data calculation error. Please decrease the setting value of
0xF078 (P1-44, P1-45) and keep the proportion will do.
Failure code Acceleration degree is too small, and then please
0xF079 decreases the value of waiting area (W), synchronous area
(Y) or curve level (S).
Failure code Waiting area is too small, then please increase the value of
0xF07A acceleration area (W) or decrease the value of
synchronous area (Y)
The following macros are available from version V1.042 sub09 (included):
Command code
E-Cam curve scaling (P5-19) is effective immediately
0x0008
Macro parameters N/A
This macro can be triggered when E-cam is engaged. P5-19 is effective
immediately.
Usually, E-Cam scaling is only changed by P5-19 when it entering the engaged
condition (see transition 3). It cannot be changed in engaged condition. E-Cam
scaling only can be changed after one E-Cam cycle so as to make sure the E-Cam
can return to the original position without accumulative error.
Engaged: 1 Stop: 0
5
4 1
3 2
P5-19 is loading into
E-Cam scaling.
Lead: 2
8-215
In application, two ways can change the setting of E-Cam curve scaling.
1. P5-88.X2 = 1: When E-Cam is engaged, setup this bit at the same time.
Function of P5-19 will be enabled immediately.
2. Use macro#8: Every time when this macro command is triggered, function of
P5-19 will be enabled. However, if the value of P5-19 is changed and this
macro is not triggered, function of P5-19 will not be enabled. This macro
command has to be triggered again.
Failure code N/A
Command code Change position X, where E-Cam is engaged: E-Cam

0x000C disengages after rotating one cycle at forward direction.
General
N/A
parameters
P5-93 = New engaged position X. Unit: pulse number of
master axis.
Macro parameters
Monitoring variable 062(3Eh): It displays the current engaged
position (X) of master axis.
This macro command can change the engaged position even when E-Cam is
engaged. It will automatically calculate the residual engaged length. E-Cam will
disengage after rotating one cycle at forward direction. Users have to set P5-88.U
to 2, 4, and 6; otherwise, the E-cam will not disengage.
E-Cam will disengage when alarm occurs or the power supply is cut off. If users
desire E-Cam to re-engage at the last disengaged position and continue its
operation, it is recommended to record the disengaged position (X) and resume the
operation by this macro command. Please note that when E-Cam is disengaged,
the servo position might slightly shift and therefore cause position error when E-
Cam re-engages again.
The Engaged direction is in forward direction (Master axis operates at forward
direction):
When E-Cam operates one cycle, the pulse
number of master axis is (P5-84/P5-83)
Slave Axis
Position (Y)
Master Axis
Position (X)
Assign new
position P5-93 Residual Engaged Length
(the value will be
calculated automatically)
Note: When using this macro command, it would be better to execute this command before
operate the master axis.
Failure code When executing this macro command, E-Cam is not in
0xF0C1 engaged status.
To modify the engaged position only when E-Cam is
8-216
engaged.
Failure code The setting value of P5-93 is in error. The value cannot less
0xF0C2 than 0. It should > = 0.
Failure code The setting value of P5-93 is in error. The value has to less
0xF0C3 than the value of (P5-84 / P5-83)
Command code Calculate the error between E-Cam and indexing

0x000D coordinates for PR positioning.
General
N/A
Parameters
Macro Parameters P5-93.Low_Word = DCBA: UZYX (8 digits,
HEXADECIMAL)
YX (PR number) = 0~0x3F (it is invalid when the value is
set to 0)
UZ: The value has to be set to 0.
BA (Function of P5-95):
0 (Use avoid point)，
1 (Use available forward rate, V1.038 sub53)
DC (Inhibit reverse rotation):
0 (invalid),
1(Inhibit reverse rotation, V1.038 sub53)
P5-95: Avoid point (cannot pass this point) = 0 ~ 100 (%) of
E-Cam cycle or available forward rate 0 ~ 100 (%)
Monitoring variable 091(5Bh): It displays the current indexing coordinate position
(PUU)
When E-Cam is engaged, and the motor is stopped because of Servo Off or
alarm occurs, it would cause position error between the actual position and E-
Cam position. After re-servo On, this macro command can be used to calculate
the correction value and write the value into the specified PR for incremental
positioning. So that the motor can return to the ideal E-Cam position.
When using this macro command:
1. P5-88.X1 = 1 to make E-Cam keep engaging when servo off and continue to
calculate E-Cam position.
2. The height of indexing coordinate and E-Cam coordinate should be the
same: P2-52= ECAM_H (The moving distance when E-cam operates one
cycle)
3. E-Cam table scaling (P5-19) must be 1.0 time.
4. When E-Cam is engaged for the first time, 0 degree of E-cam should aim at
0 degree of indexing coordinate.
5. This macro command only can be applicable on periodic cycle and when
every cycle starts from the same position.
8-217
A cycle of E-Cam A cycle of indexing
E-Cam_H
Slave axis
P2-52
position (Y)
0°
0° 360°
E-Cam table Indexing coordinates
Note 1: ECAM_H (height of E-Cam table) = E-Cam table (last point - first points)
Note 2: Indexing coordinate = (absolute coordinates／P2-52) take remainder.
Note 3: Use PR command for incremental positioning control.
When motor moves from the current position to the target position, it can operate
at forward or reverse direction. Due to the cyclic operation, the motor will travel
to the specified position either at forward or reverse direction. However, the
moving distance is different between both. Uses avoid point to plan the timing of
forward and reverse rotation.
＊Avoid point: the point that cannot be passed by the planned PR.
E-Cam current position
E-Cam avoid point Θ, which is set by P5-95
0° Θ = 360° x P5-95%
Cannot pass
Actual traveling distance
Failure code E-Cam is not engaged when executing this macro

0xF0D1 command. E-Cam should be engaged.
Failure code The value of P5-93.YX (PR number) exceeds the range: 1
0xF0D2 ~ 0x3F
Failure code The value of P5-95 (available forward rate) exceeds the
0xF0D3 range: 0 ~ 100 (%)
Failure code The position correction value does not exist. This macro
0xF0D5 command might be triggered twice.
Failure code
When re-servo On, E-cam is not engaged.
0xF0D6
Failure code The height (Y axis) of E-Cam table is not equal to the value
0xF0D7 of P2-52.
Failure code
P5-19 is not equal to 1
0xF0D8
Failure code
P5-93.BA, P5-95 exceeds the range: 0 ~ 1
0xF0D9
Failure code The setting value of P5-93.DC (reverse inhibit) exceeds the
8-218
0xF0DA range: 0 ~ 1
Failure code The function of reverse inhibit has failed. Do not use macro
0xF0DB command #D, #10h consecutively.
The following macros are provided after version V1.038 sub26 (included):
Command code Perform E-Cam alignment immediately and write the

0x000E correction value into the specified PR.
Macro parameters P5-93 = DCBA：UZYX (8 digits, HEXADECIMAL)
YX (PR number) = 0 ~ 0x3F, it is invalid when the value is set
to 0.
UZ (Max. alignment correction rate) = 0 ~ 0x64 (%)
A (Trigger the specified PR directly) = 1: On, 0: Off
DCB = has to be set to 0
P5-94 (DI delay time compensation) = -25000 ~ +25000;
Unit: usec.
P5-95 (available forward rate) = 0 ~ 100 (%)
P5-96 (target position of alignment Ｘ); Unit: pulse number of
master axis = 0 ~ (P5-84/P5-83) – 1.
Monitoring variable 062(3Eh): It displays the current engaged position of master
axis (X)
This macro command can move the engaged position to the alignment target
position (X) when E-Cam is engaged, and write the alignment correction value into
the specified PR.
During E-Cam operation (When E-Cam is engaged), if desire to quickly align the E-
cam position to the mechanical referral point, sensor can be used to trigger DI.EVx
to execute this macro command.
After E-Cam alignment is completed, the engaged position will move to the new
position. The excess or not enough moving distance after E-Cam operates one
cycle is called alignment correction value. It will be written into PR specified by P5-
93.YX. PR incremental command can be used to compensate this value so that the
slave axis position will remain and offset the phase of E-Cam to align the referral
position of machine. For some applications, set value of P5-93.YX to 0 will do.
Please note that PR can be executed only when triggering the host controller. This
macro command writes data only.
Pulse number of master axis after
rotating a cycle: (P5-84/P5-83) = L
Slave axis Alignment

position (Y) correction value
= Y_Diff
Master axis position (X)

Current
engaged Alignment target
position position P5-96
＊P5-93.UZ is able to limit the max. correction rate. The alignment target position
★ will be different from P5-96.
｜ a ｜ alignment target position★ – current engaged position｜ / L <= P5-93.UZ %
＊DI time delay compensation can be set via P5-94, it can correct the error caused
8-219
by different speed of motion.
When E-Cam moves from current position to the target one, it can rotate at forward
or reverse position. Due to the cyclic operation, it can reach the target position
either at forward or reverse direction. However, the moving distance between both
is usually different. Use available forward rate to plan the timing of forward and
reverse rotation.
＊Available forward rate: The available max. proportion of forward path
Max. forward rotation limit. Counterclockwise

represents forward direction in the figure
Target position is within the range;
going trip is at forward direction
going trip is at reverse direction
Available forward Available forward rate

rate = 0% (0°), = 75%, the available
reverse path only max. path is +270°
Available forward rate Available forward

= 25%, the available rate = 100% (360°),
max. path is +90° forward path only
Available forward rate =

50%, the available max.
path is +180°
Failure code When executing this macro, E-Cam is not engaged. E-Cam
0xF0E1 has to engage to execute alignment correction.
Failure code The setting value of P5-93.YX (PR number) exceeds the
0xF0E2 range: 0 ~ 0x003F
Failure code The setting value of P5-93.UZ (Max. alignment correction
0xF0E3 rate) exceeds the range: 0~0x0064 (%)
Failure code The setting value of P5-94 (DI delay time compensation)
0xF0E4 exceeds the range: -10000 ~ +10000
Failure code The setting value of P5-95 (Available forward rate) exceeds
0xF0E5 the range: 0 ~ 100 (%)
Failure code The setting value of P5-96 (alignment target position)
0xF0E6 exceeds the range: 0 ~ (P5-84/P5-83) - 1
8-220
Command code Calculate the moving distance between current and target
0x000F position of E-Cam for PR positioning.
General
N/A
parameters
Macro parameters P5-93.Low_Word = UZYX (4 digits, HEXADECIMAL)
YX (PR number of going trip) = 0~0x3F, it is invalid if the
value is set to 0.
UZ (PR number of return trip) = 0~0x3F, it is invalid if the
value is set to 0.
P5-93.Hi_Word = it has to be set to 0
P5-95 (Available forward rate) = 0 ~ 100 (%)
P5-96 (target positionＸ); Unit: pulse number of master axis =
0 ~ (P5-84/P5-83) - 1
Monitoring variable 062(3Eh): It displays the current engaged position (X) of master
axis (X)
This macro command calculates the moving distance between current and target
engaged position (X) and writes into the specified PR.
During E-Cam operation, if users desire to move the slave axis to the specified
position when master axis stops and still in engaged status, this macro command
can calculates the correct moving distance (Y_Drift) of going trip for PR positioning.
When master axis resumes the operation, use another PR to run the moving
distance of return trip (-Y_Drift), it can back to the original position (moving
distance of going trip + moving distance of return trip = 0). E-Cam position remains
the same.
Pulse number of master axis after
rotating a cycle: (P5-84/P5-83) = L
Slave axis Alignment

position (Y) correction value
= Y_Diff
Master axis position (X)

Current
engaged Alignment target
position position P5-96
Note: PR command must be the incremental command, regardless in going trip or return
trip.
When E-Cam moves from current position to the target one, it can rotate at forward
or reverse position. Due to the cyclic operation, it can reach the target position
either at forward or reverse direction. However, the moving distance between both
is usually different. Use available forward rate to plan the timing of forward and
reverse rotation.
＊Available forward rate: The available max. proportion of forward path
8-221
Max. forward rotation limit. Counterclockwise

represents forward direction in the figure
going trip is at forward direction
going trip is at reverse direction
Available forward Available forward rate

rate = 0% (0°), = 75%, the available
reverse path only max. path is +270°
Available forward rate Available forward

= 25%, the available rate = 100% (360°),
max. path is +90° forward path only
Available forward rate =

50%, the available max.
path is +180°
Failure code When executing this macro, E-Cam is not engaged. E-Cam
0xF0F1 has to engage to change the engaged position.
Failure code The setting value of P5-93.YX (PR number of going trip)
0xF0F2 exceeds the range: 0x0000 ~ 0x003F
Failure code The setting value of P5-93.UZ (PR number of return trip)
0xF0F3 exceeds the range: 0x0000 ~ 0x003F
Failure code The setting value of P5-95 (Available forward rate) exceeds
0xF0F5 the range: 0 ~ 100 (％)
Failure code The setting value of P5-96 (target position) exceeds the
0xF0F6 range: 0 ~ (P5-84/P5-83) - 1
Command code E-Cam stops for one cycle and resumes its operation at next
0010h cycle.
General
N/A
parameters
Macro parameters Value of P5-93 has to be set to 0.
After E-Cam is engaged, this macro command can stop the slave axis for a cycle of
distance regardless the E-Cam degree.
The following conditions have to be established when using this macro command.
1. E-Cam must be in engaged status.
2. E-Cam must be the forward operation curve (including straight line) so it can
stop temporally.
8-222
Refer to the figure below, triggering this macro command, E-Cam will stop for one
cycle regardless the degree (X) where E-Cam is.
E-Cam operates one cycle
ECAM_H
Slave axis
position E-Cam stops E-Cam
(PUU) one cycle continues
ECAM_H its operation
0° 360° X° X+360°
Degree(°) of
Trigger this macro
master axis command
Note 1: ECAM_H (E-Cam pause distance) = table (last point – first point) x P5-19 (the
effective scaling)
Note 2: This function can accumulate times. If the command is triggered for N times
consecutively, it will stop the E-Cam for N cycles. The accumulated pause distance
cannot exceed (>2^31), or the macro command will be disabled.
Note 3: When E-Cam resumes the operation, the accumulated pause distance will be
cleared to 0.
Failure code When executing this macro command, E-Cam is not
0xF101 engaged.
Failure code
The setting value of P5-93 is incorrect: It has to be set to 0.
0xF102
Failure code E-Cam has to operate at forward direction. Please check the
0xF103 E-Cam table and make sure P5-19 > 0.
Failure code The accumulated pause distance exceeds 2^31. Do not
0xF104 execute this macro command consecutively.
Address: 05C4H
P5-98 EVON PR# Triggered by Event Rising-Edge
05C5H
Interface：
Default： 0x0000
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0x0000 ~ 0xDDDD
Data Size： 16-bit
8-223
Settings： Four items: UZYX

When EVx is set to ON, the PR# will be executed.
X=0: When EV1 is ON, PR will not be triggered.
X=1 ~ D: When EV1 is ON, execute PR # 51 ~ 63.
Y=0: When EV2 is ON, PR will not be triggered.
Y=1 ~ D: When EV2 is ON, execute PR # 51 ~ 63.
Note: EV3 and EV4 are supported after firmware V1.009.
Z=0: When EV3 is ON, PR will not be triggered.

Z=1 ~ D: When EV3 is ON, execute PR # 51 ~ 63.
U=0: When EV3 is ON, PR will not be triggered.
U=1 ~ D: When EV4 is ON, execute PR # 51 ~ 63.
Address: 05C6H
P5-99 EVOF PR# Triggered by Event Falling-Edge
05C7H
Interface：
Default： 0x0000
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0x0000 ~ 0xDDDD
Data Size： 16-bit
Settings： Four items: UZYX

When EVx is set to OFF, the PR# will be executed.
X=0: When EV1 is OFF, PR will not be triggered.
X=1 ~ D: When EV1 is OFF, execute PR # 51 ~ 63.
Y=0: When EV2 is OFF, PR will not be triggered.
Y=1 ~ D: When EV2 is OFF, execute PR # 51 ~ 63.
Note: EV3 and EV4 are supported after firmware V1.009.
Z=0: When EV3 is OFF, PR will not be triggered.

Z=1 ~ D: When EV3 is OFF, execute PR # 51 ~ 63.
U=0: When EV4 is OFF, PR will not be triggered.
U=1 ~ D: When EV4 is OFF, execute PR # 51 ~ 63.
8-224
P6-xx PR Parameters (Please refer to Chapter 7 for detailed setting)
Address: 0600H
P6-00 ODEF Homing Definition
0601H
Operational Related Section;
Interface： 7.10
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0x00000000 ~ 0x10FFFF3F
Data Size： 32-bit
Settings： Homing definition:

.31 ~ .27 ~ .23 .19 ~ .15 ~
11 ~ 8 7~4 3~0
28 24 ~20 16 12
BOOT - DLY - DEC1 ACC PATH
PATH: Path type (64-bit)

0: Stop: Homing complete and stop
1 ~ 3F: Auto: Homing complete and execute the specified path
(Path#1 ~ Path#63)
ACC: Select 0~F for acceleration time and corresponds to
P5-20~P5-35.
DEC1: The deceleration time selection of 1st homing, the setting value
of DEC is 0 ~ F and corresponds to P5-20 ~ P5-35.
DLY: Select 0 ~ F for the delay time and corresponds to P5-40 ~ P5-55
BOOT: When the servo drive applies to the power, if it will be executed
searching the origin.
0: Do not do homing
1: Execute homing automatically (SRV ON for the first time
after applying to power)
Apart from the above mentioned definition, the related setting of
homing also includes:
1. P5-04 Homing mode
2. P5-05 ~ P5-06 Speed setting of searching the origin
3. P6-01: ORG_DEF is the location of the origin. It may not be 0.
This function is the offset of coordinate system.
A. The setting for whether to return to the origin after completing

homing of P1-47 in the A series is not available in the A2 series;
instead, it is done in other ways. After the origin is found (Sensor or
Z); it has to decelerate to stop. The stop position will exceed the
8-225
origin for a short distance.

If it does not return to the origin, set PATH to 0.
If it needs to return to the origin, set PATH to non-zero value and
set PABS = ORG_DEF.
B. If the origin is found (Sensor or Z), desire to move an offset S and
define the coordinate as P after moving, then PATH = non-zero and
set ORG_DEF = P-S. The absolute position command = P.
Address: 0602H
P6-01 ODAT Origin Definition
0603H
Interface： 7.10
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： Value of origin definition:

.31 ~ .27 ~ .23 .19 ~ .15 ~
11 ~ 8 7~4 3~0
28 24 ~20 16 12
ORG_DEF (32-bit)
Address: 0604H
P6-02 PDEF1 PATH#1 Definition
0605H
Interface： 7.10
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Data Size： 32-bit
8-226
Settings： Properties of PATH# 1:

.31 ~ .27 ~ .23 ~ .19 ~ .15 ~ 11
7~4 3~0
28 24 20 16 12 ~8
P6-02 - - DLY - - - OPT TYPE
P6-03 DATA (32-bit)
TYPE, OPT:
OPT TYPE
7 6 5 4 BIT 3 ~ 0 BIT
- UNIT AUTO INS 1: SPEED, Speed setting control
2: SINGLE, Positioning control. It will
load in the next path when finished.
CMD OVLP INS
3: AUTO positioning control. It will load
in the next path when finished.
- - - INS 7: JUMP to the specified path
8: Write the specified parameter to the
- - AUTO INS
specified path
TYPE: 1 ~ 3 accept DI.STP stop and software limit.
INS: When executing this PR, it interrupts the previous one.
OVLP: Allow the overlap of the next path. The overlap is not allowed in
speed mode. When overlap happens in position mode, DLY has
no function.
AUTO: When PR procedure completes, the next procedure will be
loaded in automatically.
CMD: Refer to Chapter 7 for PR command description.
DLY: 0 ~ F, delay time number (4 BIT). The delay after executing this
PR. The external INS is invalid.
DLY (4) Index P5-40 ~ P5-55
Address: 0606H
P6-03 PDAT1 PATH# 1 Data
0607H
Interface： 7.10
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32-bit
Format： Decimal
8-227
Settings： PATH# 1 Data

.31 ~ .27 ~ .23 .19 ~ .15 ~
11 ~ 8 7~4 3~0
28 24 ~20 16 12
DATA (32 bit)
Property of P6-02; P6-03 corresponds to the target position of P6-02 or

jump to PATH_NO.
Address: 0608H
P6-04 PDEF2 PATH# 2 Definition
0609H
Interface： 7.10
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Data Size： 32-bit
Address: 060AH
060BH
Interface： 7.10
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32-bit
Format： Decimal
8-228
Address: 060CH
060DH
Interface： 7.10
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Data Size： 32-bit
Address: 060EH
060FH
Interface： 7.10
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32-bit
Format： Decimal
Address: 0610H
0611H
Interface： 7.10
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
8-229
Data Size： 32-bit
Address: 0612H
0613H
Interface： 7.10
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32-bit
Format： Decimal
Address: 0614H
0615H
Interface： 7.10
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Data Size： 32-bit
8-230
Address: 0616H
0617H
Interface： 7.10
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32-bit
Format： Decimal
Address: 0618H
0619H
Interface： 7.10
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Data Size： 32-bit
Address: 061AH
061BH
Interface： 7.10
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
8-231
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32-bit
Format： Decimal
Address: 061CH
061DH
Interface： 7.10
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Data Size： 32-bit
Address: 061EH
061FH
Interface： 7.10
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32-bit
Format： Decimal
8-232
Address: 0620H
0621H
Interface： 7.10
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Data Size： 32-bit
Address: 0622H
0623H
Interface： 7.10
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32-bit
Format： Decimal
Address: 0624H
0625H
Interface： 7.10
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
8-233
Data Size： 32-bit
Address: 0626H
0627H
Interface： 7.10
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32-bit
Format： Decimal
Address: 0628H
0629H
Interface： 7.10
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Data Size： 32-bit
8-234
Address: 062AH
062BH
Interface： 7.10
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32-bit
Format： Decimal
Address: 062CH
062DH
Interface： 7.10
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Data Size： 32-bit
Address: 062EH
062FH
Interface： 7.10
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
8-235
Data Size： 32-bit
Format： Decimal
Address: 0630H
0631H
Interface： 7.10
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Data Size： 32-bit
Address: 0632H
0633H
Interface： 7.10
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32-bit
Format： Decimal
8-236
Address: 0634H
0635H
Interface： 7.10
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Data Size： 32-bit
Address: 0636H
0637H
Interface： 7.10
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32-bit
Format： Decimal
Address: 0638H
0639H
Interface： 7.10
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
8-237
Data Size： 32-bit
Address: 063AH
063BH
Interface： 7.10
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32-bit
Format： Decimal
Address: 063CH
P6-30 PDEF15 PATH# 15Definition
063DH
Interface： 7.10
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Data Size： 32-bit
8-238
Address: 063EH
063FH
Interface： 7.10
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32-bit
Format： Decimal
Address: 0640H
0641H
Interface： 7.10
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Data Size： 32-bit
Address: 0642H
0643H
Interface： 7.10
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
8-239
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32-bit
Format： Decimal
Address: 0644H
0645H
Interface： 7.10
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Data Size： 32-bit
Address: 0646H
0647H
Interface： 7.10
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32-bit
Format： Decimal
8-240
Address: 0648H
0649H
Interface： 7.10
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Data Size： 32-bit
Address: 064AH
064BH
Interface： 7.10
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32-bit
Format： Decimal
Address: 064CH
064DH
Interface： 7.10
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
8-241
Data Size： 32-bit
Address: 064EH
064FH
Interface： 7.10
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32-bit
Format： Decimal
Address: 0650H
0651H
Interface： 7.10
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Data Size： 32-bit
8-242
Address: 0652H
0653H
Interface： 7.10
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32-bit
Format： Decimal
Address: 0654H
0655H
Interface： 7.10
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Data Size： 32-bit
Address: 0656H
0657H
Interface： 7.10
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
8-243
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32-bit
Format： Decimal
Address: 0658H
0659H
Interface： 7.10
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Data Size： 32-bit
Address: 065AH
065BH
Interface： 7.10
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32-bit
Format： Decimal
8-244
Address: 065CH
065DH
Interface： 7.10
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Data Size： 32-bit
Address: 065EH
065FH
Interface： 7.10
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32-bit
Format： Decimal
Address: 0660H
0661H
Interface： 7.10
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
8-245
Data Size： 32-bit
Address: 0662H
0663H
Interface： 7.10
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32-bit
Format： Decimal
Address: 0664H
0665H
Interface： 7.10
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Data Size： 32-bit
8-246
Address: 0666H
0667H
Interface： 7.10
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32-bit
Format： Decimal
Address: 0668H
0669H
Interface： 7.10
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Data Size： 32-bit
Address: 066AH
066BH
Interface： 7.10
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
8-247
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32-bit
Format： Decimal
Address: 066CH
066DH
Interface： 7.10
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Data Size： 32-bit
Address: 066EH
066FH
Interface： 7.10
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32-bit
Format： Decimal
8-248
Address: 0670H
0671H
Interface： 7.10
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Data Size： 32-bit
Address: 0672H
0673H
Interface： 7.10
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32-bit
Format： Decimal
Address: 0674H
0675H
Interface： 7.10
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
8-249
Data Size： 32-bit
Address: 0676H
0677H
Interface： 7.10
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32-bit
Format： Decimal
Address: 0678H
0679H
Interface： 7.10
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Data Size： 32-bit
8-250
Address: 067AH
067BH
Interface： 7.10
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32-bit
Format： Decimal
Address: 067CH
067DH
Interface： 7.10
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Data Size： 32-bit
Address: 067EH
067FH
Interface： 7.10
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
8-251
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32-bit
Format： Decimal
Address: 0680H
0681H
Interface： 7.10
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Data Size： 32-bit
Address: 0682H
0683H
Interface： 7.10
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32-bit
Format： Decimal
8-252
Address: 0684H
0685H
Interface： 7.10
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Data Size： 32-bit
Address: 0686H
0687H
Interface： 7.10
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32-bit
Format： Decimal
Address: 0688H
0689H
Interface： 7.10
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
8-253
Data Size： 32-bit
Address: 068AH
068BH
Interface： 7.10
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32-bit
Format： Decimal
Address: 068CH
068DH
Interface： 7.10
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Data Size： 32-bit
8-254
Address: 068EH
068FH
Interface： 7.10
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32-bit
Format： Decimal
Address: 0690H
0691H
Interface： 7.10
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Data Size： 32-bit
Address: 0692H
0693H
Interface： 7.10
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
8-255
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32-bit
Format： Decimal
Address: 0694H
0695H
Interface： 7.10
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Data Size： 32-bit
Address: 0696H
0697H
Interface： 7.10
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32-bit
Format： Decimal
8-256
Address: 0698H
0699H
Interface： 7.10
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Data Size： 32-bit
Address: 069AH
069BH
Interface： 7.10
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32-bit
Format： Decimal
Address: 069CH
069DH
Interface： 7.10
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
8-257
Data Size： 32-bit
Address: 069EH
069FH
Interface： 7.10
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32-bit
Format： Decimal
Address: 06A0H
06A1H
Interface： 7.10
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Data Size： 32-bit
8-258
Address: 06A2H
06A3H
Interface： 7.10
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32-bit
Format： Decimal
Address: 06A4H
06A5H
Interface： 7.10
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Data Size： 32-bit
Address: 06A6H
06A7H
Interface： 7.10
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
8-259
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32-bit
Format： Decimal
Address: 06A8H
06A9H
Interface： 7.10
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Data Size： 32-bit
Address: 06AAH
06ABH
Interface： 7.10
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32-bit
Format： Decimal
8-260
Address: 06ACH
06ADH
Interface： 7.10
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Data Size： 32-bit
Address: 06AEH
06AFH
Interface： 7.10
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32-bit
Format： Decimal
Address: 06B0H
06B1H
Interface： 7.10
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
8-261
Data Size： 32-bit
Address: 06B2H
06B3H
Interface： 7.10
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32-bit
Format： Decimal
Address: 06B4H
06B5H
Interface： 7.10
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Data Size： 32-bit
8-262
Address: 06B6H
06B7H
Interface： 7.10
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32-bit
Format： Decimal
Address: 06B8H
06B9H
Interface： 7.10
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Data Size： 32-bit
Address: 06BAH
06BBH
Interface： 7.10
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
8-263
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32-bit
Format： Decimal
Address: 06BCH
06BDH
Interface： 7.10
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Data Size： 32-bit
Address: 06BEH
06BFH
Interface： 7.10
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32-bit
Format： Decimal
8-264
Address: 06C0H
06C1H
Interface： 7.10
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Data Size： 32-bit
Address: 06C2H
06C3H
Interface： 7.10
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32-bit
Format： Decimal
8-265
Address: 06C4H
06C5H
Interface： 7.10
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Data Size： 32-bit
Address: 06C6H
06C7H
Interface： 7.10
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32-bit
Format： Decimal
8-266
P7-xx PR Parameters (Please refer to Chapter 7 for detailed setting)
Address: 0700H
0701H
Interface： 7.10
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Data Size： 32-bit
Address: 0702H
0703H
Interface： 7.10
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32-bit
Format： Decimal
8-267
Address: 0704H
0705H
Interface： 7.10
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Data Size： 32-bit
Address: 0706H
0707H
Interface： 7.10
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32-bit
Format： Decimal
Address: 0708H
0709H
Interface： 7.10
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
8-268
Data Size： 32-bit
Format： HEXADECIMAL
Address: 070AH
070BH
Interface： 7.10
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32-bit
Format： Decimal
Address: 070CH
070DH
Interface： 7.10
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Data Size： 32-bit
8-269
Address: 070EH
070FH
Interface： 7.10
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32-bit
Format： Decimal
Address: 0710H
0711H
Interface： 7.10
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Data Size： 32-bit
Address: 0712H
0713H
Interface： 7.10
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
8-270
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32-bit
Format： Decimal
Address: 0714H
0715H
Interface： 7.10
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Data Size： 32-bit
Address: 0716H
0717H
Interface： 7.10
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32-bit
Format： Decimal
8-271
Address: 0718H
0719H
Interface： 7.10
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Data Size： 32-bit
Address: 071AH
071BH
Interface： 7.10
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32-bit
Format： Decimal
Address: 071CH
071DH
Interface： 7.10
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
8-272
Data Size： 32-bit
Address: 071EH
071FH
Interface： 7.10
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32-bit
Format： Decimal
Address: 0720H
0721H
Interface： 7.10
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Data Size： 32-bit
8-273
Address: 0722H
0723H
Interface： 7.10
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32-bit
Format： Decimal
Address: 0724H
0725H
Interface： 7.10
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Data Size： 32-bit
Address: 0726H
0727H
Interface： 7.10
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
8-274
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32-bit
Format： Decimal
Address: 0728H
0729H
Interface： 7.10
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Data Size： 32-bit
Address: 072AH
072BH
Interface： 7.10
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32-bit
Format： Decimal
8-275
Address: 072CH
072DH
Interface： 7.10
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Data Size： 32-bit
Address: 072EH
072FH
Interface： 7.10
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32-bit
Format： Decimal
Address: 0730H
0731H
Interface： 7.10
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
8-276
Data Size： 32-bit
Address: 0732H
0733H
Interface： 7.10
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32-bit
Format： Decimal
Address: 0734H
0735H
Interface： 7.10
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Data Size： 32-bit
8-277
Address: 0736H
0737H
Interface： 7.10
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32-bit
Format： Decimal
8-278
Table 8.1 Function Description of Digital Input (DI)
Setting Value: 0x01

Trigger Control
DI Name Function Description of Digital Input (DI)
Method Mode
Level
SON When this DI is On, servo is activated (Servo On) ALL
triggered
Setting Value: 0x02

Trigger Control
Method Mode
Rising
After the alarm has been cleared, when the DI is ON the drive will
ARST edge ALL
show that the alarm has been cleared.
triggered
Setting Value: 0x03

Trigger Control
Method Mode
In speed and position mode, when the DI is ON (P2-27 should be
Level
GAINUP set to 1), the gain switched to the one multiplies the switching PT, PR, S
triggered
rate.
Setting Value: 0x04

Trigger Control
Method Mode
Clear the pulse counter and the setting of parameter P2-50. Rising
edge
CCLR 0: clear the position pulse deviation (It is suitable in PT mode). triggered, PT, PR
When DI is ON, the accumulative pulse deviation of the drive will Level
be cleared to 0. triggered
Setting Value: 0x05

Trigger Control
Method Mode
When the speed is slower than the setting of zero speed (P1-38),
if the DI is ON, the motor stops running.
Speed
Command
Setting value of
P1-38 (Zero speed)
Level
ZCLAMP S
ZCLAMP triggered
input signal
OFF ON
Motor Speed
Setting value of
P1-38 (Zero speed)
Time
8-279
Setting Value: 0x06

Trigger Control
Method Mode
In speed and torque modes, when the DI is ON, the input
command will be in reverse direction. Level
CMDINV S, Sz, T
Note: when you use this function in the torque mode, it is only triggered
applicable to analog commands.
Setting Value: 0x07

Trigger Control
Method Mode
Reserved
Setting Value: 0x08

Trigger Control
Method Mode
In PR mode, after selecting the PR command (POS0 ~ 5), when Rising
CTRG the DI is ON, the motor will rotate according to the command edge PR
issued by the register. triggered
Setting Value: 0x09

Trigger Control
Method Mode
In speed and position mode, when the DI is ON, the motor torque
Level
TRQLM will be limited, and the limited torque command will be internal PT, PR, S
triggered
register or analog voltage command.
Setting Value: 0x0A

Trigger Control
Method Mode
When gantry control function is enabled (P1-74 = 2), if it needs to
Rising
temporarily disable this function, turn on DI.GTRY will do. And the
GTRY edge PT
axis that received the command from DI.GTRY no longer
triggered
calculates the error between two axes.
8-280
Setting Value: 0x0C

Trigger Control
Method Mode
Latch function of analog position command.
When this DI is ON, the motor will be held on the current
position.
During the time of DI ON, the motor will not operate even when
there is any change of analog command. When this DI is OFF,
the motor will complete the command during the time the DI is
triggered.
Motor Position
( Turn )
When DI is OFF, the motor

Level
VPL will operate to the PT
corresponding position triggered
input by analog.
The
position
when DI is Analog input
triggered
command
(V)
When DI is ON,
the analog input
The voltage
command
when DI is
change the
triggered
amount. The
motor is still at
the moment.
Note: The above graph is the commands that haven’t gone through P1-
65 filter.
Setting Value: 0x0D

Trigger Control
Method Mode
Clear function of analog position command
When this DI is ON, the motor will be held in the current
position.
Despite the change of analog command during the time of DI Level
VPRS PT
ON, the motor will still stay in the current position even when the triggered
DI is OFF. However, the position the motor stays will correspond
to the new analog command. Thus, the coordinate system of the
motor will be redefined.
8-281
Setting Value: 0x0D

Trigger Control
Method Mode
Motor position
( Turn )
The
position
when DI
is
triggered
When DI is
ON, all input
command is Analog input
invalid. command
(V)
The voltage
when DI is
triggered Analog input
command
(V)
When DI is OFF, the
motor stands still, but its
coordinate will be
redefined.
Setting value: 0x0E

Trigger Control
Method Mode
PT/PR,
Rising
Clear the error between full-closed loop linear scale and motor Full-
FEC edge
encoder. closed
triggered
loop
Setting Value: 0x10

Trigger Control
Method Mode
In torque mode, when the DI is ON, the motor speed will be
Level
SPDLM limited, the limited speed command will be internal register or T
triggered
analog voltage command.
8-282
Setting Value: 0x11, 0x12, 0x13, 0x1A, 0x1B, 0x1C

DI Trigger Control
Function Description of Digital Input (DI)
Name Method Mode
PR Command Selection (1 ~ 64)
Position Corresponding
POS5 POS4 POS3 POS2 POS1 POS0 CTRG
Command Parameter
P6-00
POS0 Homing 0 0 0 0 0 0
P6-01
POS1 P6-02
Procedure1 0 0 0 0 0 1
POS2 P6-03 Level
~ PR
POS3 triggered
POS4 Procedure P6-98
1 1 0 0 1 0
50 P6-99
POS5 Procedure P7-00
1 1 0 0 1 1
51 P7-01
~
Procedure P7-26
1 1 1 1 1 1
63 P7-27
Setting Value: 0x1D

Trigger Control
Method Mode
When DI.ABSE is ON, it is in ABS mode. DI.ABSQ, DI.ABSC,
DI.ABSR, DI.ABSD, and DI.ABSC are enabled.
Level
ABSE When DI.ABSE is ON, the function of DI4, DO2, and DO3 will be ALL
triggered
disabled. Function of DI4 will be ASDQ, DO2 will be ABSR and
DO3 will be ABSD.
Setting Value: 0x1F

Trigger Control
Method Mode
Rising
When DI.ABSC is ON, multi-turn data stored in absolute encoder
ABSC edge ALL
will be cleared. When DI.ABSE is ON, this function is enabled.
triggered
Setting Value: When DI.ABSE is ON, DI4 inputs ABSQ signal, function set by P2-13 is
disabled.
Trigger Control
Method Mode
During I/O transmission, Handshaking signal will be sent to the Rising
ABSQ is
servo drive by the controller. When DI.ABSQ is OFF, it means the and
always
controller issues Request ; DI.ABSQ is ON means the controller Falling ALL
inputted
has already recdived ABSD signal. When DI.ABSE is ON, this DI edge
by DI4
is enabled. Please refer to diagram 12.4 for detailed description. triggered
8-283
Setting Value: 0x14, 0x15

DI Trigger Control
Name Method Mode
Internal Speed Command Selection (1 ~ 4)
DI
signal
of
Speed
CN1
Command Command Content Range
S S
Number
P P
D D
1 0
SPD0 Level
External Voltage deviation
S analog between V-REF +/- 10V
triggere S
SPD1 d
Mode
S1 0 0 command and GND

Speed command
Sz N/A 0
is 0
+/-5000
S2 0 1 P1-09
r/min
+/-5000
S3 1 0 Register Parameter P1-10
r/min
+/- 5000
S4 1 1 P1-11
r/min

DI Trigger Control
Name Method Mode
Internal Torque Command Selection (1 ~ 4)
Torque
DI signal of CN1
Command Command Content Range
Number
TCM1 TCM0
Voltage
External deviation
+/-
T analog between
10V
command T-REF and
TCM0 T1 0 0 Mode GND Level
T
TCM1 Torque triggered
Tz N/A command 0
is 0
+/-
T2 0 1 P1-12
300%
+/-
T3 1 0 Register Parameter P1-13
300%
+/-
T4 1 1 P1-14
300%
8-284
Setting Value: 0x18

Trigger Control
Method Mode
In position and speed mode, if the DI is OFF, it is in speed mode.
Level Dual
S-P And it is in position mode when the DI is ON. (P selects PT or PR
triggered Mode
via DI.PT-PR (0x2B).)
Setting Value: 0x19

Trigger Control
Method Mode
In speed and torque mode, if the DI is OFF, it is in speed mode. Level Dual
S-T
And it is in torque mode when the DI is ON. triggered Mode
Setting Value: 0x1F

Trigger Control
Method Mode
When DI.ABSC is on, the pulse number stored in absolute
Rising-
encoder is cleared to 0 and the PUU value is reset to P6-01. But
ABSC edge ALL
this DI is only valid when DI.ABSE is on. Please refer to Section
triggered
12.3 for the timing diagram.
Setting Value: 0x20

Trigger Control
Method Mode
In position and torque mode, if the DI is OFF, it is in torque mode; Level Dual
T-P
if the DI is ON, then it is in position mode. triggered Mode
Setting Value: 0x21

Trigger Control
Method Mode
Level
EMGS When this DI is ON, the motor stops urgently. ALL
triggered
Setting Value: 0x22

Trigger Control
Method Mode
Level
NL (CWL) Reverse inhibit limit (contact b) ALL
triggered
8-285
Setting Value: 0x23

Trigger Control
Method Mode
PL Level
Forward inhibit limit (contact b) ALL
(CCWL) triggered
Setting Value: 0x24

Trigger Control
Method Mode
Rising /
In PR mode, during the process of homing if the DI is ON ←→
Falling
ORGP OFF, the servo will regard this position as the homing origin. PR
edge
(Please refer to the setting of parameter P5-04) triggered
Setting Value: 0x27

Trigger Control
Method Mode
In PR mode, when searching the origin is needed, it will activate Rising
SHOM the function of searching the origin when the DI is ON. (Please edge PR
refer to the setting of parameter P5-04) triggered
Setting Value: 0x2B

Trigger Control
Method Mode
When selecting PT-PR dual mode or PT-PR-S multiple mode,
Level Dual
PT-PR source can be selected via this DI. If this DI is OFF, it is in PT
triggered Mode
mode; If the DI is ON, it is in PR mode.
Setting value: 0x35

Trigger Control
Methods Mode
When E-Cam alignment function is enabled (P2.076.bit0 = 1 & Rising
ALGN P2.076.bit1 = 1), it executes alignment correction when this DI is edge PR
on. triggered
Setting Value: 0x36

Trigger Control
Method Mode
E-Cam engaging control (Please refer to the setting of P5-88 U, Z Rising /

value) Falling
CAM PR
edge
A2-L does not support E-cam function. triggered
8-286
Setting Value: 0x37

Trigger Control
Method Mode
Level
JOGU When this DI is ON, the motor will JOG in forward direction. ALL
triggered
Setting Value: 0x38

Trigger Control
Method Mode
Level
JOGD When this DI is on, the motor will JOG in reverse direction. ALL
triggered
Setting Value: 0x39

Trigger Control
Method Mode
Rising
/Falling
EV1 Event trigger command #1 (Refer to the setting of P5-98, P5-99) PR
edge
triggered
Setting Value: 0x3A

Trigger Control
Method Mode
Rising
/Falling
EV2 Event trigger command #2 (Refer to the setting of P5-98, P5-99) PR
edge
triggered
Setting Value: 0x3B

Trigger Control
Method Mode
Rising
Event trigger command #3 (It is provided after firmware version /Falling
EV3 PR
V1.008 sub04.) edge
triggered
Setting Value: 0x3C

Trigger Control
Method Mode
Rising
Event trigger command #4 (It is provided after firmware version /Falling
EV4 PR
V1.008 sub04) edge
triggered
8-287

Trigger Control
Method Mode
Gear Ratio Selection 0 (Numerator)
Gear Ratio Selection 1 (Numerator)
GNUM0 Level
PT
GNUM1 triggered
Setting Value: 0x45

Trigger Control
Method Mode
In position mode, when this DI is ON, the external pulse input
command is not working. Level
INHP PT
(Note: The function has to be set to DI8 so as to ensure the triggered
instantaneity of pulse prohibition)
Setting Value: 0x46

Trigger Control
Method Mode
Rising
STOP Motor stops. edge PR
triggered
Setting Value: 0x47

Trigger Control
Method Mode
This DI can be used to stop the emergency stop of deceleration
time. The setting of deceleration time is identical to P5-03. When Rising
PFQS DI.PFQS is on, AL35F will occur. Then, motor starts to edge PT,PR,T,S
decelerate. When the speed reaches 0, AL3CF occurs and servo triggered
is off. Please turn on DI.ARST to servo on the drive again.
Note: 1）11 ~ 17 Single control modes; 18 ~ 20 Dual control mode.
2）When P2-10 ~ P2-17 is set to 0, DI has no function.
8-288
Table 8.2 Function Description of Digital Output (DO)
Setting Value: 0x01

Trigger Control
DO Name Function Description of Digital Output (DO)
Method Mode
When the controlled and main circuit power is applied to the drive, Level
SRDY ALL
this DO is ON if no alarm occurs. triggered
Setting Value: 0x02

Trigger Control
Method Mode
When the servo is ON, this DO is ON if no alarm occurs.
As soon as it applies to the power, when it is
automatically Servo On, the time difference between
DO:SRDY and DO:SON
ON
DO: OFF Level
SON ALL
SRDY triggered
ON
DO: OFF
SON
Approx. 300 ns
Setting Value: 0x03

Trigger Control
Method Mode
When the motor speed is slower than the setting speed of zero Level
ZSPD ALL
speed (P1-38), this DO is ON. triggered
Setting Value: 0x04

Trigger Control
Method Mode
When the motor speed is faster than the target speed (P1-39), Level
TSPD ALL
this DO is ON. triggered
Setting Value: 0x05

Trigger Control
Method Mode
In position mode, when the deviation pulse number is smaller than
the position range (the setting value of P1-54), this DO is ON.
Level
TPOS When the drive is in PR mode, this DO is ON when the position PT, PR
triggered
error between target position and current position is smaller than
the setting value (value of P1-54).
8-289
Setting Value: 0x06

Trigger Control
Method Mode
ALL ,
Level
TQL When it is in torque limit, this DO is ON. except T,
triggered
Tz
Setting Value: 0x07

Trigger Control
Method Mode
When the alarm occurs, this DO is ON.
Level
ALRM (Except DO: 0x11 (forward / reverse limit, communication error, ALL
triggered
under voltage))
Setting Value: 0x08

Trigger Control
Method Mode
When the signal of brake control is output, adjust the setting of
parameter P1-42 and P1-43.
ON
SON OFF OFF
ON
BRKR BRKR
OFF OFF Level
ALL
triggered
MBT1(P1-42) MBT2(P1-43)
Motor ZSPD
Speed (P1-38)
Setting Value: 0x09

Trigger Control
Method Mode
When homing is completed, it means the position coordinates
system is available and this DO is ON.
When applying to the power, this DO is OFF. When homing is
completed, this DO is ON. During the operation, this DO is ON Level
HOME PR
until the counter overflows (including command or feedback) and triggered
the DO becomes OFF.
When PR triggers homing command, this DO becomes OFF.
After homing, this DO becomes ON.
Setting Value: 0x0D

DO Name Function Description of Digital Output (DO) Control Mode
ABSW Warning of absolute encoder. ALL
8-290
Setting Value: 0x0E

IDXD Indexing coordinates is valid. PR
Setting Value: 0x10

Trigger Control
Method Mode
When reaching the overload setting, this DO is ON.
tOL= Overload allowable time of the servo x Setting value of P1-56,
when the overload accumulative time exceeds tOL, it will
output pre-overload warning (OLW). However, if the overload
accumulative time exceeds the overload allowable time of the
servo, it will output pre-overload error (ALRM).
For example:
The setting value of pre-overload warning is 60% (P1-56=60). Level
OLW ALL
When the output average load of the servo drive is 200%, if the triggered
output time exceeds 8 seconds, the servo drive will show the
overload alarm (AL006).
tOL= The output average load of the servo exceeds 200% for 8
seconds x parameter setting value = 8sec x 60% = 4.8sec
Result: When the output average load of the servo drive exceeds
200% for 4.8 seconds, this DO is ON. If it exceeds for 8 seconds,
then, DO.ALRM is ON.
Setting Value: 0x11

Trigger Control
Method Mode
Warning output (Forward / reverse limit, emergency stop, Level
WARN ALL
communication error, under voltage) triggered
Setting Value: 0x12

Trigger Control
Method Mode
Level
OVF Position Command /Feedback Overflows PR
triggered
Setting Value: 0x13

Trigger Control
Method Mode
SNL Level
Software limit (Reverse limit) PR
(SCWL) triggered
8-291
Setting Value: 0x14

Trigger Control
Method Mode
SPL Level
Software limit (Forward limit) PR
(SCCWL) triggered
Setting Value: 0x15

Trigger Control
Method Mode
Complete PR command and enter into PR mode, this DO is ON.
When PR command is executing, this DO is OFF.
Level
Cmd_OK After completing the command, this DO is ON. PR
triggered
When the DO is ON, it means the command is completed, but not
finishing motor positioning. Please refer to DO.TPOS.
Setting Value: 0x16

Trigger Control
Method Mode
Level
CAP_OK CAP procedure completed ALL
triggered
Setting Value: 0x17

Trigger Control
Method Mode
When DO.Cmd_OK and TPOS are both ON, this DO is ON. Refer Level
MC_OK PR
to P1-48. triggered
Setting Value: 0x18

Trigger Control
Method Mode
CAM_AREA1: Master position of the E-Cam is between P5-90
Level
CAM_AREA1 and P5-91. PR
triggered
Setting Value: 0x19

Trigger Control
Method Mode
Speed completed output: In speed mode, when the deviation
Level
SP_OK between the speed feedback and the command is smaller than S / Sz
triggered
the setting value of P1-47, then this DO is ON.
8-292
Setting Value: 0x1A

Trigger Control
Method Mode
CAM_AREA2: Master position of the E-Cam is between P2-78
Level
CAM_AREA2 and P2-79. PR
triggered
Setting Value: 0x2C

When the value which is monitored by P0-09 is between P0-54～

Zon1 ALL
P0-55, then this DO is ON.
Setting Value: When DI.ABSE is ON, DO2 outputs ABSR signal, function set by P2-19 is
disabled.
Trigger Control
Method Mode
ABSR is DO.ABSR is OFF means the Request sent by ABSQ has been
always received. DO.ABSR is ON means the data that is outputted by Level
ALL
outputted ABSD is valid. When DI.ABSE is ON, this DO is enabled. Please triggered
by DO2 refer to diagram 12.4 for detailed description.
Setting Value: When DI.ABSE is ON, DO3 outputs ABSD signal, function set by P2-20 is
disabled.
Trigger Control
Method Mode
ABSD is
Position data of ABS is outputted. The data is valid when ABSR is
always Level
ON. When DI.ABSE is ON, this DO is enabled. Please refer to ALL
outputted triggered
diagram 13.4 for detailed description.
by DO3
Setting Value: 0x30

Trigger Control
Method Mode
Level
SDO_0 Output the status of bit 00 of P4-06 ALL
triggered
Setting Value: 0x31

Trigger Control
Method Mode
Level
triggered
8-293
Setting Value: 0x32

Trigger Control
Method Mode
Level
triggered
Setting Value: 0x33

Trigger Control
Method Mode
Level
triggered
Setting Value: 0x34

Trigger Control
Method Mode
Level
triggered
Setting Value: 0x35

Trigger Control
Method Mode
Level
triggered
Setting Value: 0x36

Trigger Control
Method Mode
Level
triggered
Setting Value: 0x37

Trigger Control
Method Mode
Level
triggered
Setting Value: 0x38

Trigger Control
Method Mode
Level
triggered
8-294
Setting Value: 0x39

Trigger Control
Method Mode
Level
triggered
Setting Value: 0x3A

Trigger Control
Method Mode
Level
SDO_A Output the status of bit 10 of P4-06 ALL
triggered
Setting Value: 0x3B

Trigger Control
Method Mode
Level
SDO_B Output the status of bit 11 of P4-06 ALL
triggered
Setting Value: 0x3C

Trigger Control
Method Mode
Level
SDO_C Output the status of bit 12 of P4-06 ALL
triggered
Setting Value: 0x3D

Trigger Control
Method Mode
Level
SDO_D Output the status of bit 13 of P4-06 ALL
triggered
Setting Value: 0x3E

Trigger Control
Method Mode
Level
SDO_E Output the status of bit 14 of P4-06 ALL
triggered
Setting Value: 0x3F

Trigger Control
Method Mode
Level
SDO_F Output the status of bit 15 of P4-06 ALL
triggered
Note: When P2-18～P2-22 is set to 0, DO has no function.
8-295
(This page is intentionally left blank,)
8-296
Chapter 9 Communications
9.1 RS-485 & RS-232 Communication Hardware Interface
This servo drive supports the serial communication of RS-485 and RS-232. Communication
function enables the servo drive to access and change parameters inside the system. However,
RS-485 and RS-232 cannot be used at the same time. Parameter P3-05 can use RS-485 or
RS-232 as the communication protocol. Followings are the wiring description.
RS-232
 Configuration
CN3 D-Sub
1394 Connector 9-Pin Connector
4 (Rx) 3 (Tx)
2 (Tx) 2 (Rx)
1 (GND) 5 (GND)
Note:
1) The cable length can be up to 15 meters (49.21 feet) when the servo drive is installed in a quiet
environment. If the transmission speed is over 38400 bps, however, a cable within 3 meters (9.84 feet) is
recommended to ensure data transmission accuracy.
2) Numbers shown in the above diagram represent the pin number of each connector.
9-1
ASDA-A2 Chapter 9 Communications
RS-485
 Configuration
CN3 D-Sub
1394 Connector 9-Pin Connector
485(+)
485 (+)
5
Servo 1 485(-)
6 485 (-)
5
Servo 2 6
Note:
1) The cable length can be up to 100 meters (32.81 feet) when the servo drive is installed in a quiet
environment. If the transmission speed is over 38400 bps, however, a cable within 15 meters is
recommended to ensure data transmission accuracy.
2) Please refer to Section 3.6 for CN3 Pin Definition.
9-2
Chapter 9 Communications ASDA-A2
9.2 RS-485 / RS-232 Communication Parameters Setting
The following four parameters, P3-00 (Address Setting), P3-01 (Transmission Speed), P3-02
(Communication Protocol), and P3-05 (Communication Mechanism), are essential and must be set
for the communication of the servo drive. The rest, such as P3-03 (Communication Error Disposal),
P3-04 (Communication Timeout), P3-06 (Control Switch of Digital Input), and P3-07
(Communication Response Delay Time), are optional. Please refer to Chapter 8 of this user
manual.
The followings show the content of parameter P3-00 and its corresponding address, 0300H –
0301H, which is shown in the rightmost column.
Address: 0300H
P3-00● ADR Address Setting
0301H
Interface： 9.2
Default： 0x007F
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0x0001 ~ 0x007F
Data Size： 16-bit
Settings： The communication address setting is divided into Y, X (hexadecimal):

0 0 Y X
Range －－ 0~7 0~F

When using RS-232/RS-485 to communicate, one servo drive can only
set one address. The duplicate address setting will cause abnormal
communication.
This address represents the absolute address of the servo drive in
communication network. It is also applicable to RS-232/485, CANopen,
and DMCNET.
When the communication address setting of MODBUS is set to 0xFF,
the servo drive will automatically reply and receive data regardless of
the address. However, P3-00 cannot be set to 0xFF.
9-3
Address: 0302H
P3-01 BRT Transmission Speed
0303H
Interface： 9.2

Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： bps
Range： 0x0000 ~ 0xF405
Data Size： 16-bit
Settings： The setting of transmission speed is divided into Z, Y, X (hexadecimal):

U Z Y X
Communication
DMC CAN / DMC － RS-232/485
Port
Range 0/3 0~4 0 0~5
 Definition of X setting value
0: 4800
1: 9600
2: 19200
3: 38400
4: 57600
5: 115200
 Definition of Z setting value
0: 125 Kbit/s
1: 250 Kbit/s
2: 500 Kbit/s
3: 750 Kbit/s
4: 1.0 Mbit/s
 Definition of U setting value
0: Use Delta’s controller, such as PLC and HMI
3: Use Delta’s motion card
Note: 1）If this parameter is set via CAN, only Z can be set and the others
remain.
2）The communication speed of USB is 1.0 Mbit/s only and is
unchangeable.
9-4
Address: 0304H
P3-02 PTL Communication Protocol
0305H
Interface： 9.2
Default： 0x0006
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0x0000 ~ 0x0008
Data Size： 16-bit
Settings： The definition of the setting value is as the followings:

2: 7, O,1 (MODBUS, ASCII)
5: 8, O, 1 (MODBUS, ASCII)
6: 8, N, 2 (MODBUS, RTU)
7: 8, E, 1 (MODBUS, RTU)
8: 8, O, 1 (MODBUS, RTU)
Address: 030AH
P3-05 CMM Communication Mechanism
030BH
Interface： 9.2
Default： 0x0000
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0x0000 ~ 0x0001
Data Size： 16-bit
Settings： Communication port can select one or more than one communications.
 Communication Interface
0: RS232 (only applicable to A2-L and A2-M models)
1: RS485 (only applicable to A2-L, A2-M, and A2-LN models)
9-5
9.3 MODBUS Communication Protocol
There are two modes of MODBUS networks communication, ASCII (American Standard Code for
information interchange) mode and RTU (Remote Terminal Unit) mode. Users could set the
needed communication protocol via parameter P3-02. Apart from these two communication modes,
this servo drive also supports functions of 03H to access more than one data, 06H to write one
character, and 10H to write multiple characters. Please refer to the following descriptions.
 Code Description
ASCII Mode:
The so-called ASCII mode is using American Standard Code for Information Interchange (ASCII) to
transmit the data. If desiring to transmit data 64H between two stations (Master and Slave), the
master will send ‘6’ represented by 36H of ASCII code and ‘4’ represented by 34H of ASCII code.
ASCII code of digits 0 to 9 and characters A to F is as follows:

Character ‘0’ ‘1’ ‘2’ ‘3’ ‘4’ ‘5’ ‘6’ ‘7’
ASCII code 30H 31H 32H 33H 34H 35H 36H 37H
Character ‘8’ ‘9’ ‘A’ ‘B’ ‘C’ ‘D’ ‘E’ ‘F’
ASCII code 38H 39H 41H 42H 43H 44H 45H 46H
RTU Mode:
Every 8-bit of data is constituted by two 4-bits hexadecimal characters. If data 64H is transmitted
between two stations, it will be transmitted directly, which is more efficient than ASCII mode.
9-6
 Character Structure
Characters will be encoded into the following framing and transmitted in serial. The checking
method of different bits is as the following.
10-bit character frame (For 7-bit character)

7N2
Start Stop Stop
bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
bit bit
7-data bits
10-bits character frame
7E1
Start Even Stop
bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 parity bit
7-data bits
7O1
Start Odd Stop
bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 parity bit
7-data bits
11-bit character frame (For 8-bit character)

8N2
Start Stop Stop
bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 bit bit
8-data bits
8E1
Start Even Stop
bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
parity bit
8-data bits
8O1
Start Odd Stop
bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
parity bit
8-data bits
9-7
 Communication Data Structure
Definitions for the data frames in the two modes are as follows:
ASCII Mode:
Start Start character ’: ’ (3AH)
Slave Address Communication address: 1-byte consists of 2 ASCII codes
Function Function code: 1-byte consists of 2 ASCII codes
Data (n-1)
……. Data content: n-word = 2n-byte includes 4n of ASCII code, n<=10
Data (0)
LRC Error checking: 1-byte consists of 2 ASCII codes
End 1 End code 1: (0DH)(CR)
End 0 End code 0: (0AH)(LF)
The start character of communication in ASCII mode is colon ‘:’ (ASCII is 3AH), ADR is the ASCII
code of two characters. The end code is CR (Carriage Return) and LF (Line Feed). And the
communication address, function code, data content, error checking LRC (Longitudinal
Redundancy Check), etc. are between the start character and end code.
RTU Mode:
Start A silent interval of more than 10 ms
Slave Address Communication address: 1-byte
Function Function code: 1-byte
Data (n-1)
……. Data content：n-word =2n-byte，n<=10
Data (0)
CRC Error checking: 2-byte
End 1 A silent interval of more than 10 ms
The start of communication in RTU (Remote Terminal Unit) mode is a silent interval. The end of it
is another silent interval. The communication address, function code, data content, error checking
CRC (Cyclical Redundancy Check), etc. are between the start and the end.
9-8
Example 1: function code 03H, access multiple words:
The Master issues the command to the 1st Slave and reads the continuous 2 words starting from
the start address 0200H. In response message from the Slave, the content of starting address
0200H is 00B1H and the content of the 2nd data address 0201H is 1F40H. The maximum allowable
data in one single access is 10. The calculation of LRC and CRC will be described in the following
sections.
ASCII Mode:
Command message (Master): Response message (Slave):
Start ‘:’ Start ‘:’
‘0’ ‘0’
Slave Address Slave Address
‘1’ ‘1’
‘0’ ‘0’
Function Function
‘3’ ‘3’
‘0’ Number of data ‘0’
Starting data ‘2’ (In Byte) ‘4'
address ‘0’ ‘0’
‘0’ Content of ‘0’
starting data
‘0’ address 0200H ‘B’
Number of data ‘0’ ‘1’
(In Word) ‘0’ ‘1’
‘2’ Content of ‘F’
second data
‘F’ address 0201H ‘4’
LRC Check
‘8’ ‘0’
End 1 (0DH)(CR) ‘E’
LRC Check
End 0 (0AH)(LF) ‘8’
End 1 (0DH)(CR)
End 0 (0AH)(LF)
9-9
RTU Mode:
Slave Address 01H Slave Address 01H
Function 03H Function 03H
Starting data 02H (High) Number of data

04H
address 00H (Low) (In Byte)
Number of data 00H Content of 00H (High)

starting data
(In Word) 02H address 0200H B1H (Low)
CRC Check Low C5H (Low) Content of 1FH (High)

second data
CRC Check High B3H (High) address 0201H 40H (Low)
CRC Check Low A3H (Low)

CRC Check High D4H (High)
Note:
Before and after the transmission in RTU mode, 10 ms of silent interval is needed.
9-10
Example 2: function code 06H, write single word:
The Master issues command to the 1st Slave and writes data 0064H to address 0200H. The Slave
sends the response message to the Master after the writing is completed. The calculation of LRC
and CRC will be described in the following sections.
ASCII Mode:
‘0’ ‘0’
‘1’ ‘1’
‘0’ ‘0’
Function Function
‘6’ ‘6’
‘0’ ‘0’
Starting data ‘2’ Starting data ‘2'
address ‘0’ address ‘0’
‘0’ ‘0’
‘0’ ‘0’
‘0’ ‘0’
Data content Data content
‘6’ ‘6’
‘4’ ‘4’
‘9’ ‘9’
LRC Check LRC Check
‘3’ ‘3’
End 1 (0DH)(CR) End 1 (0DH)(CR)
End 0 (0AH)(LF) End 0 (0AH)(LF)
RTU Mode:
Address 01H Address 01H
Slave Function 06H Slave Function 06H
Starting data 02H (High) Starting data 02H (High)
address 00H (Low) address 00H (Low)
00H (High) 00H (High)
Data content Data content
64H (Low) 64H (Low)
CRC Check Low 89H (Low) CRC Check Low 89H (Low)
CRC Check High 99H (High) CRC Check High 99H (High)
Note:
9-11
Example 3: function code 10H, write multiple words:
The Master issues command to the 1st Slave and writes 0BB8H and 0000H to the starting address
0112H. That is to say, 0112H is written into 0BB8H and 0113H is written into 0000H. The
maximum allowable data in one single access is 10. The Slave sends the response message to
the Master after the writing is completed. The calculation of LRC and CRC will be described in the
following sections.
ASCII Mode:
‘0’ ‘0’
‘1’ ‘1’
‘1’ ‘1’
Function Function
‘0’ ‘0’
‘0’ ‘0’
Starting data ‘1’ Starting data ‘1'
address ‘1’ address ‘1’
‘2’ ‘2’
‘0’ ‘0’
Number of data ‘0’ ‘0’

Number of data
(In Word) ‘0’ ‘0’
‘2’ ‘2’
Number of data ‘0’ ‘D’
LRC Check
(In Byte) ‘4’ ‘A’
‘0’ End 1 (0DH)(CR)
The first data ‘B’ End 0 (0AH)(LF)

content ‘B’
‘8’
‘0’
The second data ‘0’
content ‘0’
‘0’
‘1’
LRC Check
‘3’
End 1 (0DH)(CR)
End 0 (0AH)(LF)
9-12
RTU Mode:
Slave Address 01H Slave Address 01H
Function 10H Function 10H
Starting data 01H (High) Starting data 01H (High)

address 12H (Low) address 12H (Low)
Number of data 00H (High) Number of data 00H (High)

(In Word) 02H (Low) (In Word) 02H (Low)
Number of data CRC Check Low E0H (Low)

04H
(In Byte) CRC Check High 31H (High)
The first data 0BH (High)

content B8H (Low)
The second data 00H (High)

content 00H (Low)
CRC Check Low FCH (Low)
CRC Check High EBH (High)
Note:
9-13
 LRC and CRC transmission Error Checking
The error checking in ASCII communication mode is LRC (Longitudinal Redundancy Check);
CRC (Cyclical Redundancy Check) is for RTU communication mode. The algorithm of both is as
the following.
LRC (ASCII mode):

Start ‘:’
‘7’
Slave address
‘F’
‘0’
Function
‘3’
‘0’
‘5’
Starting data address
‘C’
‘4’
‘0’
‘0’
Number of data
‘0’
‘1’
‘B’
LRC Check
‘4’
End 1 (0DH)(CR)
End 0 (0AH)(LF)
The LRC algorithm is: add all bytes, round down the carry, and take 2’s complement. For example,
7FH + 03H + 05H + C4H + 00H + 01H = 14CH, round down the carry 1 and take 4CH.
2’s complement of 4CH is B4H.
9-14
CRC (RTU Mode):
The description of CRC is as the followings:
Step 1: Load a 16-bits register of FFFFH, which is called CRC register.
Step 2: (The low byte of CRC register) XOR (The first byte of command), and save
the result in CRC register.
Step 3: Right move one bit. Check the least significant bit (LSB) of CRC register.
If the bit is 1, then (CRC register) XOR (A001H).
Step 4: Return to Step 3 until Step 3 has been executed for 8 times. Go to Step 5.
Step 5: Repeat the procedure from Step 2 to Step 4 until all bytes are processed.
Get the result of CRC value.
Description: After calculating CRC value, fill in the low word of CRC first in command message,
and then fill in the high word of CRC. For example, if the result of CRC algorithm is
3794H, fill in 94H in low word and then 37H in high word, as shown in the following
figure.
ADR 01H
CMD 03H
01H (High)
Starting data address
01H (Low)
Number of data 00H (High)
(In Word) 02H (Low)
CRC Check Low 94H (Low)
CRC Check High 37H (High)
9-15
Example of CRC program:

Produce CRC in C language. This function needs two parameters:
unsigned char* data;
unsigned char length
The function returns the CRC value as a type of unsigned integer.
unsigned int crc_chk(unsigned char* data, unsigned char length) {
int j;
unsigned int reg_crc=0xFFFF;
while( length-- ) {
reg_crc^= *data++;
for (j=0; j<8; j++ ) {
if( reg_crc & 0x01 ) { /*LSB(bit 0 ) = 1 */
reg_crc = (reg_crc >> 1)^0xA001;
} else {
reg_crc = (reg_crc>>1);
}
}
}
return reg_crc;
}
PC communication program example:
#include<stdio.h>
#include<dos.h>
#include<conio.h>
#include<process.h>
#define PORT 0x03F8 /* the address of COM 1 */
#define THR 0x0000
#define RDR 0x0000
#define BRDL 0x0000
#define IER 0x0001
#define BRDH 0x0001
#define LCR 0x0003
#define MCR 0x0004
#define LSR 0x0005
#define MSR 0x0006
unsigned char rdat[60];
/* read 2 data from address 0200H of ASD with address 1 */
unsigned char tdat[60]={‘:’,’0’,’1’,’0’,’3’,’0’,’2’,’0’,’0’,’0’,’0’,’0’,’2’,’F’,’8’,’\r’,’\n’};
9-16
void main() {
int I;
outportb(PORT+MCR,0x08); /* interrupt enable */
outportb(PORT+IER,0x01); /* interrupt as data in */
outportb(PORT+LCR,( inportb(PORT+LCR) | 0x80 ) );
/* the BRDL/BRDH can be access as LCR.b7 == 1 */
outportb(PORT+BRDL,12);
outportb(PORT+BRDH,0x00);
outportb(PORT+LCR,0x06); /* set prorocol
<7,E,1> = 1AH, <7,O,1> = 0AH
<8,N,2> = 07H <8,E,1> = 1BH
<8,O,1> = 0BH */
for( I = 0; I<=16; I++ ) {

while( !(inportb(PORT+LSR) & 0x20) ); /* wait until THR empty */
outportb(PORT+THR,tdat[I]); /* send data to THR */
}
I = 0;
while( !kbhit() ) {
if( inportb(PORT+LSR)&0x01 ) { /* b0==1, read data ready */
rdat[I++] = inportb(PORT+RDR); /* read data from RDR */
}
}
}
9-17
9.4 Write-in and Read-out Communication Parameters
Please refer to Chapter 8, Parameters, for all parameter details. And the descriptions of
parameters which can be wrote or read through communication are as follows.
Parameters are divided into 8 groups, Group 0: Monitor Parameters, Group 1: Basic Parameters,
Group 2: Expansion Parameters, Group 3: Communication Parameters, Group 4: Diagnosis
Parameters, Group 5: Motion Setting, Group 6 and Group 7: PR Definition.
Write parameters via communication:

Parameters which can be written through communication include:
Group 0, except (P0-00 ~ P0-01), (P0-08 ~ P0-13), and (P0-46)
Group 1 (P1-00 ~ P1-76)
Group 2 (P2-00 ~ P2-67)
Group 3 (P3-00 ~ P3-11)
Group 4, except (P4-00 ~ P4-04) and (P4-08 ~ P4-09)
Group 5 (P5-00 ~ P5-99), except P5-10, P5-16, and P5-76
Group 6 (P6-00 ~ P6-99)
Group 7 (P7-00 ~ P7-27)
Please note that:

(P3-01) When changing to a new communication speed, the next data will be written in a new
transmission speed after setting the new value.
(P3-02) When changing to the new communication protocol, the next data will be written with the
new communication protocol after setting the new value.
(P4-05) JOG controls parameters of the servo. Please refer to Chapter 8, Parameters, for the
description.
(P4-06) Force to control output contact. This parameter is for DO (Digital Output) testing.
Users can write 1, 2, 4, 8, and 16 to test DO1, DO2, DO3, DO4, and DO5 respectively.
Please write 0 after the test so as to inform the servo drive that the test has been
completed.
(P4-10) Adjustment function selection. Write 20 (= 14H in hexadecimal format) in parameter
P2-08 first to enable the adjustment so as to change the value of P4-10.
(P4-11 ~ P4-21) This parameter is Offset Adjustment. Do not change the setting unless it is
necessary. If it is necessary, please write 22 (= 16H, in hexadecimal format)
in parameter P2-08 first to enable the function so as to change the values of
P4-11 ~ P4-21.
9-18
Read parameters through communication:
Parameters can be read through communication include:
Group 0 (P0-00 ~ P0-46) Group 4 (P4-00 ~ P4-23)
Group 1 (P1-00 ~ P1-76) Group 5 (P5-00 ~ P5-99)
Group 2 (P2-00 ~ P2-67) Group 6 (P6-00 ~ P6-99)
Group 3 (P3-00 ~ P3-11) Group 7 (P7-00 ~ P7-27)
9-19
9-20
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting
10.1 Alarm of Servo Drive
Corresponding Servo
Display Alarm Name Alarm Description
DO Status
The current of the main circuit is 1.5
Servo
AL001 Over current times more than the instantaneous ALM
Off
current of the servo drive.
The voltage of the main circuit is higher Servo
AL002 Over voltage ALM Off
than the standard voltage.
The voltage of the main circuit is lower Servo
AL003 Under voltage WARN
than the standard voltage. Off
Motor
The drive corresponds to the wrong Servo
AL004 Combination ALM
motor. Off
Error
Regeneration Servo
AL005 Regeneration control is in error. ALM Off
Error
Servo
AL006 Overload The motor and the drive are overloaded. ALM Off
The control speed of the motor exceeds Servo
AL007 Over speed ALM
the normal speed. Off
The input frequency of the pulse
Abnormal Pulse Servo
AL008 command is over the allowable value of ALM
Command Off
the hardware interface.
Excessive
Deviation of The deviation of position command Servo
AL009 ALM
Position exceeds the allowable setting value. Off
Command
Servo
AL011 Encoder Error The encoder produces abnormal pulses. ALM
Off
When executing electrical adjustment,
Servo
AL012 Adjustment Error the adjusted value exceeds the ALM Off
allowable value.
Servo
AL013 Emergency Stop Press the emergency stop button. WARN Off
Reverse Limit Servo
AL014 Activate the reverse limit switch. WARN
Error On
Forward Limit Servo
AL015 Activate the forward limit switch. WARN
Error On
10-1
ASDA-A2 Chapter 10 Troubleshooting
Corresponding Servo
DO Status
Servo
AL016 IGBT Overheat The temperature of IGBT is too high ALM
Off
Abnormal An error occurs when the DSP Servo
AL017 ALM
EEPROM accesses EEPROM. Off
Abnormal signal The encoder output exceeds the rated Servo
AL018 ALM Off
output output frequency.
Serial
Servo
AL019 Communication RS-232/485 communication is in error ALM Off
Error
Serial
Servo
AL020 Communication RS-232/485 communication time out WARN
On
Time Out
Main Circuit
RST power cable is loose or there is no Servo
AL022 Power Lack WARN
power. Off
Phase
Early Warning Servo
AL023 Early warning for overload WARN
for Overload On
Encoder initial Servo
The magnetic field of the encoder U, V,
AL024 magnetic field ALM
W signal is in error. Off
error
The Internal of
The internal memory of the encoder and Servo
AL025 the Encoder is in ALM Off
the internal counter are in error.
Error
Unreliable
The error of the internal data has been Servo
AL026 internal data of ALM
detected for three times continuously. Off
the encoder
The Internal of
Servo
AL027 the Motor is in The encoder reset error ALM
Off
Error
Encoder voltage
Charging circuit of the servo drive is not
error or the
removed and the battery voltage is Servo
AL028 internal of the ALM
higher than the specification (> 3.8 V) or Off
encoder is in
error the encoder signal is in error.
Servo
AL029 Gray code error Absolute position is in error. ALM
Off
The motor crashes the equipment,
Motor Crash Servo
AL030 reaches the torque of P1-57 and ALM
Error Off
exceeds the time set by P1-58.
Incorrect wiring
of the motor Incorrect wiring of the motor power line Servo
AL031 ALM
power line U, V, U, V, W, and GND or disconnection. Off
W, GND
10-2
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting ASDA-A2
Corresponding Servo
DO Status
Internal 1. Internal communication error of the
communication absolute encoder Servo
AL034 ALM
of the encoder is 2. Internal error of other type of Off
in error encoder
Encoder
temperature Encoder temperature exceeds the Servo
AL035 ALM
exceeds the protective range. Off
protective range
Excessive
Deviation of Full Excessive Deviation of Full Closed-loop Servo
AL040
Closed-loop Position Control. ALM Off
Position Control
Communication
Servo
AL041 of linear scale is Linear scale communication is cut off. ALM
Off
breakdown.
Analog input The analog voltage is over than the Servo
AL042 ALM
voltage error setting value of P1-83. Off
Warning of servo When the servo drive function
Servo
AL044 drive function overloads, it might bring the abnormality WARN
On
overload of motion control, such as PR or E-Cam.
The setting of E-gear ratio exceeds the
Wrong setting of range (1/50~25600). Thus, when cycling Servo
AL045 ALM
E-gear ratio power on the servo drive, an alarm off
occurs.
Due to battery undervoltage or the
The absolute Servo
AL060 failure of power supply, the encoder lost WARN
position is lost On
the internal record.
Encoder under The voltage of the absolute encoder is Servo
AL061 WARN
voltage lower than the specification. On
The multi-turn of
The multi-turn of absolute encoder
absolute Servo
AL062 exceeds the maximum range: -32768 ~ WARN
encoder On
+32767.
overflows
Encoder Encoder temperature exceeds the
AL067 temperature warning level. (But it is still within the WARN N/A
warning protective range.)
Absolute data
The sequence is wrong when reading Servo
AL068 transmitted via WARN
the absolute position via DIO. On
I/O is in error
Wrong motor Incremental motor is not allowed to Servo
AL069 ALM
type activate the absolute function. Off
10-3
Corresponding Servo
DO Status
The absolute origin coordinate has not
been created. The possible causes
The absolute
might be:
coordinate has Servo
AL06A 1. The motor is used for the first time. WARN
not been On
2. The battery had run dry but has
initialized
replaced a new one causing the loss of
absolute position.
Encoder does
not complete the
Command is not completed when the Servo
AL070 command which WARN
barcode is written to the encoder. Off
is issued by
servo drive
When the encoder is powered by the
servo drive: the speed is over 8,800 rpm
Encoder or the acceleration is over 1×105 rad/s2; Servo
AL072 ALM
overspeed when the encoder is powered by the Off
battery: the speed is over 10,000 rpm or
the acceleration is over 4×103 rad/s2.
An error occurs when the encoder is
Encoder memory Servo
AL073 reading data from or writing data to ALM
error Off
EEPROM.
Absolute
encoder single Absolute encoder single turn position Servo
AL074 ALM
turn position error. Off
error
Absolute
Servo
AL075 encoder position Absolute encoder position error. ALM
Off
error
Encoder Encoder internal error (internal Servo
AL077 ALM
computing error computing error). Off
The encoder is not cycled after the
Encoder Servo
AL079 parameter is written, so the parameter ALM
parameter error Off
value is not updated.
Loss of encoder Servo
AL07A Loss of the encoder Z pulse position. ALM
Z pulse Off
Encoder memory Servo
AL07B Encoder memory is busy. ALM
busy Off
Command to
clear the
The command to clear the absolute
absolute position Servo
AL07C position is issued when the motor speed WARN
is issued when On
is over 200 rpm.
the motor speed
is over 200 rpm
Servo drive
AL07C occurs and is not cleared before
power is cycled Servo
AL07D the power is cycled on the servo drive, ALM
before AL07C is Off
and then the motor stops operating.
cleared
10-4
Corresponding Servo
DO Status
Encoder clearing Number of attempts to clear the encoder Servo
AL07E ALM
procedure error exceeds the maximum. Off
When the output current from servo
Servo drive
drive exceeds the setting level, AL083
outputs Servo
AL083 will be triggered to protect IGBT. This ALM
excessive Off
could avoid IGBT to be burned out
current
because of the excessive current.
Regeneration Servo
AL085 Regeneration control error. ALM
setting error off
When the servo drive detects no
regenerative power, but other
Input voltage is regenerative energy (such as Servo
AL086 ALM
too high interference) is input to the servo drive, Off
or voltage input is higher than the
permissible rated voltage.
The servo drive
As for the 220V 5.5 kW model or above,
does not
if the value of P1-53 is not 0 and the
connect to Servo
AL095 external regenerative resistor or the WARN
external On
brake is not connected, the alarm
regenerative
occurs.
resistor
EEPROM has not been reset after DSP
firmware is upgraded. To clear the
DSP Firmware Servo
AL099 alarm, set P2-08 to 30 first and then set ALM
Upgrade Off
it to 28. Next, cycle power on the servo
drive.
STO function is Safe torque off function (STO) is Servo
AL500 ALM
enabled enabled. Off
STO_A loss Loss of STO_A signal or STO_A and
Servo
AL501 (signal loss or STO_B signals are not synchronized for ALM
Off
signal error) more than 1 sec.
STO_B loss Loss of STO_B signal or STO_A and
Servo
AL502 (signal loss or STO_B signals are not synchronized for ALM
Off
signal error) more than 1 sec.
STO self- Servo
AL503 STO self-diagnostic error ALM Off
diagnostic error
10-5
10.2 Alarm of CANopen Communication
Corrective Corresponding Servo

Actions DO Status
SDO Rx Buffer overflow NMT: Reset
CANopen SDO
(receives more than two node or Servo
AL111 receives buffer ALM
SDOs within 1 0x6040.Fault On
overflow
millisecond) Reset
PDO Rx Buffer overflow
CANopen PDO (receives more than two
Same as Servo
AL112 receives buffer same PDOs of the ALM
above On
overflow COBID within 1
millisecond)
Index error
The specified Index in
occurs when Same as Servo
AL121 the message does not ALM
accessing above On
exist.
CANopen PDO
Sub-Index error
The specified Sub-Index
AL122 in the message does not ALM
accessing above On
exist.
CANopen PDO
Data Size error
The data length in the
AL123 message does not match ALM
accessing above On
to the specified object.
CANopen PDO
Data range error The data value in the
occurs when message is over the Same as Servo
AL124 ALM
accessing range of the specified above On
CANopen PDO object.
CANopen PDO The specified object in
Same as Servo
AL125 is read-only and the message is write- ALM
above On
write-protected protected.
CANopen PDO The specified object in
Same as Servo
AL126 is not allowed in the message does not ALM
above On
PDO support PDO
The specified object in
CANopen PDO
the message is write- Same as Servo
AL127 is write-protected ALM
protected when Servo above On
when Servo On
ON.
An error occurs when
Error occurs loading the default value
when reading via ROM at start-up. All Same as Servo
AL128 ALM
CANopen PDO objects of CAN returns to above On
via EEPROM the default value
automatically.
10-6

Actions DO Status
Error occurs
when writing Same as Servo
AL129 saving the current value ALM
CANopen PDO above On
into ROM.
via EEPROM
The quantity of the data
inside ROM is over the
The accessing
planned space. It is
address of
probably because the
EEPROM is out Same as Servo
AL130 software has been ALM
of range when above On
updated. The data inside
using CANopen
ROM is stored by the old
PDO.
version. Thus, it cannot
be used.
CRC of It indicates that the data
EEPROM stored in ROM has been
calculation error damaged. All objects of Same as Servo
AL131 ALM
occurs when CAN will return to the above On
using CANopen default setting
PDO automatically.
When entering
Enter the
parameters via CAN, the
incorrect
parameters are Same as Servo
AL132 password when ALM
password-protected. above On
using CANopen
Users have to enter the
PDO
password to unlock.
Heartbeat or
Heartbeat or Same as
AL170 NodeGuarding WARN On
NodeGuarding error above
error
Heartbeat or
Heartbeat or Same as
AL180 NodeGuarding ALM On
NodeGuarding error above
error
The communication of
NMT: Reset
Abnormal CAN CAN Bus is breakdown Servo
AL185 node or re- ALM
Bus hardware or Error Rx/Tx Counter is On
servo on
over 128.
CAN data transmission
AL186 CAN Bus off - ALM On
error
10-7
10.3 Alarm of Motion Control

Actions DO Status
DI.ARST,
CANopen
An error occurs An error occurs when
0x1011 Servo
AL201 when loading loading data via WARN
Restore On
CANopen data EEPROM.
default
parameter
DI.ARST,
The group of PR#8 CANopen
Parameter group
command source, 0x1011 Servo
AL207 of PR#8 is out of WARN
P_Grp exceeds the Restore On
range
range. default
parameter
DI.ARST,
Parameter number CANopen
The parameter
P_Idx of PR#8 0x1011 Servo
AL209 number of PR#8 WARN
command exceeds the Restore On
is out of range
range. default
parameter
DI.ARST,
Write parameters via PR
CANopen
The parameter #8: the value is over the
0x1011 Servo
AL213 setting of PR#8 range. Please refer to WARN
Restore On
is wrong Chapter 7 for detailed
default
description.
parameter
Write Write parameters via PR
DI.Alm Reset Servo
AL215 parameters: procedure: the WARN
or P0-01= 0 On
read-only parameter is read-only
Write parameters via PR
Write
procedure: it is write- Correct the
parameters: Servo
AL217 protected when the PR command WARN
parameter On
servo is ON or the input and parameter
locked
data is unreasonable.
DI.ARST,
The setting of CANopen
The setting of monitor
monitor item of 0x1011 Servo
AL231 item of PR#8, Sys_Var WARN
PR#8 is out of Restore On
exceeds the range.
range default
parameter
Feedback position
Execute the
PR command counter overflows and Servo
AL235 homing WARN
overflows executes the absolute On
procedure
positioning command.
10-8

Actions DO Status
When executing
indexing function, if the
index positioning
Indexing command is directly DI.Alm Reset
Servo
AL237 coordinate is executing before or write 0 into WARN
On
undefined defining the start point of P0-01
index coordinate, the
alarm will therefore
occur.
The PR positioning is DI.Alm Reset
PR positioning triggered, and the or write 0 into Servo
AL245 ALM
timeout execution of positioning P0-01; cycle Off
command is too long. the power
The number of The number of triggered DI.Alm Reset

or write 0 into Servo
AL249 PR command PR command exceeds ALM
P0-01; cycle Off
exceeds the limit the limit. the power
The fault will
be cleared
The value of position
automatically
Forward command is bigger than Servo
AL283 when the WARN
Software Limit forward software limit On
motor
(P5-08).
operates
backwards.
The fault will
be cleared
The value of position
automatically
Reverse command is smaller Servo
AL285 when the WARN
Software Limit than reverse software On
motor
limit (P5-09).
operates
backwards.
NMT: Reset
Feedback
Feedback position node or Servo
AL289 position counter WARN
counter overflows. 0x6040.Fault On
overflows
Reset
Servo OFF when the
Same as Servo
AL291 Servo OFF error motion path is WARN
above On
incomplete.
CANopen IP mode fails
CANopen fails to Same as Servo
AL301 to synchronize with the WARN
synchronize above On
controller.
The
The synchronized
synchronized
signal, SYNC of Same as Servo
AL302 signal of WARN
CANopen is sent too above On
CANopen is sent
fast.
too fast
10-9

Actions DO Status
The
The synchronized
synchronized
signal, SYNC of Same as Servo
AL303 signal of WARN
CANopen has not been above On
CANopen is sent
received in time.
too slow
CANopen IP Command cannot be
Same as Servo
AL304 command is issued in CANopen IP WARN
above On
failed mode.
SYNC Period is CANopen 301 Obj Same as Servo
AL305 WARN
in error 0x1006 Data Error. above On
DI(0x47) is rising-edge
Emergency stop
triggered. When the Cycle the Mode B: WARN Servo
AL35F (during
speed reaches 0, power Mode C: ALM On
deceleration)
AL3CF occurs.
Please refer to the
description of parameter
Position P1-48.
DI.Alm Reset Servo
AL380 Deviation Alarm After DO.MC_OK is ON, WARN
or P0-01= 0 On
for DO: MC_OK DO.MC_OK becomes
OFF because DO.
TPOS turns OFF.
After AL35F has
Cycle the Mode B: WARN Servo
AL3CF Emergency stop occurred, the speed
power Mode C: ALM Off
reaches 0.
This alarm occurs when
you use the
communication type
servo drives (CANopen,
DMCNET, and
Absolute index EtherCAT) with Execute
coordinate incremental type motors homing Servo
AL3F1 ALM
undefined and position overflow procedure Off
occurs, and you send an
absolute positioning
command without first
executing the homing
procedure.
Adjust the
The setting value of
value of P2-52
Index P2-52 is set too small
AL400 to the ALM Off
coordinates error and causes index
appropriate
coordinates error.
one
NMT Reset NMT:Reset
NMT Reset command is
command is node or
AL401 received when Servo ALM Off
received when 0x6040.Fault
On.
Servo On Reset
10-10
Re-adjust the
Value of PR The setting value of P1-
value of P1-22
AL404 special filter 22 causes inner position ALM Off
until it is
setting is too big error to overflow.
appropriate.
Do not
AL555 System Failure DSP processing error N/A N/A
Switch
Note:
If the alarm occurs and is different from the alarm showed in Alarm of Servo Drive, Alarm of
CANopen Communication, and Alarm of Motion Control, please contact the distributors or
technical personnel.
10-11
10.4 Causes and Corrective Actions
Alarm Display
AL001：Over current
Causes Checking Method Corrective Actions
Check if the wiring between the Eliminate the short circuit and keep
The drive output is short-
motor and the drive is correct and metal conductor from being
circuited.
see if the wire is short-circuited. exposed.
Check if the wiring steps are correct
The motor wiring is in Rewiring by following the wiring
when connecting the motor to the
error. description from the user manual.
drive.
The temperature of the heat sink is Send the drive back to the
IGBT is abnormal.
abnormal. distributors or contact Delta.
The control parameter Check if the setting value exceeds Setting back to the default setting
setting is in error. the default setting. and then gradually adjust the value.
Check if the command changes Less steep command used or filter
Unreasonable command
greatly. applying to smooth command.
AL002：Over voltage
Re-calculate the value for the
A wrong regenerative
regenerative resistor, and reset the
resistor is selected or the Check the connections for the
values of P1-52 and P1-53. If this
external regenerative regenerative resistor.
does not clear the alarm, please
resistor is not connected.
send the servo drive back to Delta.
The input voltage of the Use the voltmeter to see if the input
main circuit is higher voltage of the main circuit is within Apply to the correct power supply
than the rated allowable the rated allowable voltage value. or serial voltage regulator.
voltage. (please refer to section 11.1)
Wrong power input Use the voltmeter to see if the
Apply to the correct power supply
(incorrect power power system matches the
or serial adaptor.
system) specification.
Use the voltmeter to see if the input
The hardware of the voltage of the main circuit is within Send the drive back to the
servo drive malfunctions the rated allowable voltage value distributors or contact Delta.
but still shows the error.
AL003：Under voltage
The input voltage of the
main circuit is lower than Check if the input voltage wiring of
Re-confirm the voltage wiring.
the rated allowable the main circuit is normal.
voltage.
No power supply for the Use the voltmeter to see if the
Check the power switch.
main circuit. voltage of the main circuit is normal.
Wrong power input Use the voltmeter to see if the
Apply to the correct power supply
(incorrect power power system matches the
or serial adaptor.
system) specification.
10-12
AL004：Motor Combination Error

The encoder is
The encoder is abnormal. Change the motor.
damaged.
The encoder is loose. Check the encoder connector. Install the motor again.
Motor Combination Error Connect to the right motor. Change the motor.
AL005：Regeneration Error
Re-calculate the value for the
A wrong regenerative
regenerative resistor, and reset the
resistor is selected or the Check the connections for the
values of P1-52 and P1-53. If this
external regenerative regenerative resistor.
does not clear the alarm, please
resistor is not connected.
send the servo drive back to Delta.
Parameter P1-53 is not
Set parameter P1-53 of
set to zero when the Check if parameter P1-53 of
regenerative resistor to zero when
regenerative resistor is regenerative resister is set to zero.
it is not applying.
not in use.
Check the setting values of
Wrong parameter setting Correctly reset the setting.
parameters P1-52 and P1-53.
AL006：Overload
The load is over the
rated range and the Set parameter P0-02 to 11 and see
Increase the motor capacity or
servo drive is in a if the average torque [%] is over
reduce the load.
persistent overload 100% all the time.
condition.
1. Check if there is any mechanical
1. Adjust the gain value of the
The setting of the control vibration.
control circuit.
system parameter is 2. Check if the acceleration /
2. Slow down the acceleration /
inappropriate. deceleration constant are set too
deceleration setting time.
fast.
Wrong wiring of the Check the wiring of U, V, and W
Correct the wiring.
motor and the encoder. and the encoder.
The encoder of the motor
Send the drive back to the distributors or contact Delta.
is defective.
10-13
AL007：Overspeed
A dramatic change in Use the scope to check if the signal Adjust the signal changing rate or
speed of analog voltage is abnormal. enable the filter function
Check if the setting of parameter
Inappropriate parameter Correctly set parameter P2-34 (the
P2-34 is too small (the condition of
setting condition of over-speed warning).
over-speed warning).
1. Check if DI.TRQLM (torque 1. Disable the torque limit DI.
limit) is used.
2. Check if the default torque limit 2. Disable the default setting.
Torque limit
of P1-02 is enabled.
3. Check if the torque limit setting 3. P1-12 ~ P1-14 = 100%
in P1-12 ~ P1-14 is enabled.
AL008：Abnormal Pulse Command

The pulse command
Use the scope to check if the input
frequency is higher than Correctly set the input pulse
frequency is over the rated input
the rated input frequency.
frequency.
frequency.
AL009：Excessive Deviation of Position Command

Check the setting value of
Increase the setting value of P2-35
The maximum position parameter P2-35 (The warning
(The warning condition of
deviation is set too low condition of excessive position
excessive position deviation).
deviation).
The setting of the gain Check if the setting value is
Correctly adjust the gain value.
value is too small. appropriate.
The torque limit is too Correctly adjust the torque limit
Check the torque limit value.
low. value.
Reduce the external load or
Excessive external load Check the external load.
evaluate the motor capacity again
Improper setting of Make sure if the proportion of P1-44
Correctly setup the E-gear ratio.
E-gear ratio and P1-45 is appropriate.
AL011：Encoder Error
Check if the wiring follows the
Wrong wiring of the
suggested wiring of the user Correct the wiring.
encoder
manual.
Check the drive connector of CN2
The encoder is loose Install the encoder again.
and encoder
Check if the connection between
Bad connection of the
CN2 of the drive and the encoder of Reconnect the wiring.
encoder
the servo motor is loose.
The encoder is
Check if the motor is damaged. Change the motor.
damaged.
10-14
AL012：Adjustment Error
The analog input contact Measure if the voltage of the analog
Correctly ground the analog input
is incorrectly set back to input contact is the same as the
contact.
zero. ground voltage.
If the error still occurs after reset,
The detection device is
Reset the power supply. send the drive back to the
damaged.
distributors or contact Delta.
AL013：Emergency Stop
The emergency stop Check if the emergency stop button
Activate emergency stop.
button is pressed. is enabled.
AL014：Reverse Limit Error

Reverse limit switch is
Check if the limit switch is enabled. Enable the reverse limit switch.
activated.
The servo system is Check the control parameter and Re-adjust the parameter or
unstable. inertia ratio. evaluate the motor capacity.
AL015：Forward Limit Error

Forward limit switch is
Check if the limit switch is enabled. Enable the forward limit switch.
activated.
The servo system is Check the control parameter and Re-adjust the parameter or re-
unstable. inertia ratio. estimate the motor capacity.
AL016：IGBT Overheat
The load is over the
rated range and the
Check if it is overloading or the Increase the motor capacity or
servo drive is in a
motor current is too high. reduce the load.
persistent overload
condition.
The drive output is short-
Check the drive output wiring. Correct the wiring.
circuited.
AL017：Abnormal EEPROM
Press the SHIFT Key on the panel The fault occurs when applying to
and it shows EXGAB. the power. It means one of the
X = 1, 2, 3 parameters is over the reasonable
It is in error when DSP G＝group code of the parameter range. Please re-power on after
accesses EEPROM. adjusting.
AB＝hexadecimal of the parameter
If it shows E320A, it means it is The fault occurs in normal
parameter P2-10; if it shows E3610, operation. It means it is in error
10-15

it means it is parameter P6-16. when writing the parameter. The
Please check the parameter. alarm can be cleared by DI.ARST.
The fault occurs in parameter reset.
Abnormal hidden Press the SHIFT Key on the panel The setting of the drive is wrong.
parameter and it shows E100X. Please set the correct type of the
drive.
The fault occurs when the servo is
on. Usually it is because the data in
Data in ROM is Press the SHIFT Key on the panel ROM is damaged or there is no
damaged. and it shows E0001. data in ROM. Please send the drive
back to the distributors or contact
Delta.
AL018：Abnormal Signal Output

Check the fault records (P4-00 ~
The encoder is in error
P4-05). See if the encoder error Conduct the corrective actions of
and thus causes
occurs (AL011, AL024, AL025, and AL011, AL024, AL025, and AL026.
abnormal signal output.
AL026).
Check if the following conditions Correctly set parameter P1-76 and
The output pulse produce: P1-46:
exceeds the hardware P1-76 < Motor Speed or P1-76 > Motor Speed or
allowable range. Motor Speed Motor Speed
 P1  46  4  19.8  10 6  P1  46  4  19.8  10 6
60 60
AL019：Serial Communication Error

Improper setting of the
Check the setting value of
communication Correctly set the parameter value.
communication parameter.
parameter
Incorrect communication Correctly set the communication
Check the communication address.
address address.
Incorrect communication
Check the accessing value. Correctly set the value.
value
AL020：Serial Communication Time Out

Improper setting of the
Check the parameter setting. Correctly set the value.
time-out parameter
The drive hasn’t received
Check if the communication cable is
the communication Correct the wiring.
loose or broken.
command for a long time.
10-16
AL022：Main circuit power leak phase

Check if RST power cable is loose
or there is no power. This alarm
occurs when the 1.5 kW (or below)
Make sure it applies to the power. If
A2 servo drive is not connected to
The main circuit power is the issue persists, please send the
the three-phase power supply. For
abnormal. drive back to the distributors or
2 kW (or above) A2 servo drives,
contact Delta.
the alarm occurs when one single
phase is not connected to the power
supply.
AL023：Early warning for overload

1. Please refer to the corrective
actions of AL006.
1. Check if it is used in an overload
condition. 2. Please increase the setting
Early warning for
overload value of parameter P1-56. Or
2. Check if the value of parameter
set the value over 100 and
P1-56 is set too small.
deactivate the overload warning
function.
AL024：Encoder initial magnetic field error

1. Check if the servo motor is
properly grounded.
The initial magnetic field
of the encoder is in error 2. Check if the encoder cable
If the issue persists, please send
separates from the power supply
(Signal, U, V, W of the the drive back to the distributors or
or the high-current circuit to avoid
encoder magnetic field contact Delta.
the interference.
is in error.)
3. Check if the shielding cables are
used for the encoder.
AL025：The internal of the encoder is in error

1. Please connect the UVW
1. Check if the servo is properly connector (color green) to the
grounded. heat sink of the servo drive.
The internal of the
2. Check if the encoder cable 2. Please check if the encoder
encoder is in error.
separates from the power supply cable separates from the power
(The internal memory
or the high-current circuit to avoid supply or the high-current circuit.
and the internal counter
the interference. 3. Please use shielding mesh.
are in error.)
3. Check if the shielding cables are 4. If issue persists, please send the
used for the encoder. drive back to the distributors or
contact Delta.
When powered on, the
When powered on, please make
motor operates because Make sure the motor shaft does not
sure the motor shaft stands still and
of the mechanical inertia move when power is turned on.
will not operate.
or other causes.
10-17
AL026：Unreliable internal data of the encoder

1. Check if the servo is properly connector (color green) to the
grounded. heat sink of the servo drive.
The encoder is in error. 2. Check if the encoder cable 2. Please check if the encoder
(Errors occur in the separates from the power supply cable separates from the power
internal data for three or the high-current circuit to avoid supply or the high-current circuit.
consecutive times.) the interference. 3. Please use shielding mesh.
3. Check if the shielding cables are 4. If the issue persists, please send
used in the wiring of the encoder. the drive back to the distributors
or contact Delta.
AL027：The internal of the motor is in error
1. Check if the encoder cable is 1. Check if the encoder signal cable
firmly connected.
works normally.
2. Check if the power supply for the
2. Use shielded cable for the
The internal reset of the encoder is stable.
encoder signal cable.
encoder is in error. 3. Check if the operation
3. If the situation is not improving,
temperature is over 95°C please send the drive back to the
(203°F). distributors or contact Delta.
AL028：Encoder voltage error or the internal of the encoder is in error

1. Check if the charging circuit According to the procedure of Over
Battery voltage is too exists in the servo drive. voltage to check. When corrective
high. 2. Check if the battery is correctly actions are done, AL028 will be
installed. (voltage > 3.8V) cleared automatically.
1. If the situation is not improving,
please send the drive back to the
1. Check if it is the absolute type
encoder.
2. Check if the servo is properly
connector (color green) to the
grounded.
heat sink of the servo drive.
The internal encoder is in 3. Check if the encoder cable
error. 3. Please check if the encoder
separates from the power supply
cable separates from the power
or the high-current circuit to avoid
supply or the high-current circuit.
the interference.
4. Please use shielding mesh. If the
4. Check if the shielding cables are
situation is not improving, please
used in the wiring of the encoder.
send the drive back to the
AL029：Gray code error

Re-power on to operate the motor
Absolute position is in If the alarm occurs again, please
and check if the alarm will occur
error. change the encoder.
again.
10-18
AL030：Motor Crash Error

1. If it is enabled by mistake, please
set P1-57 to zero.
1. Check if P1-57 is enabled. 2. According to the actual torque
2. Check if P1-57 is set too small setting, if the value is set too
Motor Crash Error and the time of P1-58 is set too small, the alarm will be triggered
short. by mistake. However, if the value
is set too big, it will lose the
function of protection.
AL031：Incorrect wiring of the motor power line U, V, W

The wiring of U, V, W of
the motor is incorrect
connected or the
connection is breakdown. Check if U, V, W of the motor is Follow the user manual to correctly
(Function of connection incorrect connected or the wire U, V, and W and make sure it
detection can be enabled connection is breakdown. is grounded.
or disabled via P2-65 Bit
9. Its default setting is to
disable the function.)
AL034：Internal communication of the encoder is in error

1. Internal communication error of
the absolute encoder
2. Internal error of other type of
Conduct the wiring of the battery
Internal communication of encoder
3. Incorrect wiring of the battery again and then cycle power on the
the encoder is in error.
cable. system.
4. Check the wiring.
5. Check the voltage.
AL035：Encoder temperature exceeds the protective range

1. Improve heat dissipation or
reduce the loading of operation.
The temperature should be
Encoder temperature
Check the setting: set the value of lower than 100°C (212°F).
exceeds the protective
P0-02 to 120 to display the 2. If the encoder’s temperature is
range, above 100°C
temperature. higher than the motor’s (more
(212°F).
than 30°C (86°F)). Please send
the motor back to the
distributors.
10-19
AL040：Excessive deviation of full closed-loop position control

1. Check if P1-73 is set too small.
Excessive deviation of 1. Increase the value of P1-73.
2. Check if the connector is loose
full closed-loop position 2. Check if the connection is
or there is any connection
control well connected.
problem of other mechanism.
AL041：Communication of linear scale is breakdown

The communication of Check the communication of linear Check the communication of linear
linear scale is breakdown scale. scale again.
AL042：Analog input voltage error

Check all analog input voltages.
The analog input voltage
Check if analog input voltage is too Check if there is any problem about
is higher than the value of
high. the sources of analog speed
P1-83.
commands.
AL044：Warning of servo drive function overload

Warning of servo drive Setting P2-66 Bit4 to 1 can disable
N/A
function overload the display of this alarm.
AL045： Wrong setting of E-gear ratio

Setting of E-gear ratio is
Check if the setting of E-gear ratio Modify the range of E-gear ratio
wrong when power on the
is within the range (1/50~25600). and cycle power on the servo drive.
servo drive
10-20
AL060：The absolute position is lost

After changing the battery, conduct
homing procedure again. Please
Check if the voltage of the battery
Battery under voltage refer to the description of creating
is lower than 2.8V.
the absolute origin coordinate in
Chapter 12.
Do no change or remove the Conduct homing procedure again.
The battery is replaced
battery when the power is OFF, Please refer to the description of
when the main power of
which is controlled by the servo creating the absolute coordinate in
the servo drive is off.
drive. Chapter 12.
1. Install the battery.
After activating the 2. Check the wiring between the Conduct homing procedure. Please
absolute function, the battery pack and the power refer to the description of creating
absolute origin coordinate cable of the servo drive. the absolute origin coordinate in
has not been created. 3. Check the wiring of the Chapter 12.
encoder.
1. Check the wiring of the Connect or repair the wiring of the

encoder. battery so as to supply the power to
Poor connection or
the encoder. Conduct homing
disconnection of the 2. Check the wiring between the procedure again. Please refer to the
battery power circuit battery pack and the power description of creating the absolute
cable of the servo drive. origin coordinate in Chapter 12.
AL061：Encoder under voltage

1. Check if the voltage of the
battery on the panel is lower Do not change the battery when the
than 3.1V (tentative power is ON which is controlled by
Battery under voltage specification). the servo drive. After you change
2. Measure if the voltage of the the battery, AL061 will be cleared
battery is lower than 3.1V automatically.
(tentative specification).
AL062：The multi-turn of absolute encoder overflows

Check if the motor’s number of Conduct homing procedure again.
Motor’s rotation cycle
turns while operating is within the Please refer to the description of
exceeds the allowable
range between -32768 and creating absolute origin coordinate
range.
+32767. in Chapter 12.
10-21
AL067：Encoder temperature warning

1. Improve heat dissipation or
reduce the loading of operation.
Encoder temperature
The temperature should be
exceeds the warning
Check the setting: Set the value of lower than 100°C (212°F).
level. (But it is still within
P0-02 to 120 to display the 2. If the encoder’s temperature is
the protective range 85°C
temperature. higher than the motor’s (more
to 100°C, 185°F to
than 30°C (86°F)). Please
212°F.)
send the motor back to the
distributors.
AL068：Absolute data transmitted via I/O is in error

1. Switch OFF DI ABSQ until DO
ABSR is OFF. Correct the reading sequence of
Sequence error
2. Switch ON ABSQ until DO I/O.
ABSR is ON.
After switching ON DO ABSR (the
Check if the time between absolute position data is ready),
switching ON DO ABSR and read DO ABSD and switch ON DI
Reading time out
switching ON ABSQ exceeds ABSQ within 200 ms so as to
200 ms. inform the servo drive data reading
is completed.
AL069：Wrong motor type

1. Check if the motor is If the user desires to use the
Incremental motor is not incremental or absolute absolute function, please choose an
allowed to activate the encoder. absolute motor. If not, please set
absolute function.
2. Check parameter P2-69. parameter P2-69 to 0.
AL06A：The absolute coordinate has not been initialized

Voltage of the battery is
normal, but the encoder
loses number of
revolutions. 1. Check if the absolute origin
1. The motor is used for coordinate has been created. 1. Create the absolute origin
the first time. 2. Check the encoder wiring. coordinate.
2. The battery had run 3. Check the connection between 2. Ensure the battery wiring and
dry but has replaced a the battery box and the servo execute homing again.
new one. drive.
3. Poor connection or
disconnection of the
battery power circuit.
10-22
AL070：Encoder does not complete the command which is issued by servo drive

The servo drive has not
completely written
barcode into the encoder Check if the encoder wiring is
Correctly connect the encoder
or the encoder does not correct or there is any loose
wiring again.
complete the command connection.
issued by the servo
drive.
AL072：Encoder overspeed

1. Make sure the UVW connector
1. Check if the motor is well is grounded to the heat sink of
When encoder is grounded. the servo drive.
powered by the servo 2. Check if the encoder cable is 2. Make sure the encoder signal
drive: the speed is over separated from the power cable is separated from the
8,800 rpm or the supply or any high-current cable power supply or any high-
acceleration exceeds to avoid interference. current cable.
1×105 rad/s2. 3. Check if the encoder uses 3. Use shielded cable for the
When the encoder is shielded cable. encoder.
powered by the battery: 4. Check the motor speed. When 4. Make sure the motor speed is
the speed is over the application has a high within the rated range.
10,000 rpm or the reduction ratio and the 5. Create the absolute origin
acceleration is over connecting mechanism is coordinate again.
4×103 rad/s2. moved, it results in motor 6. If the issue persists, please
overspeed. send your servo drive back to
the distributor or contact Delta.
AL073：Encoder memory error

is grounded to the heat sink of
the servo drive.
1. Check if the motor is well
grounded. 2. Make sure the encoder signal
cable is separated from the
2. Check if the encoder cable is
An error occurs when the power supply or any high-
separated from the power
encoder is reading data current cable.
supply or any high-current cable
from or writing data to 3. Use shielded cable for the
to avoid interference.
EEPROM. encoder.
3. Check if the encoder uses
shielded cable. 4. Make sure the motor speed is
within the rated range.
4. Check the motor speed.
5. If the issue persists, please
send your servo drive back to
10-23
AL074：Absolute encoder single turn position error

the servo drive.
2. Make sure the encoder signal
grounded.
power supply or any high-
Absolute encoder single current cable.
turn position error 3. Use shielded cable for the
encoder.
4. Make sure the motor speed is
shielded cable.
AL075：Absolute encoder position error

the servo drive.
Absolute encoder position current cable.
error to avoid interference. 3. Use shielded cable for the
encoder.
AL077：Encoder computing error

the servo drive.
2. Make sure the encoder signal
grounded.
Encoder internal error current cable.
(internal computing error) 3. Use shielded cable for the
encoder.
4. Make sure the motor speed is
shielded cable.
10-24
AL079：Encoder parameter error

The encoder is not cycled
after the parameter is Check if the parameter is written to
Cycle power on the servo drive.
written, so the parameter the encoder.
value is not updated.
AL07A：Loss of encoder Z pulse

1. Check if the motor is well the servo drive.
2. Check if the encoder cable is cable is separated from the
Loss of encoder Z pulse separated from the power power supply or any high-
position supply or any high-current cable current cable.
to avoid interference. 3. Use shielded cable for the
3. Check if the encoder uses encoder.
shielded cable. 4. If the issue persists, please
AL07B：Encoder memory busy

the servo drive.
current cable.
Encoder memory is busy. supply or any high-current cable
to avoid interference. 3. Use shielded cable for the
encoder.
AL07C：Command to clear the absolute position is issued when the motor speed is over
200 rpm

The command to clear
Do not issue a command to clear Follow the procedure for clearing
the absolute position is
the absolute position when the the absolute position to clear this
issued when the motor
motor speed is over 200 rpm. alarm.
speed is over 200 rpm.
10-25
AL07D：Servo drive power is cycled before AL07C is cleared

AL07C occurs and is not
cleared before the power Use DI.ARST to clear the alarm.
Check if the encoder parameter is
is cycled on the servo Once this alarm is cleared, AL07C
written.
drive, then the motor occurs.
stops operating.
AL07E：Encoder clearing procedure error

If the issue persists, check the
The attempts to clear the
communication quality with the Use DI.ARST to clear the alarm.
encoder exceed the limit.
encoder.
AL083：Servo drive outputs excessive current

Check the configuration of motor
Replace by new UVW cable and
power cable and connector cable.
UVW cable is short- avoid the metal conductor being
See if the metal wire is exposed or
circuited. exposed so as to eliminate the
AWG is worn and causes short
short circuit.
circuit of UVW cable.
1. If applying non-standard power
cable recommended by Delta,
please check if the wiring
sequence of UVW cable is
Please refer to the description of
correct.
Wrong motor wiring wiring in Chapter 3 and conduct the
2. Check if there is any problem of
wiring again.
lack phase when connecting
UVW from servo to motor
(unconnected or wrong
connection).
Please refer to Chapter 3 and
Analog signal (GND) Check if the GND of analog signal is
conduct the wiring again. GND of
from servo drive is misconnected to another ground
analog signal cannot be grounded
interfered. signal.
with other signals.
10-26
AL085：Regeneration error
Calculate the value of the
Choose wrong
regenerative resistor again and
regenerative resistor or
Check the connection of correctly set the values of P1-52
does not connect to
regenerative resistor. and P1-53. If the issue persists,
external regenerative
please send the drive back to the
resistor.
Parameter P1-53 is not
Set parameter P1-53 of
set to zero when the Check if parameter P1-53 of
regenerative resistor to zero when
regenerative resistor is regenerative resister is set to zero.
it is not applying.
not in use.
Check the setting value of Correctly reset the values of P1-52
Wrong parameter setting
parameters P1-52 and P1-53. and P1-53.
AL086：Input voltage is too high

The servo drive detects
no regenerative power, Use a voltmeter to measure if the
but other regenerative input voltage from the power
energy (such as source is within the permissible Use the correct voltage source or
interference) is input to rated value (see the servo drive connect the voltage regulator in
the servo drive, or specifications). If the voltage series.
voltage input is higher exceeds the rated value, please
than the permissible remove the interference source.
rated voltage.
Check if the issue persists when
the voltmeter detects that the
Servo drive (hardware) Please send the drive back to
voltage from the main circuit is
malfunction distributors or contact Delta.
within the permissible rated
range.
AL095：The servo drive does not connect to external regenerative resistor

1. If wishing to apply regenerative
brake, please connect to
external regenerative resistor.
Then, check if the setting of
The input of regenerative P1-53 is correct.
1. Check if it is connected to
resistor capacity is over 0
regenerative resistor. 2. If not applying to regenerative
and the servo drive does
2. Check if the setting value of brake, please set P1-53 to 0.
not connect to external
P1-53 is 0. 3. If the issue persists after
conducting the above two
steps, please send the drive
back to distributors or contact
Delta.
10-27
AL099：DSP firmware upgrade

Firstly set P2-08 to 30. Then set
Upgrade DSP firmware. Check if the firmware is upgraded. P2-08 to 28, the alarm will be
cleared when cycling power on.
AL111：CANopen SDO receives overflow

SDO Rx Buffer overflow Check if the servo drive receives
NMT: Reset node or 0x6040.Fault
(receives more than two (sends) more than one SDO within
Reset
SDOs within 1 ms) 1 ms.
AL112：CANopen PDO receives overflow

PDO Rx Buffer overflow
Check if the servo drive receives
(receives more than two NMT: Reset node or 0x6040.Fault
(sends) more than one PDO of
PDOs of COBID within Reset
COBID within 1 ms.
one millisecond)
AL121：Index error occurs when accessing CANopen PDO

The specified Index in Check if the Entry Index of PDO
the message does not Mapping is modified when PDO is
Reset
exist. receiving or sending.
AL122：Sub-Index error occurs when accessing CANopen PDO

The specified Sub-Index Check if the Entry Sub-index of
in the message does not PDO Mapping is modified when
Reset
exist. PDO is receiving or sending.
AL123：Data Size error occurs when accessing CANopen PDO

The data length in the Check if the data length of Entry of
message does not match PDO Mapping is modified when
Reset
to the specified object. PDO is receiving or sending.
AL124：Data range error occurs when accessing CANopen PDO

The data value in the
message is over the Check if the written range is wrong NMT: Reset node or 0x6040.Fault
range of the specified when PDO is receiving or sending. Reset
object.
10-28
AL125：CANopen PDO is read-only and write-protected

The specified object in Check if the specified object is read-
the message is write- only when PDO is receiving or
Reset
protected. sending.
AL126：CANopen PDO is not allowed in PDO

The specified object in Check if the specified object allows
the message does not PDO Mapping when PDO is
Reset
support PDO. receiving or sending.
AL127：CANopen PDO is write-protected when Servo On

The specified object in
Check that when PDO is receiving
the message is write- NMT: Reset node or 0x6040.Fault
or sending, if the specified object is
protected when Servo Reset
write-protected when Servo On.
ON.
AL128：Error occurs when reading CANopen PDO via EEPROM

loading the default value When PDO is receiving or sending,
via ROM at start-up. All check if the error occurs because NMT: Reset node or 0x6040.Fault
objects of CAN returns to the specified object reads Reset
the default value EEPROM.
automatically.
AL129：Error occurs when writing CANopen PDO via EEPROM

When PDO is receiving or sending,
check if the error occurs because NMT: Reset node or 0x6040.Fault
saving the current value
the specified object is written into Reset
into ROM.
EEPROM.
AL130：The accessing address of EEPROM is out of range when using CANopen PDO
The quantity of the data
in the ROM is over the
allowable space. It is
Check if the addressing in
probably because the
EEPROM exceeds the range for the NMT: Reset node or 0x6040.Fault
software has been
specified object during PDO Reset
updated. The data in the
receiving or sending.
ROM is stored by the old
version. Thus, it cannot
be used.
10-29
AL131：CRC of EEPROM calculation error occurs when using CANopen PDO

It means the data stored
Check if the specified object would
in ROM is damaged. All
cause CRC calculation error in NMT: Reset node or 0x6040.Fault
CANopen objects
EEPROM when PDO is receiving or Reset
automatically returns to
sending.
the default value.
AL132：Enter the incorrect password when using CANopen PDO

When entering
parameters via CAN,
Check if the specified object enters
parameters are NMT: Reset node or 0x6040.Fault
the wrong password when PDO is
password-protected. Reset
receiving or sending.
Users have to decode
the password first.
AL170：CANopen Heartbeat or NodeGuarding error

CANopen Check if CANopen communication NMT:Reset node or 0x6040.Fault
communication breaks. and connection is normal. Reset
AL180：CANopen Heartbeat or NodeGuarding error

CANopen Check if CANopen communication NMT:Reset node or 0x6040.Fault
communication breaks. and connection is normal. Reset
AL185：Abnormal CAN Bus hardware

1. Check if the communication cable
of CAN Bus is connected.
Abnormal CAN Bus
hardware 2. Check the communication quality. NMT: Reset node or re-servo on
(It is suggested to use common
grounding and shielded cable)
AL186：Bus off
Check if the communication is
Change the communication cable
correctly connected or if there is any
or eliminate the noise.
interference.
CAN Bus transfer error
The number of slave station is
excessive and the communication Lengthen the communication cycle.
cycle period is too short.
10-30
AL201：An error occurs when loading CANopen data

1. If the alarm is cleared when
cycling power on the servo drive,
it means the data error occurs
instantaneously when accessing
in the previous time.
2. If the error still exists after cycling
power on the servo drive, it
means the data in EEPROM is
damaged. It has to enter the
An error occurs when correct value again. The method DI.ARST, CANopen 0x1011
loading CANopen data is as the followings: Restore default parameter
a. If the user desires to enter the
default value, it can set P2-08
to 30, 28 or CANopen object
as 0x1011.
b. If the user desires to enter the
current value, it can set
CANopen object to 0x1010.
(Please refer to CANopen
description.)
AL207：Parameter group of PR#8 is out of the range

Writing parameter via PR
The parameter group of
procedure: The parameter group of
command source DI.Alm Reset or write 0 into P0-01
command source exceeds the
exceeds the range.
range.
AL209：Parameter number of PR#8 is out of the range

The parameter number of
procedure: The parameter number
of command source exceeds the
exceeds the range.
range.
AL213 ~ AL217：An error occurs when writing parameter via PR

AL213: parameter exceeds the
PR commands TYPE 8 range DI.Alm Reset or P0-01 = 0
Error occurs when writing AL215: the parameter is read-only
parameters. Re-adjust PR command and
AL217: Servo On or invalid value
parameters.
10-31
AL231：The setting of monitor item of PR#8 is out of the range

The monitor item of the
procedure: The monitor item
number of command source
exceeds the range.
exceeds the range.
AL235：PR command overflows

Incremental type:
PR mode continuously operates in
one direction and causes feedback
register (FB_PUU) overflows. And
the coordinate system cannot reflect
the correct position. If issuing the
absolute positioning command at
this time, the error will occur.
Absolute type:
The error occurs in following
situations:
1. Feedback register (FB_PUU)
overflows
PR command error 2. After P1-01.Z is modified, the Conduct homing procedure.
system neither returns to the
original point nor conducts
homing procedure.
3. It does not conduct homing
procedure after the E-gear ratio
is modified (P1-44 and P1-45).
4. Returning to the original point is
triggered and the homing
procedure is not complete.
5. When AL060 and AL062 occur,
please use the scope to check if
the feedback position has
overflowed. Check steps 1- 4
above and perform the homing
procedure.
AL237：Indexing coordinate is undefined

1. Before executing indexing
When executing indexing function, please conduct
function, if the index homing first so as to avoid this
positioning command is Indexing coordinate is undefined alarm.
directly executing before and then execute index positioning 2. When the alarm occurs, please
defining the start point of command. use DI:Alm Reset or write 0 into
index coordinate, the P0-01 to clear the alarm.
alarm will therefore occur. 3. The alarm can be cleared when
it is Servo ON.
10-32
AL245：PR Positioning Timeout

PR positioning command Check the causes of not completing
When the alarm occurs, please use
is triggered and the the PR command, such as the
DI:Alm Reset or write 0 into P0-01
execution time for waiting conditions are not set or not
to clear the alarm.
positioning is too long. triggered.
AL249：The number of PR command exceeds the limit

Causes Checking Method Correction Actions
Check if the PR command jumps to
When the alarm occurs, please use
The triggered PR path the path that exceeds the range and
DI:Alm Reset or write 0 into P0-01
exceeds 63. if the PR command format is
to clear the alarm.
correct.
AL283：Forward Software Limit

Forward Software Limit is
determined by the position
command, not the actual feedback
position. It is because the command
will arrive first and then the
feedback. When the protection NMT: Reset node or 0x6040.Fault
Forward software limit
function is activated, the actual Reset
position might not over the limit.
Therefore, setting an appropriate
decelerating time could satisfy the
demand. Please refer to the
description of parameter P5-03.
AL285：Reverse Software Limit

Reverse Software Limit is
determined by the position
command, not the actual feedback
position. It is because the command
will arrive first and then the
feedback. When the protection NMT: Reset node or 0x6040.Fault
Reverse software limit
function is activated, the actual Reset
position might not over the limit.
Therefore, setting an appropriate
decelerating time could satisfy the
demand. Please refer to the
description of parameter P5-03.
10-33
AL289：Feedback position counter overflows

1. Set the gear ratio properly
according to the total traveling
distance of the absolute motor
and the actual application
requirements to avoid the
Feedback position NMT: Reset node or 0x6040.Fault
feedback position counter
counter overflows. Reset
overflow.
2. If you have set P2-69.Z to 1 to
disable the index coordinate
overflow function, set P2-70 [Bit
2] to 1.
AL291：Servo Off error

1. Check if the wiring of DI.SERVO
ON is correct. NMT: Reset node or 0x6040.Fault
Servo Off error
2. Check if the controller switch the Reset
servo to on too early.
AL301：CANopen fails to synchronize

1. Check if the communication
quality of the circuit is bad.
CANopen fails to 2. Check if the controller sends NMT: Reset node or 0x6040.Fault
synchronize. SYNC signal successfully. Reset
3. Check if the setting of P3-09 is
reasonable. (It is better to use
the default value.)
AL302：The synchronized signal of CANopen is sent too fast

1. Check if synchronized cycle
0x1006 is the same as the setting
of controller.
The synchronized signal 2. Check if the setting of P3-09 is
of CANopen is sent too reasonable. (It is better to use the Reset
fast. default value.)
3. Ensure the correct time sequence
of sending packets from the
controller.
10-34
AL303：The synchronized signal of CANopen is sent too slow

1. Check if the communication
quality of the circuit is bad.
2. Check if synchronized cycle
0x1006 is the same as the setting
The synchronized signal of controller.
of CANopen is sent too 3. Check if the setting of P3-09 is
Reset
slow. reasonable. (It is better to use the
default value.)
4. Ensure the correct time sequence
of sending packets from the
controller.
AL304：CANopen IP command fails

The computing time in IP mode
CANopen IP command NMT: Reset node or 0x6040.Fault
takes too long. Please disable the
fails. Reset
USB monitoring function.
AL305：SYNC Period is in error

Examine the content of 0x1006.If
SYNC Period is in error. it is smaller than or equals to 0, the
Reset
alarm will occur.
AL35F： Emergency Stop (during deceleration)

The DI (0x47) is rising-
Check if the DI (0x47) is accidently
edge triggered and the
triggered because of the parameter Cycle power on the servo drive.
motor decelerates to 0
setting.
before AL3CF occurs.
AL380：Position deviation alarm

Please refer to the description of
parameter P1-48.
After DO.MC_OK has been ON,
DO.MC_OK becomes OFF because
DO.MC_OK is ON and
DO.TPOS turns OFF. DI.Alm Reset or P0-01= 0
becomes OFF.
The position of the motor might be
deviated by the external force after
positioning. This alarm can be
cleared by P1-48.Y=0.
10-35
AL3CF： Emergency Stop

Check if the DI (0x47) is accidently
After AL35F occurs, the
triggered because of the parameter Cycle power on the servo drive.
motor decelerates to 0.
setting.
AL3F1： Absolute index coordinate undefined

This alarm occurs when
you use the
communication type
servo drives (CANopen,
DMCNET, and
EtherCAT) with
incremental type motors
and position overflow
occurs, and you send an
absolute positioning 1. Create an absolute coordinate
command without first system. Set the origin again.
executing the homing 2. Set the origin again.
procedure.
Causes:
1. The absolute
coordinate system
has not been created.
2. Overflow occurs
because the motor
keeps rotating in the
same direction.
AL400： Index coordinates error

Check if the setting of P2-52 is
within the range. If the setting value Re-adjust the value of P5-52 until it
Setting of P2-52 is wrong
is too small, it would cause index is appropriate.
coordinates error.
AL401：Receives NMT reset command when Servo On

Receives NMT reset Check if the servo drive receives
command when Servo NMT reset command when Servo
Reset
On On.
AL404：Value of PR special filter setting is too big

Check the setting of P1-22. If the
Inner position error Re-adjust the value of P1-22 until it
value is too high, the following error
overflows. is appropriate.
exceeds the allowable range faster.
10-36
AL500：STO function is enabled

Safe torque off function (STO) is
Safe torque off function Use DI.ARST or 0x6040.Fault
enabled. Please check why it is
(STO) is enabled. Reset, or set P0-01 to 0.
enabled.
AL501： STO_A loss (signal loss or signal error)

Loss of STO_A signal or
STO_A and STO_B
Check if the wiring of STO_A is Use DI.ARST or 0x6040.Fault
signals are not
correct. Reset, or set P0-01 to 0.
synchronized for more
than 1 sec.
AL502：STO_B lost (signal loss or signal error)

Loss of STO_B signal or
STO_A and STO_B
Make sure the wiring of STO_B is Use DI.ARST or 0x6040.Fault
signals are not
correct. Reset, or set P0-01 to 0.
synchronized for more
than 1 sec.
AL503：STO_error
It might be that the STO circuit is
An error occurs during
N/A causing the error. Please contact
STO self-diagnosis.
the distributor.
AL555：System failure

If AL555 occurs, do not do anything
DSP processing error N/A
and send the drive back to Delta.
10-37
10.5 Corrective Actions after the Alarm Occurs
AL001 ：Over current Turn DI.ARST on to clear the alarm.
AL002 ：Over voltage Turn DI.ARST on to clear the alarm.
Cycle power on the servo drive to

clear the alarm.
AL003 ：Undervoltage For the alarm to clear automatically
after the voltage returns to normal,
please set with P2-66 Bit2.
The alarm can be cleared after power
AL004 ：The magnetic field of the motor is abnormal
cycling.
AL005 ：Regeneration error Turn DI.ARST on to clear the alarm.
AL006 ：Overload Turn DI.ARST on to clear the alarm.
AL007 ：Excessive speed deviation Turn DI.ARST on to clear the alarm.
AL008 ：Abnormal pulse command Turn DI.ARST on to clear the alarm.
AL009 ：Excessive deviation of position control Turn DI.ARST on to clear the alarm.
The alarm can be cleared after power

AL011 ：Encoder error
cycling.
The alarm can be cleared when
AL012 ：Adjustment error removing CN1 wiring and execute
auto adjustment.
The alarm can be cleared
AL013 ：Emergency stop automatically after turning DI.EMGS
off.
Turn DI.ARST on or Servo Off to clear
the alarm. The alarm also can be
AL014 ：Reverse limit error
cleared when the motor operates
backwards.
Turn DI.ARST on or Servo Off to clear
the alarm. The alarm also can be
AL015 ：Forward limit error
cleared when the motor operates
backwards.
AL016 ：The temperature of IGBT is abnormal Turn DI.ARST on to clear the alarm.
If the alarm occurs, then parameter

reset is a must. And re-servo on
AL017 ：Abnormal EEPROM again. If it happens during the
operation, please turn DI.ARST on to
clear the alarm.
AL018 ：Abnormal signal output Turn DI.ARST on to clear the alarm.
AL019 ：Serial communication error Turn DI.ARST on to clear the alarm.
10-38
AL020 ：Serial communication timeout Turn DI.ARST on to clear the alarm.
AL022 ：Main circuit power leak phase Turn DI.ARST on to clear the alarm.
AL023 ：Early warning for overload Turn DI.ARST on to clear the alarm.
The alarm can be cleared after

AL024 ：Encoder initial magnetic field error
power cycling.
AL025 ：The internal of the encoder is in error
power cycling.
AL026 ：The encoder is in error
power cycling.
AL027 ： The internal of the motor is in error
power cycling.
：The encoder is over voltage or the internal The alarm can be cleared after
AL028
of the encoder is in error power cycling.
AL029 ：Gray code error
power cycling.
AL030 ：Motor crash error Turn DI.ARST on to clear the alarm.
：Incorrect wiring of the motor power line U,

AL031 Turn DI.ARST on to clear the alarm.
V, W, GND
：Internal communication of the encoder is in The alarm can be cleared after
AL034
error power cycling.
The temperature sensor of motor
：Encoder temperature exceeds the shall below 100°C (212°F). And the
AL035
protective range alarm can be cleared after cycling
power on.
：Excessive deviation of full closed-loop

position control
AL041 ：Linear scale communication is cut off Turn DI.ARST on to clear the alarm.
AL042 ：Analog input voltage error Turn DI.ARST on to clear the alarm.
Set P2-66 Bit4 to 1 and then cycle
AL044 ：Warning of servo drive function overload
power on the servo drive.
AL045 ：Wrong setting of E-gear ratio
correctly setting up the parameter.
AL060 ：The absolute position is lost
power cycling.
Change the battery and AL061 will be
AL061 ：Encoder under voltage
cleared automatically.
：The multi-turn if absolute encoder The alarm can be cleared after
AL062
overflows power cycling.
AL067 ：Encoder temperature warning Turn DI.ARST on to clear the alarm.
10-39

AL068 ：Absolute data transmitted via I/O is in error
power cycling.
Set P2-69 to 0 and then cycle power
AL069 ：Wrong motor type
on the servo drive.
：The absolute coordinate has not been The alarm can be cleared after
AL06A
initialized creating the absolute origin coordinate.
AL070 ：Encoder does not complete the command The alarm can be cleared after
which is issued by servo drive power cycling.
AL072 ：Encoder overspeed Turn DI.ARST on to clear the alarm.
AL073 ：Encoder memory error Turn DI.ARST on to clear the alarm.
AL074 ：Absolute encoder single turn position error Turn DI.ARST on to clear the alarm.
AL075 ：Absolute encoder position error Turn DI.ARST on to clear the alarm.
AL077 ：Encoder computing error Turn DI.ARST on to clear the alarm.
AL079 ：Encoder parameter error Turn DI.ARST on to clear the alarm.
Cycle power on the servo drive to clear

AL07A ： Loss of encoder Z pulse
the alarm.
AL07B ：Encoder memory busy Turn DI.ARST on to clear the alarm.
：Command to clear the absolute position is

Perform the position reset when the
AL07C issued when the motor speed is over 200 motor speed is under 200 rpm.
rpm
AL07D ：Servo drive power is cycled before AL07C Turn DI.ARST on to clear the alarm.
is cleared
AL07E ：Encoder clearing procedure error Turn DI.ARST on to clear the alarm.
AL083 ：Servo drive outputs excessive current Turn DI.ARST on to clear the alarm.
AL085 ： Regeneration error Turn DI.ARST on to clear the alarm.
AL086 ：Input voltage is too high Turn DI.ARST on to clear the alarm.
AL095 ：The servo drive does not connect to Turn DI.ARST on to clear the alarm.
external regenerative resistor
Firstly set P2-08 to 30. Then set it to
AL099 ：DSP firmware upgrade 28. And the alarm will be cleared after
power cycling.
AL111 ：CANopen SDO receives buffer overflow
Reset
AL112 ：CANopen PDO receives buffer overflow
Reset
：Index error occurs when accessing NMT: Reset node or 0x6040.Fault

AL121
CANopen PDO Reset
10-40
：Sub-Index error occurs when accessing NMT: Reset node or 0x6040.Fault

AL122
CANopen PDO Reset
：Data Size error occurs when accessing NMT: Reset node or 0x6040.Fault
AL123
CANopen PDO Reset
：Data range error occurs when accessing NMT: Reset node or 0x6040.Fault
AL124
CANopen PDO Reset
：CANopen PDO is read-only and write- NMT: Reset node or 0x6040.Fault

AL125
protected. Reset
AL126 ：CANopen PDO is not allowed in PDO
Reset
：CANopen PDO is write-protected when NMT: Reset node or 0x6040.Fault

AL127
Servo On Reset
AL128 ：Error occurs when reading CANopen PDO NMT: Reset node or 0x6040.Fault
via EEPROM Reset
：Error occurs when writing CANopen PDO NMT: Reset node or 0x6040.Fault
AL129
via EEPROM Reset
：The accessing address of EEPROM is out NMT: Reset node or 0x6040.Fault

AL130
of range when using CANopen PDO Reset
：CRC of EEPROM calculation error occurs NMT: Reset node or 0x6040.Fault

AL131
when using CANopen PDO Reset
：Enter the incorrect password when using NMT: Reset node or 0x6040.Fault
AL132
CANopen PDO Reset
AL170 ：Heartbeat or NodeGuarding error
Reset
AL180 ：Heartbeat or NodeGuarding error
Reset
AL185 ：Abnormal CAN Bus hardware NMT: Reset node or power cycling
AL186 ：CAN bus off
Reset
Turn DI.ARST on to clear the alarm.
AL201 ：An error occurs when loading CANopen CANopen 0x1011 Restore default
data parameter
Turn DI.ARST on to clear the alarm or
AL207 ：Parameter group of PR#8 is out of range
set P0-01 to 0.
AL209 ：Parameter number of PR#8 is out of range
set P0-01 to 0.
：An error occurs when writing parameter via Turn DI.ARST on to clear the alarm or
AL213
PR：exceeds the range set P0-01 to 0.
10-41
：An error occurs when writing parameter via Turn DI.ARST on to clear the alarm or
AL215
PR：read-only set P0-01 to 0.
：An error occurs when writing parameter via Re-adjust PR command and
AL217
PR：parameter locked parameter.
：The setting of monitor item of PR#8 is out Turn DI.ARST on to clear the alarm or
AL231
of range set P0-01 to 0.
AL235 ：PR command overflows Execute the homing procedure.

AL237 ：Indexing coordinate is undefined
set P0-01 to 0.
AL245 ：PR Positioning Timeout
set P0-01 to 0; cycle the power.
AL249 ：The number of PR command exceeds the Turn DI.ARST on to clear the alarm or
limit set P0-01 to 0; cycle the power.
AL283 ：Forward Software Limit
Reset
AL285 ：Reverse Software Limit
Reset
AL289 ：Feedback position counter overflows
Reset
AL291 ：Servo Off error
Reset
AL301 ：CANopen fails to synchronize
Reset
：The synchronized signal of CANopen is NMT: Reset node or 0x6040.Fault

AL302
sent too fast Reset
：The synchronized signal of CANopen is NMT: Reset node or 0x6040.Fault

AL303
sent too slow Reset
AL304 ：CANopen IP command is failed
Reset
AL305 ：SYNC Period is in error
Reset
AL380 ：Position Deviation Alarm
set P0-01 to 0.
AL400 ：Index coordinates error Turn DI.ARST on to clear the alarm.
：NMT Reset command is received when

Servo On
AL404 ：Value of PR special filter setting is too big Turn DI.ARST on to clear the alarm.
10-42
Use DI.ARST or 0x6040.Fault Reset,

AL500 ：STO function is enabled
or set P0-01 to 0.
AL501 ： STO_A loss (signal loss or signal error)
or set P0-01 to 0.
AL502 ：STO_B lost (signal loss or signal error)
or set P0-01 to 0.
STO circuit error; please contact the
AL503 ：STO_error
distributor.
AL555 ：System failure N/A
10-43
10-44
Chapter 11 Specifications
11.1 Specifications of Servo Drives (ASDA-A2 Series)

100 W 200 W 400 W 750 W 1 kW 1.5 kW 2 kW 3k W 4.5 kW 5.5 kW 7.5 kW 11 kW 15 kW
ASDA-A2 Series
01 02 04 07 10 15 20 30 45 55 75 1B 1F
Phase / Voltage Single-phase / Three-phase 220 VAC Three-phase 220 VAC
Single-phase / Three-phase Three-phase
Permissible Voltage
200 to 230 VAC, -15% to 10% 200 to 230 VAC, -15% to 10%
Input Current (3PH)
Power
0.39 1.11 1.86 3.66 4.68 5.9 8.76 9.83 17.5 19.4 26.3 48 63
Unit: Arms
Input Current (1PH)
0.69 1.92 3.22 6.78 8.88 10.3 - - - - - - -
Unit: Arms
Continuous Output
Current 0.9 1.55 2.6 5.1 7.3 8.3 13.4 19.4 32.5 40 47.5 54.4 70
Unit: Arms
Cooling method Natural cooling Fan Cooling
Encoder Resolution
Incremental type: 20-bit; absolute type: 17-bit (1280000 p/rev)
(Servo Drive Resolution)
Main Circuit Control SVPWM (Space Vector Pulse Width Modulation) Control
Control Mode Auto / Manual
Regenerative Resistor None Built-in External

Max. Input Pulse
Frequency Line driver: 500 Kpps / 4 Mpps; open collector: 200 Kpps
(except DMCNET mode)
Pulse Type
Position Control Mode
Pulse + Direction, A phase + B phase, CCW pulse + CW pulse

(except DMCNET mode)
Command Source External pulse (except DMCNET mode) / Register
Smoothing Strategy Low-pass and P-curve filter
E-gear ratio N/M multiple (1/50 < N/M < 25600)
E-gear ratio
N: 1 to (229-1), M: 1 to (231-1)
Torque Limit Parameter settings
Feed Forward
Parameter settings
Compensation
Voltage
0 to ±10 VDC
DMCNET mode)
Command Input
Range
(except
Analog
Input
10 k
Resistance
Speed Control Mode
Time
2.2 us
Constant
Speed Control
1 : 5000 1 : 3000 1 : 2000
Range *1 P
Command Source External analog command (except DMCNET mode) / Register

Smoothing Strategy Low-pass and S-curve filter
Torque Limit Via parameter settings or analog input (except DMCNET mode)
Bandwidth Maximum 1 kHz
11-1
ASDA-A2 Chapter 11 Specifications

ASDA-A2 Series
01 02 04 07 10 15 20 30 45 55 75 1B 1F
0.01% or less at 0 to 100% load fluctuation
Speed Accuracy *2 P P 0.01% or less at ±10% power fluctuation
0.01% or less at 0°C to 50°C ambient temperature fluctuation
P
Voltage
0 to ±10 VDC
(DMCNET mode is not
Command Input
Range
Torque Control Mode
included)
Analog
Input
10 k
Resistance
Time
2.2 us
Constant
Smoothing Strategy Low-pass filter
Speed Limit Via parameter settings or analog input (except DMCNET mode)
Analog Monitor Output Monitor signal can be set by parameters (Output voltage range: ±8V)
Servo on, Fault reset, Gain switch, Pulse clear, Zero clamp, Command input reverse control,
Internal position command trigger, Torque limit, Speed limit, Internal position command
selection, Motor stop, Speed command selection, Speed / position mode switching, Speed /
torque mode switching, Torque / position mode switching, PT / PR command switching,
Input Emergency stop, Positive / negative limit, Original point, Forward / reverse operation torque
limit, Homing activated, E-CAM engage, Forward / reverse JOG input, Event trigger, E-gear N
selection, Pulse input prohibition
Digital *DMCNET mode is not included for the DI mentioned above. When applying DMCNET mode, it is suggested to use
Input/Output communication for DI input. Its DI only supports emergency stop, forward/reverse limit and homing.
A, B, Z Line Driver output
Servo on, Servo ready, Zero speed, Target speed reached, Target position reached, torque
Output limiting, Servo alarm, Brake control, Homing completed, Early warning for overload, Servo
warning, Position command overflows, Software negative limit (reverse direction), Software
positive limit (forward direction), Internal position command completed, Capture procedure
completed, Servo procedure completed, Master position area of E-CAM
Over current, Overvoltage, Under voltage, Overheat, Regeneration error, Overload, Excessive
speed deviation, Excessive position deviation, Encoder error, Adjustment error, Emergency
Protective Function stop, Negative / positive limit error, Excessive deviation of full-closed loop control, Serial
communication error, Rst leak phase, Serial communication timeout, Short-circuit protection of
terminal U, V, W and CN1, CN2, CN3
Communication Interface RS-232 / RS-485 / CANopen / USB / DMCNET
Installation
Indoors (avoid the direct sunlight), no corrosive fog (avoid fume, flammable gas, and dust)
Site
Altitude Altitude 1,000 m (3280.84 ft) or lower above sea level
Atmospheric
86 kPa to 106 kPa
pressure
Operating 0°C to 55°C (32°F to 131°F)
Environment
Temperature (If operating temperature is above 45°C (113°F), forced cooling will be required)
P
Storage
-20°C to 65°C (-4°F to 149°F)
Temperature
Humidity Under 0 to 90% RH (non-condensing)
2 2
Vibrating 9.80665 m/s (1 G) less than 20 Hz, 5.88 m/s (0.6 G) 20 to 50 Hz
P
P
P
P
IP Rating IP20
Power System TN System*3 P
11-2
Chapter 11 Specifications ASDA-A2

ASDA-A2 Series
01 02 04 07 10 15 20 30 45 55 75 1B 1F
IEC/EN 61800-5-1, UL 508C, C-tick

Approvals
Note:
*1 Within the rated load, the speed ratio is: the minimum speed (smooth operation) / rated speed.
*2 When the command is the rated speed, the velocity correction ratio is: (rotational speed with no load –
rotational speed with full load) / rated speed.
*3 Please refer to section 11.4 for overload features.
*4 TN system: The neutral point of the power system connects to the ground directly. The exposed metal
components connect to the ground via the protective earth conductor.
*5 Please use a single-phase three-wire power system for the single-phase power model.
11-3

750 W 1 kW 1.5 kW 2 kW 3 kW 4.5 kW 5.5 kW 7.5 kW 11kW 15kW
ASDA-A2 Series
07 10 15 20 30 45 55 75 1B 1F
Input Voltage 24 VDC, ±10%

Power
Input Current 0.89 A 1.18 A 1.66 A 2A
Input Power 21.4 W 28.2 W 39.85 W 48 W
Main Circuit Power Three-phase, 380 to 480 VAC, ±10%

Input Current (3PH) 2.22 3.02 4.24 5.65 8.01 11.9 14.1 17.27 28.95 39.47
Unit: Arms
Continuous Output
Current 3.07 3.52 5.02 6.66 11.9 20 22.04 28.39 28.1 38.65
Unit: Arms
Instantaneous Max.
Output Current 9.21 9.86 10.04 18.65 33.32 44 48.49 62.46 61.82 85.03
Unit: Arms
Cooling method Fan Cooling
Encoder Resolution
Incremental type: 20-bit (1280000 p/rev);
(Servo Drive
Absolute type: 17-bit (1280000 p/rev)
Resolution)
Main Circuit Control SVPWM (Space Vector Pulse Width Modulation) Control
Control Modes Auto / Manual
Regenerative Resistor Built-in External

Max. Input Pulse
Frequency Line driver: 500 Kpps / 4 Mpps; Open collector: 200 Kpps
(except DMCNET
mode )
Pulse Type
Position Control Mode
(except DMCNET Pulse + Direction, A phase + B phase, CCW pulse + CW pulse

mode)
Command Source External pulse train (except DMCNET mode) / Internal parameters
Smoothing
Low-pass and P-curve filter
Strategy
E-gear ratio: N/M multiple (1/50 < N/M < 25600)
E-gear ratio
N: 1 to (229-1) / M: 1 to (231-1)
Torque Limit Parameter settings
Feed Forward
Parameter settings
Compensation
Analog Voltage
Range 0 to ±10 VDC
Command
Input Input
(except Resistance
10 k
DMCNET Time
Speed Control Mode
mode) Constant
2.2 us
Speed Control
1 : 5000 1 : 3000
Range *1 P
Command Source External analog command (DMCNET is not included) / Register

Smoothing
Low-pass and S-curve filter
Strategy
Torque Limit Via parameter settings or analog input (DMCNET mode is not included)
Bandwidth Maximum 1 kHz
11-4

ASDA-A2 Series
07 10 15 20 30 45 55 75 1B 1F
0.01% or less at 0 to 100% load fluctuation
Control Mode
Speed
Speed Accuracy *2 0.01% or less at ±10% power fluctuation

0.01% or less at 0°C to 50°C (35°F to 122°F)
c
ambient temperature fluctuation

Analog Voltage
0 to ±10 VDC
Command Range
Torque Control Mode
Input Input
10 k
(except Resistance
DMCNET Time
mode) 2.2 us
Constant
Smoothing Strategy Low-pass filter
Speed Limit Via parameter settings or analog input (except DMCNET mode)
Analog Monitor Output Monitor signal can set by parameters (Output voltage range: ±8V)
Servo on, Fault reset, Gain switching, Pulse clear, Zero speed CLAMP,
Command input reverse control, Command triggered, Torque limit., Speed
limit, Position command selection, Motor stop, Speed command selection,
Position / Speed mode switching, Speed / Torque mode switching, Torque /
Position mode switching, PT / PR command switching, Emergency stop,
Input Forward / Reverse inhibit limit, Original point for homing, Forward / Reverse
operation torque limit, Homing activated, E-Cam engage, Forward / Reverse
JOG input, Event trigger PR command, Electronic gear ratio (Numerator)
selection and Pulse inhibit input
Digital *DMCNET mode is not included for the DI mentioned above. When applying DMCNET mode, it
Input/Output is suggested to use communication for DI input. Its DI only supports emergency stop,
forward/reverse limit and homing.
A, B, Z Line Driver output
Servo on, Servo ready, Zero speed, Target speed reached, Target position
reached, torque limiting, Servo alarm, Brake control, Homing completed,
Output Early warning for overload, Servo warning, Position command overflows,
Software negative limit (reverse direction), Software positive limit (forward
direction), Internal position command completed, Capture procedure
completed, Servo procedure completed, Master position area of E-CAM
Overcurrent, Overvoltage, Undervoltage, Overheat, Regeneration error,
Overload, Excessive speed deviation, Excessive position deviation, Encoder
error, Adjustment error, Emergency stop, Negative / positive limit error,
Protective Function
Excessive deviation of full-closed loop control, Serial communication error,
Rst leak phase, Serial communication timeout, Short-circuit protection of
terminal U, V, W and CN1, CN2, CN3
Communication Interface RS-232 / RS-485 / CANopen / USB / DMCNET
Indoor (avoid the direct sunlight), no corrosive fog (avoid fume, flammable
Installation Site
gas, and dust)
Altitude Altitude 1,000 m (3280.84 ft) or lower above sea level
Atmospheric pressure 86 kPa to 106 kPa
Environment
0°C to 55°C (32°F to 131°F)

Operating Temperature
(If operating temperature is above 45°C (113°F),
(°C )
forced air circulation will be required)
Storage Temperature
-20°C to 65°C (-4°F to 149°F)
(°C )
Humidity 0 to 90% (non-condensing)
2 2
Vibrating 9.80665 m/s (1 G) less than 20 Hz, 5.88 m/s (0.6 G) 20 to 50 Hz
P
P
P
P
11-5

ASDA-A2 Series
07 10 15 20 30 45 55 75 1B 1F
IP Rating IP20
Power System TN System*3P
IEC/EN 61800-5-1, UL 508C, C-tick

Approvals
Note:
*1 Within the rated load, the speed ratio is: the minimum speed (smooth operation) / rated speed.
*2 When the command is the rated speed, the velocity correction ratio is: (rotational speed with no load –
rotational speed with full load) / rated speed.
*3 Please refer to section 11.4 for overload features.
*4 TN system: The neutral point of the power system connects to the ground directly. The exposed metal
components connect to the ground via the protective earth conductor.
11-6
11.2 Specifications of Servo Motors (ECMA Series)

11.2.1 ECMA 220V Series
Low Inertia Series
C104 C△04 C△06 C△08 C△09
ECMA Series
0F 01 02 04□S 04 07 07 10
Rated power (kW) 0.05 0.1 0.2 0.4 0.4 0.75 0.75 1.0
Rated torque (N-m) *1 P 0.159 0.32 0.64 1.27 1.27 2.39 2.39 3.18
Max. torque (N-m) 0.477 0.96 1.92 3.82 3.82 7.16 7.14 8.78
Rated speed (r/min) 3000 3000
Max. speed (r/min) 5000 3000
Rated current (Arms) 0.69 0.90 1.55 2.60 2.60 5.10 3.66 4.25
Max. instantaneous current
2.05 2.70 4.65 7.80 7.80 15.3 11.0 12.37
(Arms)
Power rating (kW/s) 12.27 27.7 22.4 57.6 24.0 50.4 29.6 38.6
Rotor inertia (× 10-4kg.m2)

P P P
P
0.0206 0.037 0.177 0.277 0.68 1.13 1.93 2.62
Mechanical constant (ms) 1.2 0.75 0.80 0.53 0.74 0.63 1.72 1.20
Torque constant-KT (N-m/A) 0.23 0.36 0.41 0.49 0.49 0.47 0.65 0.75
Voltage constant-KE
9.8 13.6 16.0 17.4 18.5 17.2 24.2 27.5
(mV/(r/min))
Armature resistance (Ohm) 12.7 9.30 2.79 1.55 0.93 0.42 1.34 0.897
Armature inductance (mH) 26.0 24.0 12.07 6.71 7.39 3.53 7.55 5.7
Electric constant (ms) 2.05 2.58 4.30 4.30 7.96 8.36 5.66 6.35
Insulation class Class A (UL), Class B (CE)
Insulation resistance > 100 M, DC 500V
Insulation strength 1.8k VAC, 1 sec
Weight (kg) (without brake) 0.42 0.5 1.2 1.6 2.1 3.0 2.9 3.8
Weight (kg) (with brake) -- 0.8 1.5 2.0 2.9 3.8 3.69 5.5
Radial max. loading (N) 78.4 78.4 196 196 245 245 245 245
Axial max. loading (N) 39.2 39.2 68 68 98 98 98 98

Power rating (kW/s)
-- 25.6 21.3 53.8 22.1 48.4 29.3 37.9
(with brake)
-- 0.04 0.19 0.30 0.73 1.18 1.95 2.67
P
P P P
(with brake)
Mechanical constant (ms)
-- 0.81 0.85 0.57 0.78 0.65 1.74 1.22
(with brake)
Brake holding torque
-- 0.3 1.3 1.3 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5
[Nt-m (min)] *2
P
Brake power consumption

-- 7.3 6.5 6.5 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2
(at 20°C ) [W]
11-7
C104 C△04 C△06 C△08 C△09

ECMA Series
0F 01 02 04□S 04 07 07 10
Brake release time
-- 5 10 10 10 10 10 10
[ms (Max)]
Brake pull-in time
-- 25 70 70 70 70 70 70
[ms (Max)]
Vibration grade (μm) 15
Operating temperature (°C ) 0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F)
Storage temperature (°C ) -10°C to 80°C (14°F to 170°F)
Operating humidity 20% to 90% RH (non-condensing)
Storage humidity 20% to 90% RH (non-condensing)
Vibration capacity 2.5 G

IP65 (when waterproof connectors are used, or when an oil seal is
IP Rating
used to be fitted to the rotating shaft (an oil seal model is used))
Approvals
Note:
*1. The rated torque is the continuous permissible torque between 0 to 40˚C (32°F to 104°F) operating
temperature which is suitable for the following heat sink dimension.
ECMA-_ _ 04 / 06 / 08 : 250 mm x 250 mm x 6 mm
ECMA-_ _ 10 : 300 mm x 300 mm x 12 mm
ECMA-_ _ 13 : 400 mm x 400 mm x 20 mm
ECMA-_ _ 18 : 550 mm x 550 mm x 30 mm
ECMA-_ _ 22 : 650 mm x 650 mm x 35mm
Material: Aluminum – F40, F60, F80, F100, F130, F180, F220
*2. The built-in brake of the servo motor is for remaining the item in stop status. Do not use it to decelerate
or as the dynamic brake.
11-8
Low Inertia Series

C△10 C△13
ECMA Series
10 20 30
Rated power (kW) 1.0 2.0 3.0
Rated torque (N-m) *1 P 3.18 6.37 9.55
Max. torque (N-m) 9.54 19.11 28.65
Rated speed (r/min) 3000
Rated current (Arms) 7.30 12.05 17.2
Max. instantaneous current (Arms) 21.9 36.15 47.5
Power rating (kW/s) 38.1 90.6 71.8

P P P
P
2.65 4.45 12.7
Mechanical constant (ms) 0.74 0.61 1.11
Torque constant-KT (N-m/A) 0.44 0.53 0.557
Voltage constant-KE (mV/(r/min)) 16.8 19.2 20.98
Armature resistance (Ohm) 0.20 0.13 0.0976
Armature inductance (mH) 1.81 1.50 1.21
Electric constant (ms) 9.30 11.4 12.4
Weight (kg) (without brake) 4.3 6.2 7.8
Weight (kg) (with brake) 4.7 7.2 9.2
Radial max. loading (N) 490 490 490
Axial max. loading (N) 98 98 98
Power rating (kW/s) (with brake) 30.4 82.0 65.1

3.33 4.95 14.0
P
P P P
(with brake)
0.93 0.66 1.22
(with brake)
Brake holding torque [Nt-m (min)] *2 P 8.0 8.0 10.0
18.7 18.7 19.0
(at 20°C ) [W]
P
Brake release time [ms (Max)] 10 10 10
Brake pull-in time [ms (Max)] 70 70 70
11-9
C△10 C△13
ECMA Series
10 20 30

IP65 (use the waterproof connector
IP Rating and shaft seal installation (or oil seal)
model)
Approvals
Note:
ECMA-_ _ 04 / 06 / 08 : 250 mm x 250 mm x 6 mm
ECMA-_ _ 10 : 300 mm x 300 mm x 12 mm
ECMA-_ _ 13 : 400 mm x 400 mm x 20 mm
ECMA-_ _ 18 : 550 mm x 550 mm x 30 mm
ECMA-_ _ 22 : 650 mm x 650 mm x 35 mm
*2. The built-in brake of the servo motor is for remaining the item in stop status. Do not use it to decelerate or
as the dynamic brake.
11-10
Medium / High Inertia Series

E△13 E△18 G△13
ECMA Series
05 10 15 20 20 30 35 03 06 09
Rated power (kW) 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.0 3.0 3.5 0.3 0.6 0.9
Rated torque (N-m) *1 P 2.39 4.77 7.16 9.55 9.55 14.32 16.71 2.86 5.73 8.59
Max. torque (N-m) 7.16 14.3 21.48 28.65 28.65 42.97 50.13 8.59 17.19 21.48
Rated current (Arms) 2.9 5.6 8.3 11.01 11.22 16.1 19.2 2.5 4.8 7.5
Max. instantaneous
8.7 16.8 24.9 33.03 33.66 48.3 57.6 7.5 14.4 22.5
current (Arms)
Power rating (kW/s) 7.0 27.1 45.9 62.5 26.3 37.3 50.8 10.0 39.0 66.0

P P P
P
8.17 8.41 11.18 14.59 34.68 54.95 54.95 8.17 8.41 11.18
Mechanical constant (ms) 1.91 1.51 1.10 0.96 1.62 1.06 1.08 1.84 1.40 1.06
Torque constant-KT
0.83 0.85 0.87 0.87 0.85 0.89 0.87 1.15 1.19 1.15
(N-m/A)
Voltage constant-KE
30.9 31.9 31.8 31.8 31.4 32.0 32.0 42.5 43.8 41.6
(mV/(r/min))
Armature resistance
0.57 0.47 0.26 0.174 0.119 0.052 0.052 1.06 0.82 0.43
(Ohm)
Armature inductance (mH) 7.39 5.99 4.01 2.76 2.84 1.38 1.38 14.29 11.12 6.97
Electric constant (ms) 12.96 12.88 15.31 15.86 23.87 26.39 26.39 13.50 13.50 16.06

Weight (kg)
6.8 7.0 7.5 7.8 13.5 18.5 18.5 6.8 7.0 7.5
(without brake)
Weight (kg) (with brake) 8.2 8.4 8.9 9.2 17.5 22.5 22.5 8.2 8.4 8.9
Radial max. loading (N) 490 490 490 490 1176 1470 490 490 490 490
Axial max. loading (N) 98 98 98 98 490 490 98 98 98 98

Power rating (kW/s)
6.4 24.9 43.1 57.4 24.1 35.9 48.9 9.2 35.9 62.1
(with brake)
8.94 9.14 11.90 15.88 37.86 57.06 57.06 8.94 9.14 11.9
P
P P P
(with brake)
2.07 1.64 1.19 1.05 1.77 1.10 1.12 2.0 1.51 1.13
(with brake)
10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 10.0 10.0 10.0
[Nt-m (min)] *2P

19.0 19.0 19.0 19.0 20.4 20.4 20.4 19.0 19.0 19.0
(at 20°C ) [W]
Brake release time
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
[ms (Max)]
11-11
E△13 E△18 G△13

ECMA Series
05 10 15 20 20 30 35 03 06 09
Brake pull-in time
70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70
[ms (Max)]
IP Rating IP65 (use the waterproof connector and shaft seal installation (or oil seal) model)
Approvals
Note:
ECMA-_ _ 04 / 06 / 08 : 250 mm x 250 mm x 6 mm
ECMA-_ _ 10 : 300 mm x 300 mm x 12 mm
ECMA-_ _ 13 : 400 mm x 400 mm x 20 mm
ECMA-_ _ 18 : 550 mm x 550 mm x 30 mm
ECMA-_ _ 22 : 650 mm x 650 mm x 35 mm
*2. The built-in brake of the servo motor is for remaining the item in stop status. Do not use it to decelerate
11-12
Medium-High / High Inertia Series
F△13 F△18 F122

ECMA Series
05 08 13 18 30 45 55 75 1B 1F
Rated power (kW) 0.5 0.85 1.3 1.8 3.0 4.5 5.5 7.5 11 15
Rated torque (N-m) *1 P

3.18 5.41 8.34 11.48 19.10 28.65 35.01 47.74 70 95.4
Max. torque (N-m) 8.92 13.8 23.3 28.7 57.29 71.62 87.53 119.36 175 224.0
Rated current (Arms) 3.9 7.1 12.6 13.0 19.4 32.5 40.0 47.5 51.8 67.0
Max. instantaneous current 12.1 19.4 38.6 36.0 58.2 81.3 100.0 118.8 129.5 162.0
(Arms)
Power rating (kW/s) 9.8 21.52 34.78 52.93 66.4 105.5 122.9 159.7 144.9 201.8

P P P
P
10.3 13.6 20.0 24.9 54.95 77.75 99.78 142.7 338 451
Torque constant-KT 0.82 0.76 0.66 0.88 0.98 0.88 0.88 1.01 1.37 1.42
(N-m/A)
Voltage constant-KE 29.5 29.2 24.2 32.2 35.0 32.0 31.0 35.5 49.0 50.0
(mV/(r/min))
Motor resistance (Ohm) 0.624 0.38 0.124 0.185 0.077 0.032 0.025 0.015 0.026 0.0184
Motor inductance (mH) 7.0 4.77 1.7 2.6 1.27 0.89 0.60 0.40 0.65 0.48
Electric constant (ms) 11.22 12.55 13.71 14.05 16.5 27.8 24.0 26.7 24.79 26.09
Weight (kg) (without brake) 6.3 8.6 9.4 10.5 18.5 23.5 30.5 40.5 56.4 75.0
Weight (kg) (with brake) 7.7 10.0 10.8 11.9 22.5 29.0 36.0 46.0 68.4 87.0
Radial max. loading (N) 490 490 490 490 1470 1470 1764 1764 3300 3300
Axial max. loading (N) 98 98 98 98 490 490 588 588 1100 1100
Power rating (kW/s)
8.8 19.78 32.66 50.3 63.9 101.8 119.4 156.6 141.4 197.1
(with brake)
Rotor inertia (× 10-4kg.m2) 11.5 14.8 21.3 26.2 57.06 80.65 102.70 145.55 346.5 461.8
P
P P P
(with brake)
(with brake)
10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 25.0 55.0 55.0 55.0 115 115
[Nt-m (min)] *2
P

19.0 19.0 19.0 19.0 20.4 19.9 19.9 19.9 28.8 28.8
(at 20°C ) [W]
P
Brake release time 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10

[ms (Max)]
11-13
F△13 F△18 F122

ECMA Series
05 08 13 18 30 45 55 75 1B 1F
Brake pull-in time 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70
[ms (Max)]
Operating temperature (°C) 0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F)
Storage temperature (°C) -10°C to 80°C (14°F to 176°F)
Approvals
Note:
*1 The rated torque is the continuous permissible torque between 0 to 40˚C (32°F to 104°F) operating
ECMA-__04 / 06 / 08 : 250 mm x 250 mm x 6 mm
ECMA-__10 : 300 mm x 300 mm x 12 mm
ECMA-__13 : 400 mm x 400 mm x 20 mm
ECMA-__18 : 550 mm x 550 mm x 30 mm
ECMA-__22 : 650 mm x 650 mm x 35 mm
*2 The built-in brake of the servo motor is for remaining the item in stop status. Do not use it to decelerate or
3 If desiring to reach the max. torque limit of motor 250%, it is suggested to use the servo drive with higher
watt.
11-14
High Inertia Series

C△06 C△08
ECMA
04□H 07□H
Rated power (kW) 0.4 0.75
Rated torque (N-m)*1 P

1.27 2.39
Max. torque (N-m) 3.82 7.16
Rated current (Arms) 2.6 5.1
Max. instantaneous current (Arms) 7.8 15.3
Max. power per second (kW/s) 21.7 19.63

P P P
P
0.743 2.91
Mechanical constant (ms) 1.42 1.6
Torque constant – KT (N-m/A) 0.49 0.47
Voltage constant – KE (mV/(r/min)) 17.4 17.2
Armature resistance (Ohm) 1.55 0.42
Armature inductance (mH) 6.71 3.53
Electric constant (ms) 4.3 8.36
Insulation resistance ＞100M, DC 500V
Insulation strength 1.8k VAC,1 sec
Weight – without brake (kg) 1.8 3.4
Weight – with brake (kg) 2.2 3.9
Radial max. loading (N) 196 245
Axial max. loading (N) 68 98

Max. power per second (kW/s)
21.48 19.3
(with brake)
0.751 2.96
P
P P P
(with brake)
Mechanical constant (ms) (with brake) 1.43 1.62
1.3 2.5
[Nt-m (min)] *2 P
Brake power consumption (at 20˚C) [W] 6.5 8.2

Brake release time
10 10
[ms (Max)]
Brake pull-in time
70 70
[ms (Max)]
Operating temperature (˚C) 0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F)

Storage temperature (˚C) -10°C to 80°C (14°F to 176°F)
11-15
C△06 C△08
ECMA
04□H 07□H
Operating humidity 20 to 90% RH (non-condensing)
Storage humidity 20 to 90% RH (non-condensing)

IP65 (use the waterproof connector and shaft
IP Rating
seal installation (or oil seal)
Approvals
Note:
ECMA-_ _ 04 / 06 / 08 : 250 mm x 250 mm x 6 mm
ECMA-_ _ 10 : 300 mm x 300 mm x 12 mm
ECMA-_ _ 13 : 400 mm x 400 mm x 20 mm
ECMA-_ _ 18 : 550 mm x 550 mm x 30 mm
ECMA-_ _ 22 : 650 mm x 650 mm x 35 mm
3 If desiring to reach the max. torque limit of motor 250%, it is suggested to use the servo drive with higher
watt.
11-16
11.2.2 ECMA 400V Series

Low Inertia Series
J△06 J△08 J△09 J△10 J△13
ECMA Series
04 07 07 10 10 20 30
Rated power (kW) 0.4 0.75 0.75 1 1.0 2.0 3.0
Rated torque (N-m) *1 P 1.27 2.39 2.39 3.18 3.18 6.37 9.55
Max. torque (N-m) 3.82 7.16 7.14 8.78 9.54 19.1 28.65
Rated speed (r/min) 3000 3000 3000 3000
Maximum speed (r/min) 5000 3000 5000 4500
Rated current (Arms) 1.62 3.07 2.16 2.4 4.15 7.09 9.8
4.85 9.5 6.37 7.17 12.46 21.28 29.99
(Arms)
Power rating (kW/s) 58.2 50.4 29.6 38.6 38.2 91.2 71.8

P P P
P
0.277 1.13 1.93 2.62 2.65 4.45 12.7
Mechanical constant (ms) 0.47 0.66 1.56 1.06 0.77 0.58 0.99
Torque constant-KT (N-m/A) 0.79 0.78 1.12 1.29 0.77 0.9 0.97
Voltage constant-KE
30.6 28.24 42 50.9 29.0 34.4 37.3
(mV/(r/min))
Armature resistance (Ohm) 3.95 1.22 3.62 2.58 0.617 0.388 0.269
Armature inductance (mH) 21.3 10.68 21.2 15.28 6.03 4.62 3.55
Electric constant (ms) 5.39 8.75 5.85 5.93 9.77 11.9 13.2

Weight (kg)
1.6 3.0 2.9 3.8 4.3 6.2 7.8
(without brake)
Weight (kg) (with brake) 2.0 3.8 - - 4.7 7.2 9.2
Radial max. loading (N) 196 245 245 245 490 490 490
Axial max. loading (N) 68 98 98 98 98 98 98

Power rating (kW/s)
53.8 48.4 29.3 37.9 30.4 82 65.1
(with brake)
0.3 1.18 1.95 2.67 3.33 4.95 14.0
P
P P P
(with brake)
0.52 0.65 1.57 1.08 0.96 0.65 1.09
(with brake)
1.3 2.5 2.5 2.5 8.0 8.0 10.0
[Nt-m (min)] *2P

6.5 8.5 8.2 8.2 18.5 18.5 19.0
(at 20°C) [W]
P
Brake release time

10 10 10 10 10 10 10
[ms (Max)]
11-17
J△06 J△08 J△09 J△10 J△13

ECMA Series
04 07 07 10 10 20 30
Brake pull-in time
70 70 70 70 70 70 70
[ms (Max)]
Operating temperature (°C) 0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F)
Storage temperature (°C) -10°C to 80°C (14°F to 176°F)

IP65 (use the waterproof connector and shaft seal installation (or oil seal)
IP Rating
model)
Approvals
Note:
ECMA-_ _ 08 : 250 mm x 250 mm x 6 mm
ECMA-_ _ 13 : 400 mm x 400 mm x 20 mm
ECMA-_ _ 18 : 550 mm x 550 mm x 30 mm
Material: Aluminum – F80, F130, F180
*2 The built-in brake of the servo motor is for remaining the item in stop status. Do not use it to decelerate
11-18
Medium Inertia Series

K△13 K△18
ECMA Series
05 10 15 20 20
Rated power (kW) 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.0
Rated torque (N-m) *1 P 2.39 4.77 7.16 9.55 9.55
Max. torque (N-m) 7.16 14.32 21.48 28.65 28.65
Maximum speed (r/min) 3000
Rated current (Arms) 1.7 3.52 5.02 6.66 6.6

5.2 10.56 15.06 19.98 19.88
(Arms)
Power rating (kW/s) 6.99 27.1 45.9 62.5 26.3

P P P
P
8.17 8.41 11.18 14.59 34.68
Mechanical constant (ms) 2.08 1.80 1.24 1.04 1.74

Torque constant-KT
1.41 1.35 1.43 1.43 1.45
(N-m/A)
Voltage constant-KE
51.5 53.2 55.0 55.0 54.0
(mV/(r/min))
Armature resistance (Ohm) 1.76 1.47 0.83 0.57 0.376
Armature inductance (mH) 22.4 17.79 11.67 8.29 7.87
Electric constant (ms) 12.73 12.04 14.04 14.39 20.9

Weight (kg)
6.8 7.0 7.5 7.8 13.5
(without brake)
Weight (kg) (with brake) 8.2 8.4 8.9 9.2 17.5
Radial max. loading (N) 490 490 490 490 1176
Axial max. loading (N) 98 98 98 98 490

Power rating (kW/s)
6.39 24.9 43.1 59.7 24.1
(with brake)
8.94 9.14 11.90 15.88 37.86
P
P P P
(with brake)
2.28 1.96 1.32 1.13 1.9
(with brake)
10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 25.0
[Nt-m (min)] *2
P

19.0 19.0 19.0 19.0 20.4
(at 20°C ) [W]
Brake release time
10 10 10 10 10
[ms (Max)]
Brake pull-in time
70 70 70 70 70
[ms (Max)]
11-19
K△13 K△18
ECMA Series
05 10 15 20 20
Operating temperature ( °C )
P 0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F)

IP65 (use the waterproof connector and shaft seal
IP Rating
installation (or oil seal) model)
Approvals
Note:
ECMA-_ _ 08: 250 mm x 250 mm x 6 mm
ECMA-_ _ 13: 400 mm x 400 mm x 20 mm
ECMA-_ _ 18: 550 mm x 550 mm x 30 mm
Material: Aluminum – F80, F130, F180
11-20
Medium-High Inertia Series

L△18 L122
ECMA Series
30 45 55 75 1B 1F
Rated power (kW) 3.0 4.5 5.5 7.5 11 15
Rated torque (N-m) *1 P

19.10 28.65 35.0 47.74 70 95.4
Max. torque (N-m) 57.29 71.62 87.53 119.36 175 224
Rated current (Arms) 11.53 20.8 22.37 27.3 27.2 41.6

34.6 52.0 56.0 68.3 68 100
(Arms)
Power rating (kW/s) 66.4 105.5 122.9 159.7 145 201.8

P P P
P
54.95 77.75 99.78 142.7 338 451
Mechanical constant (ms) 1.11 0.94 0.88 0.77 1.42 1.34
Torque constant-KT (N-m/A) 1.66 1.38 1.56 1.75 2.57 2.29

Voltage constant-KE
64.4 53.0 58.9 66.4 96 83.9
(mV/(r/min))
Motor resistance (Ohm) 0.21 0.09 0.07 0.06 0.0994 0.0545
Motor inductance (mH) 4.94 2.36 2.2 1.7 2.51 1.43
Electric constant (ms) 23.97 28.07 27.6 28.29 25.25 26.26

Weight (kg) (without brake) 18.5 23.5 30.5 40.5 56.4 75
Weight (kg) (with brake) 22.5 29 36 46 68.4 87
Radial max. loading (N) 1470 1470 1764 1764 3300 3300
Axial max. loading (N) 490 490 588 588 1100 1100
Power rating (kW/s)
63.9 101.8 119.4 156.6 141.4 197.1
(with brake)
P P P
P
57.06 80.65 102.70 145.5 346.5 461.8

(with brake)
1.16 0.95 0.91 0.79 1.46 1.37
(with brake)
25.0 55.0 55.0 55.0 115 115
[Nt-m (min)]
20.4 19.9 19.9 19.9 28.8 28.8
(at 20°C ) [W]
Brake release time [ms (Max)] 10 10 10 10 10 10
Brake pull-in time [ms (Max)] 70 70 70 70 70 70
11-21
L△18 L122
ECMA Series
30 45 55 75 1B 1F
Operating temperature (°C ) 0 °C to 40 °C (32°F to 104°F)

P P
Storage temperature (°C ) -10 °C to 80°C (14°F to 176°F)

P
Approvals
Note:
ECMA-_ _ 08: 250 mm x 250 mm x 6 mm
ECMA-_ _ 13: 400 mm x 400 mm x 20 mm
ECMA-_ _ 18: 550 mm x 550 mm x 30 mm
ECMA-_ _ 22: 650 mm x 650 mm x 35 mm
Material type: Aluminum – F80, F130, F180, F220
*2 The built-in brake of the servo motor is for remaining the item in stop status. Do not use it to decelerate
11-22
High Inertia Series

L△13 M△13
ECMA Series
05 08 13 18 09
Rated power (kW) 0.5 0.85 1.3 1.8 0.9
Rated torque (N-m)*1 P 3.18 5.39 8.34 11.5 8.59
Max. torque (N-m) 8.92 13.8 23.3 28.7 21.48
Rated speed (r/min) 1500 1500 1500 1500 1000
Max. speed (r/min) 3000 3000 3000 3000 2000
Rated current (Arms) 2.1 3.4 5.02 11.2 4.4
Max. constant current (Arms) 6.1 8.85 15 30.4 13.1
Power rating (kW/s) 7.72 17.0 29.47 50.9 66

P P P
P
13.1 17.1 23.6 26 11.18
Mechanical constant (ms) 2.3 1.76 1.44 1.45 1.21
Torque constant-KT (N-m/A) 1.5 1.59 1.66 1.03 1.95

Voltage constant-KE
55.5 58.9 61.1 37 71.7
(mV/(r/min))
Armature resistance (Ohm) 1.41 0.92 0.59 0.203 1.45
Armature inductance (mH) 20 14.1 9.54 3.09 23.3
Electrical constant (ms) 14.1 15.33 16.17 15.22 16.07
Insulation resistance ＞100 M, DC 500V

Weight (kg) (without brake) 6.8 8.6 10.7 11.2 7.5
Weight (kg) (with brake) - 10 - - 8.9
Radial max. loading (N) 490 490 490 490 490
Axial max. loading (N) 98 98 98 98 98
Power rating (kW/s) (with brake) 7.02 14.82 27.82 48.3 62

14.4 19.6 25 27.4 11.9
P
P P P
(with brake)
Mechanical time constant (ms)
2.54 2.02 1.52 1.53 1.29
(with brake)
10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0
[Nt-m (min)] *2 P

19.0 19.0 19.0 19.0 19.0
(at 20˚C) [W]
Brake release time [ms (Max.)] 10 10 10 10 10
Brake pull-in time [ms (Max.)] 70 70 70 70 70
Operating temperature (˚C) 0°C to 40 °C (32°F to 104°F)

P
Storage temperature (˚C) -10°C to 80°C (14°F to 176°F)
11-23
L△13 M△13
ECMA Series
05 08 13 18 09
Operating humidity 20 to 90% RH (non-condensing)
Storage humidity 20 to 90% RH (non-condensing)

IP65 (use the waterproof connector and shaft seal installation (or oil
IP Rating
seal) model)
Approvals
Note:
ECMA-_ _ 08：250 mm x 250 mm x 6 mm
ECMA-_ _ 13：400 mm x 400 mm x 20 mm
ECMA-_ _ 18：550 mm x 550 mm x 30 mm
ECMA-_ _ 22：650 mm x 650 mm x 35 mm
Material type: Aluminum –F80, F130, F180, F220
3 Model of ECMA-L11308 is applying for UL approval.
11-24
11.3 Torque Features (T-N Curves)

11.3.1 220V Series
Torque (N-m)
Torque (N-m) Torque(N-m)
0.477 0.96 1.92

(300%) (300%) (300%)
Intermittent Duty Intermittent Duty Intermittent
Zone Zone Duty Zone
0.159 0.32 0.64

(100%) (100%) (100%)
0.095 0.19 0.38
(60%) Continuous Duty Zone Continuous Duty Zone Continuous Duty zone
(60%) (60%)
Speed (r/min) Speed (r/min) Speed(r/min)
3000 5000 3000 5000 3000 5000
ECMA-CΔ040F□S ECMA-CΔ0401□S ECMA-CΔ0602□S
Torque
(N-m)
Torque
3.82 (N-m) Torque (N-m)
(300%)
7.16
7.14
Intermittent (300%) (298%) 6.00
Duty Zone
Intermittent (251%)
Intermittent
1.27 Duty Zone Duty Zone
(100%)
0.76 2.39 2.38
(60%) Continuous Duty Zone (100%) (100%)
Speed Continuous
1.43
3000 5000 (r/min) Continuous Duty Zone Duty Zone
(60%) Speed
Speed (r/min)
3000 5000 (r/min)
ECMA-CΔ0604□S, ECMA-CΔ0604□H 2000 3000
ECMA-CΔ0804□7 ECMA-CΔ0807□S, ECMA-CΔ0807□H ECMA-CΔ0907□S
Torque (N-m)
Torque (N-m) Torque (N-m)
8.78 19.11
9.54
(276%) (300%)
(300%)
5.85 Intermittent
(184%) Intermittent
Intermittent Duty Zone
Duty Zone
Duty Zone
3.18 3.18 6.37
(100%) (100%) (100%)
Continuous 3.82
1.91 Continuous Duty Zone
Duty Zone Continuous Duty Zone (60%)
(60%)
Speed (r/min) Speed (r/min) Speed (r/min)
2000 3000 3000 5000 3000 5000
ECMA-CΔ0910□S ECMA-CΔ1010□S ECMA-CΔ1020□S

Torque (N-m)
28.65 14.32
(300%) 7.16 (300%)
(300%)
Intermittent Intermittent
Duty Zone Intermittent Duty Zone
Duty Zone
9.55 4.77
(100%) 2.39
(100%)
(100%)
6.40 3.2
Continuous Duty Zone 1.6 Continuous Duty Zone
(67%) (67%) Continuous Duty Zone (67%)
3000 4500 2000 3000 2000 3000
ECMA-CΔ1330□4 ECMA-EΔ1305□S ECMA-EΔ1310□S
Torque (N-m)
28.65
21.5 28.65
(300%)
(300%) (300%)
Intermittent
Duty Zone
Duty Zone Duty Zone
7.16 9.55 9.55

(100%) (100%) (100%)
4.8 6.4 Continuous Duty zone 6.4
Continuous Duty Zone Continuous Duty Zone
(67%) (67%) (67%)
2000 3000 2000 3000 2000 3000
ECMA-EΔ1315□S ECMA-EΔ1320□S ECMA-EΔ1820□S
11-25
Torque (N-m) 50.13

(300%) 8.92
42.97 (280%)
(300%) Intermittent
Intermittent
Duty Zone 5.1
Duty Zone (160%)
16.71 3.18
14.32 (100%) (100%)
(100%) 11.20
Continuous Duty Zone 1.59
9.59 (67%) Continuous Duty Zone
Continuous Duty zone (50%)
(67%) Speed (r/min) Speed (r/min)
Speed (r/min)
2000 3000 2000 3000 1500 2300 3000
ECMA-EΔ1830□S ECMA-EΔ1835□S ECMA-FΔ1305□S

Torque (N-m)
13.80 23.3 28.7

(255%) (280%) (250%)
Intermittent Intermittent Intermittent
Duty Zone Duty Zone Duty Zone
7(130%) 11.48
8.34
5.41(100%) (100%) (100%)
2.70 4.17 5.74
(50%) Continuous Duty Zone (50%) Continuous Duty Zone (50%) Continuous Duty Zone
1500 2300 3000 1500 3000 1500 2300 3000
ECMA-FΔ1308□S ECMA-FΔ1313□S ECMA-FΔ1318□S

Torque (N-m)
71.62 87.53
57.29 (300%)
(300%) (300%)
Intermittent
Duty Zone Duty Zone
Duty Zone
19.10
28.65 35.01
(100%) (100%) (100%)
9.55 14.33 17.51
1500 3000 1500 3000 1500 3000
ECMA-FΔ1830□S ECMA-FΔ1845□S ECMA-FΔ1855□S
Torque (N-m) Torque (N-m) Torque (N-m)
119.36 175 224

(250%) (250%) (240%)
Intermittent Duty Intermittent
Intermittent Zone
Duty Zone Duty Zone
70 95.4
47.74 (100%) (100%)
(100%) 52.5 71.6
23.87 (75%) (75%) Continuous Duty Zone
Continuous Duty Zone
(50%) Continuous Duty Zone
1500 3000 1500 2000 1500 2000
ECMA-FΔ1875□S ECMA-F1221B□3 ECMA-F1221F□S
Torque (N-m) Torque (N-m) Torque (N-m)
8.59 17.19
(300%) (300%)
21.48
Intermittent (250%)
Intermittent
Duty Zone Duty Zone Intermittent
Duty Zone
2.86 5.73 8.59
(100%) (100%) (100%)
1.43 2.87 4.29
1000 2000 1000 2000 1000 2000
ECMA-GΔ1303□S ECMA-GΔ1306□S ECMA-GΔ1309□S
11-26
11.3.2 400V Series
Torque (N-m)
3.82
7.16 7.14
(300%) (298%)
(300%) 6.00
Intermittent (251%)
1.27 2.39 2.38

(100%) (100%) (100%)
0.762 1.43 Continuous
Continuous Duty Zone Continuous Duty Zone Duty Zone
(60%) (60%)
3000 5000 3000 5000 2000 3000
ECMA-JΔ0604□S ECMA-JΔ0807□S ECMA-JΔ0907□S

Torque (N-m)
9.54 19.11
8.78 (300%) (300%)
(276%)
5.85 Intermittent Intermittent
(184%) Duty Zone Duty Zone
Intermittent
Duty Zone
3.18 6.37
3.18
(100%) (100%)
(100%)
Continuous 1.91 3.82
Duty Zone (60%) Continuous Duty Zone (60%) Continuous Duty Zone
Speed (r/min) Speed(r/min) Speed (r/min)
2000 3000 3000 5000 3000 5000
ECMA-JΔ0910□S ECMA-JΔ1010□S ECMA-JΔ1020□S
Torque (N-m)
Torque (N-m)
Torque (N-m)
7.16 14.32
28.65 (300%)
(300%) (300%)
Duty Zone Duty Zone
4.77
9.55 2.39
(100%)
(100%) (100%) 3.2
6.4 1.6 (67%)
Continuous Duty Zone Continuous Duty Zone Continuous Duty Zone
(67%) (67%)
3000 4500 2000 3000 2000 3000
ECMA-JΔ1330□4 ECMA-KΔ1305□S ECMA-KΔ1310□S

Torque (N-m)
28.66 28.66
21.5 (300%)
(300%)
(300%)
Duty Zone
Duty Zone
7.16 9.55 9.55
(100%) (100%) (100%)
4.8 6.4
6.4
(67%) (67%) Continuous Duty Zone Continuous Duty Zone
Continuous Duty Zone (67%)
2000 3000 2000 3000 2000 3000
ECMA-KΔ1315□S ECMA-KΔ1320□S ECMA-KΔ1820□S
Torque (N-m)
8.92 13.80 23.3

(280%) (255%) (280%)
Intermittent
Duty Zone 3.5 Intermittent Intermittent
(110%) Duty Zone Duty Zone
3.18 5.39
(100%) 8.34
(100%) 4.5 (100%)
1.59 6
Continuous Duty Zone (83%) (72%)
(50%) 2.70 Continuous Duty Zone
Speed (r/min) Speed (r/min) 4.17 Continuous Duty Zone
(50%) Speed (r/min)
1500 2300 3000 1500 3000 (50%)
1500 3000
ECMA-LΔ1305□S ECMA-LΔ1308□S ECMA-LΔ1313□S
11-27

Torque (N-m)
28.7 71.62
57.29
(250%) (300%)
(300%)
Intermittent Intermittent Intermittent

11.48 19.10 28.65
(100%) (100%) (100%)
5.74 Continuous 14.33
9.55
(50%) Duty Zone (50%) Continuous Duty Zone (50%) Continuous Duty Zone
1500 3000 1500 3000 1500 3000
ECMA-L 1318 S ECMA-LΔ1830□S ECMA-LΔ1845□S
Torque (N-m)
Torque (N-m)
Torque (N-m)
87.53
(300%) 119.36 21.48
(250%) (250%)
Intermittent
Duty Zone Intermittent Intermittent
Duty Zone Duty Zone
35.01 47.74 8.59
(100%) (100%) (100%)
17.51 23.87 4.3
1500 3000 1500 3000 1000 2000
ECMA-LΔ1855□S ECMA-LΔ1875□S ECMA-MΔ1309□S
11-28
11.4 Overload Features

Definition of overload protection
The overload protection is to prevent the motor from overheating.
Cause of overload
1) When the motor operates over the rated torque, the operation time is too long
2) The inertia ratio is set too big and the motor accelerates / decelerates too often
3) Connection error between the power cable and encoder wiring
4) The servo gain setting error causes resonance of the motor
5) The motor with brake operates without releasing the brake
The graph of load and operating time

Low Inertia Series (ECMA C1, J1 Series)
11-29
Medium and Medium-High Inertia Series (ECMA E1, F1, K1 and L1 Series)
High Inertia Series (ECMA G1 Series)
11-30
11.5 Dimensions of Servo Drive

11.5.1 220V Series
ASD-A2-0121; ASD-A2-0221; ASD-A2-0421 (100 W ~ 400 W)
Weight
1.5 (3.3)
Note:
1. Dimensions are in millimeters (inches); weights are in kilograms (kg) and (pounds (lbs)).
2. Dimensions and weights of the servo drive may be revised without prior notice.
11-31
ASD-A2-0721; ASD-A2-1021; ASD-A2-1521 (750 W ~ 1.5 kW)
Weight
2.0 (4.4)
Note:
11-32
ASD-A2-2023; ASD-A2-3023 (2 kW ~ 3 kW)
Weight
2.89 (6.36)
Note:
11-33
ASD-A2-4523 (4.5 kW)
Weight
4.4 (10.0)
Note:
11-34
ASD-A2-5523 (5.5 kW)
Weight
5.5 (12.1)
Note:
11-35
ASD-A2-7523 (7.5 kW)
Weight
5.9 (13)
Note:
11-36
ASD-A2-1B23 (11 kW); ASD-A2-1F23 (15 kW)
Weight
20 (44)
Note:
11-37
11.5.2 400V Series

ASD-A2-0743; ASD-A2-1043; ASD-A2-1543 (750 W ~ 1.5 kW)
11-38
ASD-A2-2043; ASD-A2-3043, ASD-A2-4543; ASD-A2-5543 (2 kW ~ 5.5 kW)
Power A B C D E Weight
750 W~ 1.5 kW 216 (8.50) 203 (7.99) 82 (3.23) 62 (2.44) 203 (7.99) 2.89 (6.36)
2 kW ~ 5.5 kW 245 (9.65) 205.4 (8.09) 123 (4.88) 107 (4.21) 230 (9.06) 5.5 (12.1)
11-39
ASD-A2-7543 (7.5 kW)
Power A B C D E Weight
7.5 kW 254.2 (10.01) 205.5 (8.09) 136 (5.35) 107 (4.21) 247 (9.72) 5.5 (12.1)
Note:
1. Dimensions are in millimeters (inches).

2. Weights are in kilograms (kg) and (pounds (lbs)).
3. The servo drive images shown here may differ from actual product appearance. Please refer to
actual product appearance.
4. Actual measured values are in metric units. Dimensions and weights (in imperial units) are for
reference only.
11-40
11.6 Dimensions of Servo Motors (ECMA Series)

11.6.1 220V Series
Motor Frame Size: 86 mm and below Models (Units: mm)
300±50
300±50 LG LR
LE
TP
LS
LW
ØLBh7
ØSh6
□LC
RH
KEY DETAILS SHAFT END DETAILS
LL
Model C1040F□S C△0401□S C△0602□S C△0604□S C△0604□H

LC 40 40 60 60 60
LZ 4.5 4.5 5.5 5.5 5.5
LA 46 46 70 70 70
S 8(00.009 ) 8(00.009 ) 14(00.011) 14(00.011) 14(00.011)
LB 30(00.021) 30(00.021) 50( 00.025 ) 50( 00.025 ) 50( 00.025 )
LL (without brake) 79.1 100.6 105.5 130.7 145.8
LL (with brake) -- 136.8 141.6 166.8 176.37
LS 20 20 27 27 27
LR 25 25 30 30 30
LE 2.5 2.5 3 3 3
LG 5 5 7.5 7.5 7.5
LW 16 16 20 20 20
RH 6.2 6.2 11 11 11
WK 3 3 5 5 5
W 3 3 5 5 5
T 3 3 5 5 5
M3 M3 M4 M4 M4
TP
Depth 8 Depth 8 Depth 15 Depth 15 Depth 15
Note:
1. Dimensions are in millimeters. Actual measured values are in metric units.
2. Dimensions of the servo motor may be revised without prior notice.
3. The boxes () in the model names represent shaft end/brake or the number of oil seal.
4. Please refer to Chapter 1 for the boxes (△) in the model names (which represent encoder type).
11-41
300±50 Motor frame size: 86 mm and below Models (Units: mm)
300±50 LG LR
LE
TP
LS
LW
ØLBh7
ØSh6
□LC
RH
KEY DETAILS SHAFT END DETAILS
LL
Model C△0804□7 C△0807□S C△0807□H C△0907□S C△0910□S

LC 80 80 80 86 86
LZ 6.6 6.6 6.6 6.6 6.6
LA 90 90 90 100 100
S 14( 00.011) 19( 00.013) 19( 00.013) 16( 00.011) 16( 00.011)
LB 70( 00.030) 70( 00.030) 70( 00.030) 80( 00.030) 80( 00.030)
LL
112.3 138.3 154.8 130.2 153.2
(without brake)
LL
152.8 178 187.8 161.3 184.3
(with brake)
LS 27 32 32 30 30
LR 30 35 35 35 35
LE 3 3 3 3 3
LG 8 8 8 8 8
LW 20 25 25 20 20
RH 11 15.5 15.5 13 13
WK 5 6 6 5 5
W 5 6 6 5 5
T 5 6 6 5 5
M4 M6 M6 M5 M5
TP
Note:
4. Please refer to Chapter 1 for the boxes (△ ) in the model names (which represent encoder type).
11-42
Motor Frame Size: 100 mm ~ 130 mm Models (Units: mm)
Model C△1010□S C△1020□S C△1330□4 E△1305□S E△1310□S E△1315□S E△1320□S

LC 100 100 130 130 130 130 130
LZ 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
LA 115 115 145 145 145 145 145
22(00.013) 22(00.013) 22(00.013) 22(00.013)
0
S 24(0.013) 22(00.013) 22(00.013)
95(00.035) 95(00.035) 110(00.035) 110(00.035)
0
LB 110 ( 0.035) 110(00.035) 110(00.035)
LL
153.3 199.0 187.5 147.5 147.5 167.5 187.5
(without brake)
LL
192.5 226.0 216.0 183.5 183.5 202.0 216.0
(with brake)
LS 37 37 47 47 47 47 47
LR 45 45 55 55 55 55 55
LE 5 5 6 6 6 6 6
LG 12 12 11.5 11.5 11.5 11.5 11.5
LW 32 32 36 36 36 36 36
RH 18 18 20 18 18 18 18
WK 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
W 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
T 7 7 7 7 7 7 7
M6 M6 M6 M6 M6 M6 M6
TP
Depth 20 Depth 20 Depth 20 Depth 20 Depth 20 Depth 20 Depth 20
Note:
11-43
Motor Frame Size: 100 mm ~ 130 mm Models (Units: mm)
Model F△1305□S F△1308□S F△1313□S F△1318□S G△1303□S G△1306□S G△1309□S

LC 130 130 130 130 130 130 130
LZ 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
LA 145 145 145 145 145 145 145
S 22(00.013) 22(00.013) 22(00.013) 22(00.013) 22(00.013) 22(00.013) 22(00.013)
LB 110(00.035) 110(00.035) 110(00.035) 110(00.035) 110(00.035) 110(00.035) 110(00.035)
LL
139.5 152.5 187.5 202.0 147.5 147.5 163.5
(without brake)
LL
168.0 181.0 216.0 230.7 183.5 183.5 198
(with brake)
LS 47 47 47 47 47 47 47
LR 55 55 55 55 55 55 55
LE 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
LG 11.5 11.5 11.5 11.5 11.5 11.5 11.5
LW 36 36 36 36 36 36 36
RH 18 18 18 18 18 18 18
WK 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
W 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
T 7 7 7 7 7 7 7
M6 M6 M6 M6 M6 M6 M6
TP
Depth 20 Depth 20 Depth 20 Depth 20 Depth 20 Depth 20 Depth 20
Note:
11-44
Motor Frame Size: 180 mm and above Models (Units: mm)
Model E△1820□S E△1830□S E△1835□S F△1830□S

LC 180 180 180 180
LZ 13.5 13.5 13.5 13.5
LA 200 200 200 200
S 35(00.016) 35(00.016) 35(00.016) 35(00.016)
LB 114.3(00.035) 114.3(00.035) 114.3(00.035) 114.3(00.035)
LL (without brake) 169.0 202.1 202.1 202.1

LL (with brake) 203.1 235.3 235.3 235.3
LS 73 73 73 73
LR 79 79 79 79
LE 4 4 4 4
LG 20 20 20 20
LW 63 63 63 63
RH 30 30 30 30
WK 10 10 10 10
W 10 10 10 10
T 8 8 8 8
M12 M12 M12 M12
TP
Depth 25 Depth 25 Depth 25 Depth 25
Note:
11-45
Motor Frame Size: 180 mm Models (Units: mm)
Model F△1845□S F△1855□3 F△1875□3

LC 180 180 180
LZ 13.5 13.5 13.5
LA 200 200 200
S 35(00.016) 42(00.016) 42(00.016)
LB 114.3(00.035) 114.3(00.035) 114.3(00.035)

LL (without brake) 235.3 279.7 342.0
LL (with brake) 279.3 311.7 376.1
LS 73 108.5 108.5
LR 79 113 113
LE 4 4 4
LG 20 20 20
LW 63 90 90
RH 30 37 37
WK 10 12 12
W 10 12 12
T 8 8 8
M12 M16 M16
TP
Depth25 Depth32 Depth32
Note:
11-46
Model F1221B□3 F1221F□S

LC 220 220
LZ 13.5 13.5
LA 235 235
S 42(00.016 ) 55(00..03
011)
LB 200(00.046 ) 200(00.046 )
LL (without brake) 371.4 453.4
LL (with brake) 434.4 513.4
LS 108 108
LR 116 116
LE 4 4
LG 20 20
LW 90 90
RH 37 49
WK 12 16
W 12 16
T 8 10
M16 M20
TP
Depth 32 Depth 40
Note:
11-47
11.6.2 400V Series

Motor Frame Size: 86 mm and below Models (Units: mm)
Model J△0604□S J△0807□S J△0907□S J△0910□S

LC 60 80 86 86
LZ 5.5 6.6 6.6 6.6
LA 70 90 100 100
S 14( 0 ) 19(00.013) 16( 00.011) 16( 00.011)

0.011
LB 50( 0 ) 70(00.030) 80( 00.030) 80( 00.030)
0.025
LL (without brake) 130.7 138.3 130.2 153.2
LL (with brake) 166.8 178.0 161.3 184.3
LS (without oil seal) 27 32 30 30
LS (with oil seal) -- 29.5 30 30
LR 30 35 35 35
LE 3 3 3 3
LG 7.5 8 8 8
LW 20 25 20 20
RH 11 15.5 13 13
WK 5 6 5 5
W 5 6 5 5
T 5 6 5 5
M4 M6 M5 M5
TP
Depth15 Depth 20 Depth 15 Depth 15
Note:
11-48
Model J△1010□S J△1020□S

LC 100 100
LZ 9 9
LA 115 115
S 22(00.013) 22(00.013)
LB 95(00.035) 95(00.035)
LL (without brake) 153.3 199.0
LL (with brake) 192.5 226.0
LS 37 37
LR 45 45
LE 5 5
LG 12 12
LW 32 32
RH 18 18
WK 8 8
W 8 8
T 7 7
M6 M6
TP
Depth 20 Depth 20
Note:
11-49
Model J△1330□4 K△1305□S K△1310□S K△1315□S K△1320□S

LC 130 130 130 130 130
LZ 9 9 9 9 9
LA 145 145 145 145 145
S 24( 0 ) 22(00.013) 22(00.013) 22(00.013) 22(00.013)
0.013
0
LB 110(0.035) 110(00.035) 110(00.035) 110(00.035) 110(00.035)
LL (without brake) 187.5 139.5 147.5 167.5 187.5
LL (with brake) 216.0 168.0 183.5 202.0 216.0
LS 47 47 47 47 47
LR 55 55 55 55 55
LE 6 6 6 6 6
LG 11.5 11.5 11.5 11.5 11.5
LW 36 36 36 36 36
RH 20 18 18 18 18
WK 8 8 8 8 8
W 8 8 8 8 8
T 7 7 7 7 7
M6 M6 M6 M6 M6
TP
Note:
11-50
Model L△1305□S L△1313□S L△1308□S L△1318□S M△1309□S

LC 130 130 130 130 130
LZ 9 9 9 9 9
LA 145 145 145 145 145
S 22(00.013) 22(00.013) 22(00.013) 22(00.013) 22(00.013)
LB 110(00.035) 110(00.035) 110(00.035) 110(00.035) 110(00.035)
LL (without brake) 147.5 194.5 163.5 194.5 163.5
LL (with brake) 168.0 223.0 181.0 - 198.0
LS 47 47 47 47 47
LR 55 55 55 55 55
LE 6 6 6 6 6
LG 11.5 11.5 11.5 11.5 11.5
LW 36 36 36 36 36
RH 18 18 18 18 18
WK 8 8 8 8 8
W 8 8 8 8 8
T 7 7 7 7 7
M8 M6 M6 M6 M6
TP
Note:
11-51
Model L△1830□S L△1845□S L△1855□S L△1875□S K△1820□S

LC 180 180 180 180 180
LZ 13.5 13.5 13.5 13.5 13.5
LA 200 200 200 200 200
S 35(00.016) 35(00.016) 42(00.016) 42(00.016) 35(00.016)
LB 114.3(00.035) 114.3(00.035) 114.3(00.035) 114.3(00.035) 114.3(00.035)
LL (without brake) 202.1 235.3 279.7 342.0 169.0
LL (with brake) 235.3 279.3 311.7 376.1 203.1
LS 73 73 108.5 108.5 73
LR 79 79 113 113 79
LE 4 4 4 4 4
LG 20 20 20 20 20
LW 63 63 90 90 63
RH 30 30 37 37 30
WK 10 10 12 12 10
W 10 10 12 12 10
T 8 8 8 8 8
M12 M12 M16 M16 M12
TP
Note:
3. The boxes () in the model names represent shaft end/brake or the number.
11-52
Chapter 12 Absolute System
Introduction
Delta’s absolute system includes an ASDA-A2 series servo drive, an ECMA series servo motor
with an absolute encoder, and a backup battery box for an absolute encoder. The backup battery
supplies power to the system so that the encoder continues to operate even when the power is off.
In addition, an absolute encoder in an ECMA series servo motor will constantly record the actual
positions by its built-in coordinate system at any time. So the real position of the servo motor will
be measured and recorded even if the motor shaft rotates after the power is turned off.
An ECMA series servo motor with an absolute encoder is essential and must be connected with an
ASDA-A2 series servo drive for a Delta’s absolute system. When an ECMA series servo motor with
an incremental encoder is connected to an ASDA-A2 series servo drive, if the users enable the
servo parameters for absolute system, a fault code, AL069, will be shown on the drive’s LCD
display to alert that an error occurs.
Note that when using an absolute motor, as soon as it applies to the power, the motor speed
should be lower than 250 rpm. When operating in battery mode, make sure the maximum speed
does not exceed 200 rpm. The model name of a servo motor with an absolute encoder is shown as
below:
ECMA-□A□□□□□□
A: Servo Motor with Absolute Encoder
Install the battery properly with the encoder cable. One servo drive uses one single battery box.
Two servo drives can share a dual battery box. We recommend the users to choose Delta’s
backup battery boxes and Delta’s encoder connection cables for Delta’s absolute systems for
wiring and connection. Regarding the descriptions and specifications of battery boxes and
corresponding accessories, please refer to the contents in the following sections.
12-1
ASDA-A2 Chapter 12 Absolute System
12.1 Battery Box (absolute type) and wiring
12.1.1 Specifications
Precautions
Please thoroughly understand and observe the following safety precautions. In order to prevent
damage and danger, please use batteries in accordance with the specified specification.
 Install the product in a location free of vapor, and corrosive and inflammable gas.
 Do not place the battery dispersedly to prevent short circuit.
 Do not short-circuit the positive pole and the negative pole of the batteries or install
batteries in reverse polarity.
 To prevent electric energy loss and lifetime reduction, it is recommended to use new
batteries only.
 Please follow the instructions when wiring the battery box to avoid danger.
 Do not store batteries within an ambient temperature above +100°C (212°F). Failure to
observe this precaution may cause fire or explosion.
 The batteries are non-rechargeable. Do not charge the batteries, or explosion may
occur.
 Do not directly solder the battery surface.
Battery Specifications
Items Li/SOCl2 Cylindrical Battery
Type ER14505
Delta Model Number ASD-CLBT0100
International Standard Size AA
Standard Voltage 3.6V
Standard Capacity 2700 mAh
Maximum Continuous Discharge Current 100 mA
Maximum Pulse Current 200 mA
Dimensions (D x H) 14.5 x 50.5 mm
Weight Approx. 19 g
Operating Temperature -40°C to 85°C (-40°F to 185°F)
12-2
Chapter 12 Absolute System ASDA-A2
Battery Life
The above figure comes from EVE Energy Co. ER14505 Discharge Characteristics
(1) The above figure illustrates the discharge current curve generated by constant current test.
According to the testing result shown on the graph above, when the power consumption of an
absolute encoder is 190 uA or lower, if the voltage of the battery keeps 3V or higher, the
expected battery life is about 19.7 months(Note). Therefore, the lowest voltage level of battery for
an absolute encoder is set to 3.1V.
(2) The battery life expectancy is about 5 years and is able to provide 3.6V or higher voltage under
normal temperature and humidity conditions.
Note: the battery life was measured when one single battery box is connecting to one servo drive and one
servo motor.
12-3
12.1.2 Battery Box Dimensions
Single Battery Box

Delta Model Number: ASD-MDBT0100
68
35 22
Weight
44 g
R
3.
25
Units: mm
Dual Battery Box

Delta Model Number: ASD-MDBT0200
72.5
45
26
64.5
Weight
80 g
R2
.5
Units: mm
12-4
12.1.3 Connection Cables for Absolute Encoder
A. Quick Connector
Delta part number: ASD-A2EB0003, ASD-A2EB0005
L
Title Model Name
mm inch
1 ASD-A2EB0003 3000  100 118  4
2 ASD-A2EB0005 5000  100 197  4
Connection method:
Please conduct the wiring according to the following instructions. Wrong wiring might
cause battery explosion.
Quick *1
Connector
Battery box
CN2 Connector Connector of Connector of

Servo Drive
Motor
Note 1:
Connector of Connector of
Housing : AMP(1-172161-9)
View from this side

View from this side
1 2 3 3 2 1
White Red Black White
T+ BAT+ Reserved Reserved BAT+ T+
4 5 6 6 5 4
White/Red Black Red/Black White/Red
T- Reserved Reserved BAT- T-
BAT-
7 8 9 9 8 7
Brown Blue Blue Brown
Shield Shield
DC+5V GND GND DC+5V
The wire color of the servo drive

connector is only for reference.
Please refer to the real object.
12-5
B. Military Connector
Delta part number: ASD-A2EB1003, ASD-A2EB1005
L
Title Model Name
mm inch
1 ASD-A2EB1003 3000  100 118  4
2 ASD-A2EB1005 5000  100 197  4
Connection method:
Battery box
Military *1
CN2 Connector Connector
Servo Drive
Motor
Note 1:
Pin
Terminal Color
No.
A A T+ White
B M
C N L B T- White/Red
P T
D K
R S C BAT+ Red
E J
F G H D BAT- Black
S DC+5V Brown
R GND Blue
3106A-20-29S BRAID
L -
Military Connector SHIELD
12-6
12.1.4 Battery Box Cords
Battery Box Cord AW

Delta Part Number: 3864573700
15±5
25±5
See detail A See detail B

200±10
detail A detail B
(RED)1 1(RED)
(BLACK)2 2(BLACK)
Battery Box Cord IW

15 ± 5 15 ± 5
See detail A 200 ± 10 See detail B
detail A detail B
1 (BLACK) 1 (RED)
2 (RED) 2 (BLACK)
12-7
12.2 Installation
12.2.1 Connection Examples
Single Battery Box (Standard wiring)

Servo Drive
*3
CN2 Connector
Absolute type
encoder cable*1
ASD-A2EB0003,
ASD-A2EB0005,
ASD-A2EB1003,
ASD-A2EB1005
Single battery
box for absolute
type encoder
*2
Motor
Note:
This is the wiring diagram for connecting to a single battery box. The scale of the objects does not
match the dimensions as shown in the drawing above. For different models of AC servo drives and
motors, the connection cables may differ.
For 1* and 2*, please refer to section 12.1.3.
3* Definition of CN2 connector
CN2 Connector Motor Connector
Pin No. Function and Description
5 T+ A 1
input/output (+)
4 T- B 4
input/output (-)
7 BAT+ Battery 3.6V C 2
9 BAT- Battery ground D 5
14, 16 +5V Power +5V S 7
- Shield Shield L 9
12-8
Single Battery Box (Connect to CN8)
Servo Drive
CN2 Connector
Incremental type
encoder cable
ASD-ABEN0003,
ASD-ABEN0005,
ASD-CAEN1003,
Single battery *1 ASD-CAEN1005
box for absolute
type encoder
CN8 *3
*2
Battery Box Cord

IW Motor
Note:
1* Make sure the battery box is firmly fixed with this connection method.
2* Connect to the power base on a single battery box. See the descriptions below:
Pin No. Terminal Symbol Connector Cable
1 BAT+ Red
1 2 2 BAT- Black
3* Definition of CN8 Connector:

Pin No. Terminal Symbol
1 BAT+
2 BAT-
12-9
Dual Battery Box (Connect to CN2)
Servo Drive # 1 Servo Drive #2
Two connection ports

are on the front and
rear sides of the
battery box for
CN2 Connector*3 connecting to two
CN2 Connector*3
servo drives
Absolute type *1 Absolute type *1

encoder cable encoder cable
ASD-A2EB0003, ASD-A2EB0003,
ASD-A2EB0005, Battery Box Cord Battery Box Cord ASD-A2EB0005,
ASD-A2EB1003, AW AW ASD-A2EB1003,
ASD-A2EB1005 Absolute type ASD-A2EB1005
*2 of battery box *2
Motor # 1 Motor #2
Note:
CN2 Connector Motor Connector
Pin No. Function and Description
Serial communication
5 T+ A 1
signal input/output (+)
Serial communication
4 T- B 4
signal input/output (-)
7 BAT+ Battery 3.6V C 2
9 BAT- Battery ground D 5
14, 16 +5V Power +5V S 7
- Shield Shield L 9
12-10
Dual Battery Box (Connect to CN8)
Servo Drive # 1 Servo Drive #2
Two connection ports

are on the front and
rear sides of the
CN2 Connector battery box for CN2 Connector
connecting to two
servo drives
CN8 *3 CN8
Incremental type*1 Incremental type *1
encoder cable encoder cable
ASD-ABEN0003, ASD-ABEN0003,
ASD-ABEN0005, ASD-ABEN0005,
ASD-CAEN1003, ASD-CAEN1003,
ASD-CAEN1005 ASD-CAEN1005
Battery Box Cord Battery Box Cord

*2 IW Absolute type IW *2
of battery box
Motor # 2
Motor #1
Note:
Pin No. Terminal Symbol
1 BAT+
2 BAT-
12-11
12.2.2 How to Install a Battery
Single Battery Box

Put on the clip on the cable.
Loosen the latches of both
Please note that the position of
sides to open the top cover.
the clip should be very close to
the heat shrink tube.
Heat Shrink
Tube
Clip
① Plug in the connection cable Install a new battery.

② Turn the screw to tighten it.
Place the cables into the box

and put the cover on the box.
12-12
Dual Battery Box
Pull the latches located on Tighten the mounting screws

the bottom side as shown to secure the battery box.
in the figure below.
12-13
12.2.3 How to Replace a Battery
Please replace with a new battery if AL061 occurs, it means the battery is under voltage (refer to
section 12.7.1 for detailed description). Or when accessing P0-02 for showing the battery power
and it displays 31, which means the voltage is under 3.1V, so as to avoid data loss.
When the voltage is under 2.7V, it might lose the record of motor’s position. Please conduct
homing after replacing with a new battery. Please refer to section 12.7.1 for detailed description.
Please replace the battery while the power is applied to the servo drive in order to prevent the
absolute position data loss.
Single Battery Box
Release the latches located on Fully open the top cover

both sides to open the top cover.
Disconnect the wires and remove the Place the cables into the box and
old battery from the box. Then, replace put the cover on the box. Finally,
with a new battery. Ensure to connect lock the latches to complete the
the connector of new battery to battery replacement.
complete the wiring.
Please replace the battery

while power is applied to the
drive. Do not remove the power
connection, or power interrupt
may cause data loss.
12-14
Dual Battery Box
Lifting the top cover to pull

Please replace the
out the batteries.
battery while power is
applied to the drive. Press the latches
Do not remove the located on both sides
power connection, or
to open the top cover.
power interrupt may
cause data loss.
Disconnect the wires and remove

the old batteries. Then, replace with
new batteries. Ensure to connect
the connectors of new batteries to
complete the wiring. To prevent the
data loss, please replace the
Push down the cover until they lock.
batteries in 10 minutes.
Place the cables

toward the inner
side so that the
batteries can be
put into the
battery box.
12-15
12.3 System Initialization Procedure and Operation
12.3.1 System Initialization Procedure
When the servo system is power on, the host controller can get the motor coordinate position via
communication with RS-485 or DI/O. There are two data in different units can be read, and they
are in PULSE and PUU.
At the very first time to operate absolute system, there will be a fault code, AL060 shown when
power on because the initialization procedure still not yet be done. The fault will be kept until the
initialization procedure is finished. Besides, the AL060 will be displayed when the power from the
servo and battery is discontinued that will lead to the coordinate system lost. There is a fault code,
AL062 which is used to indicate when the number of motor rotations is exceeding the range
-32768 to 32767. But from the view of PUU, the coordinate value must fall into the range
-2147483648 to 2147483647 to avoid triggering the fault AL289.
Except for the alarms mentioned above, you can use P2-70 to set up Delta’s absolute servo
system. You can choose not to show AL062 and AL289 if overflow occurs in the absolute
coordinate system when the number of rotations exceeds the range -2147483648 to 2147483647.
This is for the applications that the motor rotates in a single direction with incremental commands.
Parameter Settings:
1. The AL060 will be cleared when the coordinate system has been initialized.
PR mode: The absolute coordinate system will be reset after any homing operation under PR
mode.
Other modes: Two methods can be used to initialize the coordinated system. One is via digital
inputs described in section 12.3.4, and the other is applying parameters in section
12.3.5.
2. For an initialized system when the power is turned on, the host controller can read the absolute
coordinate data via digital inputs and digital outputs (see section 12.3.6) or parameters with
communication (see section 12.2.6). Through the settings of parameter P2-70, you can have the
host controller to read the value in either PUU (see section 12.3.3) or the pulse number within
one turn 1280000 (see section 12.3.2).
12-16
12.3.2 Pulse Counting
When the motor is running in clockwise direction, the counting number of turns will be minus where
the counter clockwise rotating is plus. The number range for turns is from -32768 to 32767. The
fault code, AL062, will appear when exceeding this counting range and it can be cleared by
resetting the coordinate system. If parameter P2-70 has been set to ignore the over range alarming,
the AL062 is disabled even exceeding the counting range. For the counter clockwise counting, the
sequence of the number is …32767, -32768, -32767, -32766 …. and the clockwise will have a
sequence like …-32768, 23767, 32766 ….
In addition, there are 1280000 pulses (0 ~ 1279999) in one rotation. Please pay attention on its
direction. The communication or digital inputs/digital outputs can be used to read it.
Pulse number for the distance = m (turn) × 1280000 + pulse number within one turn (0 ~
1279999)
The conversion between Pulse and PUU:

When the rotating direction is CCW defined in P1-01.
(P1  45 )
PUU number = pulse number × + (P6-01)
(P1  44 )
When the rotating direction is CW defined in P1-01.
(P1  45 )
PUU number = (-1) × pulse number × + (P6-01)
(P1  44 )
Pulse within one turn

P0-52
Turn, P0-51 m=-2 m=-1 m=0 m=1
(1280000-1)
Pulse
0
0~1279999 0~1279999 0~1279999 0~1279999 0~1279999 0~1279999
ORG
CW CCW
Figure 12.1 Pulse counting in absolute coordinate system
12-17
12.3.3 PUU Counting
A 32-bit number with sign is used to denote PUU number in an absolute system. The PUU number
is increasing when the motor is in positive rotating direction and decreasing for a negative running
direction. The motor’s rotating direction is defined in P1-01 Z setting. In a word, the encoder
feedback number is an easy way to distinguish the motor’s rotating direction. Increasing number
sequence is for positive direction and decreasing number sequence is for negative direction.
If the motor keeps rotating in one direction, the AL062 will be shown when exceeding the number
range -32768 to 32767 for turns, and the AL289 is for PUU out of the range -2147483648 to
22147483647. Both of these fault codes can be cleared by homing.
And the parameter P2-70 can be used to take the range restrictions away in order to avoid
occurring AL062 and AL289. When the counting number reaches the maximum number, the PUU
pulse number sequence for forward rotation is … 2147483647, -2147483648, -
2147483647…where the number sequence -2147483648, 2147483647, 2147483646… is for
reverse rotation. Two examples for evaluating the timing of overflow are as below:
Example 1:
When P1-44=128 and P1-45=10, there are 100000 PUU for motor to rotate one turn.
2147483647 ÷ 100000 ≒ 21474.8. The limit to trigger the fault AL289 is 21474.8 (< 32767).
Example 2:
When P1-44=128 and P1-45=1, there are 10000 PUU for motor to rotate one turn.
2147483647 ÷ 10000 ≒ 214748.3. The limit to trigger the fault AL062 is 32767 (< 214748.3).
PUU
The range of data
...... 2147483647 -2147483648 ~ 2147483647 -2147483648 ......
2147483647
0 ...... ......
-2147483648
CCW CW
ORG
Overflow
warning AL289 AL289
Figure 12.2 PUU counting in absolute coordinate system
Note: When an absolute system has been initialized, if the parameter P1-01 Z setting, P1-44, and P1-45 are
changed, the absolute coordinate system will be destroyed. A homing procedure is necessary at that
moment.
12-18
12.3.4 Use Digital Inputs/Outputs to Create the Absolute Origin Coordinate
When the servo drive is in PR mode, initialize the system with PR homing. Except for PR mode,
the digital inputs and outputs can be used for a driver to do homing when other modes are selected.
Move the motor to home place, enable digital input, ABSE, then enable digital input, ABSC from
OFF to ON, and the system will start to initialization. The pulse number will be set to zero and the
number in P6-01 is for PUU to reference. Please refer to Figure 12.3 below for the signal
controlling chart.
1
ON
ABSE
OFF
TS 2
ON
ABSC
OFF 3
TQ
Absolute
Position Counter
(Pulse=0, PUU=P6-01)
TS(ms) TQ(ms)
Min. P2-09+2
Max. P2-09+250
Figure 12.3 The controlling chart for creating the absolute origin coordinates via digital inputs/outputs
The descriptions for the timing:

1. When the host controller switches ABSE from OFF to ON, the system needs to wait after a
period of time TS before proceeding to the next steps to reset.
2. After waiting time TS, the host controller now can enable the ABSC from OFF to ON and hold the
signal for TQ to reset the coordinate system where pulse number will be zero and PUU number
is defined in P6-01.
12.3.5 Use Parameters to Create the Absolute Origin Coordinate
When the parameter P2-71 is set to 1 (one) via the keypad or communication, the system starts to
create the absolute origin coordinate. Because P2-71 is write-protected by P2-08, you need to first
set 271 to P2-08 to write the value to P2-71. The procedure is P2-08=271 and then P2-71=1. This
mode is only for all modes except PR mode. If it is in PR mode, please execute homing procedure
to create the absolute origin coordinate.
12-19
12.3.6 Use Digital Inputs/Outputs to Read the Absolute Coordinate Data
When Bit 0 is 0 in P2-70, the PUU number can be read by using digital inputs and outputs.
The frame is as below.
Bit 79 ~ Bit 64 Bit 63 ~ Bit 32 Bit 31 ~ Bit 16 Bit 15 ~ Bit 0
Encoder PUU 0 Encoder status,

Check Sum
-2147483648 - 2147483647 P0-50
When Bit 0 is 1 in P2-70, the PULSE number can be read by using digital inputs and outputs.
The frame is as below.
Bit 79 ~ Bit 64 Bit 63 ~ Bit 32 Bit 31 ~ Bit 16 Bit 15 ~ Bit 0
Pulse within one turn Encoder turn Encoder status,

Check Sum
0 ~ 1279999 (= 1280000-1) -32768 ~ +32767 P0-50
Explanation:
Check Sum = (((((((WORD_0+0xA700) XOR WORD_1)+0x605A) XOR WORD_2)+0x30A5) XOR
WORD_3)+0x5A06)
WORD_0 WORD_1 WORD_2 WORD_3
+ XOR + XOR + XOR + output
0xA700 0x605A 0x30A5 0x5A06
Note:
1. This algorithm has no plus or minus sign.
2. 0xA700, 0x605A, 0x30A5, and 0x50A6 are the constants of hexadecimal.
3. WORD_0: encoder status (Bit 15 ~ 0)
WORD_1: encoder turn (Bit 31 ~ 16)
WORD_2: encoder pulse (Bit 47 ~ 32)
WORD_3: encoder pulse (Bit 63 ~ 48)
12-20
The setting in P2-70 with digital inputs/outputs communication can be used to read PULSE number
or PUU data with below signal communication sequence.
See 14 and 15 on the
next picture below
1 2 14 15
ABSE (DIx) TB
Communication 12
Enable (any DI)
TS 3 5 7 9 TS
ABSQ (DI4)
Request Signal TN
(DI4 only) TN
TR
ABSR (DO2) TQ TQ TQ
Ready Signal
(DO2 only)
4 6 8 10
ABSD (DO3) b0 b1 b2
ABSW (DOx)
11 13
Communication
Error (DOx)
See 13 on the
next picture below
DI/DO function before communication enabled
The same as 14 and 15

on the picture above
14 15 16
ABSE (DIx) TB
Communication
Enable (any DI)
TS
ABSQ (DI4)
Request Signal
(DI4 only)
ABSR (DO2)
Ready Signal
(DO2 only)
ABSD (DO3)
Data (DO3 only) b0 b1 b2 b79
ABSW (DOx)
Communication 13
Error (DOx)
Same as 13 in the picture above
TR(ms) TS(ms) TQ(ms) TN(ms) TB(ms)

Min - P2-09+2
Max 200 P2-09+10
Figure 12.4 Timing diagram of using digital inputs/outputs to read absolute data
12-21
The step explanation for the communication:
1. At the very beginning of communication, the host controller must enable ABSE and all the
communication starts from here.
2. After the signal has been recognized, the DI4, DO2, and DO3 (no matter what their functions
are), will be switched to the functions of ABSQ, ABSR, and ABSD respectively. At the moment
of the communication function enabled, if the signal of ABSQ is in high level, it will keep high
level for its original function and also will be high level signal for ABSQ. DI4, DO2, and DO3
are multiple functions pins, please be noted especially at the moment of communication
function switching on and off. For the purpose of simplifying the application, the functions of
these three digital inputs and outputs could to set to 0 for communication use only.
3. When ABSE is at high level and retaining TS long, the function of DI4 will be switched to ABSQ.
If the host controller switch ABSQ to low after it is defined, the servo drive will recognize that
host controller wants to read data from it.
4. After confirming time TQ, the data for communication is already well prepared on ABSD and
the signal ABSR is enabled for signaling the host controller to get data from the servo drive
side. If the longest possible waiting time of TQ (see Figure 12.4) expired, the host controller still
cannot get the signal ABSR from low to high which could be a problem of wiring disconnection.
5. After the host controller detects that ABSR is high, the data is fetched. The ABSQ will be set to
signal high to inform the drive after dada read.
6. After confirming time TN for ABSQ kept high, the servo drive will maintain ABSR to low for
signaling the host controller to be ready for accessing next bit.
7. The host will set ABSQ to low when it detects that ABSR is low for requesting the next bit from
drive.
8. The servo drive will repeat the steps 3 to 4 to put its data at ABSD for next bit communication
9. By repeating steps 5 to 7, the host controller will get the data, bit, and have an
acknowledgement to the servo drive.
10. The third bit data is ready on the servo drive side.
11. After the data is ready and has been held for time TR, the servo drive still does not see the
signal ABSQ controlled by the host controller, and then the servo drive will have a
communication error flag ABSW raise to terminate the communication procedure.
12. The host controller will set the ABSE to low for restart the communication cycle after getting
the communication error message from the servo drive.
13. The communication error flag on servo drive side will be reset after detecting a low signal
ABSE from the host controller.
14. A new communication cycle on the host controller restarts after the buffering time TB.
15. Repeat the step 1 for the host controller to start a new communication cycle.
16. If no error occurs during communication, the host controller finishes the data transmission for
12-22
bit 0 to bit 79 (80 bits in total), the functions of DI4, DO2, and DO3 resume their original
functions after the communication is complete.
Note:
If ABSW does not go back to high level signal after the changing of ABSE for signal low to high that is a sign
of error occurring, there must be some other errors existing. Please check if the coordinate data still there,
the voltage level of battery, or overflowing on the coordinate value. A new communication cycle can be
started only all of these errors been removed.
12.3.7 Use Parameter to Read the Absolute Coordinate Data
The servo drive will update its encoder status to P0-50 and encoder position to P0-51 and P0-52
when the parameter P0-49 is set. The Bit 1 of P2-70 is used to select which type of the data will be
read, PULSE or PUU. While the servo motor is stalling, it is always maintaining its position with a
very tiny forward and backward movement. At the moment the encoder data read, the coordinate
data in servo drive side will be reset to the current position of motor if P0-49=2 where it is just read
without changing any from the servo motor when P0-49=1. For example, if the motor is positioning
at the place of 20000, it will move around position from 19999 to 20001 normally. The command
for reading the encoder data is put when the motor is at the place 20001, and the data 20001 will
be read and the coordinate data in servo drive will be revised to 20001. There will avoid the error
from the data at encoder side and the data at drive side. The P0-49 will be reset to 0 when all the
encoder data put in P0-50 to P0-52 is ready, and it means that the host controller can get the data
now. When the status already signals absolute coordinate data lost or overflow of number for turns
in P0-50, the values in P0-51 to P0-52 are not correct. A homing or system reset procedure is
necessary now.
Start
Write
P0-49 = 1 or P0-49 =2
No
P0-49 = 0
Yes
Read
P0-50 ~ P0-52
Stop
12-23
12.4 Related Parameters for Absolute System
Address: 028AH
P2-69● ABS Absolute Encoder Setting
028BH
Interface：
Default： 0x0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： N/A
Range： 0x0 ~ 0x1
Data Size： 16-bit
Settings： 0: Incremental mode. Servo motor with absolute encoder can be

operated as incremental motor.
1: Absolute mode. (This setting is only available for the servo motor
with absolute encoder. When an incremental servo motor is
connected, if P2-69 is set to 1, AL069 will occur.)
Note: This parameter is effective only after the servo drive is re-powered on.
Address: 028CH
P2-70 MRS Read Data Format Selection
028DH
Interface：
Default： 0x0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： N/A
Range： 0x00 ~ 0x07
Data Size： 16-bit
Settings：

Bit 0: Data unit setting of digital input/output (DI/DO);
1: Pulse, 0: PUU
Bit 1: Communication data unit setting; 1: Pulse, 0: PUU
12-24
Bit 2: Overflow warning; 1: No overflow warning, 0: Overflow warning,

AL289 (PUU), AL062 (pulse).
Bit 3 ~ Bit 15: Reserved. Must be set to 0.
Address: 028EH
P2-71■ CAP Absolute Position Homing
028FH
Interface：
Default： 0x0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： N/A
Range： 0x0 ~ 0x1
Data Size： 16-bit
Settings： When P2-71 is set to 1, the current position will be set as home position.
This function is the same as the digital input, ABSC. This function can
be enabled only when parameter P2-08 is set to 271.
Address: 0062H
P0-49■ UAP Renew Encoder Absolute Position
0063H
Interface：
Default： 0x0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： N/A
Range： 0x00 ~ 0x02
Data Size： 16-bit
Settings：This parameter is used to renew the absolute position data of the

encoder.
Parameter Renew Setting:

1: Renew the encoder data to parameters P0-50 ~ P0-52 only.
12-25
2: Renew the parameters P0-50 ~ P0-52, and clear the position error
as well. While this setting is activated, the current position of the
motor will be reset as the target position of position command (same
function as CCLR).
Address: 0064H
P0-50★ APSTS Absolute Coordinate System Status
0065H
Interface：
Default： 0x0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： N/A
Range： 0x00 ~ 0x1F
Data Size： 16-bit
Settings：

Bit0: Absolute position status
Bit0=0: Normal
Bit0=1: Absolute position is lost
Bit1: Voltage level of battery
Bit0=0: Normal
Bit0=1: Low battery
Bit2: Status of encoder multiturn
Bit0=0: Normal
Bit0=1: Overflow
Bit3: Status of PUU
Bit0=0: Normal
Bit0=1: Overflow
Bit4: Absolute coordinate system status
Bit0=0: Normal
Bit0=1: Absolute coordinate system has not been set
Bit5 ~ Bit15: Reserved. Must be set to 0.
12-26
Address: 0066H
P0-51★ APR Encoder Absolute Position (Multiturn)
0067H
Interface：
Default： 0x0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： rev
Range： -32768 ~ +32767
Data Size： 32-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： While the Bit 1 of P2-70 is set to 1 to read the encoder pulse number,
this parameter represents the turns of encoder absolute position. While
the Bit 1 of P2-70 is set to 0 to read the PUU number, this parameter
becomes disabled and the setting value of this parameter is 0.
Encoder Absolute Position Address: 0068H

P0-52★ APP
(Pulse number within Singleturn or PUU) 0069H
Interface：
Default： 0x0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： Pulse or PUU
Range： 0~1280000-1 (Pulse Number);

-2147483648 ~ 2147483647 (PUU)
Data Size： 32-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings：While the Bit 1 of P2-70 is set to 1 to read the pulse number, this
parameter represents the pulse number of encoder absolute position.
While the Bit 1 of P2-70 is set to 0 to read the PUU number, this
parameter represents PUU number of motor absolute position.
12-27
Address: 0004H
P0-02 STS Drive Status
0005H
Interface： 7.2
Default： 00
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 00 ~ 127
Data Size： 16-bit
Format： Decimal
Settings： Please refer to section 7.2.1 for the description of monitoring variables.
12-28
12.5 Digital Input (DI) Function Definition (for Absolute System)
Setting Value: 0x1D

Trigger Control
DI Name Function Description of Digital Input (DI) Method Mode
When DI.ABSE is ON, it is in ABS mode. DI.ABSQ, DI.ABSC,
DI.ABSR, DI.ABSD and DI.ABSC are enabled. Please refer to
Diagrams 12.3 and 12.4 for detailed description.
When DI.ABSE is ON, the function of DI4, DO2, and DO3 will be Level
ABSE disabled. Function of DI4 will be ASDQ, DO2 will be ABSR and ALL
Triggered
DO3 will be ABSD.
DI pins of DI.ABSC can be assigned by parameters.
When DI.ABSE is on, P2-13 cannot be modified.
Setting Value: When DI.ABSE is ON, DI4 inputs ABSQ signal, function set by P2-13 is
disabled.
Trigger Control
During I/O transmission, Handshaking signal will be sent to the
ABSQ is Rising /
servo drive by the controller. When DI.ABSQ is OFF, it means the
always Falling-
controller issues Request ; DI.ABSQ is ON means the controller ALL
input by edged
has already recdived ABSD signal. When DI.ABSE is ON, this DI
DI4 Triggered
is enabled. Please refer to diagram 12.4 for detailed description.
Setting Value: 0x1F

Trigger Control
When DI.ABSC is ON, multi-turn data stored in absolute encoder
Rising-
will be set to 0 and PUU number will be the value of P6-01. When
ABSC edge ALL
DI.ABSE is ON, this function is enabled. Please refer to diagram
Triggered
12.3 for detailed description.
12-29
12.6 Digital Output (DO) Function Definition (for Absolute System)
Setting Value: When DI.ABSE is ON, DO2 outputs ABSR signal, function set by P2-19 is
disabled.
Trigger Control
DO Name Function Description of Digital Output (DO) Method Mode
DO.ABSR is OFF means the Request sent by ABSQ has been
ABSR is
received. DO.ABSR is ON means the data that is outputted by
always Level
ABSD is valid so that the controller can access the ABSD data. ALL
output by Triggered
This output is only valid when DI.ABSE is ON. Please refer to
DO2
diagram 12.4 for detailed description.
Setting Value: When DI.ABSE is ON, DO3 outputs ABSD signal, function set by P2-20 is
disabled.
Trigger Control
ABSD is
DO pin of ABS data. The data is valid when ABSR is ON. This
always Level
output is only valid when DI.ABSE is ON. Please refer to diagram ALL
output by Triggered
12.4 for detailed description.
DO3
Setting Value：0x0D
Trigger Control
Display the absolute encoder alarms. Please refer to diagram Level
ABSW ALL
12.4 for detailed description Triggered
12-30
12.7 Alarms for Absolute System
Encoder voltage error or Charging circuit of the servo drive is not removed and
AL028 the internal of the the battery voltage is higher than the specification
encoder is in error (>3.8 V) or the encoder signal is in error.
AL029 Gray code error Absolute position is in error.
1. Internal communication error of the absolute

AL034 Internal communication encoder
of the encoder is in error
2. Internal error of other type of encoder
The absolute position is Due to battery under voltage or the failure of power
AL060
lost supply, the encoder lost the internal record.
The voltage of the absolute encoder is lower than the

AL061 Encoder under voltage
specification, or voltage of the battery is in error.
The multi-turn of absolute The multi-turn of absolute encoder exceeds the

AL062
encoder overflows maximum range: -32768 ~ +32767
Absolute data transmitted The sequence is wrong when reading the absolute
AL068
via I/O is in error position via DI/O.
Incremental motor is not allowed to activate the

AL069 Wrong motor type
absolute function.
Feedback position
AL289 Feedback position counter overflows.
counter overflows
12-31
12.7.1 Causes and Corrective Actions
AL028: Encoder voltage error or the internal of the encoder is in error

According to the procedure of
1. Check if the charging circuit exists in
Over voltage to check. When
Battery voltage is too the servo drive.
corrective actions are done,
high 2. Check if the battery is correctly installed
AL028 will be cleared
(voltage > 3.8V)
automatically.
1. If the situation is not
improving, please send the
drive back to the distributors or
contact with Delta.
1. Check if it is the absolute type encoder. 2. Please connect the UVW
connector (color green) to the
2. Check if the servo is properly grounded.
heat sink of the servo drive.
The internal encoder 3. Check if the encoder cable separates 3. Please check if the encoder
is in error. from the power supply or the high-
cable separates from the
current circuit to avoid the interference.
power supply or the high-
4. Check if the shielding cables are used in current circuit.
the wiring of the encoder.
4. Please use shielding mesh. If
the situation is not improving,
please send the drive back to
the distributors or contact with
Delta.
AL029: Gray code error

Absolute position is in Re-power on to operate the motor and If the alarm occurs again,
error check if the alarm will occur again. please change the encoder.
AL034：Internal communication of the encoder is in error

1. Internal communication error of the
absolute encoder
Internal 2. Internal error of other type of encoder Conduct the wiring of the
communication of the battery again and then cycle
3. Incorrect battery wiring.
encoder is in error power on the system.
4. Check the wiring.
5. Check the voltage.
AL060: Absolute position lost

After changing the battery,
conduct homing procedure
Check if the voltage of the battery is lower again. Please refer to the
Battery under voltage
than 2.8V. description of creating absolute
origin coordinate in sections
12.3.4 and 12.3.5.
12-32

Conduct the homing procedure
Change the battery
Do not change or remove the battery when again. Refer to Chapter 12 for
when the drives’ main
the drive’s main power is OFF. the description of creating
power is OFF.
absolute origin coordinate.
After activating the 1. Install the battery. Conduct homing procedure.
absolute function, the 2. Check the wiring between the battery Please refer to the description
absolute origin pack and the power cable of the servo of creating absolute origin
coordinate has not drive. coordinate in sections 12.3.4.
been created. 3. Check the wiring of the encoder. and 12.3.5.
Connect or repair the wiring of
the battery so as to supply the
1. Check the wiring of the encoder. power to the encoder. Conduct
Bad connection of the 2. Check the wiring between the battery homing procedure again.
battery power circuit pack and the power cable of the servo Please refer to the description
drive. of creating absolute origin
coordinate in sections 12.3.4.
and 12.3.5.
AL061: Encoder under voltage

1. Check if the voltage of the battery on
the panel is lower than 3.1V (tentative Change the battery when the
specification). power is ON which is controlled
Battery under voltage by the servo drive. After you
2. Measure if the voltage of the battery is change the battery, AL061 will
lower than 3.1V (tentative be cleared automatically.
specification).
AL062: The multi-turn of absolute encoder overflows
Potential Cause Checking Method Corrective Actions

The operation Conduct homing procedure
distance exceeds the Check if the operation distance exceeds again. Please refer to the
range the absolute the range, -32768 ~ +32767, the absolute description of absolute
encoder is able to encoder is able to record. coordinate initialization in
record. sections 12.3.4 and 12.3.5.
AL068: Absolute data transmitted via I/O is in error

1. Switch OFF DI ABSQ should wait until
DO ABSR is OFF. Correct the reading sequence of
Sequence error
2. Switch ON ABSQ should wait until DO I/O.
ABSR is ON.
After switching ON DO ABSR
(the absolute position data is
Check if the time between switching ON ready), read DO ABSD and
Reading time out DO ABSR and switching ON ABSQ switch ON DI ABSQ within
exceeds 200 ms. 200 ms so as to inform the
servo drive data reading is
completed.
12-33
AL069: Wong motor type

If the user desires to use
Incremental motor is 1. Check if the motor is incremental or
absolute function, please
not allowed to absolute encoder. choose absolute motor. If not,
activate the absolute
2. Check parameter P2-69. please set parameter P2-69 to
function.
0.
AL289: Feedback position counter overflows

1. Please set the gear ratio according to
the total traveling distance of the
absolute motor and the actual
Feedback position application requirements to avoid the NMT: Reset node or
counter overflows. overflow of feedback position counter. 0x6040.Fault Reset
2. If P2-69.Z is set to 1 (prevent index
coordinate overflow function), please
set P2-70 bit 2 to 1.
12.8 Related Monitoring Variables
Monitoring Variables /
Code Explanation
Attribute
The voltage level of battery for an absolute
038 (26h) Voltage level of battery
encoder.
12-34
Appendix A Accessories
 Power Connectors
Delta Part Number: ASDBCAPW0000 (for 220V series servo drive)
Delta Part Number: ASDBCAPW0100 (for 220V series servo drive, with brake contact)
Delta Part Number: ASD-CAPW5400 (for 400V series servo drive)
Delta Part Number: ASD-CAPW5100 (for 400V series servo drive, with brake contact)
A-1
Appendix A Accessories ASDA-A2
Delta Part Number: ASD-CAPW1000

CLAMP: WPS3057-20A
Motor Brake Connector: ASD-CNBR1000

CLAMP: WPS3106A 10SL-4S-R
10SL-4S
A-2
ASDA-A2 Appendix A Accessories
 Power Cables
Delta Part Number: ASD-ABPW0003, ASD-ABPW0005 (for 220V series servo drive)
L
Title Part No.
mm inch
1 ASD-ABPW0003 3000  100 118  4
2 ASD-ABPW0005 5000  100 197  4
Delta Part Number: ASD-CAPW5403, ASD-CAPW5405 (for 400V series servo drive)
L
Title Part No.
mm inch
1 ASD-CAPW5403 3000  100 118  4
2 ASD-CAPW5405 5000  100 197  4
A-3
Delta Part Number: ASD-ABPW0103, ASD-ABPW0105

(for 220V series servo drive, with brake cable)
L
Title Part No.
mm inch
1 ASD- ABPW0103 3000  100 118  4
2 ASD- ABPW0105 5000  100 197  4
Delta Part Number: ASD-CAPW5103, ASD-CAPW5105

(for 400V series servo drive, with brake cable)
L
Title Part No.
mm inch
1 ASD- CAPW5103 3000  100 118  4
2 ASD- CAPW5105 5000  100 197  4
A-4

(50mm)
(1.97 inch)
L (80 mm)
(3.15 inch)
L
Item Part No. Straight plug
mm inch
1 ASD-CAPW1003 MS 3106-20-18S 3000±10 118±0.4
L
Title Part No. Straight
2 ASD-CAPW1005
mm 5000±10
MS 3106-20-18S 197±0.4
inch
1 ASD-CAPW1003 3106A-20-18S 3000  100 118  4
2 ASD-CAPW1005 3106A-20-18S 5000  100 197  4
(50mm)
(1.97 inch)
L (80 mm)
(3.15 inch)
L
mm L inch
1 mm 3000±10
ASD-CAPW1103 MS 3106-20-18S inch
118±0.4
1 ASD-CAPW1103 3106A-20-18S
2 ASD-CAPW1105 3000 
MS 3106-20-18S100
5000±10 118 4
197±0.4
2 ASD-CAPW1105 3106A-20-18S 5000  100 197  4
A-5
Delta Part Number: ASDB-CAPW1203, ASDB-CAPW1205
L
mm inch
1 ASDB-CAPW1203 3106A-20-18S 3000  100 118  4
2 ASDB-CAPW1205 3106A-20-18S 5000  100 197  4
L
mm inch
1 ASD-CAPW1303 3106A-20-18S 3000  100 118  4
2 ASD-CAPW1305 3106A-20-18S 5000  100 197  4
A-6
Delta Part Number: ASD-A2PW1003, ASD-A2PW1005

(50mm)
(1.97 inch)
L (80 mm)
(3.15 inch)
L
Item Part No. Straight plug L
mm inch
1 mm
ASD-CAPW1003 MS 3106-20-18S 3000±10 inch
118±0.4
1 ASD-A2PW1003 3106A-20-18S
2 ASD-CAPW1005 3000  100
MS 3106-20-18S5000±10 118 4
197±0.4
2 ASD-A2PW1005 3106A-20-18S 5000  100 197  4
Delta Part Number: ASD-A2PW1103, ASD-A2PW1105
(50mm)
(1.97 inch)
L (80 mm)
(3.15 inch)
L
mm L inch
1 ASD-CAPW1103 MS 3106-20-18S mm 3000±10 118±0.4inch
1 ASD-A2PW1103 3106A-20-18S
2 ASD-CAPW1105 3000  100
MS 3106-20-18S 5000±10 118  4
197±0.4
2 ASD-A2PW1105 3106A-20-18S 5000  100 197  4
L
mm inch
1 ASD-CAPW2003 3106A-24-11S 3000  100 118  4
2 ASD-CAPW2005 3106A-24-11S 5000  100 197  4
A-7
L
mm inch
1 ASD-CAPW2103 3106A-24-11S 3000  100 118  4
2 ASD-CAPW2105 3106A-24-11S 5000  100 197  4

(80mm)
(3.15 inch)
L (100 mm)
(3.94 inch)
L L
Title Part No. Straight mm inch
1 mm
ASD-CAPW2203 MS 3106-24-11S 3000±10 inch
118±0.4
1 ASD-CAPW2203 3106A-24-11S
2 ASD-CAPW2205
3000  100
MS 3106-24-11S5000±10
118
197±0.4
4
2 ASD-CAPW2205 3106A-24-11S 5000  100 197  4
A-8
Delta Part Number: ASD-CAPW2303, ASD-CAPW2305 (for motors with brake)
(80mm)
(3.15 inch)
L (100 mm)
(3.94 inch)
L L
Title Part No. Straight mm inch
1 mm 3000±10
ASD-CAPW2303 MS 3106-24-11S
inch
118±0.4
1 ASD-CAPW2303 3106A-24-11S
2 ASD-CAPW2305
3000  100
MS 3106-24-11S 5000±10 118
197±0.44
2 ASD-CAPW2305 3106A-24-11S 5000  100 197  4
Delta Part Number: ASD-CAPW3203, ASD-CAPW3205 (for 4.5 kW models)
L L1
Item Part No. Straight
mm inch mm inch
1 ASD-CAPW3203 MS 3106-24-11S 3000  100 118  4 3100100 122  4
2 ASD-CAPW3205 MS 3106-24-11S 5000  100 197  4 5100100 201  4
A-9
Delta Part Number: ASD-CAPW3303, ASD-CAPW3305 (for motors with brake)
L L1
Item Part No. Straight
mm inch mm inch
1 ASD-CAPW3303 MS 3106-24-11S 3000100 118  4 3100100 122  4
2 ASD-CAPW3305 MS 3106-24-11S 5000100 197  4 5100100 201  4
 Encoder Connectors
Delta Part Number: ASD-ABEN0000
Delta Part Number: ASD-CAEN1000
A-10
 Incremental Type Encoder Cables
Delta Part Number: ASD-ABEN0003, ASD-ABEN0005
L
Title Part No.
mm inch
1 ASD-ABEN0003 3000  100 118  4
2 ASD-ABEN0005 5000  100 197  4
Delta Part Number: ASD-CAEN1003, ASD-CAEN1005
L
mm inch
1 ASD-CAEN1003 3106A-20-29S 3000  100 118  4
2 ASD-CAEN1005 3106A-20-29S 5000  100 197  4
A-11
 Absolute Type Encoder Cables
Delta Part Number: ASD-A2EB0003, ASD-A2EB0005
L
Title Part No.
mm inch
1 ASD-A2EB0003 3000  100 118  4
2 ASD-A2EB0005 5000  100 197  4
Delta Part Number: ASD-A2EB1003, ASD-A2EB1005
L
Title Model Name
mm inch
1 ASD-A2EB1003 3000  100 118  4
2 ASD-A2EB1005 5000  100 197  4
A-12
 Battery Box Cord AW (connects to the battery on the encoder cable)

15±5
25±5
200±10
A B
1( RED)
2(BLACK)
Unit: mm
 Battery Box Cord IW (connects to CN8)

15 ± 5 15 ± 5
See detail A 200 ± 10 See detail B
detail A detail B
1 (BLACK) 1 (RED)
2 (RED) 2 (BLACK)
Unit: mm
A-13
 Battery Boxes
Single Battery Box Dual Battery Box

Delta Part Number: ASD-MDBT0100 Delta Part Number: ASD-MDBT0200
72.5
68
45
35 22 26
64.5
Unit: mm Unit: mm
 I/O Signal Connector
Delta Part Number: ASD-CNSC0050
A-14
 I/O Terminal Block Module
Delta Part Number: ASD-BM-50A
 RS-232 Communication Cable
Delta Part Number: ASD-CARS0003
L
Title Part No.
mm inch
1 ASD-CARS0003 3000  100 118  4
 Communication Cable between Drive and Computer (for PC)
Delta Part Number: DOP-CAUSBAB
L
Title Part No.
mm inch
1 DOP-CAUSBAB 1400  30 55  1.2
A-15
 CANopen Communication Cable
Delta Part Number: TAP-CB03, TAP-CB05
L
Title Part No.
mm inch
1 TAP-CB03 300  10 11  0.4
2 TAP-CB05 500  10 19  0.4
 CANopen Distribution Box
Delta Part Number: TAP-CN03
Unit: mm [inch]
 RS-485 Connector
Delta Part Number: ASD-CNIE0B06
Unit: mm
A-16
 CN1 Convenient Connector
Delta Part Number: ASD-IF-SC5020

15.28
25
14.5
PIN11:PULL_HI_PS PIN10:DO2+
PIN12:/PULSE PIN9:DO1+
PIN13:PULSE PIN8:DI7-
41.3
1
52.4
PIN14:/SIGN PIN7:DI4-
PIN15:SIGN PIN6:DI3-
PIN16:OCZ PIN5:DI2-
PIN17:GND PIN4:DI1-
PIN18:DO4+ PIN3:COM-
PIN19:DO3+
PIN20:CN_GND
PIN2:COM+
PIN1:VDD
2
ASD-IF-SC5020
1. 2.
22.83 22.83
PIN11:PULL_HI_PS
PIN10:DO2+
PIN12:/PULSE
PIN9:DO1+
PIN8:DI7- PIN13:PULSE
PIN14:/SIGN
PIN7:DI4-
45.5
PIN15:SIGN
45.5
PIN6:DI3-
PIN16:OCZ
PIN5:DI2-
PIN17:GND
PIN4:DI1-
PIN18:DO4+
PIN3:COM-
PIN19:DO3+
PIN2:COM+
PIN20:CN_GND
PIN1:VDD
7.7
7.7
Unit: mm
A-17
Optional Accessories – 220V Series
100 W Servo Drive and 50 W Low Inertia Servo Motor

Servo Drive ASD-A2-0121-
Low Inertia Servo Motor ECMA-C1040FS
Motor Power Cable (Without Brake) ASD-ABPW000X
Power Connector (Without Brake) ASDBCAPW0000
Motor Power Cable (With Brake) ASD-ABPW010X
Power Connector (With Brake) ASDBCAPW0100
Incremental Type Encoder Cable ASD-ABEN000X
Absolute Type Encoder Cable ASD-A2EB000X
Encoder Connector ASD-ABEN0000
(X=3 indicates that the cable length is 3 m; X=5 indicates that the cable length is 5 m)

Low Inertia Servo Motor ECMA-C△0401S
A-18


ECMA-C△0604S
Low Inertia Servo Motor ECMA-C△0604H
ECMA-C△08047
400 W Servo Drive and 500 W Medium Inertia Servo Motor

Medium Inertia Servo Motor ECMA-E△1305S
Motor Power Cable (Without Brake) ASD-CAPW100X
Motor Power Cable (With Brake) ASD-CAPW110X
Power Connector ASD-CAPW1000
Incremental Type Encoder Cable ASD-CAEN100X
Encoder Connector ASD-CAEN1000
A-19
400 W Servo Drive and 300 W High Inertia Servo Motor

High Inertia Servo Motor ECMA-G△1303S

ECMA-C△0807S
Low Inertia Servo Motor ECMA-C△0807H
ECMA-C△0907S
750 W Servo Drive and 500 W Medium-High Inertia Servo Motor

Medium-High Inertia Servo Motor ECMA-F△1305S
A-20
750 W Servo Drive and 600 W High Inertia Servo Motor

1 kW Servo Drive and 1 kW Low Inertia Servo Motor


Power Cable (Without Brake) ASDBCAPW0000
Power Cable (With Brake) ASDBCAPW0100
A-21
1 kW Servo Drive and 1 kW Medium Inertia Servo Motor

1 kW Servo Drive and 850 W Medium-High Inertia Servo Motor

1 kW Servo Drive and 900 W High Inertia Servo Motor

A-22
1.5 kW Servo Drive and 1.5 kW Medium Inertia Servo Motor


Motor Power Cable (Without Brake) ASD-A2PW100X
Motor Power Cable (With Brake) ASD-A2PW110X

A-23

2 kW Servo Drive and 1.3 kW Medium-High Inertia Servo Motor

2 kW Servo Drive and 1.8 kW Medium-High Inertia Servo Motor

A-24

Low Inertia Servo Motor ECMA-C△13304

3 kW Servo Drive and 3.5 kW Medium Inertia Servo Motor

A-25
3 kW Servo Drive and 3 kW Medium-High Inertia Servo Motor

4.5 kW Servo Drive and 4.5 kW Medium-High Inertia Servo Motor


Medium-High Inertia Servo Motor ECMA-F△18553
Motor Power Cable (Without Brake) -
Motor Power Cable (With Brake) -
Brake Connector ASD-CNBR1000
A-26

Medium-High Inertia Servo Motor ECMA-F△18753

Servo Drive ASD-A2-1B23-
Medium-High Inertia Servo Motor ECMA-F1221B3

Servo Drive ASD-A2-1F23-
Medium-High Inertia Servo Motor ECMA-F1221FS
A-27
Note:
1. The boxes () at the ends of the servo drive model names are for optional configurations. Please refer to
the ordering information of the actual purchased product.
2. The boxes (△) in the model names are for encoder resolution types. Please refer to Chapter 1 for further
information.
 Optional Accessories – 400V Series

Low Inertia Servo Motor ECMA-J△0604S
Power Connector (Without Brake) ASD-CAPW5400
Power Connector (With Brake) ASD-CAPW5100

A-28

750 W Servo Drive and 500 W Medium Inertia Servo Motor

Medium Inertia Servo Motor ECMA- K△1305S
750 W Servo Drive and 500 W Medium-High Inertia Servo Motor

Medium-High Inertia Servo Motor ECMA- L△1305S
A-29

1 kW Servo Drive and 850 W High Inertia Servo Motor

High Inertia Servo Motor ECMA-L△1308S

Medium Inertia Servo Motor ECMA-K△1310S
A-30
1.5 kW Servo Drive and 900 W High Inertia Servo Motor

High Inertia Servo Motor ECMA-M△1309S
1.5 kW Servo Drive and 1 kW Low Inertia Servo Motor


Medium-High Inertia Servo Motor ECMA-L△1313S
A-31
1.5 kW Servo Drive and 1.5 kW Medium Inertia Servo Motor

2 kW Servo Drive and 2 kW Low Inertia Motor


A-32


Low Inertia Servo Motor ECMA-J△13304
Motor Power Cable(Without Brake) ASD-CAPW120X

Medium-High Inertia Servo Motor ECMA- L△11830S
A-33

Medium-High Inertia Servo Motor ECMA-L△1845S

Medium-High Inertia Servo Motor ECMA-L118553

Medium-High Inertia Servo Motor ECMA-L118753
Note:
1. The boxes () at the ends of the servo drive model names. For the actual model name, please refer to
the ordering information of the actual purchased product.
A-34
2. The boxes (△) in the model names are for encoder resolution types. Please refer to Chapter 1 for further
information.
 Other Accessories (for all ASDA-A2 series models)

Description Delta Part Number
50-pin I/O Signal Connector (CN1) ASD-CNSC0050
I/O Terminal Block Module ASD-BM-50A
RS-232 Communication Cable ASD-CARS0003
Communication Cable between Drive and
DOP-CAUSBAB
Computer (for PC)
CANopen Communication Cable TAP-CB03 / TAP-CB05
CANopen Distribution Box TAP-CN03
RS-485 Connector ASD-CNIE0B06
Regenerative Resistor 400W 40Ω BR400W040
Regenerative Resistor 1kW 20Ω BR1K0W020
Regenerative Resistor 1.5kW 5Ω BR1K5W005
A-35
A-36
Appendix B Maintenance and
Inspection
Basic Inspection
Item Content
Periodically check if the screws of the servo drive, the connection
between the motor shaft, and the mechanical system as well as the
connection of terminal block and mechanical system are securely
tightened.
The gap of the control box and the installation of the cooling fan should
be free from oil, water, or metallic particles. Also, the servo drive shall
General inspection be free from the cutting powder of the drill.
If the control box is installed in the site which contains harmful gas or is
full of dust, please be ensured the servo drive is free from the harmful
gas and dust.
When making encoder cable or wire rods, please be ensured the wiring
is correct. Otherwise, the motor may have sudden unintended
acceleration or be burned.
To avoid the electric shock, the ground terminal of the servo drive
should firmly connect to the ground terminal of the control box. If the
wiring is needed, wait at least 10 minutes after disconnecting the drive
from the main supply power, or discharge electricity by discharge
device.
The splicing parts of the wiring terminal should be isolated.
Make sure the wiring is correct so as to avoid the damage or any
abnormity.
Inspection before Check if the electrically conductive objects including sheet metal (such
operation as screws) or inflammable objects are not inside the servo drive.
(has not applied to the Check if the control switch is in OFF status.
power yet)
Do not place the servo drive or external regenerative resistor on
inflammable objects.
To prevent the electromagnetic brake from losing efficacy, please
check if stop function and circuit break function can work normally.
If the peripheral devices are interfered by the electronic instruments,
please reduce electromagnetic interference with devices.
Please make sure the external voltage level of the servo drive is
correct.
The encoder cable should avoid excessive stress. When the motor is
Inspection before
running, please be ensured the cable is not frayed or over extended.
B-1
Appendix B Maintenance and Inspection ASDA-A2
Item Content
running the servo drive Please contact Delta if there is any vibration of the servo motor or
(has already applied to unusual noise during the operation.
the power) Make sure the setting of the parameters is correct. Different machinery
has different characteristics, please adjust the parameter according to
the characteristic of each machinery.
Please reset the parameter when the servo drive is in the status of
SERVO OFF, or it may cause malfunction.
When the relay is operating, contact Delta if there is no contact noise or
there is other abnormal noise.
Check if the power indicator and LED display work normally.
Maintenance
 Please use and store the product in a proper site.
 Periodically clean the surface of the servo drive and servo motor so as to avoid the dust and
dirt.
 Do not disassemble any mechanical part when in maintenance.
 Periodically clean the ventilation ports of the servo drive and do not use the product in a high-
temperature site for a long time so as to avoid the malfunction.
The lifetime of machinery parts

 DC Bus Capacitor
DC Bus Capacitor will be deteriorated by the affection of ripple current. Its lifetime is
determined by the surrounding temperature and operating conditions. If it is operating in an
air-conditioned site, its lifetime can be up to 10 years.
 Relay
The contact of switching power supply will wear and lead to poor contact. The lifetime of relay
is influenced by the power supply capacity; thus, the accumulative time of switching power
supply is about 100,000 times.
 Cooling Fan
In continuous operation, the lifetime of the cooling fan is 2 to 3 years. However, if there is any
unusual noise or vibration during inspection, replacing a new one is a must.
B-2

Servo Delta ASDA

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Servo Delta ASDA

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Servo Delta ASDA

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Communication Applications ASDA-A2 Series User Manual

Delta High Resolution AC Servo Drive for Network

Delta Electronics (Japan), Inc. BENELUX: Delta Electronics (Netherlands) B.V.

Delta High Resolution

AC Servo Drive for Network

 Installation and inspection of servo drive and servo motor

This manual addresses personnel with the following qualifications:

 Servo system designers

ASDA-A2 is applicable on industrial application and is suggested to be installed in the distribution

The symbol of danger, warning and stop represent:

It indicates the absolute prohibited activity. It is possible to damage the product or

 It is prohibited to expose the product with the environment containing vapor,

 During the operation, it is prohibited to touch any rotating motor parts. Or it is

Maintenance and Inspection

Main Circuit Wiring

Terminal Wiring of the Main Circuit

Chapter 1 Inspection and Model Explanation ························································ 1-1

1.1 Inspection ····························································································· 1-1

1.2 Product Model ························································································ 1-3

1.2.1 Nameplate Information····································································· 1-3

1.2.2 Model Explanation ·········································································· 1-5

1.3 Servo Drive and Corresponding Servo Motor ················································ 1-8

1.3.1 ASDA-A2 220V Series ····································································· 1-8

1.3.2 ASDA-A2 400V Series ····································································1-10

1.4 Each Part of the Servo Drive ····································································1-11

1.4.1 ASDA-A2 220V Series ····································································1-11

1.4.2 ASDA0A2 400V Series ···································································1-14

1.5 ASDA-A2-XN Series ···············································································1-16

1.5.1 Model Explanation ·········································································1-16

1.5.2 ASDA-A2-XN Series Servo Drive and Corresponding Motor ····················1-19

1.5.3 Each Part of the ASDA-A2-XN Series Servo Drive ································1-20

Chapter 2 Installation ························································································ 2-1

2.1 Notes ··································································································· 2-1

2.2 Ambient Conditions of Storage ··································································· 2-1

2.3 Ambient Conditions of Installation ······························································· 2-1

2.4 Installation Direction and Space ································································· 2-2

2.5 Specification of Circuit Breaker and Fuse ····················································· 2-4

2.6 Ferrite Ring ··························································································· 2-5

2.7 EMI Filter Selection ················································································· 2-8

2.8 Selection of Regenerative Resistor ····························································2-11

2.9 The Use of Servo Motor ··········································································2-21

2.9.1 Troubleshooting for the Motor Operation and Status ······························2-21

2.9.4 Precautions for Using Couplings ·······················································2-23

2.9.6 Measures to Suppress Temperature Increase of the Servo Motor ·············2-25

Chapter 3 Wiring ························································································· 3-1

3.1 Connections – 220V series ······································································· 3-1

3.1.1 Connecting to Peripheral Devices······················································· 3-1

3.1.2 Connectors and Terminals of Servo Drive ············································ 3-3

3.1.3 Wiring Method ··············································································· 3-5

3.1.4 Specification of Motor Power Cable ···················································· 3-7

3.1.5 Specification of Encoder Cable Connector············································ 3-9

3.1.6 Selection of Wiring Rod···································································3-15

3.2 Connections – 400V series ······································································3-17

3.2.1 Connecting to Peripheral Devices······················································3-17

3.2.2 Connectors and Terminals of the Servo Drive ······································3-18

3.2.3 Wiring Method ··············································································3-20

3.2.4 Specification of Motor Power Cable ···················································3-21

3.2.5 Specification of Encoder Connector ···················································3-23

3.2.6 Selection of Wiring Rod···································································3-25